Qss-35 Service Manual

Distributed by: www.minilablaser.
com
QSS-35 series
Service Manual
Issued in June 2006
– for service personnel only –

Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
CHAPTER DESCRIPTION
1.Cautions for work
2.Replacement and adjustment of parts
3.Mode
4.Troubleshooting
5.Operation sequence
6.Electrical parts
7.Setup for service personnel
8.Appendix
Notes to service personnel

Be sure to read this manual carefully to gain a thorough understanding of the correct procedures before servicing the
machine.
The printer processor uses both tapping truss head screws and spike truss head screws. When attaching the screws once
removed, make sure they are on their original positions. These screws are used for the place where grounding is required.
Tapping truss head screw
Spike truss head screw (green)
Washer head screw (for ground)
SCREW
System program:
• QSS-3501i series: Ver. 2
• QSS-3501/3502 series: Ver. 2
! It is prohibited to show, provide, lend or transfer this manual to the others except the service personnel.
! The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
! Illustrations in this manual may vary depending on the model or manufacturing lot.
Explanation of manual
Description for each specification
This manual contains the maintenance procedure for all the specifications.
The procedure for each specification may differ.
For the different procedures depending on the specifications
The specification mark is mentioned for the procedure.
Specification Mark
Normal specification [N]
SM specification [SM]
J specification [J]
F specification [F]
There is no specification mark for the procedure which is same for all the specifications.
About the chapters
" 1. Cautions for work

Contains information on how to achieve safety in service operations.
Be sure to read precautions thoroughly and carefully.
" 2. Replacement and adjustment of parts
Describes how to remove or replace component parts and units, and how to adjust each part in replacement.
" 3. Mode
Shows the service personnel mode transition.
" 4. Troubleshooting
Describes how to solve the troubles.
" 5. Operation sequence
Describes the operation sequence of system.
" 6. Electrical parts
Describes the PCBs used in this system.
" 7. Setup for service personnel
Describes the setup procedures for service personnel.
" 8. Appendix
Describes the wiring diagram.
Symbols used in this manual
Definitions of the marks and symbols used in this manual are as follows:
This is called the alert symbol mark.

Text following this mark contains particularly important information concerning safety. Be sure to heed this information.
This mark is used in conjunction with the words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, according to the extent of
influence (injury) on persons or damage to physical property.
The Important symbol indicates operations or procedures requiring caution, instructions and supplementary explanations
that need to be followed.
The pointing finger symbol indicates the manual or section where you can find additional information.
ii
The Note symbol indicates functions or instructions which are convenient if you know.
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual
The names of the processing solutions in this manual are indicated as shown below. Some types of processing solutions may
have other names.
Processing solutions Abbreviations
Color Developer CD
Bleach Fixer BF
Stabilizer STB
iii
This page is intentionally blank.
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notes to service personnel
Explanation of manual ............................................................................................................................ii
Description for each specification ...................................................................................................ii
About the chapters ..........................................................................................................................ii
Symbols used in this manual ..........................................................................................................ii
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual ........................................................... iii
1. Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................... 10010
Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................................................10010
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation .................................................................................................................. 10030
For safe operation .................................................................................................................................................10030
Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electronic parts ................................10040
Laser Precautions ..................................................................................................................................................10050
2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

System list .............................................................................................................................. 20005
QSS-35 series model types [35, 35i] ....................................................................................................................20005
Removing covers [35, 35i] ...................................................................................................... 20020
Removing covers (Printer section) [35, 35i] .........................................................................................................20020
Removing covers (Processor section) [35, 35i] ....................................................................................................20021
Adjusting the belt tension ....................................................................................................... 20110
Adjusting belt tension (Printer section) [35, 35i] .................................................................................................20110
Adjusting belt tension (colorimeter) [35i, 35] ......................................................................................................20125
Adjusting belt tension (Dryer section and conveyor section) [35, 35i] ................................................................20140
PC control section .................................................................................................................. 21170
Opening and closing PC control unit [35, 35i] .....................................................................................................21170
Removing PC control unit cover [35, 35i] ............................................................................................................21180
Precautions when opening/closing PC control unit [35, 35i] ...............................................................................21190
Paper magazine section ......................................................................................................... 22000
Procedure to check magazine [35, 35i] .................................................................................................................22000
Paper supply unit A ................................................................................................................ 25610
Removing paper supply unit A [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................................25610
Removing cutter unit and adjusting its right angle [35, 35i] ................................................................................25620
Adjusting paper hold timing of arm [35, 35i] .......................................................................................................25630
Adjusting CVP imprint pressure [35, 35i] ............................................................................................................25640
Paper supply unit B ................................................................................................................ 25710
Removing paper supply unit B [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................................25710
Adjusting the height and position of paper magazine mount B [35, 35i] .............................................................25720
Adjusting paper feeding unevenness of paper supply unit B [35, 35i] .................................................................25730
v
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................... 25810

Removing exposure advance unit [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................................25810
Banding shooting [35] ..........................................................................................................................................25820
Banding shooting [35i] .........................................................................................................................................25830
Paper Advance Section .......................................................................................................... 26610
Removing paper advance unit [35, 35i] ................................................................................................................26610
Removing processor loading unit [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................................26630
Laser engine unit .................................................................................................................... 26710
Replacing laser unit and adjusting its position [35] ..............................................................................................26710
iBeam unit .............................................................................................................................. 26720
Replacing iBeam unit and adjusting its position [35i] ..........................................................................................26720
Zigzag adjustment .................................................................................................................. 26810
Adjusting procedure for uneven paper advancing in paper advance section [35, 35i] .........................................26810
Space dimension between units ............................................................................................ 26910
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit [35] ...........................................26910
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and exposure advance unit [35i] ................................................26920
Conveyor unit section ............................................................................................................. 27100
Replacing colorimeter and calibration plate [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................27100
Adjusting the height of colorimeter unit [35, 35i] ................................................................................................27110
Replacing print conveyor unit belt [35, 35i] .........................................................................................................27120
Dryer section .......................................................................................................................... 27220
Removing dryer rack [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................................................27220
Adjusting the dryer section slide base position [35, 35i] ......................................................................................27222
Checking the adjustment of backlash in dryer rack [35, 35i] ...............................................................................27223
Adjusting ejection guide 1 [35, 35i] .....................................................................................................................27224
Adjusting the position of the upper turn guide [35, 35i] ......................................................................................27225
Adjusting backlash in dryer drive section [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................27230
Removing dryer heater and dryer fan [35, 35i] ....................................................................................................27250
Print sorter unit section .......................................................................................................... 27420
Removing print sorter unit [35, 35i] .....................................................................................................................27420
Replacing print receiving tray [35, 35i] ................................................................................................................27430
Adjusting the stop position of print receiving tray [35, 35i] ................................................................................27440
Adjusting chain tension of print sorter unit [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................27450
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i] ........................................................................................ 27610
Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J] ..........................................................................................................27610
Replacing the module [J] ......................................................................................................................................27620
Replacing the drum motor [J] ...............................................................................................................................27630
Replacing the elevator motor [J] ...........................................................................................................................27640
Adjusting the elevator belt tension [J] ..................................................................................................................27650
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J] ........................................................................................27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J] ......................................................................................27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J] ........................................................................................27680
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J] .........................................................................................................27690
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i] .................................................................................... 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ......................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] .....................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] ........................................................................27830
vi
F replenishment unit [35, 35i] ................................................................................................. 27900

Removing F replenishment unit [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................27900
Removing the cartridge installation section .........................................................................................................27910
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor .........................................................................................27920
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor ...............................................................................................27930
Output Check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump ...............................27940
3. Mode
Passwords .............................................................................................................................. 30500
Passwords .............................................................................................................................................................30500
Mode structure chart .............................................................................................................. 31000
Mode structure chart .............................................................................................................................................31000
Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 32510
Paper Specification Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................32510
iBeam Tuning [35i] ...............................................................................................................................................32511
iBeam Engine Check [35i] ....................................................................................................................................32512
Magazine Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................................32520
Monitor setup ........................................................................................................................................................32530
Data Initialization .................................................................................................................................................32550
Processor Settings ................................................................................................................. 33001
Print Sensor Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................33001
Counter [J] ............................................................................................................................................................33010
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] ..............................................................................................................33030
Pump Output Amount Setting[F] ..........................................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ...........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] ........................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] .......................................................................................................................................33060
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................... 33500
Thermosensor Calibration ....................................................................................................................................33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] ....................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] .................................................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] ..............................................................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] ..................................................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] ......................................................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] .........................................................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] ..............................................................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] ..........................................................................................................................................33570
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J] .....................................................................................................33580
Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F] ......................................................................................................................33580
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F] .................................................................................................33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ................................................................................................................33600
Display Processor Working Information[F] .........................................................................................................33620
Processor Set Up Mode[F] ....................................................................................................................................33630
vii
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 35100

Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Printer) ............................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [N] .................................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [J] ..................................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [F] ..................................................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [J] ................................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [F] ...............................................................................................................................35320
Reading and Writing Data ....................................................................................................................................35400
System Version Check ..........................................................................................................................................35500
System update for each control PCB (CPU) .........................................................................................................35600
Operation Information ..........................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification ..........................................................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic ......................................................................................................................................................35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic .................................................................................................................................35920
Printer Mechanical Adjustment .............................................................................................. 36000
Paper sensor adjustment .......................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction ............................................................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction [35] ..............................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment [35] ......................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment [35] ....................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ........................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction .......................................................................................................................36060
Exposure Center Correction .................................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 .........................................................................................................................36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 .........................................................................................................................36081
Paper pressure operation correction ......................................................................................................................36090
WB width correction .............................................................................................................................................36100
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................... 36700
Compact Archive Unit Initialization ....................................................................................................................36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ...............................................................................................................36710
Laser Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 37300
Laser Unit Adjustment [35] ..................................................................................................................................37300
Operation Information ............................................................................................................ 37500
Saving the Logdata ...............................................................................................................................................37500
Saving the memory data .......................................................................................................................................37510
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time .......................................................................................37520
System Version Check on ARCNET communication error .................................................................................37530
Machine Specification ..........................................................................................................................................37540
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................... 4001
Classification of errors and attention messages ......................................................................................................4001
Suffix number display .............................................................................................................................................4002
viii
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring ............ 4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) [35, 35i] .........................................................4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) [35, 35i] ................................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse .................................................... 4252
Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section) [35, 35i] ........................................4252
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart ................................................................................. 4302
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear from the Net Order display. [35] ........4302
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35] ....................................... 4390
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35] .......................................................................................................4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i] ...................................... 4470
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i] .....................................................................................................4470
White line and black line appear on a print. (vertical) [35i] ...................................................................................4470
Mistake in setting of focal plane regulating guide [35i] .........................................................................................4470
Appearing the paper width line [35i] ......................................................................................................................4470
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ............................................................................................. 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ...........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment ...................................................................................... 4600
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow ........................................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error ..............................................................................................4610
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error ..............................................................................................4620
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 40500
No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ........................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..............................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ................................................................40500
No. 0503[N] [SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. .....................................................................................................40500
No. 0505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. ....................................................................................40500
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. ..........................................................................................................40500
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ...................................40500
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. ...........................................................................................................................40500
No. 0519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. ..............................................................................40500
No. 0520 Sensors may be dirty. ..........................................................................................................................40500
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment ............................................................................ 40600
No. 0600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD ................................................................................................40600
No. 0601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. BF .................................................................................................40600
No. 0602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty.STB ................................................................................................40600
No. 0603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ............................................................................................40600
No. 0604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. ....................................................................................................40600
No. 0605[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD .....................................................................................................40600
No. 0606[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. BF .....................................................................................................40600
No. 0607[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.STB ....................................................................................................40600
No. 0609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. ..................................................................................................................40600
No. 0610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### .........................................................................................................40600
ix
Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................. 40700

No. 0700[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ..........................................................40700
No. 0701[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ......................................................................................40700
No. 0702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ........................................................................................40700
No. 0703 [SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? ...............40700
No. 0704 [SM] Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package. ....
40700
No. 0705[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ..........................................................40700
Attention message: F replenishment ...................................................................................... 40900
No. 0900[F] PSR is running out. ........................................................................................................................40900
No. 0901[F] PSR is empty. .................................................................................................................................40900
No. 0902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge. .....................................................................................................40900
No. 0903[F] Close the replenisher section door. ................................................................................................40900
No. 0904[F] Replenish PSR. ..............................................................................................................................40900
No. 0905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge. .............................................................................................40900
No. 0906[F] It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge. ..............................................................................40900
No. 0907[F] Collect the waste solution. .............................................................................................................40900
No. 0908[F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. 40900
No. 0909[F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ............................................................40900
No. 0910[F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . ...................................................40900
No. 0911[F] Prcessor Section is processing. One moment please. . . ...............................................................40900
No. 0912[F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. ...40900
No. 0913[F] Manual opening cannot be started. ................................................................................................40900
Attention message: Printer ..................................................................................................... 41000
No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...................................................................41000
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ...................................................................41000
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .............................................41000
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B .............................................41000
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ................................................................................41000
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ................................................................................41000
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................................41000
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ...............................................................................41000
No. 1012-1013 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .................41000
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ......................................................................41000
No. 1027 Profile data was not found. .................................................................................................................41000
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. ........................................................................................41000
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . ............................................................41000
No. 1047 Close printer door. ..............................................................................................................................41000
No. 1065 Would you like to continue? ...............................................................................................................41000
No. 1074 Sensors may be dirty. ..........................................................................................................................41000
No. 1082 iBeam temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . ..........................................................41000
No. 1087 Would you like to calibrate the Colorimeter? .....................................................................................41000
No. 1093 Uneven coloring may occur on the print. Would you like to stop processing? .................................41000
No. 1094 Unit is not attached. ............................................................................................................................41000
x
Attention message: Scanner .................................................................................................. 41300

No. 1302-1320 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..................41300
Attention message: Film carrier ............................................................................................. 41400
No. 1400-1439 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..................41400
No. 1450-1454 Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ....41400
Attention message: Disk/Media .............................................................................................. 41500
Attention message: Colorimeter ............................................................................................. 41550
No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. ....................................................................................................41550
No. 1552 The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. .....................................................41550
No. 1555 The calibration plate data is out of range. ...........................................................................................41550
Attention message: Pricing unit .............................................................................................. 41600
Attention message: NMC ....................................................................................................... 41620
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................... 41800
No. 1801 Execute software upgrade. ..................................................................................................................41800
Attention message: Main ........................................................................................................ 41900
No. 1903 Proceeding. One moment please. . . ....................................................................................................41900
No. 1904 Proceeding. One moment please. . . ....................................................................................................41900
No. 1920-#### Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. ................................41900
No. 1921-#### Capacity Booster Key was detected. .........................................................................................41900
No. 1930 Turn ON the Flatbed Scanner. ............................................................................................................41900
No. 1931 Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test Print. ................................................................................41900
No. 1932 Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly. ...............................................................................41900
No. 1946 Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter from the flatbed scanner glass
surface or test print and measure again. ................................................................................................................41900
No. 1977 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for the Corrective action of Attention message. .....................41900
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit ..................................................................... 43370
Attention message: QSS-Kids ................................................................................................ 44250
No. 4250-4308 Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............44250
Attention message: Bravo II ................................................................................................... 44350
No. 4350-4358 Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .................44350
xi
Error message: Processor 1 .................................................................................................. 45500

No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD ..................................................45500
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF ...................................................45500
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB ................................................45500
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ...............................................................................45500
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD ..........................................45500
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF ...........................................45500
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB ........................................45500
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. .......................................................................45500
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. ............................................................................................45500
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. .........................................................................................................45500
No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ...........................................................................................45500
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD .....................................................................................................................45500
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ......................................................................................................................45500
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ...................................................................................................................45500
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. .................................................................................................................45500
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...........................................................................................45500
Error message: Processor 2 .................................................................................................. 45530
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ......................................................................................................45530
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ................................................................45530
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. .......................................................................................45530
No. 5534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. ........................................................................................................45530
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. .......................................................................................45530
No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor .............................................................................................................45530
No. 5543 The dryer cover is removed. ...............................................................................................................45530
No. 5545 Print Sensor (Left) error. .....................................................................................................................45530
No. 5546 Print Sensor error. ...............................................................................................................................45530
No. 5547 Print Sensor (Right) error. ..................................................................................................................45530
No. 5549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ....................................................................45530
No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. ....................................................................................................................45530
No. 5552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. ...........................................................................................45530
xii
Error message: Tablet replenishment .................................................................................... 45600

No. 5600[J] Tablet Drum operation error. CD ...................................................................................................45600
No. 5601[J] Tablet Drum operation error. BF ....................................................................................................45600
No. 5602[J] Tablet Drum operation error. STB .................................................................................................45600
No. 5603[J] A tablet has jammed. ......................................................................................................................45600
No. 5609[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD ....................................................................45600
No. 5610[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF .....................................................................45600
No. 5611[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB ...................................................................45600
No. 5612[J] Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. .............................................................................45600
No. 5613[J] The processing solution level is too low. STB1 ...........................................................................45600
Error message: SM replenishment ......................................................................................... 45700
No. 5700[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A .............................................................................45700
No. 5701[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B .............................................................................45700
No. 5702[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C .............................................................................45700
No. 5703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W ............................................................................45700
No. 5704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A ..............................................................................45700
No. 5705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ..............................................................................45700
No. 5706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ................................................................................45700
No. 5708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. .....................................................................45700
No. 5709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. .....................................................................45700
No. 5710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ......................................................................................45700
No. 5711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W .......................................................................................45700
No. 5712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...................................................................................45700
xiii
Error message: F replenishment ............................................................................................ 45900

No. 5900[F] Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. ........................................................................45900
No. 5901[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R ............................................................................45900
No. 5902[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA .........................................................................45900
No. 5903]F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB .........................................................................45900
No. 5904[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR ............................................................................45900
No. 5905[F] P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. ....
45900
No. 5906[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. .
45900
No. 5907[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. .
45900
No. 5908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. ........................................................................................45900
No. 5909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R ...........................................45900
No. 5910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA ........................................................45900
No. 5911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB .........................................................45900
No. 5912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. ..............................................................................45900
No. 5913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. .................................................................................45900
No. 5914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. ........................................................................................45900
No. 5916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 .................................45900
No. 5917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 .................................45900
No. 5918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 ...............................45900
No. 5922[F] Replenisher section door is open. ..................................................................................................45900
No. 5923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. ..................................................................................45900
xiv
Error message: Printer 1 ........................................................................................................ 46000

No. 6012 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ..............................................................................................46000
No. 6013 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ...............................................................................................46000
No. 6014 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A ..........................................................................................46000
No. 6015 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B ..........................................................................................46000
No. 6016 Paper Cutter operation error. ..............................................................................................................46000
No. 6054 The Initial Setup was not executed. ....................................................................................................46000
No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. ..................................................................................................................46000
No. 6074 B Laser control error. ..........................................................................................................................46000
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ..........................................................................................................................46000
No. 6076 Polygon Mirror control error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 6077 Interlock error. ....................................................................................................................................46000
No. 6081 Backup data error. Printer ..................................................................................................................46000
No. 6082 Setup error. ..........................................................................................................................................46000
No. 6087 Laser Control PCB system error. ........................................................................................................46000
No. 6101 Paper Hold Motor operation error. .....................................................................................................46000
No. 6104 Printer Door is open. ...........................................................................................................................46000
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. ........................................................................................................46000
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. ........................................................................................................46000
No. 6107 R Laser temperature is out of range. ...................................................................................................46000
No. 6135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. ................................................................................................................46000
No. 6136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. ..........................................................46000
No. 6137 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. ..........................................................46000
No. 6144 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor operation error. ...................................................................46000
No. 6145 Lane Select Motor operation error. .....................................................................................................46000
No. 6146 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. .......................................................................................46000
No. 6147 Turn Motor operation error. ................................................................................................................46000
No. 6148 Paper End Sensor A error. ..................................................................................................................46000
No. 6149 Paper End Sensor B error. ...................................................................................................................46000
No. 6151 Paper Loading Sensor error. ...............................................................................................................46000
No. 6152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ........................................................................................46000
No. 6153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. ......................................................................................46000
xv
Error message: Printer 2 ........................................................................................................ 46100

No. 6155 Exposure Start Sensor error. ...............................................................................................................46100
No. 6156 Exposure End Sensor error. ................................................................................................................46100
No. 6173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. .......................................................46100
No. 6177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. ..............................................................................................46100
No. 6179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ..............................................................................................................46100
No. 6182 iBeam Unit control error. ....................................................................................................................46100
No. 6183 iBeam Control PCB control error. ......................................................................................................46100
No. 6184 iBeam Control PCB system error. ......................................................................................................46100
No. 6185 Roller Move Motor operation error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 6187 Setup calculation error. .......................................................................................................................46100
No. 6194 Laser Control PCB control error. ........................................................................................................46100
No. 6198 Laser Unit EE-PROM control error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 6203 Setup error. ..........................................................................................................................................46100
No. 6204 Setup error. ..........................................................................................................................................46100
No. 6205 Setup error. ..........................................................................................................................................46100
No. 6208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. ......................................................................................46100
No. 6209 Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit. .............................................................................46100
No. 6210 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. ............................................................................................46100
No. 6211 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. ...................................................................................46100
Error message: Scanner ........................................................................................................ 46300
No. 6303-6337 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .........................46300
Error message: Film carrier .................................................................................................... 46400
No. 6400-6446 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .........................46400
No. 6447-6459 Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. ...........46400
Error message: Disk/Media .................................................................................................... 46500
No. 6506 Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). ....................................................................46500
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................... 46550
No. 6551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ........................................................................................46550
No. 6554 Calibration Plate advance error. ..........................................................................................................46550
Error message: Pricing unit .................................................................................................... 46600
No. 6600 Pricing Unit communication error. .....................................................................................................46600
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ..........................................................................................................46600
No. 6602 Pricing Unit Printer operation error. ...................................................................................................46600
No. 6603 Backup data error. PU ........................................................................................................................46600
Error: NMC ............................................................................................................................. 46620
No. 6620 Remote Control was not finished. .......................................................................................................46620
No. 6621 Could not connect to the server. .........................................................................................................46620
No. 6622 There is no backup data in the server. ................................................................................................46620
No. 6623 Noritsu-eNET was not started. ............................................................................................................46620
Error message: Software upgrade ......................................................................................... 46802
No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. ...................................46802
xvi
Error: Main ............................................................................................................................. 46900

No. 6900 Main control system error. ..................................................................................................................46900
No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. .........................................................................................................46900
No. 6903 Serial communication error. ...............................................................................................................46900
No. 6906 Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? .........................................................................46900
No. 6907 The file was not found. .......................................................................................................................46900
No. 6908 Processing response error. ..................................................................................................................46900
No. 6909 CPU was reset. Abort the process. .....................................................................................................46900
No. 6910 Flatbed Scanner diagnosis error. .........................................................................................................46900
No. 6911 Flatbed Scanner operation error. .........................................................................................................46900
No. 6912 Flatbed Scanner communication error. ...............................................................................................46900
No. 6913 System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. .........................................................................46900
No. 6921 PCB error. ...........................................................................................................................................46900
No. 6922 Device control error. ...........................................................................................................................46900
No. 6926 PC Interface PCB control error. ..........................................................................................................46900
Error: Compact Archive Unit .................................................................................................. 48350
No. 8361 Archive File read error. .......................................................................................................................48350
No. 8362 Archive File write error. .....................................................................................................................48350
No. 8363 Compact Archive Unit processing error. ............................................................................................48350
No. 8364 Compact Archive Unit cannot be used. ..............................................................................................48350
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................... 49000
No. 9000 Edit mode System error. ....................................................................................................................49000
No. 9001 Edit mode Information file error. .......................................................................................................49000
No. 9002 Edit mode Image data error. ..............................................................................................................49000
No. 9003 Edit mode Image read error. ..............................................................................................................49000
Error message: QSS-Kids ...................................................................................................... 49250
No. 9250-9311 For error corrective action, refer to QSS-Kids Service Manual. ..............................................49250
Error message: Bravo II ......................................................................................................... 49350
No. 9350-9376 For error corrective action, refer to Bravo II Service Manual. .................................................49350
5. Operation sequence
Start up/Closing down sequence ........................................................................................... 50500
Startup sequence [35, 35i] ....................................................................................................................................50500
ARCNET communication ....................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................50520
Data flow chart ....................................................................................................................... 50700
Data flow in printing [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................................................50700
Data flow in data saving [35, 35i] ........................................................................................................................50710
Data flow to the CAU [35, 35i] ............................................................................................................................50730
Paper path diagram ................................................................................................................ 55000
Paper path diagram [35, 35i] ................................................................................................................................55000
xvii
Printer paper advance operation ............................................................................................ 55100

Paper loading operation [35, 35i] .........................................................................................................................55100
Paper supply operation (advance length of 383.9 mm or less) [35, 35i] ..............................................................55200
Paper supply operation (advance length of 384.0 mm or more) [35, 35i] ............................................................55210
Exposure advance operation (paper advance length of 383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more) [35, 35i] .............55300
Exposure advance operation (advance length of 384.0 mm to 469.9 mm) [35, 35i] ............................................55310
Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [35, 35i] .............................................................................55400
Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [3502] ......................................................................................55420
Paper rewind operation [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................................................55500
Paper splicing processing operation [35, 35i] .......................................................................................................55600
Paper end processing operation [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................55700
Fogged paper processing operation [35, 35i] .......................................................................................................55800
iBeam Tuning operation ......................................................................................................... 55900
iBeam Tuning test print operation [35i] ...............................................................................................................55900
iBeam Tuning Operation [35i] ..............................................................................................................................55910
Processor paper advance operation ...................................................................................... 56100
Processor paper advance operation (normal print) ...............................................................................................56100
Processor paper advance operation (Setup print) .................................................................................................56200
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped device] ....................................................................56300
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device] ........................................................................56400
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device] .............................................................................56500
Colorimeter unit operation ...................................................................................................... 56600
The calibration operation of the colorimeter ........................................................................................................56600
Automatic colorimetry operation of setup print ...................................................................................................56610
Judgment operation of setup print ........................................................................................................................56620
Replenishment operation ....................................................................................................... 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [35, 35i] ........................................................................................................57010
6. Electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ............................................................................. 60100
Compatibility of QSS-35 series PCBs and electrical parts [35, 35i] ....................................................................60100
Position of electrical parts (printer section) ............................................................................ 61000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) [35, 35i] ........................................................................................................61000
Printer section (position and description of electrical parts) [35, 35i] .................................................................61050
Paper supply section (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ................................................................................61200
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35] ......................................................61300
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35i] .....................................................61310
Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35, 35i] .....................................................61400
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) [35] ................................................................................61450
PCB position (Processor section) [35, 35i] ............................................................................. 63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N] [SM] [J] [F] .......................................................................................63200
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i] ............................................................ 63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J] ..............................................................................63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] ..........................................................................................63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J] ..............................................................................................63310
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F] ..............................................................................................63311
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F] ......................................................63312
xviii
Processor (fan operation specification) (35, 35i) .................................................................... 63321

Processor section (fan operation specification) ....................................................................................................63321
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) ............................ 63510
Dryer section, conveyor section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ...........63510
Conveyor unit/Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ..............................................................63520
Description of PCB (printer section) ....................................................................................... 64110
Keyboard PCB (J391193) [35, 35i] ......................................................................................................................64110
Printer control PCB (J391183) [35, 35i] ...............................................................................................................64140
Laser control PCB (J391318)[35] .........................................................................................................................64150
iBeam Control PCB (J391180) [35i] ....................................................................................................................64151
Dual paper magazine PCB (J391184) [35, 35i] ....................................................................................................64190
B laser driver and G laser driver [35] ...................................................................................................................64210
AOM driver [35] ...................................................................................................................................................64230
CVP PCB (J391182) [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................................................64240
PU Control PCB (J391321) [35, 35i] ...................................................................................................................64241
Power supply (printer section, processor section) [35, 35i] .................................................... 64250
Power supply (Printer/Processor section) [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................64250
Description of PCB (processor section) ................................................................................. 66200
Processor control PCB (J391329) [35, 35i] .........................................................................................................66200
Processor relay PCB (J391339, J391186) [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................66220
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J306328) [J] [35] ...........................................................................................66500
SM I/O PCB (J391191) [SM] [35, 35i] ................................................................................................................66600
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] [35, 35i] ................................................................................................66700
Cables .................................................................................................................................... 68100
Precautions for handling the cable [35, 35i] .........................................................................................................68100
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) [35, 35i] ..........................................................68550
7. Setup for service personnel

Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................... 70010
Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) [35, 35i] .........................70010
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) [35, 35i] ..................................70021
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ..................................................70040
Check the processor setting [N] [SM] [J] ............................................................................................................70050
Check the processor setting [F] ............................................................................................................................70051
Scanner section adjustment check [S-4] ...............................................................................................................70060
Scanner section adjustment check [S1-II] ............................................................................................................70060
8. Appendix
Service personnel tool list ...................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [N] [SM] [J] [F] ..........................................................................................................80310
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................... 81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list ..............................................................................................................81010
Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................ 89000
Wiring diagram table [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................................89000
xix
xx
1000
Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................. 10010

Description of warning (signal words) ..............................................................................................................10010
1 Cautions for work

Location of warning labels ................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation ............................................................................................................... 10030
For safe operation ..............................................................................................................................................10030
Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electronic parts .............................10040
Laser Precautions ...............................................................................................................................................10050
1000 1/1
10010
Description of warning (signal words)
• Signal words identify the level of injuries that can potentially occur.
• The signal words used in this manual and found on labels, DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, are assigned according to the
level of potential risk.

• Warning labels are located at or near the part of the system that pose the indicated danger. If ignored, death or serious injury occurs, or
the system breaks down. Be sure to follow the indications in the manuals and on the warning labels.
• The warnings include a signal word, the type and extent of the danger, and information to avoid danger.
• Carefully read and follow the warnings included in this manual and on the warning labels before operating the system.
This indicates situations that if not immediately avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in non-life threatening injury. It is also used to indicate situations
which may cause damage to physical property.
Example of warning label

Warning (signal word)
Symbol mark (warning

indication)
Warning text (warning

indication)
SIGNALWORD
10010 1/1
10020
Location of warning labels
The following shows the locations and types of warning labels and the parts number on this machine. Heed the clearly indicated warnings
and operate safely without accidents. Do not peel the labels off. If the warning labels on the machine becomes illegible or peel off, contact
your place of purchase and exchange them with new labels.

Though the system appearance of some models may be different from figures, locations of warning labels are same as shown in figures.
Printer processor section
Only for J specification Standard, SM and J specifications
12 17
3 9 14
4
2
16
10
12*1
1*1
15
3
7
4
1 8 1
13 3
6
5 4
11*3 F specification
1*2 1
14
18
3
4
15
1
G086609
*1. Only for system equipped with dual paper magazine unit (option)
*2. Only for single paper magazine specification
*3. QSS-3502 only
10020 1/4
10020
1 2
A023349-01 A023200-01

3 4
A022523-01 A022531-01
5 6
A023031-01 A022587-01
7
A234392-01
8
A234350-01
10020 2/4
10020
9 10
A022536-01 A023473-01

11 12
A515330-01 A227560-01
13 14
A022516-01 A045206-01
15
A063381-01
16 17
A022509-01 A031010-01
10020 3/4
10020
18 A087463-01
10020 4/4
10030
For safe operation
For safe operation
For safe operation
! General precautions

• Prior to any part replacement or mechanical adjustment, be sure the main power supply is turned off.
• Since the work which uses key operations cannot turn off the circuit breaker, mechanical operation check during it
requires particular attention.
IMPORTANT
• Ground wires (green and yellow) are connected to the covers and units of the machine.
For reassembly, be sure to connect the ground wires as they were.
• Be sure to perform an operation check after replacing or adjusting any parts (or units).
! Precautions for processing solutions
• This machine uses non-pharmaceutical poison and toxic processing solutions which are dangerous to drink in. Direct
contact with processing solutions may irritate eyes.
When handling processing solutions, wear safety goggles.
If a processing solution has been ingested accidentally, immediately rinse the mouth out with water, and drink one or
two cups of water. Contact a physician as soon as possible, and then vomit the solution according to the physician's
instructions.
If processing solution gets into eyes, immediately rinse them under running water for at least 15 minutes, and then
contact a physician.
• Direct contact with processing solutions may irritate the skin and may cause an allergic reaction.
When handling processing solutions, be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for workwear, to avoid direct contact.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots of
water, after completion of work.
• Processing solution stains on your clothing may result in discoloration or fading. When handling processing solutions,
wear clothing for workwear.
10030 1/3
10030
For safe operation
! Precautions against electric shock
• If any case you have to take care of wiring for the power such as moving the machine, ask a qualified professional
electrician for work. Do not forget to ground the machine.

• Pay attention to avoid shocks when performing troubleshooting, wiring checking, or voltage/current measurement.
• When replacing a fuse or PCB, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and the main power supply. Wait for 10 seconds
or more before replacement.
! Precautions for operating rotary section
• Be careful for your hands, hair, clothes, etc., not to be caught under the gear, chain, belt, roller, fan and other rotating
parts.
Do not remove the cover unless it is specified.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this machine before performing any work.
Keep away your hands from the machine during operation.
If your hand or the like is caught and you cannot move, ask someone around you to turn off the circuit breaker at once.
! Precautions for operating heating section
• The processing solution heater, dryer heater and motor, etc. generate high fever.
If you directly touch them during operation or right after operation, you may get burnt.
When replacement of parts or maintenance is performed, make sure that the temperature is fully lowered.
After temperature fully falls, carry out the operation by turning OFF the circuit breaker and the main power supply.
Cooling time, such as the heater section and the motor, changes with work states.Turn off the circuit breaker and
main power supply. Then, perform the work after the temperature has become low enough.
If you have got burnt, cool the burn with flowing water and contact a physician as soon as possible.
10030 2/3
10030
For safe operation
! Precautions for movable units
• There is a danger of hands being caught by the open/close covers or doors, or by the movable units.
When opening and closing covers or doors, be sure to hold them firmly.

When moving a unit manually, hold the specified parts only.
When working with a unit which automatically moves, or when working around the unit, be sure to turn off the circuit
breaker and main power supply.
If your hand is caught and you cannot move, immediately call for help to turn off the circuit breaker.
! Precautions around cutting parts
• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

Do not remove the covers from edged tools. Keep hands away from edged tools.
When operating near edged tools, turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply.
• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

When replacing an edged tool with a new one, do not touch the edge.
10030 3/3
10040
For safe operation
Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the

electronic parts
If an electrically charged human body touches electronic parts such as PCBs, it may adversely affect the electronic parts.
When handling the electronic parts, be sure to use static-dissipative tools as below to prevent the components on the PCB from being

damaged due to static electricity.
Also use the static-dissipative tools for maintenance of the digital units or engines.
Static-dissipative tool
Description Remarks
Portable Static-Dissipative Field Service Kit Use this kit when replacing or installing/removing the electronic parts from the
machine. This kit consists of four items of Static-Dissipative Work Mat, Wrist
Strap, Ground Cord, and Alligator Clips.
Static-Dissipative conductive gloves Use this to prevent that sebum on your hand adheres when you touch a PCB.
Wrist strap Use this when checking the electronic parts.
• When using the static-dissipative tool, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the unit and the main power supply, and
wait 10 seconds or more to carry out operation.
10040 1/1
10050
For safe operation
Laser Precautions
NOTE
• The system of QSS-3501i series is not equipped with laser engine.

• Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to laser radiation.
• Do not perform the operation that is not described in this manual.
• Do not perform printing operations while the safety switch is released.
Location of laser labels
The labels for the laser precautions are placed on this system.
Do not remove those labels.
3
4
5
2
G084076
1 2
3 4
10050 1/2
10050
For safe operation

10050 2/2
2000
System list ........................................................................................................................... 20005

QSS-35 series model types [35, 35i] .................................................................................................................20005
Removing covers [35, 35i] ................................................................................................... 20020
Removing covers (Printer section) [35, 35i] .....................................................................................................20020
Removing covers (Processor section) [35, 35i] .................................................................................................20021
Adjusting the belt tension .................................................................................................... 20110
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Adjusting belt tension (Printer section) [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................20110
Adjusting belt tension (colorimeter) [35i, 35] ...................................................................................................20125
Adjusting belt tension (Dryer section and conveyor section) [35, 35i] .............................................................20140
PC control section ............................................................................................................... 21170
Opening and closing PC control unit [35, 35i] ..................................................................................................21170
Removing PC control unit cover [35, 35i] ........................................................................................................21180
Precautions when opening/closing PC control unit [35, 35i] ............................................................................21190
Paper magazine section ...................................................................................................... 22000
Procedure to check magazine [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................22000
Paper supply unit A ............................................................................................................. 25610
Removing paper supply unit A [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................................25610
Removing cutter unit and adjusting its right angle [35, 35i] .............................................................................25620
Adjusting paper hold timing of arm [35, 35i] ....................................................................................................25630
Adjusting CVP imprint pressure [35, 35i] .........................................................................................................25640
Paper supply unit B ............................................................................................................. 25710
Removing paper supply unit B [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................................25710
Adjusting the height and position of paper magazine mount B [35, 35i] ..........................................................25720
Adjusting paper feeding unevenness of paper supply unit B [35, 35i] ..............................................................25730
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................ 25810
Removing exposure advance unit [35, 35i] .......................................................................................................25810
Banding shooting [35] .......................................................................................................................................25820
Banding shooting [35i] ......................................................................................................................................25830
Paper Advance Section ....................................................................................................... 26610
Removing paper advance unit [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................26610
Removing processor loading unit [35, 35i] .......................................................................................................26630
Laser engine unit ................................................................................................................. 26710
Replacing laser unit and adjusting its position [35] ..........................................................................................26710
iBeam unit ............................................................................................................................ 26720
Replacing iBeam unit and adjusting its position [35i] ......................................................................................26720
Zigzag adjustment ............................................................................................................... 26810
Adjusting procedure for uneven paper advancing in paper advance section [35, 35i] ......................................26810
Space dimension between units .......................................................................................... 26910
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit [35] ........................................26910
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and exposure advance unit [35i] .............................................26920
Conveyor unit section .......................................................................................................... 27100
Replacing colorimeter and calibration plate [35, 35i] .......................................................................................27100
Adjusting the height of colorimeter unit [35, 35i] .............................................................................................27110
Replacing print conveyor unit belt [35, 35i] ......................................................................................................27120
2000 1/2
2000
Dryer section ....................................................................................................................... 27220

Removing dryer rack [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................................................27220
Adjusting the dryer section slide base position [35, 35i] ..................................................................................27222
Checking the adjustment of backlash in dryer rack [35, 35i] ............................................................................27223
Adjusting ejection guide 1 [35, 35i] ..................................................................................................................27224
Adjusting the position of the upper turn guide [35, 35i] ...................................................................................27225
Adjusting backlash in dryer drive section [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................27230
Removing dryer heater and dryer fan [35, 35i] .................................................................................................27250
2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Print sorter unit section ........................................................................................................ 27420
Removing print sorter unit [35, 35i] ..................................................................................................................27420
Replacing print receiving tray [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................27430
Adjusting the stop position of print receiving tray [35, 35i] .............................................................................27440
Adjusting chain tension of print sorter unit [35, 35i] ........................................................................................27450
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i] ...................................................................................... 27610
Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J] .......................................................................................................27610
Replacing the module [J] ...................................................................................................................................27620
Replacing the drum motor [J] ............................................................................................................................27630
Replacing the elevator motor [J] .......................................................................................................................27640
Adjusting the elevator belt tension [J] ...............................................................................................................27650
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J] .....................................................................................27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J] ...................................................................................27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J] .....................................................................................27680
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J] ......................................................................................................27690
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i] ................................................................................. 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ..................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] ..................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] .....................................................................27830
F replenishment unit [35, 35i] .............................................................................................. 27900
Removing F replenishment unit [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................................27900
Removing the cartridge installation section ......................................................................................................27910
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor ......................................................................................27920
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor ............................................................................................27930
Output Check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump ............................27940
2000 2/2
20005
System list
System list
QSS-35 series model types [35, 35i]
*1. In the Service Manual, some sections describe as (35, 35i).

System name is expressed by the name shown in Remarks 2 in service manual. (Some files are not always applicable.)
System Process Illustration System Scanner Remarks 1 Remar

Specifica program ks 2
*1
tion
QSS-3501 Standard S-4 • Equipped with Auto Setup function, 35
SM S1-II Automatic Water Refilling and Auto
cleaning as standard.

J • Processing the image with PC.
• Paper advance unit (only for one-
F
QSS-3501 lane advance: common for 3501 and
QSS-3502 3501i)
• For QSS-3501 Digital, print sorter
unit is optional.
• Scanner is selectable part.
QSS-3502 • Capacity booster D is necessary.

• Equipped with Auto Setup function,
Automatic Water Refilling and Auto
cleaning as standard.
• Processing the image with PC.
• Paper advance unit (only for two-
lane advance)
• For QSS-3502 Digital, print sorter
unit is a standard equipment.
QSS-3501i • Auto Setup function, Automatic 35i

QSS-3501 i Water Refilling and Auto cleaning
are optional.*1
• Processing the image with PC.
lane advance)
• iBeam engine loading
• Paper supply unit A and exposure
advance unit are only for iBeam.
lane advance: common for 3501 and
3501i)
• For QSS-3501i Digital, print sorter
unit is optional.
20005 1/2
20005
System list
*1. For F specification, Auto cleaning is a standard setup.
20005 2/2
20020
Removing covers [35, 35i]
Removing covers (Printer section) [35, 35i]
! Arrangement plan (PC control unit)

The numbers in the brackets show the number of screws for covers.
Table cover (7 pcs.)

PC cover (4 pcs.)
G084486
! Printer section
PCB cover 1 (3 pcs.)
Printer rear cover (15 pcs.) PCB cover 2 (3 pcs.)

Guide (2 pcs.)
G084480
• To remove PCB cover 1, remove the guide.

• To remove PCB cover 2, remove the guide and PCB cover 1.
20020 1/1
20021
Removing covers (Processor section) [35, 35i]
! Processor section
[N] and [SM] specifications
Sub-tank top cover PCB cover 1 (3 pcs.) Processor rear cover (6 pcs.)

Processor cover 1 (4 pcs.)
[F] specification

PCB cover 2 (2 pcs.)
[J] specification

G084430
20021 1/2
20021
[N], [SM] [J] and [F] specifications
Processor side cover 1 (11 pcs.) Dryer cover (1 pc.) Air duct (1 pc.)

Processor side cover 2 (2 pcs.)
G085888
! Tablet replenishment section

Tablet replenishment unit section cover 1 (4

pcs.)
Tablet replenishment unit section cover 2 (7

pcs.)
G084432
20021 2/2
20110
Adjusting the belt tension
Adjusting belt tension (Printer section) [35, 35i]
Reference
☞ Paper supply unit A, B (for 35, 35i) ☞ Exposure advance unit (for 35)
☞ Exposure advance unit (for 35i) ☞ Paper advance unit (for 35, 35i)
! Paper supply unit A, B (for 35, 35i)

Paper supply unit B Paper supply unit A
2 3
4,5
G083240
Paper supply unit A, B (for 35, 35i)

No. Name Deflection Force Adjusting point Illustration
1 Paper supply motor B belt 1 mm 190±35 g Paper Supply Motor B
(1.9±0.3N)
2 Paper advance motor 1 belt 1 mm 220±30 g Paper advance motor 1

(2.2±0.3 N)
20110 1/6
20110
No. Name Deflection Force Adjusting point Illustration

3 Paper advance motor 2 belt 1 mm 164±26 g Paper advance motor 2
(1.6±0.3N)
(35)
197±24 g
(1.9±0.2 N)
(35i)

4 Arm move motor (left) belt 4.5 mm 127±21 g Arm move motor (left)
5 Arm move motor (right) belt (1.2±0.2 N) Arm move motor (right)
! Exposure advance unit (for 35)
1 3
G083239
Exposure advance unit (for 35)

No. Name Belt width Deflection Force Adjusting point Illustration
1 Exposure advance motor 1 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 220±30 g Exposure advance
belt (2.2±0.3 N) motor 1
2 Pressure change motor 1 belt 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 194±20 g Pressure change motor
(1.9±0.2 N) 1
20110 2/6
20110

3 Exposure advance drive belt 10.0 mm 1.0 mm 1100±50 g Exposure advance
(10.8 ± 0.5 N) motor 1
4 Exposure advance motor 2 10.0 mm 2.0 mm 950±50 g Tension pulley

belt (9.3 ± 0.5 N)

(2.5±0.3 N) 2
! Exposure advance unit (for 35i)
G083238
Exposure advance unit (for 35i)

belt (2.2±0.3 N) motor 1
20110 3/6
20110

(2.5±0.4 N) 1
3 Exposure advance drive belt 10.0 mm 1.0 mm 700±50 g Idle pulley

(6.9 ± 0.5 N)
(3.0 ± 0.5 N) 2

belt (7±0.5 N) motor 2
20110 4/6
20110
! Paper advance unit (for 35, 35i)

5 6
1
3
G083241
Paper advance unit (for 35, 35i)

1 Paper advance motor 3 belt 6.0 mm 1.0 mm 130 to 200 g Paper advance motor
(1.2 to 1.9 N) 3
2 Pressure change motor belt 5.0 mm 4.0 mm 80 to 130 g Paper advance

(0.8 to 1.3 N) pressure change
motor
3 Turn motor belt 5.0 mm 2.0 mm 130 to 200 g Turn motor

(1.3 to 2.0 N)
20110 5/6
20110

4 Lane select motor belt 5.0 mm 5.0 mm 50 to 70 g Lane select motor
(0.5 to 0.7 N)
(3502)

5 Paper advance arm motor 10.0 mm 10.0 mm 560 to 630 g Paper advance arm
(left) belt (5.6 to 6.3 N) motor
(3502)
6.0 mm 5.0 mm 140 to 190 g
(1.4 to 1.9 N)
(3501, 3501i)
6 Paper advance arm motor 10.0 mm 10.0 mm 560 to 630 g Tension plate (right)
(right) belt (5.6 to 6.3 N)
(3502)
6.0 mm 5.0 mm 140 to 190 g
(1.4 to 1.9 N)
(3501, 3501i)
20110 6/6
20125
Adjusting belt tension (colorimeter) [35i, 35]

G083227
Colorimeter
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
1 Paper advance motor belt 50 g 1.0 mm Attaching position of the
(0.5 N) tension pulley
20125 1/1
20140
Adjusting belt tension (Dryer section and conveyor section) [35, 35i]
5
3
1, 2

3
G083194
NOTE
• For adjustment, refer to the reference listed in the following table.
Reference
No. Name Reference
1 Replacing print conveyor unit belt [35, 35i] ☞ 27120
4 Adjusting chain tension of print sorter unit [35, 35i] ☞ 27450
− Adjusting elevator belt tension [J] [35, 35i] ☞ 27650
Adjusting each belt tension

No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
2 Conveyor drive belt 100±10 g 3.5 mm Position of tension pulley
1.0±0.1N
3 Sorter drive belt 330±10 g 2.5 mm Position of sorter motor

(3.2±0.1 N) holder
5 Paper advance motor belt 265 to 296 g 1.6 mm Position of drive motor
(2.6 to 2.9 N)
20140 1/1
21170
PC control section
PC control section
Opening and closing PC control unit

[35, 35i]
For details about precautions when removing PC control unit,

refer to ☞ 21190.
! Procedure
1. Remove the scanner unit.

Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
2. Remove display monitor, keyboard,
operation keyboard, mouse and MD-1 from
table.
3. Remove PC cover.
☞ 20020
4. Remove two screws from the PC control unit.
G084060
5. Open the PC control unit. Stand the stopper

and securely attach it to the PC control unit.
PC control unit
Stopper
G084036
21170 1/1
21180
PC control section
Removing PC control unit cover [35, 6. Open the PC control unit. Stand the stopper
and securely attach it to the PC control unit.
35i]
For details about precautions when removing PC control unit,

refer to ☞ 21190.
! Procedure
1. Remove the scanner unit.

2. Remove display monitor, keyboard,
operation keyboard, mouse and MD-1 from
table.
3. Remove PC cover and table cover.
☞ 20020
4. Remove two screws from the PC control unit.
G084060
5. Remove the PC control unit cover. (Loosen

seven screws out of eight.)
PC control unit cover
G084451
21180 1/1
21190
PC control section
Precautions when opening/closing

PC control unit [35, 35i]
! Precautions when opening/closing the

PC control unit
IMPORTANT
• If the backspace of the system is 190 mm or less,
remove the PC control unit cover.

☞ 21180
• If the backspace of the system is more than 190 mm
and less than 220 mm, remove the table cover.
☞ 20020
• If the back space of the system is 220 mm or more,
open the personal computer control unit.
☞ 21170
• Be careful when handling the personal computer
control unit since it is very heavy.
• The printer becomes unstable if the personal
computer control unit is opened. Be sure not to open
the personal computer control unit when the jack
bolts do not touch the ground.
• If the personal computer control unit is opened fully,
the cables between units may get damaged or the
unit may get fallen backward.
21190 1/1
22000
Paper magazine section
Paper magazine section
Procedure to check magazine [35, 2. Check that the paper guides are securely
attached.
35i]
Paper guides
Check item
Paper Check that paper is neat in shape.
magazine Check that paper guides are attached securely.
! Procedure

1. Check that the width regulation guide and
the roller guide are securely attached.
IMPORTANT Screws
• For the paper width of 117 mm and 127 mm,
set the width regulation guide inside the
groove. For 120 mm and 130 mm, set it
outside the groove.
Width regulation guides
G074539
Groove Paper width

Roller guides
A Unused
G059817 B 210 mm (not corresponded to 35i)
C 203 mm
Position of the width regulation guide for each paper width
D Unused
E 178 mm
F Unused
G 165 mm
H Unused
I 152 mm
J Unused
K 130 mm
L 127 mm
M Unused
N 120 mm
O 117 mm
P 114 mm
Q Unused
R 102 mm
S Unused
* shows a width unused. T 89 mm
G074538
U 82.5 mm
22000 1/1
25610
Paper supply unit A
Paper supply unit A
Removing paper supply unit A [35, 7. If the CVP unit is to be attached, replace
paper advance unit A and carry out the CVP
35i] imprint pressure adjustment.
☞ 25640
! Procedure
1. Remove paper supply unit A in the direction

indicated by the arrow.

Paper supply unit A
G074446
! Adjustment after reattaching

When the original paper supply unit A is reattached
• It is not necessary to adjust.
When the new paper supply unit A is attached

1. Carry out paper sensor adjustment.
☞ 36000
2. Carry out the paper advance length
correction.
☞ 36050
3. Check the right angle adjustment of the
paper cutter unit.
☞ 25620
4. Check the zigzagging adjustment for paper
supply unit B.
☞ 25730
5. Carry out Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for
each paper magazine A, B.
6. Check the paper hold timing adjustment of
the arm.
☞ 25630
25610 1/1
25620
Paper supply unit A
Removing cutter unit and adjusting 3. Remove the loading sensor. (two screws)
its right angle [35, 35i] IMPORTANT
• When replacing the loading sensor, in order
to remove the wiring of loading sensor, it is
! Removing the cutter unit necessary to cut the mini band.
Loading sensor
1. Pull out paper supply unit A.
2. Unplug the connector(s).
• J/P422 (Cut motor)

• J/P424 (Cut home sensor)
• J/P425 (Cut end sensor)
J/P424 J/P425
Mini band
Bottom view of paper supply unit A
G078404
4. Remove the cutter unit. (two screws)

" Point
When removing the cutter unit, be careful not to
remove the positioning plate for the cutter unit. If the
positioning plate is removed, right angle adjustment of
the cutter unit must be carried out again.
J/P422 Cutter unit
G074447
Positioning plate
Loading sensor unit
G078405
25620 1/2
25620
Paper supply unit A
! Precautions when reattaching

• When attaching the cutter unit, tighten the screws by
pushing them in the direction indicated by the arrow.
• Check that the paper has been cut vertically. If not, carry
out the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit.
! The right angle adjustment of the cutter

unit

1. Loosen two screws for each cutter unit and
positioning plate to adjust the right angle of
the cutter unit.
Loosen these screws.
Positioning plate
Loosen these
screws.
G057512
" Point
Check the right angle of the paper cut section by
matching up with cut edges as shown illustration
below.
The second print
A B
Paper
advance
direction
The first print

G051111
• If the cutting end is as shown in A, adjust the
cutting angle by moving the positioning plate in
the direction indicated by the arrow A as shown in
the previous figure.
• If the cutting end is as shown in B adjust the
cutting angle by moving the positioning plate in
the direction indicated by the arrow B as shown in
the previous figure.
25620 2/2
25630
Paper supply unit A
Adjusting paper hold timing of arm (3) Adjust the position of the detection plate so
that the plate is protruded 1.8±0.2 mm from
[35, 35i] the paper hold sensor. (Loosen two set-
screws.)
! Procedure Paper hold motor

2. Remove the mounting plate of the paper hold
motor. (Loosen one of the two screws.)

Paper hold motor
Set-screw (A)
Arm
Set-screw (B)
Screw
Set-screws of the
detection plate
Cam
Detection plate
Paper hold sensor
Loosen this Paper hold motor mounting Paper hold sensor Hexagonal screwdriver
screw. plate
G057638
3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of View from this side.
the paper hold motor.
(1) Look and adjust from the direction indicated

by arrow.
Cam
Detection
1.8±0.2 mm
plate
Paper hold sensor
View from this side.

Viewed from the arrow
G074454
(2) Rotate the detecting plate using a hexagonal G057639
screwdriver to the right so that the bulge of (4) Tighten the set-screws of the paper hold
the cam faces below. motor. (Two set-screws)
NOTE 4. Operate the paper hold motor via Output
• Set-screws (A) and (B) need not be check to check that the pressure pin is align
loosened. If it is loosened, attach it as it
was.
• Set-screws (A) and (B) fix the cam to the
paper hold motor.
25630 1/2
25630
Paper supply unit A
with the guide when the paper hold sensor

is LIGHT.
☞ 35310
Guide
0.0 mm
Pressure pin

Paper hold motor
G074455
25630 2/2
25640
Paper supply unit A
Adjusting CVP imprint pressure [35, position of the CVP unit is the same as that
of the head adjustment jig.
35i]
Head adjusting jig
! Procedure

2. Loosen the two screws fixing the CVP unit. Lock nuts

CVP unit
Adjusting screws
G074452
G074453
3. Set the head adjustment jig to the guide of
paper supply unit A. 5. Tighten the two CVP unit screws.
IMPORTANT 6. Make actual prints, then check the printing
density of the CVP unit.
• The head adjusting jig is the service
personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel
tool list.
☞ 80310
4. Loosen two lock nuts and turn two adjusting
screws so that the thickness of the attaching
25640 1/1
25710
Paper supply unit B
Paper supply unit B
Removing paper supply unit B [35, 4. Remove screw(s) from paper supply unit B.
(Loosen two screws out of four.)
35i]
Paper supply unit B
! Procedure for removing paper supply

unit B
1. Remove the PCB cover. (Loosen two

screws.)

• J/P281 (Paper supply motor A)
• J/P282 (Paper supply motor B)
• J/P279 (Paper end sensor B)
J/P281, J/P282, J/P289
G084597
PCB cover
G084595
3. Remove two screws from mounting angle

bracket 1.
Angle bracket 1
G084596
25710 1/3
25710
Paper supply unit B
! Precautions when reattaching 2. Attach paper supply unit B while pushing it in

the arrow direction. (two screws)
When reattaching the original paper supply unit B Angle bracket 1
1. Attach paper supply unit B while pushing it in

the arrow direction. (six screws)
Paper supply unit B

Angle bracket 2
G084599
3. Loosen screw B. Press the angle bracket

against the direction of the arrow and fix
screws A and B. (four screws)
G084598
When attaching new paper supply unit B Screws B Angle bracket 1
1. Temporarily tighten mounting angle bracket

2 and mounting angle bracket 1. (two
screws)
Screws A
G084600
25710 2/3
25710
Paper supply unit B
4. Attach mounting angle bracket 2 by pushing

it in the direction indicated by the arrows 1
and 2. (five screws)

Angle bracket 2
G074547
25710 3/3
25720
Paper supply unit B
Adjusting the height and position of 3. Tighten the screws of the magazine slide
frame. (four screws)
paper magazine mount B [35, 35i]
4. Check the detection status of magazine
sensor B via input check. ☞ 35210
IMPORTANT If magazine B is not detected correctly, adjust the
• 33/33SD/3300i position of paper magazine code sensor B.
☞ Adjusting the position of paper magazine code
• Check if paper magazine mount B is set to the
sensor B
positioning pin of paper supply unit B smoothly.
5. After the adjustment, check that the paper
Positioning pin does not zigzag.

☞ 25730
! Adjusting the position of paper

magazine mount B
1. Loosen the screws fixing magazine slide rails

1 and 2. (three screws each)
Loosen this screw.
Magazine slide rail 1
G074552
! Adjusting the position of the paper

magazine mount B
1. Loosen the screws of the magazine slide

frame. (four screws)
Magazine slide frame

Magazine slide rail 2
G059255
2. Change the height of paper magazine mount

B and set the magazine. And continue the
confirmation work of storage condition to
G074553
2. After returning paper magazine mount B to

the original position, change its position and
set the magazine. And continue working to
confirm the storage condition to adjust them.
(Two adjusting screws)
25720 1/2
25720
Paper supply unit B
adjust them. (Two adjusting screws each left the magazine code can be detected with
and right) paper magazine B inserted.
Adjusting screws Holder 1
Holder 2

Paper magazine code sensor B
Adjusting screws
G059258

G059256
3. After the height adjustment, loosen six

screws of the magazine slide rail.
Adjust the position continuously.
If magazine B is not detected correctly, adjust the
position of paper magazine code sensor B.
☞ Adjusting the position of paper magazine code
sensor B
5. After the adjustment, check that the paper
does not zigzag.
☞ 25730
! Adjusting the position of paper

magazine code sensor B
1. Loosen four screws of paper magazine

sensor B, and adjust holders 1 and 2 so that
25720 2/2
25730
Paper supply unit B
Adjusting paper feeding Example: When the first test print is misaligned in the left.
unevenness of paper supply unit B First test print 0.5 mm Second test print
[35, 35i]
A
! Procedure
A
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the zigzagging of paper supply unit

B, make a test print using the maximum size of
paper which is in use.
1. Make a test print from magazine B in Arm
Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
2. Take the second test print as a standard.
Check that the difference between lines A on
the first and second test prints is within 0.5
mm.
Example: If the first test print skews to the right
First test print 0.5 mm Second test print

A
Paper advance
direction
A
G072367
3. If difference between lines A on first test print

and second test print is not within 0.5 mm,
carry out zigzagging adjustment for paper
supply unit B.
4. Loosen the screws for the positioning pin of
paper supply unit B, and adjust the pin.
(Loosen two fixing screws.)
When the first test print Adjust the positioning pin
is misaligned in the right. leftward.
Step 2
When the first test print Adjust the positioning pin
is misaligned in the left. rightward.
Step 2
Paper advance
direction
G074555
25730 1/2
25730
Paper supply unit B
Positioning pin
Right
Left

Loosen the fixing screws.
G074554
5. After the adjustment of the positioning pin,

check that the positioning pin goes into the
positioning hole of the magazine B smoothly
when the magazine is taken in and out.
6. If the positioning pin does not go into the
positioning hole smoothly, adjust the position
of magazine B to the right and left.
☞ 25720
7. Test prints are made in the maximum paper
size via the paper supply unit B.
☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment
of paper supply unit B, repeat Step 7 via
Step 4.
9. Carry out the zigzagging adjustment for each
magazine of paper supply unit B.
☞ 36060
25730 2/2
25810
Exposure advance unit
Removing exposure advance unit [35, 35i]
! Procedure
1. Remove paper supply unit A.

☞ 25610
• J/P399, 400 (Relay connector)

J/P399, J/P400
G083247
3. Open the exposure advance unit.

4. For 35, move the stopper of the exposure advance unit in the direction of the arrow and fix the unit.
(one screw)
Stopper
G083246
25810 1/2
25810
5. Lift the exposure advance unit to arrow direction holding the part of A and B, and then remove it.
Part A Exposure advance unit

Part B
G083248
IMPORTANT
• Be careful when handling the exposure advance unit since it is very heavy.

• Confirm that the focal plane regulating guide is correctly attached, and install the exposure advance unit.
! Adjusting the attaching position
1. The exposure advance unit has positioning pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in attaching the
exposure advance unit.
! Adjustment after reattaching and setup

When the original exposure advance unit is reattached
When the new exposure advance unit is attached
Item Reference
Perform Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
Check the Exposure Center Correction. ☞ 36070
Check the Exposure Advance Adjustment 1. ☞ 36080
Check the Exposure Advance Adjustment 2. ☞ 36081
Check the Paper Pressure Operation Correction. ☞ 36090
25810 2/2
25820
Banding shooting [35]
The method of banding shooting varies between 35 and 35i.
Reference
For 35i, refer to ☞ Banding shooting [35i].
! Paper Advance Section

Exposure position
156mm
Paper advance direction
93mm
80mm
86mm
Paper guide 74mm 74mm

Arm unit 2
17mm 17mm
Turn unit
Pressure roller 2
Pressure roller at the inlet side
Pressure roller at the exit side
G074561
! Banding shooting (Print condition: All)

Banding position Status Corrective action Refer to
Front margin: Around 3 The pressure of pressure roller 2 is not Replace the arm of pressure roller 2. ☞ Exposure
mm released. Replace pressure roller 2. advance unit 1
At the area 17 mm from the The exit pressure roller is not released • Failure of the exit arm ☞ Exposure
paper leading end or release amount of the roller is too • Failure of pressure roller holder 3 advance unit 1
small.
At the area 10 mm from the The pressure of the exit pressure • Failure of the exit arm ☞ Exposure
paper leading end roller starts. • Failure of pressure roller holder 3 advance unit 1
At the area 19 mm from the Paper is pressed by the exit pressure • Failure of the adjustment of
paper leading end roller. exposure advance pressure change
At the area 39 mm from the The pressure of the exit pressure motor 2 and pressure change motor ☞ Exposure
paper leading end roller ends. 2 belt, and replacing the exposure advance unit 2
advance unit
25820 1/3
25820

At the area 74 to 93 mm The paper touches the turn unit roller. • Replace the pressure release arm of ☞ Paper advance
from the paper leading end the paper advance unit. unit
• Perform Turn Unit Stop Position ☞ 36010
Correction of Paper Advance
Unit Correction.
• Adjusting the attaching position of ☞ 26910
exposure advance unit
• Replacing the exposure advance ☞ 25810
☞ 26610

unit
• Replacing the paper advance unit
Rear end: At about 17 mm The inlet side pressure roller release Carry out the paper pressure operation ☞ 36090
amount of the exposure advance unit correction.
is too small.
Rear end: At about 26 mm The inlet side pressure roller release
amount of the exposure advance unit
is too big.
Rear end: At about 86 mm When the paper rear end removes • Adjusting the attaching position of ☞ 26910
from the guide in paper supply unit A exposure advance unit
Whole part of the print (no The screws of the exposure advance • Adjusting the attaching position of ☞ 25810
cycle) unit are loose. exposure advance unit
It is given a vibration from outside. - -
All jack bolts are effective or not. - -
The strength of the floor is - -
insufficient.
! Exposure advance unit 1

Pressure roller holder (2)
Exit arm
Pressure roller 2
Arm of pressure roller 2 Inlet arm
G084601
25820 2/3
25820
! Paper advance unit

Pressure release arm
G083106
Advance drive pulley
Exposure advance drive belt Exposure advance motor 1 belt
Drive roller (2)
Pressure change motor 2 belt Idle pulley

G077143

Banding position Status Corrective action
5.45 mm cycle Dust stuck on the advance drive pulley • Refer to ☞ Exposure advance unit 2 for the
55.5 mm cycle Dust caught at exposure advance motor 1 belt. arrangement of each part.
The belt tension of exposure advance motor 1 • Check each part if there are any problems.
belt is maladjusted. If dust or dirt is on the belt, roller and pulley,
43.7 mm cycle Dust stuck on the idle pulley handle them by cleaning.
202 mm cycle Dust caught at the exposure advance drive • Adjust the tension of each belt when it is not
belt. appropriate. ☞ 20110
Adjusting failure of the belt tension of the • If rollers or pulleys shake, it is necessary to
exposure advance drive belt replace the exposure advance unit. ☞ 25810
92.4 mm cycle Dust stuck on drive roller (2)
NOTE
• The banding is generated on the print whole area.
25820 3/3
25830
Banding shooting [35i]
The method of banding shooting varies between 35 and 35i.
Reference
For details of 35, refer to ☞ Banding shooting [35].
! Paper Advance Section

Exposure position
156mm
93mm
80mm
86mm
Pressure roller 2 74mm 74mm
Arm unit 2
17mm 27mm
Paper guide
Turn unit
Pressure roller at the inlet side Pressure roller at the exit side
G083104

Front margin: Around 3 mm The pressure of pressure roller 2 is • Replace the arm of pressure ☞ Exposure
not released. roller 2. advance unit 1
• Replace pressure roller 2.
At the area 27 mm from the The exit pressure roller is not released • Failure of the exit arm ☞ Exposure
paper leading end or release amount of the roller is too • Failure of pressure roller holder advance unit 1
small. 3
At the area 28 mm from the The pressure of the exit pressure • Failure of the exit arm ☞ Exposure
paper leading end roller starts. • Failure of pressure roller holder advance unit 1
At the area 33 mm from the Paper is pressed by the exit pressure 3
paper leading end roller. • Failure of the adjustment of
At the area 36 mm from the The pressure of the exit pressure exposure advance pressure ☞ Exposure
paper leading end roller ends. change motor 2 and pressure advance unit 2
change motor 2 belt, and
replacing the exposure advance
unit
25830 1/4
25830

At the area 73 mm from the Adjustment fault of Exposure • Measure the distance between 0 ☞ 36080
paper leading end Advance Adjustment 1 or Exposure mm∼254 mm line for test print ☞ 36081
Advance Adjustment 2 of Exposure Advance
Adjustment 1 or Exposure
Advance Adjustment 2 again.
Then, input the value to Test
Paper Measurement Value.
At the area 74 to 93 mm from The paper touches the turn unit roller. • Replace the pressure release ☞ Paper advance
the paper leading end arm of the paper advance unit. unit

• Perform Turn Unit Stop ☞ 36010
Position Correction of Paper
Advance Unit Correction.
• Adjusting the attaching position ☞ 26920
of exposure advance unit
• Replacing the exposure ☞ 25810
advance unit ☞ 26610
• Replacing the paper advance
unit
Rear end: At about 17 mm The inlet side pressure roller release Carry out the paper pressure ☞ 36090
amount of the exposure advance unit operation correction.
is too small.
Rear end: At about 33 mm The inlet side pressure roller release • Failure of the exit arm ☞ Exposure
amount of the exposure advance unit • Failure of pressure roller holder advance unit 1
is too big. 3 ☞ Exposure
advance unit 2
• Failure of exposure advance
☞ 25810
pressure change motor 2
• Failure of pressure roller holder
3
• Adjusting failure of the
pressure change motor 2 belt
• Replacing the exposure
advance unit
Rear end: At about 86 mm When the paper rear end removes • Adjusting the attaching position ☞ 26920
from the guide in paper supply unit A of exposure advance unit
Whole part of the print (no It is given a vibration from outside. - -
cycle) All jack bolts are effective or not. - -
The strength of the floor is - -
insufficient.
25830 2/4
25830


Exit arm
Pressure roller 2
Arm of pressure roller 2 Inlet arm
G083105
! Paper advance unit
G083106
25830 3/4
25830
Exposure advance motor 1 belt Drive roller (2)
Exposure advance drive belt
Pressure change motor 2 belt

Idle pulley
Tension bearing
Advance drive pulley
G082064

Banding position Status Corrective action
5.45 mm cycle Dust stuck on the advance drive pulley • Refer to ☞ Exposure advance unit 2 for the
55.5 mm cycle Dust caught at exposure advance motor 1 belt. arrangement of each part.
The belt tension of exposure advance motor 1 • Check each part if there are any problems.
belt is maladjusted. If dust or dirt is on the belt, roller and pulley,
43.7 mm cycle Dust stuck on the idle pulley handle them by cleaning.
273 mm cycle Dust caught at the exposure advance drive belt. • Adjust the tension of each belt when it is not
Adjusting failure of the belt tension of the appropriate. ☞ 20110
exposure advance drive belt • If rollers or pulleys shake, it is necessary to
92.4 mm cycle Dust stuck on drive roller (2) replace the exposure advance unit. ☞ 25810
7.4 mm cycle Dust stuck on the tension bearing
47.1 mm cycle Dust stuck on the inlet side pressure roller and
exit side pressure roller
NOTE
• The banding is generated on the print whole area.
25830 4/4
26610
Paper Advance Section
Removing paper advance unit [35, 3. Slightly lift up the paper advance unit. Attach
the pin to the position shown in the figure not
35i] to touch the stopper and fix a screw.
Pin Screw
! Procedure
1. Pull out the paper advance unit.

2. Remove the paper advance unit. (one screw)
• When removing the screw, be careful not to lose

the spacer.
Pin Spacer
Pin Stopper
G084449
• The paper advance unit is regulated with the positioning
pin. No need for adjusting when attaching.

G084448
When the original paper advance unit is reattached
1. Hang the paper advance unit and attach it to When the new paper advance unit is attached
the pin.
1. Carry out Paper Advance Unit Correction.
2. Move the paper advance unit in the direction ☞ 36010
of the arrow.
26610 1/1
26630
Removing processor loading unit

[35, 35i]
! Procedure
1. Open the processor top cover.

2. Remove the rack stopper.
3. Remove the sprocket unit. (three screws)

Sprocket unit
G058399
4. Disconnect the ground wire. (one screw)

5. Remove the processor loading unit. (three
screws)
Ground wire
Processor loading unit
G084411

• Do not touch the screws marked in blue. The position of
the processor loading unit is adjusted with these screws
by using a jig in factory.
• The position of the processor loading unit and the
sprocket unit is adjusted with the positioning pins. No
need for adjusting when attaching.
26630 1/1
26710
Laser engine unit
Laser engine unit
Replacing laser unit and adjusting its position [35]
! Precautions for laser unit replacement
IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the laser unit, items shown below are necessary in returning the defective unit.
Laser unit Defective laser unit

Sample print The print where the abnormal color can be checked

Backup data All of the backup data when the problem occurs
Make a backup copy of all the data in Close Down Checks or Reading and Writing Data. ☞ 35400
• There are different types of laser units. Refer to ☞ 61450 regarding how to distinguish those types.
! Procedure for removing the laser unit
1. Open PC control unit or remove PC control unit cover.

☞ 21170
☞ 21180
2. Remove the exposure advance unit.
☞ 25810
3. Remove cover 1. (six screws)
Cover 1
G085809

• Be informed that the number of connectors and connector No. may change depending on the laser unit type that is connected to.
Connector Connect to Connector Connect to

J/P1509, 1515, 1532 Laser control PCB J/P1526 Relay connector
J/P855 Laser unit heater J/P1653 B laser driver
J/P1663 G laser driver J/P1632 B AOM driver
J/P1637 G AOM driver J/P1642 R AOM driver
26710 1/5
26710
Laser engine unit
5. Disconnect the ground wire. (Four wires) (One screw for each)
When removing the PCB plate, disconnect the cables from the clamps.
J/P1515
J/P1632 (R) J/P855

Cable clamp
J/P1663
J/P1532
J/P1637(G) J/P1526

J/P1653
J/P1632 (B) J/P1509
Cable clamp
G085810
6. Remove laser control box cooling fan 2. (two screws)

7. Remove exposure advance unit lock holder (1). (two screws)
8. Remove light-tight cover 2. (Loosen two screws.)
Laser control box cooling fan 2
Light-tight cover 2
Lock holder (1)
G085811
26710 2/5
26710
Laser engine unit
9. Remove the PCB plate and stand it against table cover 2.

Table cover 2

PCB plate
G085812
Take enough care of wiring of the laser control PCB.
10. Remove the laser unit. (Four fixing nuts and four washers)
Nuts and washers
Nuts and washers

Laser unit
G085813
11. When replacing the laser unit, remove lock holder (2) and attach lock holder (2) to a new laser unit. (two
screws)
26710 3/5
26710
Laser engine unit
! Precautions when installing the laser unit
1. When removing lock holder (2) to replace the laser unit, attach lock holder (2) to the holes in the
direction of the arrows and tighten the two screws. (two screws)

Lock holder (2) Stopper
G085816
If lock holder (2) is installed in a wrong direction, the laser unit cannot be installed properly in the printer.
2. Attach the light-tight cover by pushing it in the direction of the arrows. (two screws)
3. Install laser control box cooling fan 2 with the label facing in the direction of the arrows. (two screws)
Laser control box cooling fan 2
Light-tight cover 2
G085815
! Procedure for adjusting the laser unit position
1. Set the positioning pins to the laser unit.
26710 4/5
26710
Laser engine unit
2. Adjust the position of the laser unit so that the positioning pins move up and down smoothly. (four nuts
and four washers)
Nuts and washers

Positioning pins
Laser unit
Nuts and washers
G085814
! Adjustment after replacement
When the original laser unit is reattached

1. Carry out the daily setup.
When a new laser unit is attached
1. Carry out the Exposure Zoom Rate Correction.
☞ 36020
2. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
3. Carry out the Exposure Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment.
☞ 36040
4. Check the slippage of the main scanning direction of the Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
5. Carry out the initial setup.
26710 5/5
26720
iBeam unit
iBeam unit
Replacing iBeam unit and adjusting 5. Remove two ground wires.

its position [35i] Light-tight cover 2
! Precautions for replacement of iBeam

unit
IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the iBeam unit, items shown below
are necessary in returning the defective unit.

iBeam unit The defective iBeam unit
iBeam data iBeam unit data that the problem occurs
(iBeam Tuning and iBeam)
Sample print The print where the abnormal color can be
checked, Sample 4 of Paper Specification
Registration/Setup and Sample 5 ☞ 32510
Memory data and Memory data when the problem occurs and Wiring cover
Logdata data of Logdata at the same time ☞ 37520 G083179
Backup data All of the backup data when the problem 6. Unplug the connector(s).
occurs
• J/P900, 901 (iBeam unit)
IMPORTANT 7. Open the exposure advance unit.

• Make a backup copy of all the data in Close Down
Checks or Reading and Writing Data.
☞ 35400
! Procedure for removing the iBeam unit
1. Open PC control unit or remove PC control

unit cover.
☞ 21170
☞ 21180
2. Remove light-tight cover 1. (four screws)
Light-tight cover 1
G083178
3. Remove one ground wire.

4. Remove light-tight cover 2. (Loosen two
screws.)
Remove the wiring cover. (Loosen two screws.)
26720 1/3
26720
iBeam unit
8. Remove the iBeam unit. (two screws) ! How to adjust the iBeam unit position
1. Attach the iBeam unit pushing the unit in the

direction of the arrow (contact face). (two
screws)
NOTE
• If the iBeam unit contacts with the contact face
and pins after tightening the attaching screws, the
unit is correctly installed in the system.

Contact face
J/P901
J/P900
G083180
Pin
G083181
If the original iBeam unit is reattached

G084433
1. Carry out the daily setup.
When the new iBeam unit is attached
1. Carry out Paper Specification
Registration/Setup→Forced Pre-
Emission.
NOTE
• If the power supply of iBeam unit is not turned on
for 20 days or more, Forced Pre-Emission
operates automatically.
26720 2/3
26720
iBeam unit
For details, refer to ☞ 32510.

2. Read the FD enclosed with new iBeam unit
operating Service Data via Reading and
Writing Data.
☞ 35400
3. Confirm the exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
4. Carry out the initial setup.
26720 3/3
26810
Zigzag adjustment
Zigzag adjustment
Adjusting procedure for uneven

3. Carry out Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
paper advancing in paper advance Correction.
section [35, 35i]
☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
Check item
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction
All Check if leveling of the system is completed
for each paper magazine A, B.
correctly.
• Make test prints via Test Print
Magazine Check that the shutter open/close arm works
Confirmation (magazine A/B) to check the
mount properly. (If the printer door is closed, the
zigzagging amounts (A - B) of two prints are

shutter open/close arm moves 10 mm and more
within the tolerance level in the following
at the outlet section of the magazine.)
table.
If they are within the tolerance level, the
! Procedure adjustment is not necessary.
NOTE
1. Check the condition of the paper magazine. • For example, if the measurement values of the
second test print is 120 mm for both lines A and
☞ 22000 B
Check that the difference of dimension between
2. Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit B. lines A and B on the first test print is within the
tolerance level in the following table.
☞ 25730
Test Print Tolerance range
NOTE
355.6 mm A−B is ±0.5 mm, both A and
• If difference between part A on the first test
B are between 119.5 mm and
print and the second test print is within 0.5 mm,
120.5 mm.
you do not have to adjust it.
610.0 mm A−C is ±1.0 mm, both A and
Example: If the first test print skews to the right C are between 119 mm or
more and 121 mm or less.
First test print 0.5 mm Second test print
Test print (first) Test print (second)
A
Line A Line A (120 mm)

A
A
B
B
C
Line B Line B (120 mm)
Line C
G078473
4. Carry out the master correction of the

exposure center correction.
Paper advance ☞ 36070
direction
G074555
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the master correction of the
exposure center correction for each paper
magazine A, B.
26810 1/2
26810
Zigzag adjustment
• Make a test print via Test Print

Confirmation with Master Value to check
the misalignment of the test print. If it is
within 0.2 mm, no adjustment is required.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line

A
G068463
NOTE
• After master correction of the exposure center
correction, carry out Exposure Center
Correction (for each Paper Magazine) again if
you are also using another paper magazine.
26810 2/2
26910
Space dimension between units
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance
unit [35]
The dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit differs between 35 and 35i.
For 35i, refer to ☞ 26920.
• Normally, it is not necessary to adjust or check the space dimension between paper supply unit A and exposure advance unit.
However, if the space dimension between the units gets different, ☞ No. 6208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. may
occur when printing with the paper advance length between 320.1 mm and 324.0 mm.

! Space dimension between the units (front side)
(Top view)
Paper supply arm motor (right)
Paper supply unit A (3) 4.0±0.5 mm
(Front view)
Paper supply unit A
(2) 0 +0.5 mm
(1) 15.5±0.5 mm
G084415
26910 1/4
26910

No. Illustration Space dimension between units Corrective action
1 Refer to the front Confirm that the space dimension between the plate of paper supply unit A Refer to ☞ Adjusting
view. (front side) and the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is the position between
15.5±0.5 mm. paper supply unit A and
2 Confirm that the height of the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) the exposure advance
is 0 to +0.5 mm based on the plate of paper supply unit A (front side). unit.
3 Refer to the top Confirm that the space dimension between the plate of paper supply unit A Refer to ☞ Procedure
view. (front side) and the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is 4.0±0.5 for adjusting the laser

mm. unit position.
! Space dimension between the units (back side)

Paper supply unit A
(2) 0 +0.5 mm (1) 15.5±0.5 mm
G084414

No. Space dimension between units Corrective action
1 Check that the length between the plate of paper supply unit A (back side) and the plate of the Refer to ☞ Adjusting
exposure advance unit (back side) is 15.5±0.5 mm. the position between
2 Check that the height of the cutout of the exposure advance unit (back side) is 0+0.5 mm based on paper supply unit A and
the plate of paper supply unit A (back side). the exposure advance
unit.
26910 2/4
26910
! Adjusting the position between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit

☞ 21170
☞ 21180
Positioning pins

Laser unit G085892
3. Loosen the screw of the shim beneath the laser unit, and insert or remove the shim. (Loosen two screws
each.)
• To insert and remove shims (rear), remove the printer rear cover. ☞ 20020
Shim (rear)
Laser unit
Shim
G085893
26910 3/4
26910
Shim
Thickness Part No. Name
0.1 mm A064878-01 Shim (1)
0.2 mm A064878-02 Shim (1)
0.5 mm A064880-01 Shim (2)
1.0 mm A064880-02 Shim (2)
4. Check if the laser unit positioning pin is in the position where it moves up and down smoothly.
If necessary, adjust the position of the laser unit. Refer to ☞ Procedure for adjusting the laser unit position.

5. Check the length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit again.
6. Check Turn Unit Stop Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit Correction.
Refer to ☞ 36010.
! Procedure for adjusting the laser unit position

2. Adjust the position of the laser unit so that the positioning pins move up and down smoothly. (four nuts
and four washers)
Nuts and washers
Positioning pins
Laser unit Nuts and washers G085892
26910 4/4
26920
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and exposure advance unit
[35i]
The dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit differs between 35 and 35i.
For details of 35, refer to ☞ 26910.
26920 1/6
26920
! Space dimension between the units (front side) [35i]
(Top view)

Paper supply unit A
(3) 12.9±0.5 mm
(Front view)
Paper supply unit A
(2) 4.8+0.5 mm (1) 8.5+0.5 mm
G082043
26920 2/6
26920

No. Illustration Space dimension between units Corrective action
1 Refer to the front Confirm that the space dimension between the plate of paper supply unit A Refer to ☞ Procedure
view. (front side) and the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is for adjusting position
11.6±0.5 mm. between paper supply
2 Check that the height of the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) unit A and exposure
is 4.8 + 0.5 mm based on the plate of paper supply unit A (front side). advance unit [35i].
3 Refer to the top Confirm that the space dimension between the plate of paper supply unit A Refer to ☞ Procedure
view. (front side) and the slot part of the exposure advance unit (front side) is 8.5±0.5 for adjusting position of

mm. iBeam unit mount [35i].
! Space dimension between the units (rear side) [35i]
Paper supply unit A

(2) 0 +0.5 mm
(1) 15.5±0.5 mm
G082042

No. Space dimension between units Corrective action
1 Check that the length between the plate of paper supply unit A (back side) and the plate of the Refer to ☞ Procedure
exposure advance unit (back side) is 15.5±0.5 mm. for adjusting position
2 Check that the height of the cutout of the exposure advance unit (back side) is 0+0.5 mm based on between paper supply
the plate of paper supply unit A (back side). unit A and exposure
advance unit [35i].
26920 3/6
26920
! Procedure for adjusting position between paper supply unit A and exposure advance
unit [35i]

☞ 21170
☞ 21180
2. Remove light-tight cover 1. (four screws)
Light-tight cover 1

G083178
3. Remove light-tight cover 2. (Loosen two screws.)

Light-tight cover 2
G084445
4. Remove cover 3. (three screws)
26920 4/6
26920
5. Remove cover 1. (eight screws)

Cover 3
Cover 1

G084446
6. Install the positioning pin in the iBeam unit mount.

Positioning pin
Positioning pin
G084438
7. Loosen the screw of the shim installed in the iBeam unit mount (front), and insert or remove the shim.
(Loosen two screws each.)
Front
Shim
G082089
8. Loosen the screw of the shim installed in the iBeam unit mount (rear), and insert or remove the shim.
(Loosen two screws each.)
• To insert and remove shims (rear) in the iBeam unit, remove the printer rear cover. ☞ 20020
26920 5/6
26920
Rear

Shim
G082090
Shim
Thickness Part No. Name
0.1 mm A064878-01 Shim (1)
0.2 mm A064878-02 Shim (1)
0.5 mm A064880-01 Shim (2)
1.0 mm A064880-02 Shim (2)
9. Confirm if the positioning pin of the iBeam unit mount is in the position where it moves up and down
smoothly.
11. Check Turn Unit Stop Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit Correction.
Refer to ☞ 36010.
! Procedure for adjusting position of iBeam unit mount [35i]
1. Install the positioning pin in the iBeam unit mount.

2. Adjust the position of the iBeam unit mount so that the positioning pins move up and down smoothly.
(Loosen four nuts.)
Positioning pin
Positioning pin
Nuts
Nuts
G084438
26920 6/6
27100
Conveyor unit section
Replacing colorimeter and ! Replacing the colorimeter unit

calibration plate [35, 35i]
1. Remove the conveyor unit.
The following procedures for the colorimeter are explained here. Conveyor unit
# ☞ Replacing the colorimeter unit
# ☞ Replacing the colorimeter
# ☞ Replacing the calibration plate

IMPORTANT
• The colorimeter unit consists of the following items.
Colorimeter unit
G084450
2. Remove the fan unit.

(Loosen one screw.)
Colorimeter
Calibration plate
FD for
calibration data
G083197
• When replacing the colorimeter, remember that the
colorimeter, the calibration plate, and the FD for Fan unit
calibration make a set. Replace them as one set. G083198
• When replacing the calibration plate, remember that the NOTE

calibration plate and the FD for calibration data make a • If necessary, disconnect the connectors of the
set. Replace them as one set. colorimeter and cooling fan.
27100 1/4
27100
3. Remove the colorimeter unit top. 6. Remove the advance unit from the
(four screws) colorimeter unit bottom.
(four screws)
Colorimeter unit top
J/P801
J/P802, 804

G083199
Ground wire Colorimeter unit bottom
NOTE
G083229
• If necessary, disconnect the connectors of the
colorimeter and paper sensor. ! Precautions when installing colorimeter unit
4. Remove the plate bottom.
(four screws) 1. There is no need to adjust the colorimeter
unit position.
! Adjustment after replacing the colorimeter unit
1. Follow the procedures in Replacing the

calibration plate.
☞ Replacing the calibration plate
2. Adjust the colorimeter unit.
☞ 35100
Plate bottom
G083228
5. Disconnect the connectors and ground wire.

J/P801, 802, 804 (Relay connector)
27100 2/4
27100
! Replacing the colorimeter 4. Remove the connector of the colorimeter and

replace the colorimeter.
Fixing plate Fixing nuts
Conveyor unit

G084450 Connector
2. Remove the fan unit. G083200
(Loosen one screw.)
! Adjustment after replacing the colorimeter unit
1. Carry out height adjustment of the

colorimeter.
☞ 27110
2. Follow the procedures in Replacing the
calibration plate.
☞ Replacing the calibration plate
! Replacing the calibration plate
1. Update the calibration plate data.

NOTE
• Register the new calibration plate data to the
system.
Bringing up the display
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various
Adjustment → Colorimeter Calibration
Fan unit
G083198 (1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter
Calibration display, then click Updating the
3. Remove the fixing plate from the colorimeter. Calibration Plate Data.
(Loosen two mounting nuts.)
(2) Insert the calibration data FD into the floppy
disk drive.
(3) Click YES: OK.
Data of colorimeter and data in the calibration
data FD are displayed.
(4) Click YES: OK.
Register the data in the FD to the colorimeter.
27100 3/4
27100
(5) Click YES: OK.

Confirm the registration.
(6) Replace the calibration plate stored in the
colorimeter unit with new one.
(7) Click YES: OK.
Data is updated.
(8) Click YES: OK.
The screen returns to the Colorimeter
Calibration display.

2. Check if updating has been performed
properly.
NOTE
• Check that the colorimeter data and the calibration
plate data are the same.
(1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter

Calibration display, then click Confirming
the Colorimeter and Calibration Plate
Data.
(2) Click YES: OK since the FD for calibration
data has already been inserted in step 1 (2).
The confirmation display appears. Check that
the message It matches the Colorimeter Data
appears.
At this time, S/No. of the calibration plate is
registered.
(3) Click YES: OK.
The screen returns to the Colorimeter
Calibration display.
(4) Remove the FD for calibration data from the
floppy disk drive.
27100 4/4
27110
Adjusting the height of colorimeter 2. Loosen the lock screw on the leading end
control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)
unit [35, 35i]
Leading end control holder
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the height adjustment securely if colorimeter of
the colorimeter unit is replaced.
! Procedure
Lock screw

1. Remove the colorimeter unit top. (four
screws)
Colorimeter unit top
G083226
3. Turn over the colorimeter unit top.

4. Turn the leading end control holder to adjust
the height of colorimeter leading end so that
it is align with the back face of the
colorimeter mount. Use the colorimeter
height adjustment jig.
Leading end of the
Colorimeter height adjustment jig measurement part
G083199
NOTE
• If necessary, disconnect the connectors of the
colorimeter and paper sensor.
Colorimeter unit top Groove of the leading end control

holder
G083230
27110 1/2
27110
NOTE ! Precautions when installing colorimeter unit

• Use the handle side of the colorimeter height
adjustment jig to check the height of colorimeter 1. Tighten the lock screw on the leading end
leading end. control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)

Lock screw
Use the handle side of the jig.
G072364
5. Make sure that the height of colorimeter

leading end is align with the back face of the
colorimeter mount, and then turn the leading
end control holder approximately 30 degree
to the lowering direction (clockwise).
NOTE G083226
• This changes the standard value (0) of the height
of colorimeter leading end from the base of the
colorimeter mount to - 0.1 mm. One revolution
(360 degree) of the leading end control holder
makes 1 mm movement.
IMPORTANT
• If the colorimeter leading end is out of back
face of the colorimeter mount, it may damage
the calibration plate or test prints.
Turn the leading end control holder approximately 30 degree

to the lowering direction (clockwise).
Colorimeter leading end

G072365
6. Reassemble the parts as they were.
27110 2/2
27120
Replacing print conveyor unit belt ! Checking after replacement

[35, 35i]
1. Check that the belt works normally by driving
the conveyor motor in the Output Check.
! Procedure ☞ 35320
1. Remove the print conveyor unit.

2. Press circle parts of the print conveyor unit
and remove the cover.

G083243
3. Pull the rollers of the print conveyor unit in

the direction of the arrow and remove the
belt.
Roller
G083245
27120 1/1
27220
Dryer section
Dryer section
Removing dryer rack [35, 35i]
! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer rack. (Loosen two screws.)

Dryer rack
G084417
2. Remove the dryer cover.

☞ 20021
3. Remove the air duct and dryer cover 1.
Dryer cover 1
Air duct (knob screw)
G084419

J/P722, J/P723, J/P717, J/P760
27220 1/3
27220
Dryer section
5. Remove the dryer rack. (four screws)

J/P722 J/P723, J/P717, J/P760
G084418
1. Attach it by pushing the gear side of dryer rack to the stopper. (four screws)
Gear side of dryer rack
Stopper
G084609
27220 2/3
27220
Dryer section
2. Attach the dryer rack by pushing it in the arrow direction. (two screws)
Dryer rack

G084610

When the original dryer rack is reattached
When a new dryer rack is attached

1. Carry out Print Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 33001
27220 3/3
27222
Dryer section
Adjusting the dryer section slide base position [35, 35i]
• Usually, adjusting the dryer section slide base position is not necessary
• Check only when a strange sound is emitted or paper jams due to the failure in adjusting the position of dryer rack and processor
section.
! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer rack.

☞ 27220
2. Remove the sub-tank top cover and processor cover, processor side cover 1 and processor side cover
2.
☞ 20021
3. Loosen the three screws of the lock pin stopper holder.
Stopper Holder
G085804
4. Adjust the two stoppers so that the slide base opening and the position of upper turn guide No. 7 5.5 ±
0.5 mm wide. (Two adjusting screws for each)
Slide Base opening
5.5 ± 0.5 mm
Upper Turn Guide No. 7
G085785
27222 1/3
27222
Dryer section
Stopper (rear)
The cushion between the stopper (rear) and slide base contact face is
shortened from 2 mm to 1 mm.

Slide Base opening
Upper Turn Guide No. 7

5.5 ± 0.5 mm
5.5 ± 0.5 mm
Stopper (near)
Slide base contact face
G085801
5. Attach the dryer racks.

6. Adjust the stopper holder position so that the slide base lock pin can be smoothly set to the stopper
holder hole. (Three adjusting screws)
IMPORTANT
• For the adjustment described above, confirm that the slide base is at the position described below.
• The stopper (near) touches the slide base contact face.

• The cushion between the stopper (rear) and slide base contact face is shortened from 2 mm to 1 mm.
27222 2/3
27222
Dryer section
Stopper Holder

G085788
! Checking after adjustment
1. Make some prints to check if no paper jam or abnormal noise occurs in the dryer rack.
27222 3/3
27223
Dryer section
Checking the adjustment of backlash in dryer rack [35, 35i]
• Usually, adjusting the backlash in dryer rack is not necessary

• Check only when a strange sound is emitted or paper jams due to the backlash in dryer rack.
! Procedure
1. Remove the dryer cover and air duct.

☞ 20021

2. Check that the gear mounting plate is attached to the same place of gear mounting plate angle.
Gear Mounting Plate
The same height
Same position
Gear mounting plate angle
G084604
27223 1/1
27224
Dryer section
Adjusting ejection guide 1 [35, 35i]
• Normally, adjusting ejection guide 1 position for dryer rack is not necessary.
• Check paper exit guide 1 if the paper is jammed when it is sent to the colorimeter.
! Procedure

☞ 27220

2. Adjust the position of paper exit guide 1 so that the height from the lower frame of the dryer rack to the
edge of paper exit guide 1 is from 61.4 to 61.9 mm. (four screws)
The edge of paper exit guide 1
61.4 to 61.9 mm
The lower frame of the dryer rack

G085808
Remove the gear. Paper exit guide 1

G085817
1. Confirm that there is no paper jam by performing the daily setup test print etc. using the colorimeter.
27224 1/1
27225
Dryer section
Adjusting the position of the upper turn guide [35, 35i]
• Adjust the position of the upper turn guides when it was removed.
! Procedure

☞ 27220
2. Adjust the upper turn guide by pressing the guides to the roller face so that the space between the guide

and the dryer rack roller is even. (two screws each)
Roller
Roller
Upper turn guide

Upper turn guide
Roller faces Roller faces
G085819
1. Confirm that there is no paper jam or flow after performing the test print.
27225 1/1
27230
Dryer section
Adjusting backlash in dryer drive section [35, 35i]
! Procedure
1. Remove the processor rear cover, processor side covers 1 and 2.

☞ 20021
2. Adjust the backlash of double gear (1) and idle gear (13T) in the processor section to be 0.5 mm or less.
(Three adjusting screws)

Be sure that it does not touch the cog bottom of double gear (1) and idle gear (13T).
Double gear (1) Double gear (1) Idle gear (13T)
Double gear (1)

0.5 mm
0.3 mm
Idle gear (13T)

G084605
27230 1/1
27250
Dryer section
Removing dryer heater and dryer fan [35, 35i]
! Procedure

☞ 27220
J/P718, J/P768

3. Remove the dryer heater and dryer fan. (two screws)
Dryer heater, dryer fan
J/P718, J/P768
G084421
4. Remove the heater cover. (one screw)

5. Remove the dryer heater. (six screws)
NOTE
• Replace the dryer heater together with the dryer safety thermostat.
Heater cover
Dryer heater
G084422
27250 1/2
27250
Dryer section
1. Process some prints to confirm that there is no problem.
27250 2/2
27420
Print sorter unit section
Removing print sorter unit [35, 35i]
! Procedure
1. Remove the processor rear cover.

☞ 20021
J/P713: Relay connector

3. Remove the print sorter unit in the direction
indicated by the arrow. (Loosen three
screws.)
Print sorter unit
J/P713
G084429

None
27420 1/1
27430
Replacing print receiving tray [35, 2. Press part C of receiving tray (3), and
remove receiving tray (2) in the direction
35i] indicated by the arrow.
! Procedure
Replacing print receiving tray (1)

1. Stop the print receiving tray to be replaced at
the print receiving position.

2. Push the pawl of the print receiving tray (2) in
the direction indicated by arrow A, then
remove the print receiving tray (1) in the
direction indicated by arrow B.
Print receiving tray (1)
Part C of print receiving tray (3)

A
G074559

Pawl
1. Check the stop position of the print receiving

tray.
☞ 27440

G050796
Replacing print receiving tray (2)

1. Stop the print receiving tray to be replaced at
the print receiving position.
27430 1/1
27440
Adjusting the stop position of print • Adjusting the chain tension

☞ 27450
receiving tray [35, 35i]
! Procedure
1. Remove the sorter cover. (one screw)

Sorter cover

G074556
2. Adjust the sorter home sensor holder stop

position so that the print receiving tray stops
at 2.5 mm away from the fulcrum spacer.
(one screw)
Print receiving tray
Fulcrum spacer
2.5 mm
Sorter home sensor holder
G074557
3. Check if the print receiving tray stop position

is within the rage of 2.5±1.5 by pressing the
manual sorter switch continuously.
IMPORTANT
• If the stop position of the print receiving tray is
not stable, check the timing belt tension and
the chain tension of the sorter drive belt and
adjust them correctly.
• Adjusting the sorter drive belt tension
☞ 20140
27440 1/1
27450
Adjusting chain tension of print Tension plate 1

sorter unit [35, 35i]
! Procedure
1. Remove the sorter cover. (one screw)

Sorter cover

G074556
2. Adjust the position of tension plate 1 and 2 to

fix the chain so that it bends 10 mm when
pressing it by 270±25 g (2.6±0.2N). (two
screws each)
Chain
Tension plate 2
G074558
G074639
3. Adjust tension plate 1, 2 so that

measurement A becomes the followings.
(two screws each)
IMPORTANT
• Adjust the tension plates so that the
difference between the measurement A of
tension plate 1 and that of tension plate 2 is
within 0.5 mm.
27450 1/1
27610
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
Removing the tablet replenishment

unit [J]
! Procedure
1. Remove all the tablet cartridges and chutes.

2. Remove tablet replenishment unit section
cover 1 and 2. ☞ 20021

J/P539, J/P541: tablet replenishment driver PCB
4. Remove the tablet replenishment unit.
(Loosen four screws.)
NOTE
• After operating, confirm that the tablet
replenishment units were properly installed.
J/P399, J/P400
G084431

6. Check the tablet sensor via Input Check.
☞ 35220
7. Check the drum operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320
27610 1/1
27620
Replacing the module [J]
! Procedure
1. Remove all the tablet cartridges.

2. Remove tablet replenishment unit section
cover 2. ☞ 20021

J/P571, J/P572, J/P575, J/P588: CD module
J/P576, J/P577, J/P580, J/P589: BF module
J/P581, J/P582, J/P585, J/P590: STB module
4. Replace the module. (Loosen two of four
screws.)
Module

G050711

6. Check the tablet sensor via Input Check.
☞ 35220
☞ 35320
27620 1/1
27630
Replacing the drum motor [J] 5. Replace the drive motor and reassemble the
parts.
NOTE
! Procedure • When attaching the gear (32T), adjust the
backlash by adjusting the attaching position of the
1. Remove the module. gear (32T). (three screws)
☞ 27620
2. Remove the gear (32T).

Gear (32T)
Gear (32T)
G050712
G052554
3. Remove the drive gear. (two screws) 6. Check the tablet sensor via Input Check.
☞ 35220
☞ 35320
Drive gear
Screws
G050713
4. Remove the drum drive motor. (three

screws)
Screw
Drum motor
Screws
G050732
27630 1/1
27640
Replacing the elevator motor [J]
! Procedure

☞ 27610
2. Remove drum section. (four screws)

Drum section
G085889

J/P540: Elevator motor
4. Remove the wiring cover. (two screws)
5. Remove the elevator motor unit as in the direction of arrow 1 shown below. (three screws)
(1)
Wiring cover
Elevator motor unit
G085849
6. Remove gear (12T) and motor mounting plate and replace the elevator motor.
! Adjustment after installing the elevator motor
1. Attach gear (12T) and motor mounting plate.
27640 1/3
27640
2. Adjust the backlash of gear (12T) and upper idle gear.
Gear (12T) Upper idle gear

0.2 mm
G050736

4. Adjust the elevator motor unit position and also the backlash of the friction roller gear and gear (12T).
(three screws)
• Check the backlash of the friction roller gear and gear (12T) from A section.
Friction roller gear
Gear (12T)
Upper idle gear
0.2 mm
Part A
Elevator motor unit

G085891
27640 2/3
27640
5. Attach the drum section by pushing it in the direction indicated by the arrow shown below. (four screws)
Drum section

G085890
6. Check the elevator operation via Output Check.

☞ 35320
27640 3/3
27650
Adjusting the elevator belt tension 5. Measure A, B and C as shown in the

illustration to confirm that the bucket platform
[J] is parallel to the tablet replenishment unit.
Tablet replenishment unit
! Procedure

☞ 27610 Square holes
2. Loosen the screws (two for each) of the

tension plate.
C
B
A
Bucket platforms
G050740
NOTE
• Remove the tablet replenishment unit to confirm
that the bucket platforms are parallel to the unit.
☞ 27610
6. Check the elevator operation via Output
Check.
☞ 35320
G085843
3. Adjust the tension of the elevator belt.

" Point
Adjust the tension plate position so that the elevator
belt deflects by 14 mm when pushing 500 mm position
of the belt by the force of 100 g to 150 g (1 N to 1.5 N).
(Adjust the tension of the elevator belt for both right
and left.)
500 mm position
G085886
4. Lower the elevator until the elevator lower

sensor turns DARK.
27650 1/1
27660
Adjusting the position of the upper sensor is closed at the Output Check.
(two screws)
elevator upper sensor [J]
! Procedure
1. Remove the tablet replenishment unit. Upper sensor for elevator

☞ 27610
2. Leave the tablet replenishment unit

connectors connected and place the unit in
front of the processor.
3. Check that the stopper contacts with the
upper of the slot.
" Point
If the stopper does not contact with the upper of the
slot, remove the tablet replenishment unit and then
adjust the position of the stopper. (two screws each)
Bottom of the 1.5±0.5 mm

bucket
platform
Tablet gate Tablet

Tablet gate
replenishment unit
Oval hole Bucket platform frame
G085844
Stopper IMPORTANT
G085846
• How to stop the elevator at the elevator upper
sensor position
4. Adjust the position of the elevator upper 1. Select Tablet replenishment section via
sensor so that the clearance between the
Output Check.
lowest bottom of bucket platform and tablet
2. When the elevator motor (UP) is selected and
gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when stopping the
the key is kept pressed, the
elevator at the position where the elevator
elevator lifts up and stops at the position
where the elevator middle sensor is closed for
2 seconds.
3. By keeping pressing the key, the
elevator rises again and stops at the position
where the elevator upper sensor is closed.
4. If the key is released at this time,
the elevator stays at the position of the
elevator upper sensor.
5. Turn OFF the system power supply and
reassemble the parts.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via
Output Check.
☞ 35320
27660 1/1
27670
Adjusting the position of the middle sensor is closed at the Output Check.
(two screws)
elevator middle sensor [J]
! Procedure
1. Remove the tablet replenishment unit. Middle sensor for elevator
☞ 27610

3. Check that the stopper contacts with the
upper of the slot.
" Point
If the stopper does not contact with the upper of the
slot, remove the tablet replenishment unit and then
adjust the position of the stopper. (two screws each)
Bucket platform
1.5±0.5 mm
Bucket
Bottom of the
bucket platform
Chute inlet Tablet gate Chute inlet
Oval hole Tablet gate
G085845
Stopper
IMPORTANT
G085846 • How to stop the elevator at the elevator
4. Adjust the position of the elevator middle middle sensor position
sensor so that the clearance between the 1. Select Tablet replenishment section via
highest bottom of bucket platform and tablet Output Check.
gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when stopping the 2. By selecting elevator motor (UP) and keeping
elevator at the position where the elevator pressing the key, the elevator
lifts up and stops at the position where the
elevator middle sensor is closed.
3. If the key is released at this time,
the elevator stays at the position of the
elevator middle sensor.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via
Output Check.
☞ 35320
27670 1/1
27680
Adjusting the position of the side of the hole in the frame is 0 to -2.0 mm.
(two screws)
elevator lower sensor [J]
Tablet replenishment unit rear side
Bottom of the bucket platform (lower)

! Procedure
Tablet gate

☞ 27610 Bottom of the bucket platform
(lower)

3. Stop the elevator at the position where the 0 to -2.0 mm
elevator lower sensor is closed via Output
Check. Hole in the tablet replenishment
• ☞ 35320 unit frame
4. Adjust the position of the elevator lower

sensor so that the gap between the (lower)
bottom of the bucket platform and the lower
Elevator lower sensor
Tablet replenishment unit front side
Screws
G085847
5. Check if the tablet falls from the drum via

Output Check.
• ☞ 35320
27680 1/1
27690
Cleaning method of the drum of 4. Remove the gear (64T). (one mount ring)
module [J] Mount ring
! Procedure
1. Remove the module.

☞ 27620
2. Remove the cartridge guide.

Cartridge guide
Gear (64T)
G050747
5. Face the right narrow notch of the drum to

you and align the center of drum unit's
Cartridge guide
opening with the center of notch, and pull out
the drum to the arrow direction.
Narrow
G050745
3. Remove the drum case. (six screws)
Wide
Drum case
G050748
G050746
27690 1/2
27690
6. Clean the gap between the tablet drop

section and vapor proof blocks.
Vapor proof block
Gaps

Tablet drop sections
Vapor proof block

G050749
IMPORTANT
• There is a spring in the gap of vapor proof
block. Be careful not to damage it when
cleaning.
• After cleaning, check that there is no gap
when the vapor proof block is pushed in the
arrow direction.
Vapor proof block
Gap
Springs
Gap
Vapor proof block
G050750
27690 2/2
27810
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i]
Replacing the replenisher pump and the rating plate will not be determined
properly.
the water supply pump [SM] IN
Caps
(Do not remove them.)
! Procedure
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment packages.
3. Remove the pump mount. Poppet valves OUT

G050887
Arrangement for the replenisher pump and
• Be careful not to let the pump rotating part
the water supply pump
come into contact with chemical or water.
7. Remove the pump as shown in the figure.
2. Push the main body backward. 3. Lift it up.
Tray units
1. Push. G050874
8. Remove the cover from the removed pump.

Cover
Lift up the cover holding the part

indicated by the arrow.
G050875
9. Take a note of the output amount displayed

G070020
on the new pump's rating plate.
The pump, for which the output amount measurement
4. Close the strainer unit valve of the pump to is no good, must be replaced.
be replaced.
Output amount
5. Attach the tube clamps to the OUT side of
the hoses of the pump to be replaced.
6. Loosen the wire bands on the caps of the
pump to be replaced, and then remove the Rating plate
G050888
hoses.
10. Unplug the connectors, and replace the
IMPORTANT pump.
• For the replenisher pumps of CD-A, CD-B, J/P611, cord CD-A: CD-A replenisher pump
CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, and STB, do not remove J/P612, cord CD-B: CD-B replenisher pump
the new caps from the pumps. If they are J/P613, cord CD-C: CD-C replenisher pump
removed, the poppet valves may be taken off. J/P617, 618: CD-W water supply pump
Then the pump output amount indicated on J/P614, cord BF-A: BF-A replenisher pump
J/P615, cord BF-B: BF-B replenisher pump
J/P616, cord STB: STB replenisher pump
J/P619: STB-W water supply pump
Cord BF-W: BF-W water supply pump
27810 1/3
27810
12. Enter the output amount. IMPORTANT

Bringing up the display • For measurements of two or more
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output replenishment solutions, use a different
Amount Setting container for each solution.
If no different containers are available,
Setting for CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, CD-W, BF-A, clean the container before using.
BF-B, and STB
Enter the output amount written in step 9.
(4) Press on the Pump Output Amount
Setting display and select Pump Output
☞ 33030
Amount Setting.
Setting for BF-W and STB-W

(5) Select the pump for output.
Carry out pump output amount settings, and then enter
the measurement values. (6) Operate the pump by pressing the Manual
sorter switch.
! Adjustment after replacement (7) Check that the air does not remain in the
hose. Then repeat step (5) until the
1. Remove air from the replenisher pump and replenishment solution or water comes to the
the water supply pump (except BF-W and exit of the replenisher pipe or the water
STB-W). supply pipe.
IMPORTANT (8) Attach the air exhaust tool to the replenisher

pipe.
• If air remains in the pump, output cannot be
carried out accurately. Replenisher pipe and water
• If a large amount of air remains in the pump, supply pipe
the chemical may undergo oxidation, or
precise values may not be obtained because
air escapes during the measurement.
(1) Remove the sub-tank top cover and processor

cover 1. Air exhaust tool
(2) Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply

pipe.
Remove the replenisher pipe and the water
supply pipe from the sub-tank and fix the pipes
G050890
in the vertical position with the output ports
front faced. IMPORTANT
NOTE • When air is exhausted for two or more
• Fix the replenisher pipe and the water chemicals, be sure to start from CD-A
supply pipe at the same height as when the pump.
machine is operating. When the output • Before air exhausting from the pumps,
amount is measured, the pipes should be be sure to clean the tool. If the tool is
secured to obtain values correctly. not cleaned, contamination and
chemical reaction may occur.
(3) Prepare a container for the replenishment
solution or water to be output. NOTE
Replenisher pipe and water • The air exhaust tool is a service tool. Refer
supply pipe to Service personnel tool list. ☞ 80310
(9) Exhaust the air from the replenisher pump
and the water supply pump by pulling the
cylinder of the syringe from the air exhaust
tool at one stroke.
Remove the air exhaust tool from the
replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe, and
discharge the air, water, or replenishment
solution.
IMPORTANT
Tape G050889
• When the air is exhausted by using the
air exhaust tool, the float of the
package may fall by the force of
27810 2/3
27810
attraction and the attention messages

such as Replace the Replenishment
Package with a new one. may be
displayed.
There may be still some replenisher
solution left in the package. Remove
the replenishment package from the
replenishment unit and shake it to
check if the float is rising.
• If the injection syringe slips out of the
air exhaust tool, the replenishment

solution or water may be splashed.
(10) After air has been exhausted by the air
exhaust tool, check that the air does not
remain in the hose.
2. Check the output amount.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's
Manual - Additional Operations & Setup
Manual -.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the difference between the
measured value and the output amount
entered in the machine is within ±3%. If the
difference is not within ±3%, check for
damage or clogging of the pipes. When there
is still no problem relating to those items, air
must be remained in the pumps. Exhaust air,
and measure output amount securely again.
• When the output amount for each
replenishment package is measured, the
remaining amount of each solution varies.
3. Replace the replenisher pipe and the water
supply pipe to their original position.
4. Mark the label with a new pump output
amount.
(The label is affixed to the inside of processor door 1.)
5. Attach the sub-tank top cover and processor
cover 1 as they were.
IMPORTANT
• Do not leave the air exhaust tool without cleaning
after use. Otherwise the syringe packing may be
damaged.
Be sure to clean the tool before storing.
27810 3/3
27820
Replacing the probe [SM] 6. Remove the probe nut and the probe.
BF-B BF-A
! Procedure
1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment package.
3. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O
PCB. (one screw)

Protection cover
STB CD-C CD-B CD-A
Probe nut
Probe
O-ring
Probe holder
G050893
G050891
7. Assemble the new probe, then tighten the
probe nut securely using the probe replacing
4. Unplug the tray unit connectors. jig.
J/P601: Tray unit A
J/P600: Tray unit B IMPORTANT
• The O-ring is attached to the new probe.
5. Remove the tray units.
• The probe (including the O-ring) should be
2. Lift it up. used properly for each solution.
Tray unit B
For CD-C solution, use the whole black
probe and the O-ring marked with a white dot.
For other solutions, use the probe which the
resin part is brown and the O-ring marked
with a green dot.
• The probe replacing jig is a service tool. Refer
to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
1. Press the lever.
Tray unit A
G050892
27820 1/1
27830
Adjusting the sensitivity of the 4. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O
PCB. (one screw)
replenisher solution sensor [SM]
Protection cover
! Procedure
1. Clean the LED and detection sections of the

replenishment solution sensor.
Trays

Replenishment solution Replenishment solution
package P-1 package P-2
G050891
5. Turn the VR of each sensor on the SM I/0

PCB counterclockwise fully.
Replenishment solution sensors
G050894
Sensor arrangement
G050898
VR Replenishment solution sensor

Counterclock Decreases the amount of light.
wise
Clockwise Increases the amount of light.
G050895
2. Attach the replenishment package containing 6. Adjust each VR depending on each LED
the replenishment solution. condition which is OFF.
1. If LED turns ON by turning clockwise less than
3. Set the valve chuck, then turn the handle to twice from the left most position, carry out the
ON position.
operation of ☞ If LED turns on by rotating less
than twice.
2. Carry out ☞ If LED turns on by rotating more
than twice, if LED turns ON by turning clockwise
more than twice from the left most position.
Chemical VR No. LED No.

CD-A VR1 LED1
CD-B VR2 LED2
CD-C VR3 LED3
STB VR4 LED4
BF-A VR5 LED5
BF-B VR6 LED6
27830 1/2
27830
! If LED turns on by rotating less

than twice
1. If LED turns on when rotating the VR of each
replenishment solution sensor clockwise less
than twice, return the position of VR to the
left most and turn it three times clockwise
again.
IMPORTANT

• This includes the case when LED turns on
while the VR is at the left most position.
! If LED turns on by rotating more
than twice
1. While counting the rotation number of the VR
of each replenishment solution sensor, turn
the VR clockwise slowly and stop it at the
position when LED turns on.
IMPORTANT
• If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it
counterclockwise to the position where the
LED goes off. Then turn it clockwise again
until the LED lights up.
2. Under the condition in Step 1, turn each VR
of the replenishment solution sensor
clockwise once to the right.
3. Replace the replenishment solution sensor
to adjust its sensitivity if total number of VR
rotations of each sensor exceeds 11 in
Step 1 and Step 2.
NOTE
• The maximum number of VR rotations for each
replenishment solution sensor is 13.
• When the float in the replenishment package
blocks off the replenishment solution sensor, the
LED goes off.
Floats Replenishment
solution
Replenishment package
Replenishment solution sensor

(detection)
Replenishment
Probe
solution
(LED)
G050897

27830 2/2
27900
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
Removing F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
! Procedure
1. Remove the replenishment cartridge.

2. Remove processor cover 2.
☞ 20021

J/P632: Replenishment cartridge opening motor
J/P637: Relay connector
4. Remove the interlock switch (replenisher section door). (two screws)
5. Remove the F replenishment unit. (six screws)
J/P632
Interlock switch (replenisher section door)
F replenishment unit
J/P637
G085856
27900 1/2
27900
6. When removing the F replenishment unit, pull out the upper surface of the F replenishment unit in the
direction of the arrow.
F replenishment unit

G085857
When the original F replenishment unit is reattached

1. Confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the Output check.
When the new F replenishment unit is attached
27900 2/2
27910
Removing the cartridge installation section
• Remove the cartridge installation section when replacing or checking the replenishment cartridge opening motor, replenishment
cartridge position sensor (upper) or replenishment cartridge position sensor (lower).
! Procedure
1. Remove the F replenishment unit.

☞ 27900

2. Remove the cartridge installation section. (four screws)
Cartridge installation section
G085882
1. Set the cam into the square hole in the cartridge installation section to attach it.
Cam
Square hole
G085883
27910 1/1
27920
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor
! Procedure
1. Remove the F replenishment unit.

☞ 27900
2. Remove the cartridge installation section.
☞ 27910

3. Remove the replenishment cartridge opening motor. (three screws)
Replenishment cartridge opening

motor
G085858
4. Remove the plate (three screws) on the replenishment cartridge opening motor and gear (one screw).
Plate
Gear

motor
G085859
27920 1/2
27920
1. Install the gear of the replenishment cartridge opening motor so that the gap between the outer surface
of the gear and the edge of the motor axis is 3 mm. (one screw)
Plate
Gear

3 mm
G085881
2. Install the replenishment cartridge opening motor with the cam remaining at the upper start point. (three
screws)
• If the cam is not adjusted to the upper start point during the replenishment cartridge opening motor, the F replenishment unit may not
be correctly attached to the product.

motor
Cam (upper start

point)
G085880
3. After placing the cartridge installation section and the F replenishment unit to the original positions,
confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the Output Check.
27920 2/2
27930
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor
! Procedure
1. Remove processor cover 1.

☞ 20021
Refer to ☞ 63311 for the locations of each replenishment solution level sensor.
J/P611, 612:P1R

J/P613, 614:P2RA
J/P615, 616:P2RB
3. Remove the rubber plug from the flange section in the direction of arrow 1.
Remove the replenishment solution level sensor wiring from the rubber plug, and remove the replenishment solution level
sensor connector in the direction of the arrow 2. (two screws each)
• Regarding the replenishment solution level sensor, replace # # #(upper) replenishment solution level sensor, # # #(lower)
replenishment solution level sensor and HL−F−001 as a set.
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor # # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
(1) (2)
HL−F−001
Rubber plug Flange section
G085895
! Checking after replacement
1. Confirm that the replenishment solution level sensors are securely attached as shown below. (two set-
screws each)
P2RB
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor P1R P2RA
35.9mm
47.3mm
47.4mm
63.7mm
# # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
G085894
27930 1/1
27940
Output Check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge
cleaning pump
• Perform the Output Check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump following the procedure with
attaching a hose. Or, water may come into a replenishment tank and it may adversely affect the replenishment solution.
! Procedure
1. Remove the replenishment cartridge.

2. By the Output Check, move the replenishment cartridge setting part from upper point to lower point.
☞ 35320
3. Turn on Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door).
4. Insert a hose of 13 mm diameter into the cleaning nozzle to be checked and fix it with adhesive tape.
• The hose is a service personnel tool. Refer to Service personnel tool list ☞ 80310.
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door)
Hose
Cleaning nozzle
G085904
5. By the Output Check, operate P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning
Pump, P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and P2RB
Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, which are to be checked.
• The replenishment cartridge cleaning pump stops after operating for 10 seconds.
6. Remove the hose. By the Output Check, move the replenishment cartridge setting part from lower point
to upper point.
27940 1/2
27940

27940 2/2
3000
3. Mode
Passwords ........................................................................................................................... 30500

Passwords ..........................................................................................................................................................30500
Mode structure chart ............................................................................................................ 31000
Mode structure chart ..........................................................................................................................................31000
Setup ................................................................................................................................... 32510
Paper Specification Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................32510
iBeam Tuning [35i] ...........................................................................................................................................32511
iBeam Engine Check [35i] ................................................................................................................................32512
Magazine Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................................32520
3 Mode
Monitor setup .....................................................................................................................................................32530
Data Initialization ..............................................................................................................................................32550
Processor Settings .............................................................................................................. 33001
Print Sensor Adjustment ....................................................................................................................................33001
Counter [J] .........................................................................................................................................................33010
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] ...........................................................................................................33030
Pump Output Amount Setting[F] ......................................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] .....................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] ....................................................................................................................................33060
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................. 33500
Thermosensor Calibration .................................................................................................................................33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] .................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] ..............................................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] ...........................................................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] ...............................................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] ...................................................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] ......................................................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] ...........................................................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] ......................................................................................................................................33570
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J] ..................................................................................................33580
Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F] ...................................................................................................................33580
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F] ..............................................................................................33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting .............................................................................................................33600
Display Processor Working Information[F] ......................................................................................................33620
Processor Set Up Mode[F] ................................................................................................................................33630
3000 1/2
3000
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 35100

Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [J] ...............................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [F] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Printer) ......................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [N] ...........................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ........................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [J] ............................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [F] ............................................................................................................................35320
3 Mode
Reading and Writing Data .................................................................................................................................35400
System Version Check .......................................................................................................................................35500
System update for each control PCB (CPU) .....................................................................................................35600
Operation Information .......................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification .......................................................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic ...................................................................................................................................................35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic ..............................................................................................................................35920
Printer Mechanical Adjustment ............................................................................................ 36000
Paper sensor adjustment ....................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction .........................................................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction [35] ...........................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment [35] ...................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment [35] .................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ....................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ...................................................................................................................36060
Exposure Center Correction ..............................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 ......................................................................................................................36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 ......................................................................................................................36081
Paper pressure operation correction ..................................................................................................................36090
WB width correction .........................................................................................................................................36100
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment ....................................................................................... 36700
Compact Archive Unit Initialization .................................................................................................................36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ............................................................................................................36710
Laser Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 37300
Laser Unit Adjustment [35] ...............................................................................................................................37300
Operation Information .......................................................................................................... 37500
Saving the Logdata ............................................................................................................................................37500
Saving the memory data ....................................................................................................................................37510
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time ....................................................................................37520
System Version Check on ARCNET communication error ..............................................................................37530
Machine Specification .......................................................................................................................................37540
3000 2/2
30500
Passwords
Passwords
Passwords
! Explanation
! Service personnel password
1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Insert the service personnel floppy disk into
the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
3. Press the key, and then press the
key.
4. Enter the password (2260).
3. Mode
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
on each display.
NOTE
• After password input display appears, input the password
within 10 seconds.
If the display disappears while you are entering the
password, start it over again.
IMPORTANT
• Do not eject the floppy disk while the LED of the
floppy disk drive is ON. (It may damage the floppy
disk drive or the floppy disk.)
! Deleting the service personnel password

2. Press the key, and then press the
key.
3. Enter the password except for 2260.
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
on each display.
! Deleting the owner password

2. Press the key while the key is
pressed on the Menu display to bring up the
Password Deletion display.
3. Enter 0 six times slowly, and then press the
key.
NOTE
• After deleting the password, it is set to the initial
value (0123).
The Password Deletion display does not appear if
the password is not registered.
The Password Deletion display is appeared only
when deleting the password which has been
registered.
30500 1/1
31000
Mode structure chart
• SP1: Input the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
! Order Display
Item Reference
Menu
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF*1
Processor Drive ON/OFF*1
Rewind Paper
Media Copy
3. Mode
Start Adobe Photoshop
Net Order Mode
Start Bravo Utility Refer to the Bravo Service
Manual.
Remote Control Start
Help Display
*1. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
! Menu display
Item Reference
Close Down Checks
Pricing Sheet Reissue
Daily Totals*1
Daily Setup
Emulsion Number Change
AFC Cleaning*2
Cleaning the Focal Plane Regulating Guide
Extension ☞ Extension display
*1. If pricing unit is not registered as an option, selecting this item is not available.
! Extension display
Item Reference
Extension Setup ☞ Setup
Processor Settings ☞ Processor settings [N]
Operator Selections ☞ Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
Noritsu-eNET Setting (SP1) Refer to Noritsu-eNET
system program Setting
Manual.
Price Setting
Function and Option Registration
Password Registration
Maintenance ☞ Maintenance
31000 1/5
31000
! Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
(35) Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
iBeam Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
(35i) F iBeam Tuning ☞ 32511
F iBeam Engine Check (SP1) ☞ 32512
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
Paper Setup
Print Channel
Scanner Setup Refer to the Scanner
Service Manual.
3. Mode
Flatbed Scanner Setup
Master Data
Monitor Setup ☞ 32530
Data Initialization (SP1) ☞ 32550
Initial Setup (SP1)
Create Template
! Processor settings [N]

Reference
☞ Processor settings [SM] ☞ Processor settings [J] ☞ Processor settings [F]
Item Reference
Print Sensor Adjustment ☞ 33001
Processing Solution Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2) ☞ 33040
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting (SP1) Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33600
Processor settings [SM]

Item Reference
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2) ☞ 33040
Correction Setting (SP2) ☞ 33060
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
31000 2/5
31000
Processor settings [J]

Item Reference
Status Display (Basic)
Counter (SP2) ☞ 33010
Processor Standard Setting Thermosensor Calibration (SP1) ☞ 33500
Basic Kit Setting (SP1) ☞ 33520
Kit Correction (SP1) ☞ 33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33540
☞ 33560
3. Mode
Operation Check (SP1)
Manual Kit Change ☞ 33570
Cleaning Water Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting (SP1) ☞ 33600
Processor settings [F]

Item Reference
Pump Output Amount Setting ☞ 33030
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ☞ 33590
Quiet Process Setting
Total Replenishment Amount Display
Display Processor Working Information ☞ 33620
Processor Set Up Mode ☞ 33630
! Operator Selections
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service mode are explained. Refer to the User Manuals for other modes.
Operator Selections (Print Operation)

Item Details Normal setting
Notification of Print Quality This function is to notify decrease of the print quality caused by hysteresis. ON
Confirmation (0: Invalid) This notification is displayed when selecting to print to a wide paper size after
(35i) printing more than the specified number of prints in succession at a single
narrower paper size. (default: 300 prints)
☞ No. 1093
If you input 0, it will be invalidate and the attention message will not appear.
In general, setting value will not be changed.
Operator Selections (Processor)

Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch Processor drive and dryer operate continuously. ON
This operates no matter if the system is printing or not.
Error Occurrence Selection
31000 3/5
31000

*1
Replenishment Error (SP1) Errors related to replenishment can be set ON/OFF. ON
Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
Replenishment Package Error (SP1) Replenishment package error can be set to ON/OFF. ON
(Only for SM specification) Error message does not appear when this setting is OFF.
Refilling Water Error*1 (SP1) Errors related to refilling water can be set ON/OFF. ON
Circulation Pump Error (SP1) Circulation pump error can be set ON/OFF. ON
Order Classification Section Error (SP1) You can choose whether or not you want the system to display ON
customer order sorter-related errors onscreen.
*1. Not in use for F specification.
Setting ON/OFF for errors related to replenishing or water refilling is not available.
3. Mode
Operator Selections (Additional)
120 AFC Diffuser (SP1) The 120 AFC diffuser can be set to "Used" or "Not in use". Not in use
NOTE
• For details, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
! Maintenance
Item Reference
*2
Various Adjustment Film Carrier Unit Adjustment Refer to the Scanner
Service Manual.
Colorimeter Calibration
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction (SP1) *1 ☞ 36010
Exposure Magnification Correction (SP1) ☞ 36020
(35)
Exposure Position Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36030
(35)
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ☞ 36040
(SP1)
(35)
Paper Advance Length Correction (SP1) ☞ 36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ☞ 36060
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 (SP1) ☞ 36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 (SP1) ☞ 36081
Paper Pressure Operation Correction ☞ 36090
WB Width Correction ☞ 36100
Scanner Unit Adjustment (SP1) *2 Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment Refer to the Scanner
Light Source Registration Service Manual.
Focus Adjustment
Light Source Update
Scanner Sensitivity Check
Laser Unit Adjustment (SP2) ☞ 37300
(35)
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment Compact Archive Unit Initialization ☞ 36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ☞ 36710
31000 4/5
31000
Item Reference
Process Control Strip
Input Check Input Section*2 Refer to the Scanner
Service Manual.
Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220
Output Check Input Section*2 Refer to the Scanner
Service Manual.
Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320
Reading and Writing Data All Data ☞ 35400
Service Data (SP1)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500
3. Mode
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Software Upgrade Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) ☞ 35600
Software Upgrade (HD) (SP1)
Operation Information Error Record ☞ 35700
Laser Operation Record (SP1) (for 35)
iBeam Record Setting (SP1) (for 35i)
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic
*1. For 3501 and 3501i, Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Left) and Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Right) on Functions of Paper Advance Unit
Correction are not displayed.
31000 5/5
32510
Setup
Setup
Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup
NOTE
• With 35i, the display changes as Setup → iBeam Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup.
3. Mode
S1028-00-SM00
! Explanation
Model Explanation
35 A paper type for setup is registered and setup is carried out.
35i A paper type for setup is registered, setup, iBeam Tuning, iBeam Engine Check and Forced Pre-Emission are
carried out.
! Paper Type Selection/Paper Magazine Selection

A maximum of three available paper types can be set.
! Paper Magazine Selection

Select the paper magazine used for setup of each paper type.
127 (1) or the OK The magazine for which paper specification is registered
like
127 (1) or the − The magazine which is registered and for which paper specification is not registered
like
# # # (#) − The magazine which is not registered
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Model Explanation
35 • Carry out System Exposure Light Intensity Setting, Paper Gamma Setup, Black Balance
Adjustment, and Printer Profile Calibration for each paper type.
• Test prints are one sheet of 22-step setup print for setting the exposure light intensity , one sheet of 22-
step setup print for adjusting the paper gamma setup, one sheet of 22-step setup print for adjusting the
black balance, and three sheets of test prints for the printer profile calibration.
NOTE
• The test prints for the paper gamma setup are printed 3 times at most.
32510 1/6
32510
Setup
Model Explanation
35i • Carry out iBeam Tuning System Exposure Light Intensity Setting, Paper Gamma Setup, Black
Balance Adjustment, and Printer Profile Calibration for each paper type.
• Test prints are one sheet of 22-step setup print for setting the exposure light intensity , one sheet of 22-
step setup print for adjusting the paper gamma setup, two iBeam Tuning print, one sheet of 22-step setup
print for adjusting the black balance, and three sheets of test prints for the printer profile calibration.
IMPORTANT
• On the test print for black balance adjustment of 35i, unevenness appears. This does not
matter for Setup function.
NOTE
• The test prints for the paper gamma setup are printed 3 times at most.
System Exposure Light Intensity Setting/Paper gamma setup Black Balance Adjustment
3. Mode
1
Each unexposed part length: 12 mm Each unexposed part length: 12 mm
Each step length: 12 mm Each step length: 12 mm
22 step setup print: 320 mm 22 step setup print: 320 mm
Printer Profile Calibration iBeam Tuning (35i)
Each unexposed part length: 12 mm
Each step length: 12 mm
20-step, 22-step setup prints: 320 mm
32510 2/6
32510
Setup
! Functions
! Profile Chart Output (SP1)

Make five test prints for creating the printer profile.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.
NOTE
• There is no adjustment for outputting the printer profile.
• The printer profile need to be created for each paper type.
! Printer Profile Calibration
3. Mode
Calibrate the printer profile.
Make test prints for calibrating the printer profile and calibrate them with the colorimeter unit.
IMPORTANT
• If the profile data installed and recovery carried out, surely carry out Printer Profile Calibration. If not, the printer
profile data does not become valid.
Make two sheets of 22-step setup prints and one sheet of 20-step test print.
Profile Chart Output Printer Profile Calibration
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
14.5
89mm
14.5
32510 3/6
32510
Setup
! Print Check
When a problem occurs, sample images 1 to 7 are printed. Then, the machine can be checked using the sample prints.
Sample print Explanation Image

Sample 1 A print of sample image with the CMS setting ON.
Sample 2 A print of sample image with the CMS setting OFF
Sample 3 A print of letter image
3. Mode
Sample 4 The print contains three kind of gray colors.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this.
Sample 5 A solid gray print

NOTE
this.
Sample 6 A print of test chart

NOTE
this.
Sample 7
Sample 8
! Black Balance Adjustment

Adjust each R,G and B color automatically so as to show the black letters as black.
The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print.
! Black Balance Adjustment (Manual)

Adjust each R,G and B color manually so as to show the black letters as black.
NOTE
• After the initial setup or Paper Specification Registration/Setup, Black Balance Adjustment will be carried out automatically. To
carry out the fine adjustment just a little more, do it by Black Balance Adjustment (Manual).
32510 4/6
32510
Setup
Black Balance Adjustment Black Balance Adjustment (Manual)
3. Mode
Select the most appropriate color (black).
! Setup Switch (SP1)

When the setup switch is ON, high density section is calculated and setup to be the most appropriate Dmax.
When the setup switch is OFF, setup within the range of the colorimeter specification (Dmax: 2.2 D or less).
IMPORTANT
• If you change the setup switch, it is necessary to carry out the operation from the initial setup again.
• Normally, the setup switch is ON for use.
NOTE
! iBeam Tuning (35i)

Refer to ☞ 32511.
! iBeam Engine Check (for 35i) (SP1)

Refer to ☞ 32512.
NOTE
! Forced Pre-Emission (for 35i) (SP1)

Use to remove the gas occurred inside the iBeam unit if the power supply of iBeam unit is not turned on for 20 days or more.
Be sure to operate the forced pre-emission before the initial setup when installing or replacing the iBeam unit.
IMPORTANT
• If the power supply of iBeam unit is not turned on for 20 days or more, Forced Pre-Emission operates automatically.
If the power supply of the system turns on and iBeam temperatures are being adjusted. Approx. # # seconds is
displayed for five minutes or more after The processing solution temperatures are being adjusted., Forced Pre-
Emission operates automatically. Wait until iBeam temperatures are being adjusted. Approx. # # seconds
disappears.
After iBeam temperatures are being adjusted. Approx. # # seconds finishes correctly, you do not manually
operate Forced Pre-Emission via Paper Specification Registration/Setup.
• If the power supply is reset due to occurring the error in being forced pre-emission, you need to operate Paper
Specification Registration/Setup→Forced Pre-Emission manually.
• Frequently operating the forced pre-emission may decrease iBeam unit life.
• To finish the forced pre-emission, approx. 30 minutes are required.
32510 5/6
32510
Setup
NOTE
3. Mode
32510 6/6
32511
Setup
iBeam Tuning [35i] NOTE

• Print iBeam Tuning chart with the maximum paper
•
width.
• To print iBeam Tuning chart, the system uses two
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → iBeam Setup → Paper
pieces of paper, placing them at positions that are 3.5
Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → iBeam Tuning
mm to the left and to the right from the normal
position. This is because the maximum paper width
is still shorter than the light emission section of the
iBeam unit.
• With the iBeam Tuning chart of 35i, you cannot
correct all the surfaces for the iBeam unit using
some pieces of 89 mm width paper while it is
possible with the QSS-29 series models.
iBeam unit
210.0 mm
3. Mode
3.5 mm 3.5 mm
S1251-13-SM00
203 mm
203 mm
Normal print position

G082070
! Functions
S1251-02-SM00
! Explanation
! iBeam Tuning
• If the print quality does not become same as that enclosed
at the system shipment even by performing iBeam
Tuning, perform iBeam Tuning from Paper Specification
Registration/Setup. The print quality returns to the same
level as that enclosed at the system shipment.
Specification of iBeam Tuning S1251-14-SM00
Setup Times of iBeam Tuning • iBeam Tuning Data Backup History
Latest five iBeam Tuning data are recorded.
Daily Setup OK appears after one iBeam
This data is always updated.
Tuning operation.
Select the desired data to restore the settings.
Paper Specification OK appears after three iBeam
Registration/Setup Tuning operations.
Initial Setup Then iBeam Tuning can be
performed repeatedly.
32511 1/3
32511
Setup
! Adjustment 6. the test print measurement display appears.

! iBeam Tuning
IMPORTANT
• Before starting the iBeam Tuning, clean the flatbed
scanner glass if it is soiled.
1. Select the paper type to be used at iBeam

Tuning.
3. Mode
S1251-05-SM01
7. Place the test print to the flatbed scanner.

IMPORTANT
• Place the (two) test print(s) face down on the
flatbed scanner glass.
Place the test print so that its arrow points
toward the direction of the far side of the
S1251-13-SM00 Flatbed scanner

2. Click YES: Select. Arrow
3. Click YES:> Next.

NOTE
• The system automatically makes test prints.
4. If you go on to iBeam Tuning, select the type
of paper for iBeam Tuning and click YES:
Select.
If you go on to the test print measurement display,
click NO: Next.
5. Confirm that the print surface is not dirty
using cleaning paper or test print. Glass surface Test prints
• If it is clean, proceed to the next step. G082692
• If it is dirty, continue printing until it becomes NOTE

clean. • It does not matter which one of the two prints is
placed on the left and which one on the right.
• Be careful so that the test prints do not overlap.
8. Click YES:> Next.
NOTE
• Measure a test print.
• After measuring the test print(s), the result OK or
NG appears for a very short time.
Then, the result of the measurement is
automatically registered.
• If the measurement of the test print resulted in
NG, measurement is performed one more time.
32511 2/3
32511
Setup
9. The Execute the iBeam Tuning Setup

again? display appears after the result of the
measurement is automatically registered.
• Selecting PASS:> Next will bring up the paper
gamma setup - paper type selection display.
• Selecting YES: Execute will bring up the iBeam
Tuning - paper type selection display.
• Press the NO: Cancel key to stop the iBeam
Tuning operation.
10. Use Print Check Sample 4 or Sample 5 to
verify the print quality.
If it is in the tolerance level
• End
3. Mode
If it is out of the tolerance level
• Repeat iBeam Tuning again.
32511 3/3
32512
Setup
iBeam Engine Check [35i] 3. the test print measurement display appears.

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → iBeam Setup → Paper
Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → iBeam Engine
Check
3. Mode
S1251-05-SM00
4. Place the test print to the flatbed scanner.

IMPORTANT
• Place the (two) test print(s) face down on the
S1251-13-SM01 Place the test print so that its arrow points
toward the direction of the far side of the
! Explanation flatbed scanner glass.
Flatbed scanner
! iBeam Engine Check
• Diagnosis available for the iBeam Unit if dispersion or Arrow
unevenness of light intensity occurred at the iBeam unit.
IMPORTANT
• iBeam Engine Check is a mode to diagnose the
iBeam unit by measuring iBeam Tuning chart
using the flatbed scanner.
If iBeam Tuning chart has any problem due to
deteriorated processing solution, soiled iBeam
unit or Exposure advance unit, or failed
adjustment in iBeam setup, it is impossible to
diagnose the iBeam unit correctly.
Test prints
! Adjustment Glass surface
G082692
NOTE
1. Select the paper type to be used at iBeam
• It does not matter which one of the two prints is
Engine Check.
placed on the left and which one on the right.
2. Press the YES key. • Be careful so that the test prints do not overlap.
NOTE 5. Press the YES:> Next key.
• The system automatically makes test prints.
NOTE
• iBeam Engine Check test print may have lines or
• Start the measurement of test print.
lack uniformity.
32512 1/2
32512
Setup
6. Measurement result appears.
3. Mode
S1252-00-SM00
! MAX-MIN Light Intensity Dispersion

• It compares the maximum light intensity and the
minimum light intensity for each of B, G, R and then
indicates the results in %.
• If the MAX-MIN Light Intensity Dispersion of any one
of B, G, R exceeds 50%, iBeam unit could be defective.
! Adjacent Light Intensity Dispersion

• It compares the maximum adjacent light intensity and the
minimum adjacent light intensity for each of B, G, R and
then indicates the results in %.
• If the Adjacent Light Intensity Dispersion of any one of
B, G, R exceeds 20%, iBeam unit could be defective.
32512 2/2
32520
Setup
Magazine Registration/Setup The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print.

Menu → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine
Registration/Setup
NOTE
• For 35i, iBeam Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup.
Each unexposed part length: 12 mm
Each step length: 12 mm
22 step setup print: 320 mm
3. Mode
G068485
IMPORTANT
• To carry out Magazine Registration/Setup, Paper
Specification Registration/Setup of the paper
type needs to be completed.
NOTE
• The test prints are printed 3 times at most.
! Functions
S1035-00-SM00
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup
! Explanation Paper Specification Registration/Setup is linked, and Paper
Specification Registration/Setup can be carried out.
The paper magazine to be used is registered and the paper ☞ 32510
gamma setup is carried out.
Setup OK The magazine is registered for setup and

its paper specification is also registered.
Setup − The magazine is registered for setup and
its paper specification is not registered.
Magazine OK The magazine not for setup is registered
Registration and the magazine registration setup is
completed.
Magazine − The magazine not for setup is registered
Registration and the magazine registration setup is not
completed.
− The magazine not for setup is not
registered and the magazine registration
setup is not completed.
! Magazine Registration/Setup (Paper width: 82.5

to 210 mm) (Paper surface: 1 to 4)
NOTE
• For 35i, Paper width: 82.5 to 203 mm
You can resister and setup the paper magazine for each paper
type to be used. Also setup status can be checked.
32520 1/1
32530
Setup
Monitor setup ! Brightness Adjustment (CRT monitor)
Carry out the following adjustment using the hard key (button)
Bringing up the display of the display monitor.
Menu → Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup
1. Make setting for color temperature according
to the value displayed on the monitor.
2. Maximize the contrast.
3. Adjust the brightness so that the difference
of the density between the BGR digital
values 0, 0, 0 and 10, 10, 10 can be barely
recognized.
! Brightness Adjustment (LCD monitor)
3. Mode
Carry out the following adjustment using the hard key (button)
of the display monitor.
1. Make setting for color temperature according
to the value displayed on the monitor.
S1030-00-SM00
2. Adjust the brightness so that the difference
of the density between the BGR digital
! Explanation values 0, 0, 0 and 10, 10, 10 can be barely
recognized.
The mechanical basics of display monitor can be adjusted.
NOTE
Also display monitor color can be adjusted to the print color
according to the operating environment of the system. • For monitor setup procedure for LCD monitor, refer to
Option Manual → LCD monitor unit → Setup
IMPORTANT Manual.
• Before carrying out the monitor setup, check if the
color can be recognized at your working place. If ! Monitor Setup (CRT monitor)
necessary, change the environment of the working
place. 1. Make a test print.
NOTE
! Brightness Adjustment (CRT monitor, LCD
• When Only Color Adjustment Pattern is
monitor)
selected, one test print for adjustment is made.
Carry out the basic adjustment using the hard key (button) of When All is selected, seven prints including a test
the display monitor. print for adjustment are made.
IMPORTANT 2. According to the instructions on the display,
• The brightness adjustment is required according to adjust the monitor color so that the sample
the operating environment.
! Monitor Setup (CRT monitor, LCD monitor)

Make a test print and adjust the monitor color by visual check.
! Adjustment procedure (CRT monitor,

LCD monitor)
Follow the procedure below to setup.
Working place environment check
Brightness adjustment
Monitor setup
32530 1/2
32530
Setup
image on the display monitor matches the D: Detail Setting

test print color. Detail setting screen is displayed and the selected
image can be corrected in detail.
3. After all adjustments are finished, select
Save Profile. A new monitor profile is made
and the data is overwritten.
3. Mode
Color pallet
S1241-02-SM00
Image selection section

S1241-02-SM01
Color pallet
Compare the sample image on the display with the test
print. You can adjust the monitor color by selecting the
color pallet using the mouse.
Image selection section
Compare the sample image on the display with the test
print. You can adjust the monitor color by selecting the
sample image.
REPT: Data Initialization
The monitor calibration data is initialized.
N: Check
Images which is adjusted and not adjusted are
displayed.
ORDER: Save profile
The monitor profile data that matches the setting is
made and overwritten the data.
32530 2/2
32550
Setup
Data Initialization

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Data Initialization
Display (35) Display (35i)
3. Mode
! Explanation
The data which is saved in the PC can be initialized.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, backup the data (data writing).
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored to the original by reading out the backup floppy
disk data or the backup media. However, be sure to update the light source when reading out data from the floppy
disk.
☞ 35400
• If there is a backup data of the service personal level, each data can be written individually.
• In case of the backup data of the user level, each data cannot be written individually.
• For all data, the following data are all initialized.
Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks
Main BkData0100 Machine Specification
Option Registration
Password Registration
Error Record
BkData0120 Print Channel Setting
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
ShortCutKey.ini Shortcut Key Setting
BkData0125 Print Menu Setting
BkData0200 Master Data
Paper Temperature Correction
Key Difference Ratio Setting
Each Setup History
BkData0205 Laser Setup (35)
BkData0205 iBeam Setup*1 (35i)
BkData1400 NMC Setting
BkData1700 Each Slope Correction
32550 1/3
32550
Setup

Auto film carrier BkData0300 Adjustment data of AFC (S-4)
Adjustment data of AFC (S1-II)
Connection unit adjustment data
Printer BkData2700 Each data of Printer
Processor BkData0900 Each data of Processor
Colorimeter BkData1000 Each data of Colorimeter
Pricing Unit BkData1100 Price setting data except the print
price setting
Basic price setting data
Total data
LASER BkData2100 Each data of Laser (35)
iBeam Vfp.Izh Each data of iBeam unit (35i)
3. Mode
iBeam Tuning Data Unf.Izh iBeam Tuning Data
Correction data for brightness roi_SHD.bin Correction data for brightness of the (35)
of the Edge of Image Field Edge of Image Field
Scanner Bk0300_SCN Area Registration*1 (S-4)
Light Axis Adjustment*1
Light Source Registration*1
Focus Adjustment*1
Parameter (negative)*1
BkData2900 Scanner data*1
Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data*1 (S-4)
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4*2
Misreg135_6
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5*2
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
MisregMMC_5*2
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8
MisregAMC_3
MisregAMC_5*2
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8
MisregCROP_1.Izh
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh
32550 2/3
32550
Setup

*1
Scanner Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data (S1-II)
Misreg240_1
*1. For the Stand Alone Printer, it is not available.
*2. This is the data which has not been used after upgrading the system program.
! Data that are not initialized when initialization executed

Basically, data are initialized when initialization is executed.
Some data are not initialized, which are listed below.
Data which are not initialized

Total Counter, Daily Totals Counter, Daily Sales Totals, Paper Remaining Amount, Order Number, Archive Number, Total Counter 2,
Machine Specification (Attached Scanner)
3. Mode
Laser Operation Record (35)
iBeam Record Setting (35i)
32550 3/3
33001
Processor Settings
Processor Settings
Print Sensor Adjustment 2. Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Print Sensor
displayed if the service personnel password has
Adjustment
not been input.
• After Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is completed normally, OK is
displayed.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor
is from 1 to 254
• After Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is not completed normally, − is
displayed.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is
3. Mode
0 or 255 or more
• When LED light intensity value of each sensor is
255 and Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is finished normally, the message
☞ No. 0520 Sensors may be dirty. occurs.
S4015-00-00
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked
and set by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Print Sensor Adjustment (Standard value: 150)

(Input range: 0 to 255)
It is the standard value to be used for adjusting the LED light
intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each
sensor is from 1 to 254.
! Functions
! Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• With this Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
function, the sensors below are adjusted.
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value

Adjustment
Print Sensor (Left) (3502)
Print Sensor (Right) (3502)
Print Sensor (3501, 3501i)
! Adjustment
! Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
1. Confirm that each cover is closed in dryer

section.
33001 1/1
33010
Processor Settings
Counter [J] ! Water Supply Reservoir Amount

The insufficient water supply amount for the amount of paper
Bringing up the display that has been processed since last water supply can be checked
and set.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Counter Water supply amount is accumulated every time when
printing is processed.
If any of the following errors occurred, the water supply is to
be canceled.
NOTE
• Water supply reservoir amount is display only. You
cannot input any value.
(Attention)
0603 Add water to the Water Supply Tank.
0604 Add water to the SW/DW Tank.
0610 Empty the Effluent Tank.
3. Mode
! Kit Remains
S4102-01-SM00
NOTE
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel
password (2260).
.
A B C D E F G H
! Explanation
! Replenishment Counter (Input range: 0 to

999999)
The number of tablets that have been dropped can be checked
and set. S4102-01-SM00
! Water supply Counter (Input range: 0.0 to Symbol Explanation

9,999.9 ml) A Processing solution
The total water supply amount can be checked and set. B The number of the remaining cartridges per kit
C The number of the cartridges per kit
! Reservoir Count (Input range: 0 to Drop Limit) D The number of remaining tablets per cartridge
The number of insufficient tables to be replenished for the E The number of tablets per cartridge
amount of paper that has been processed since last tablet F The number of remaining tablets per kit is displayed
replenishment can be checked and set. or can be changed.
If any of the following errors occurred, the tablet G The number of tablets per kit
replenishment is to be canceled.
(Error) H Based on the remaining tablets of CD, the calculated
5600-5602 Tablet Drum operation error. numbers of remaining tablets that is required for BF
5603-5605 A tablet has jammed. and STB are displayed.
5609-5611 Printing cannot continue without
replenishment. NOTE
5612 Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. • The service personnel password (2260) is required to
(Attention) display "H".
0600-0602 The Tablet Cartridge is empty.
0605-0607 Attach the Tablet Cartridge. ! Functions
0608 Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit.
NOTE • SP1: Input the service personnel password (2260) to
select this mode.
• To reset the reservoir count, enter 0 with the key.
33010 1/2
33010
Processor Settings
! Water Supply Reservoir Amount Reset (SP1)

If Water Supply Reservoir Amount Reset is carried out, the
water supply reservoir amounts for CD, BF and STB is
initialized.
3. Mode
33010 2/2
33030
Processor Settings
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM]

The described place varies depending on the specifications. See below for the description for each specification.
• For F specification, refer to ☞ Pump Output Amount Setting[F].
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
For [N] specification display For [SM] specification display
3. Mode
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)

By Pump Output Amount Setting via F: Functions, output amount of each replenisher pump is measured and compared with the set
values.
! F: Functions
! Pump Output Amount Measurement

Use this function to measure the output amount of each pump.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenisher pump is activated via the pump output amount measurement of Functions, amount remaining
is subtracted.
! Initial Replenishment Operation (SP1)

After operating each replenisher pump for a specified time, the air remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment operation at machine installation.
• When the initial replenishment operation has been carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed, activate the pump
of the relevant hose to remove air using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
33030 1/3
33030
Processor Settings
Pump Output Amount Setting[F]
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4502-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)

By Pump Output Amount Measurement via F: Functions, output amount of each replenisher pump is measured, and the measured
values are entered.
! F: Functions

Use this function to measure the output amount of each pump.
For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output amount.
! Manual Open
There are two functions in Manual Open: creating replenishment solution and resetting the remaining amount of the replenishment
solution.
• When restarting the process without draining the replenishment solution from P1R/P2RA/P2RB after taking countermeasures
against replenisher section errors: ☞ No. 0912[F] occurs if adding water to the replenishment tank and performing manual opening
with turning on all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors (ON: the state of solution filled).
At this time, the remaining amount of replenishment solution is reset.
• ☞ No. 0913[F] occurs if performing Manual Open with # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor on (EXCEPT FOR the
case that all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on, which is the state of solution
filled).
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Create Replenishment Solution
(Manual Open).

You can remove the remaining air in the hose by operating P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB
Replenisher Pump for a specified time.
33030 2/3
33030
Processor Settings
To cancel Initial Replenishment Operation, press NO: Cancel.
• Exhausting the air from PSR replenisher pump is performed when exhausting the air at Auto Cleaning.
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Initial Replenisher Operation
(Replenisher Pump).
3. Mode
33030 3/3
33040
Processor Settings
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM].
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total Replenishment Amount Display
3. Mode
S4004-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount

The total replenishment amount can be checked.
! Replenishment Lack Time

The replenishment stops when the waste solution tank is full or when the replenisher solution is empty. Replenishment Lack Time is
accumulated according to the paper amount which are processed after the replenishment is stopped. Carry out the replenishment after
the error is released.
NOTE
• When the replenisher switch is turned off, the message appears and the process stops after the replenishment lack time reaches
600 seconds.
! Clear (SP1)
Clear the value which is accumulated.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display the clear button.
33040 1/3
33040
Processor Settings
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM]
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total Replenishment Amount Display
3. Mode
S4203-01-SM00
! Explanation
! Total Replenishment Amount (Input range: 0.00 to 99999.99 mL)

The total replenishment amount can be checked and set.
! Remaining (Initial value: Package Capacity) (Input range: 0.00 to Package Capacity)
When the prints have been processed, the amount discharged from the replenisher pump is subtracted from the remaining amount.
When replacing the package before the replenishment package gets completely empty, it returns to the initial value. (Initial value:
Package Capacity)
! Package Capacity
The package capacity which has been set in the Package Capacity Setting via Functions is displayed.
! Functions
• SP3: Input the service personnel password (2260) to display this.
! Package Capacity Setting (SP3)
# Replenishment Alarm Value (Initial value: -5%) (Input range: -50 to +50%)
When the percentage of the replenishment remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the replenishment
package capacity became smaller than the Replenishment Alarm Value, 5708-5709 Replenishment Package
solution remaining error. occurs.
☞ No. 5708[SM]
# Package Capacity Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 9999.9 mL)

Set the replenishment solution amounts for the replenishment packages.
33040 2/3
33040
Processor Settings
! SM Forced Replenishment Setting (SP3)
# SM Forced Replenishment Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to
999.9 mL)
SM Forced Replenishment Setting SM Forced Replenishment Setting (time
(standard processing) reduction processing)
CD-A 42.42 ####
CD-B 42.42 ####
CD-C 60.6 ####
BF-A 41.7 ####
BF-B 60.5 ####
STB 30.0 ####
This is the limit amount when carrying out forced replenishment.
3. Mode
When the forced replenishment amount reaches this value, each replenishment pump stops.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change it to any other value than the initial value of the forced replenishment amount.
# Revolution Count
The number of pump revolution when each pump operates replenishment with the value input in Forced
Replenishment Amount Setting is displayed.
33040 3/3
33060
Processor Settings
Correction Setting [SM]

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Correction
Setting
3. Mode
S4205-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Correction Setting
The amount of replenish and water supply can be increased
depending on the paper process amount.
! Replenishment Correction Rate

The standard replenishment amount including the water
supply amount can be changed by the same rate, without
changing the value of Standard Replenishment Amount
Setting.
NOTE
• The replenishment correction rate can be changed by
entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Refilling Water Level 2

It switches Refilling Water Amount according to the operating
environment of the machine.
• Standard: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the
Refilling Water Amount Setting 2.
• Low Humidity: It becomes the refilling water amount set
in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Humidity).
• Low Processing Amount: It becomes the refilling water
amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low
Processing Amount).
Refer to ☞ 33510 Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM].
33060 1/1
33500
Processor Standard Setting
Thermosensor Calibration

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor
Standard Setting → Thermosensor Calibration
3. Mode
S3005-00-SM00
! Explanation
NOTE
password (2260).
! Measurement Value (Initial value: 0.0°C) (Input

range: 10 to 52°C (Correction value: 0 to ±3°C)
Measure the temperature with a mercury thermometer and
enter the measured values.
! Correction Value
After entering the measured temperature, the correction value,
subtracting the displayed temperature from the measured
temperature, will be automatically entered.
! Displayed Temperature
The processing solution temperature measured by the
thermosensor is displayed.
33500 1/1
33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N]

• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM].
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4008-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is displayed.
☞ 35800
NOTE
• Refilling Water Amount Setting does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option
Registration. (Selecting as option is available only for 35i.)
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Water Amount Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 Refilling Water Amount Setting 2
Setting 1 (standard processing) (time reduction processing)
CD-W 140.0 81.0 81.0
BF-W 173.0 47.0 47.0
STB1-W 230.0 41.0 53.4
STB2-W 78.0 47.0 59.4
STB3-W 76.0 44.0 56.4
STB4-W 150.0 72.0 67.4
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.
# Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level OFF, set the refilling water amount after Refilling Water Level is
set to ON. (For automatic refilling water during start up checks and normal processing.)
# Refilling Water Amount Setting2

Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water Level ON. (For automatic refilling during start up checks.)
33510 1/3
33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM]
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4204-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is displayed.
☞ 35800
NOTE
• Refilling Water Amount Setting does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option
Registration. (Selecting as option is available only for 35i.)
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Water Amount Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (time
Setting 1 (standard processing) reduction processing)
Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low
Humidity) Humidity)
Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low
Processing Amount) Processing Amount)
CD 118.0 60.0 60.0
BF 160.0 26.0 26.0
STB1 122.0 41.0 53.4
STB2 76.0 47.0 59.4
STB3 62.0 44.0 56.4
STB4 142.0 51.0 46.0
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level OFF, set the refilling water amount after Refilling Water Level is
set to ON. (For automatic refilling water during start up checks and normal processing.)

Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water Level ON. This setting is valid when the Refilling Water Level
2 of Correction Setting has been set to Standard. (For automatic refilling during start up checks.)
33510 2/3
33510
# Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity)

Each refilling water amount is set in selecting Low Humidity for Refilling Water Level 2 of Correction Setting
for Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Standard).
# Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Processing Amount)

For Refilling Water Amount 2 (Standard), when Low Processing Amount is selected for Refilling Water Level 2
of Correction Setting, each refilling water amount is set.
Each refilling water amount can be set according to the amount of evaporation when processing amount is low (for
each machine or time of year).
IMPORTANT
• The initial values of Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity) and Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Processing
Amount) are the same as that of Refilling Water Amount Setting 2. Do not change them.
If it is necessary to change the settings, the setting values are specified.
3. Mode
33510 3/3
33520
Basic Kit Setting [J]

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Basic Kit Setting
3. Mode
S4105-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Kit Processing Amount Setting (initial value: 388.8) (input range: 0.1 to 999.9 m2)
The paper area that can be processed per kit can be set.
! Kit Water Supply Setting (initial value: 0.01 to 327.67 L)

The water supply amount that is required per kit can be changed.
CPK-2-J1-02 (initial value) CPK-2-J2 (initial value)

PSJ-02 (initial value) PSJ-TYPE C (initial value)
CD 24.49 19.05
BF 19.05 15.55
STB 46.66 58.32
! Drop Limit Setting (initial value CD:4/BF:8/STB:8) (input range: 0 to the number of tablets in the
cartridge)
If the tablet kit is finished, Tablet Operation will be performed. (The rest of the tablets will be dropped at once.)
A limit value for the number of tablets that can be dropped at that time can be set.
If the number of the tablets exceeds the set value (drop limit setting), 609: The Tablet kit is empty. appears.
! Total Cartridge Count (initial value: 1 to 99)

The number of cartridges per kit can be set.
CPK-2-J1-02 (initial value) CPK-2-J2 (initial value)

PSJ-02 (initial value) PSJ-TYPE C (initial value)
CD 6 4
BF 12 10
STB 2 2
! Number of tablets in the cartridge (initial value CD:40/BF:40/STB:20)

The number of tablets per cartridge can be set.
IMPORTANT
• Changes to the kit processing amount setting, kit water supply setting, drop limit setting, total cartridge count, or the
number of tablets in the cartridge setting will not be applied until the kit ends.
33520 1/1
33530
Kit Correction [J]

Standard Setting → Kit Correction
3. Mode
S4106-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Auto Low Processing Correction (initial value:

ON), Correction Rate (initial value: 30) (input
range: 0 to 99 %), Detection (initial value: 2.02)
(input range: 0.01 to 9.99 m2)
Correction Rate and Detection is to be effective only when the
Auto Low Processing Correction is ON.
This function corrects the tablet drop and water supply cycle
automatically while low print processing. If it is ON, and the
day continues for one week when the accumulated processing
amount per day (paper processing area) is smaller than that of
detected auto low processing correction, the correction rate is
to be effective from the eighth day. However, if processing in
more value than the setting is performed for more than two
consecutive days, it is to return to the normal processing from
the third day.
IMPORTANT
• Even if the value of Correction Rate or Detection of
Auto Low Processing Correction is changed, the
changes are not to be effective until the kit ends.
! Replenishment Correction Rate Setting (Initial

value: 100) (input range: 1 to 250 %)
This function corrects the tablet drop cycle. The setting of
large value makes drop cycle fast and that of small value
makes it slow.
! Water Supply Correction Rate Setting (Initial

value: 100) (input range: 1 to 250 %)
This function corrects the water supply cycle. The setting of
large value makes water supply cycle fast and that of small
value makes it slow.
33530 1/1
33540
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] NOTE

• The value can be set freely for No.4. (input range: 0.0 to
9.9)
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor ! Basic Evaporation Refill Amount (Input range:
Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
0.0 to 99.9 ml)
The value for Evaporation Refill Amount can be set freely for
both Working and Not Working.
IMPORTANT
• Even if the value of Basic Evaporation Refill Amount
is changed, the changes are not to be effective until
the kit ends.
3. Mode
S4107-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Environment Setting (Initial value: (1) 12-2 (2)

3-5 (3) 6-8 (4) 9-11 ) (Input range: 1 to 12)
The a year can be divided into 4 environments and their
periods can be set for the evaporation refill.
NOTE
• If a month is not set through the year, it cannot be
registered when the key is pressed.
Example: (1) 1-6 (2) 8-12
In this case, it cannot be registered because July is
missing.
• If you press the key, the value is initialized.
! Environment Correction Setting (Input range: 0

to 4)
The magnification of Evaporation Refill Amount can be set
for each environment.
Magnification
No. Working Not working
0 0.0 1.0
1 0.6 0.6
2 1.0 1.0
3 1.4 1.4
4 Free setting Free setting
Magnific Condition
ation
0.0 No refilling water
0.6 Humid condition
1.0 Standard condition
1.4 Dry condition
33540 1/1
33550
Pump Output Amount Setting [J]

Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4108-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1

to 200 ml)
Measure the pump output amount in Pump Output Amount
Measurement in Functions, and check the measured value.
! Functions

Be sure to measure the output amount when installing it.
If the output amount setting is not appropriate, the water
supply or replenishment operation is not carried out properly.
! Initial Replenishment Operation

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this.
After operating each replenisher pump, water supply pump,
refilling water pump for a specified time, the air remaining in
the hose can be extracted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment
operation at machine installation.
• When the initial replenishment operation has been
carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed,
activate the pump of the relevant hose to remove air
using the pump output amount setting of Functions.
33550 1/1
33560
Operation Check [J]

Standard Setting → Operation Check
3. Mode
S4109-00-SM00
! Explanation
Operation Checks of Tablet Sensor 1 and 2 can be carried out.
! Functions
! Dropping Tablet
One dropping tablet operation is carried out for the selected
chemical.
Conditions of tablet sensor 1 and 2 in dropping tablet are
displayed.
IMPORTANT
• The number of the dropped tablet in Dropping
Tablet is not to be subtracted from the number of
remaining tablets.
! Home Operation
When Either tablet sensor 1 or 2 is close, Home Operation of
the drum can be carried out for the selected chemical.
IMPORTANT
• When carrying out Home Operation, be sure to
remove the cartridges.
33560 1/1
33570
Manual Kit Change [J]

Menu → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard
Setting → Manual Kit Change
3. Mode
S4110-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Manual Kit Change

When carrying out Manual Kit Change, the following values
are to be initialized (setting value).
• Kit Correction Amount
• Kit Water Supply Amount Setting
• Kit Remains
• Drop Limit Setting
• Total Cartridge Count
• Tablets Per Cartridge
• Basic Evaporation Refill Amount
NOTE
• When setting value is changed, the new setting is to be
effective from the time when the manual kit change or kit
end is carried out, or kit end error occurs.
33570 1/1
33580
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F]

[SM] [J]
Description for each specification Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor
Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting
The described place varies depending on the specifications. See
below for the description for each specification.
• For F specification, refer to ☞ Cleaning Water Amount
Setting[F].
Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4508-00-00
! Explanation
! P1 Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial

value: 0.40) (input range: 0.01 to 10.00
seconds)
S4009-00-SM00 Set the operation time of P1 Auto Cleaning Valve +
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.
! Explanation
! P2 Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial
! Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (initial value: 1.50) (input range: 0.01 to 10.00
value: 8.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds) seconds)
Set the operation time of the cleaning pump. Set the operation time of P2 Auto Cleaning Valve +
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.
! Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial
value: 15.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds) ! PS Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial
Set the stop time of the cleaning pump.
seconds)
! Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 8.0) (input Set the operation time of PS Auto Cleaning Valve +
range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds) Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.
Set the time when the drive motor starts operation after the
! Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial
cleaning pump starts the output operation.
seconds)
! Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 15.0) (input
range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds) Set the stop time of the replenishment cartridge cleaning
pump.
Set the time when the drive motor stops operation after the
cleaning pump finishes the output operation.
! Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 8.0) (input
range: 0.1 to 100.0 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning
pump starts discharging until the drive motor starts.
33580 1/2
33580
! Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 15.0) (input

range: 0.1 to 100.0 seconds)
pump finishes discharging until the drive motor stops.
! Cleaning Valve ON Wait Time (Initial value:

1.00) (input range: 0.01 to 2.00 seconds)
pump turns on until P1, P2, PS automated cleaning valves
open.
3. Mode
33580 2/2
33590
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F]
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4504-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)
Measure the output amount of Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount, P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump in Functions, and enter the measured values.
! Functions
! Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount

Use this function to measure the output amount of the cleaning water of P1/P2/PS.
For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output amount [ Auto
Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ].

You can exhaust the air remaining in the hose by operating PSR Replenisher Pump, P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto Cleaning Valve +
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenishment Operation, press NO: Cancel.
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Initial Replenisher Operation
(Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump).
33590 1/1
33600
Drive Motor Revolution Count

Setting

Standard Setting → Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting
3. Mode
S4012-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Drive Motor Setting Value (Standard value: 216)

The setting count of the drive motor revolution is displayed.
! Drive Motor Revolution Count

The present count of the drive motor revolution is displayed.
! Functions
! Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment

The count of the drive motor revolution is adjusted
automatically.
NOTE
• When the drive motor has been replaced and the machine
type registration of the machine specification has been
changed, it is adjusted.
33600 1/1
33620
Display Processor Working Information[F]
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Display Processor Working Information
3. Mode
S4507-00-00
! Explanation
! Replenishment Solution Preparing Counts

• You can confirm Replenishment Solution Preparing Counts.
! Pump Operation Counts

• You can check operation counts of each replenishment pump in 100 times.
! Processor Drive Time

• The time period of drive motor can be confirmed.
! Clear
Clear the value which is accumulated.
33620 1/1
33630
Processor Set Up Mode[F]
! Display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Processor Set Up Mode
3. Mode
S4509-00-SM00
! Explanation
• If air in the auto cleaning pump is not exhausted during installation, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged. Be sure to perform
Processor Set Up Mode in the above order.
! Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump)
S4509-00-SM01
• At the installation, you can exhaust the air remaining in the hose by operating PSR Replenisher Pump,P1 Auto Cleaning Valve
+ Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto
Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump), press NO: Cancel.
• If the air in the hose cannot be exhausted even though after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning Pump), exhaust the air by operating the pump of hose that the air remains by Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount via F: Functions from Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting, or Pump Output Amount Measurement via F:
Functions from Pump Output Amount Setting.
! Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open)
S4509-00-SM02
• There are two functions in Manual Operation: creating replenishment solution and the resetting the remaining amount of the
replenishment solution.
33630 1/2
33630
! Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump)
S4509-00-SM03
• After operating P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher Pump for a specified time, the air
remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), press NO: Cancel.
• If air does not escape from hoses after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), activate the appropriate
pumps and remove the air inside using Functions Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting.
3. Mode
33630 2/2
35100
Maintenance
Maintenance
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ! Adjustment
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction,

Advance Length Correction
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Colorimeter Unit Adjustment
1. Execute Test Paper Advance via
Functions.
2. Open printer doors 1, 2, and then remove the
test paper from the bottom of the paper
advance unit.
3. Draw the first line on the paper at 116 mm
away from the test paper edge, then the
second line at 201 mm away from the first
position.
3. Mode
S3088-00-SM00
! Explanation Second line

First line
To measure each step such as test print correctly by G068475
colorimeter, correct the paper stop position and the error of 4. Slide the dryer section.
feeding rollers.
NOTE
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel 6. Insert test paper with the first line into the
password (2260). colorimeter.
When inserting test paper into the colorimeter, insert it straight
! Paper Front End Advance Length Correction
against the colorimeter.
(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller from the
paper front end to the measurement position.
! Paper Feed Error Correction (Initial value: 0.0)

(Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Correct the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller.
! Functions
! Test Paper Advance

1 2
When the test is executed, the paper with 345 mm is advanced
to the bottom of the paper advance unit.
! Paper Test Advance

Adjust the colorimeter unit.
! Cleaning operation
Use the densitometer cleaning sheet and clean the colorimeter
unit advance roller. Test paper
G084423
7. Execute Paper Test Advance via

Functions.
35100 1/2
35100
Maintenance
8. Press the key.

The test paper stops at the first line.
9. To align the first line with the colorimeter
guide, adjust the paper by pressing −1 (F9)
or +1 (F10).
NOTE
• Press +1 (F10) to advance the test paper.
• Press −1 (F9) to move the test paper back to front.
Colorimeter guide
3. Mode
+1 (F10) −1 (F9)
1 2
First line
G084424
10. Press the key to advance the test

paper to the second line.
11. To align the first line with the colorimeter
guide, adjust the paper by pressing −2 (F9)
or +1 (F10).
12. Press the key to remove the test
paper.
! Colorimeter cleaning
1. Slide the dryer section.

3. Execute Cleaning operation of Functions.
4. Insert cleaning sheet into the colorimeter.
5. Press the key.
The cleaning sheet is fed to the colorimeter.
6. Press the key again.
The cleaning sheet is ejected.
35100 2/2
35210
Maintenance
Input Check (Printer)

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Printer
! Input Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit Paper Magazine Code ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Magazine Code)
Paper Supply ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply)
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Engine Section ☞ Engine Section (35)
☞ Engine Section (35i)
☞ Paper Advance Section (Paper advance unit)
3. Mode
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Magazine Code)
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A1 DARK When the pin is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B1 DARK When the pin is detected.
15 ### Attached Paper Magazine A Displays the attached paper magazine.
16 ### Attached Paper Magazine B Displays the attached paper magazine.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A DARK When the paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor B DARK When the paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Loading Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Cut Home Sensor DARK Home position: When the cutter is opened.
5 DARK/LIGHT Cut End Sensor DARK When the cutter is closed.
6 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) ON When the cover is closed.
7 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor ON When the cover is closed.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Hold Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
35210 1/3
35210
Maintenance
No. Display Status

9 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) DARK When the left arm is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) DARK When the right arm is detected.
11 DARK/LIGHT Roller Position Sensor DARK The roller unit moves inside of the printer.
(Displayed only with 35i)
12 OK/- Capacity booster OK When equipped with capacity booster D
Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 1 DARK Pressure roller 1 is being pressed moving
from the status in which paper pressure is
released.
2 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Start Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
3. Mode
3 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 2 DARK Pressure roller 2 and 3 are being pressed
moving from the status in which paper
pressure is released.
4 DARK/LIGHT Exposure End Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
5 ##.#°C Inner Temperature Displays the inner temperature of printer.
Engine Section (35)

Display Status
1 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) ON When the cover is closed.
2 Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchro Normal
nchronous nous When the polygon mirror rotates properly
Asynchr Abnormal
onous When the polygon mirror does not rotate
properly
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror is ON.
The polygon mirror driver outputs the signal which indicates the stability of the polygon mirror rotation.
3 Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchro When the polygon mirror is synchronous
nchronous nous and either of R/G/B laser or all lasers
is/are emitting
Asynchr When the polygon mirror is
onous asynchronous
When the polygon mirror is synchronous
and either of R/G/B laser or all lasers
is/are not emitting
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror and R/G/B lasers are ON.
When either of R/G/B laser is not emitting, it depends on the timing of measurement and the laser light intensity whether
synchronous or asynchronous appears.
When checking for any problems in the laser output, check with the output check. ☞ 35310
4 OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G/B laser drivers are
B Laser Light Source Status normal.
No The laser unit is deteriorated.
Good The G/B laser driver is not connected
properly, or is damaged.
The laser light intensity depends on the electric current applied to the laser diode. When the laser diode is being
deteriorated, add the electric current to acquire the specified amount of output. No Good is displayed when the current value
exceeds the limitation.
5 ##.#°C R Laser Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the R laser.
6 ##.#°C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
7 ##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When the polygon mirror rotates properly
- When the polygon mirror does not rotate
properly
35210 2/3
35210
Maintenance
Display Status
8 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the
9 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF laser unit type.
Refer to ☞ Engine Section (35) for
10 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
details.
11 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
*1
12 ON/OFF G Laser Ready Status (SP1) ON When the G/B-SHG laser is normal (ready
13 ON/OFF B Laser Ready Status (SP1) *2 ON for printing)
*1. Auto Tuning: is displayed for the laser unit (Type EeR).
*2. Auto Tuning: is displayed for the laser unit (Type Ff), (Type FfR) and (Type EeR).
Engine Section (35i)

Display Status
1 ##.#°C iBeam Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of iBeam unit.
3. Mode
NOTE
• In QSS, temperature of iBeam Unit Thermosensor does not control.
Paper Advance Section (Paper advance unit)
Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
2 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor*1 DARK When the arm is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor DARK When the arm is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Turn Sensor DARK When the turn unit is in the paper transfer
position.
*1. Lane Select Sensor is not available for 3501 and 3501i.
35210 3/3
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [N]

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor
For the specifications other than [N] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [N] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
! Input Check
Item Specification Reference
3. Mode
Processor Section N specification ☞ Processor Section (for each specification)
SM specification ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2)
J specification ☞ Processor Section ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section
F specification ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2)
Dryer Section Common to all ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification Section specifications ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)
Tablet Replenishment Section J specification ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Processor Section (for each specification)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF CD Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is run
3 ON/OFF BF Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF out.
4 ON/OFF STB Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF
5 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level*4 OFF When the solution level is too low.
6 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
7 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
*4
8 ON/OFF STB 2 Refilling Water Level OFF
11 ON/OFF Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor*4 OFF
12 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON When the solution safety thermostat
operates normally
13 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the rack stopper is fixed, when
the processor top cover is closed
14 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
*3
15 ON/OFF BF + STB Effluent Float Switch ON
16 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the processor relay
PCB is connected ☞ 66220
17 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
19 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
35220 1/7
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

20 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
21 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
*1. Displays "OK" when all circulation pump is rotating normally.
When an error occurs, displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.
*3. When the Three Effluents Collection Unit is selected optionally, BF Effluent Float SwitchSTB Effluent Float Switch is displayed.
*4. This does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option Registration. (Selecting as option is
available only for 35i.)
Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Dryer Safety Thermostat OFF When the dryer safety thermostat is turned
3. Mode
off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Left) (3502) DARK When the paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Right) (3502) DARK
5 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Home Sensor DARK Home position: when placing at the
position to feed paper to the print conveyor
Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Sorter Home Sensor*1 DARK Home position: Print receiving position
2 DARK/LIGHT Print Full Sensor*1 DARK When the paper is detected.
3 ON/OFF Manual Sorter Switch ON When the switch is pressed.
*1. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the print sorter unit.
Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK When the paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 DARK
35220 2/7
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [SM]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
Processor Section (1)

No. Display Status
2 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF
3. Mode
3 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF
8 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
9 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
11 ON/OFF BF + STB Effluent Float Switch*3 ON

*4. This does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option Registration. (Selecting as option is available
only for 35i.)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
2 ON/OFF CD-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
3 ON/OFF CD-C Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
4 ON/OFF CD-W Water Supply Pump Sensor ON
5 ON/OFF BF-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
6 ON/OFF BF-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
7 ON/OFF STB Replenisher Pump Sensor ON
8 DARK/LIGHT CD-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
9 DARK/LIGHT CD-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT normal.
10 DARK/LIGHT CD-C Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT
11 DARK/LIGHT BF-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT
12 DARK/LIGHT BF-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT
13 DARK/LIGHT STB Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT
35220 3/7
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

14 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-1 ON When the replenishment package is set.
15 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-2 ON
16 ON/OFF Water Supply Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
3. Mode
35220 4/7
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [J]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
Processor Section
No. Display Status
2 ON/OFF SW Tank Level Sensor OFF
3. Mode
3 ON/OFF SW/DW Tank Level Sensor OFF
4 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF
*3
8 ON/OFF BF + STB Effluent Float Switch ON

Tablet Replenishment Section

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected
2 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 2 DARK
3 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 1 DARK
4 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 2 DARK
5 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 1 DARK
6 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 2 DARK
7 DARK/LIGHT CD Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected
8 DARK/LIGHT BF Cartridge Sensor LIGHT
9 DARK/LIGHT STB Cartridge Sensor LIGHT
10 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Upper Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected
11 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Middle Sensor DARK
12 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Lower Sensor DARK
35220 5/7
35220
Maintenance
Input Check (Processor) [F]

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J]

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 5508 occurs.
3. Mode
3 ON/OFF P1 Processable Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 5916[F]occurs.*3
4 ON/OFF P2 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5917[F]occurs.*3
5 ON/OFF PS1 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5918[F]occurs.*3
9 ON/OFF P1 Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
10 ON/OFF P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch ON

*3. If the processable level sensors for each processing solution are OFF, the system stops printing to prevent the time that paper is soaked from becoming
short and printing quality from degrading.

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
Sensor
2 ON/OFF P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
3 ON/OFF P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
4 ON/OFF P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
5 ON/OFF P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
6 ON/OFF P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
7 ON/OFF PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
1 ON/OFF PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ON When the cover is closed.
35220 6/7
35220
Maintenance
No. Display Status

3 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor DARK When the replenish cartridge is set
4 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) DARK When the replenish cartridge is in the
upper position
5 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) DARK When the replenish cartridge is in the
lower position
6 #.# Environment Temperature Displays the temperature and humidity in the place
7 #.# Environment Humidity where the temperature and humidity sensor is
attached.
Refer to ☞ 61050 for the installation position of the
temperature and humid sensor.
3. Mode
35220 7/7
35310
Maintenance
Output Check (Printer)

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Printer
! Output Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit Paper Supply Unit 1 ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
Paper Supply Unit 2 ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 2)
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Engine Section ☞ Engine Section (35)
☞ Engine Section (35i)
☞ Paper Advance Section
3. Mode
! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper Supply Motor A Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Paper Supply Motor B Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Cut Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Roller Move Motor Press the YES/START key to move the printer repeatedly to
(Displayed only with 35i) front and rear.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 2)

2 Ribbon Advance Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Dot Head (1st Line) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Dot Head (2nd Line) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Paper Hold Motor Press the YES/START key to repeat pressure/release.
6 Paper Supply Arm Motor Press the YES/START key to repeat the forward/backward
operation.
Exposure Advance Unit

1 Exposure Advance Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to repeat pressure/release.
3 Exposure Advance Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to repeat pressure/release.
Engine Section (35)

1 Polygon Mirror OFF Press the YES/START key to stop the polygon mirror.
Press the NO/STOP key to start the operation of the polygon
mirror.
2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan 1,2 ON Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
35310 1/3
35310
Maintenance

3 Laser Unit Heater ON Press the YES/START key for Laser Unit Heater ON.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the laser unit heater.
4 R Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the R laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the R laser output.
5 G Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the G laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the G laser output.
6 B Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the B laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the B laser output.
7 G Laser Reset (SP1) *1 Press the YES/START key to reset the G laser.
8 B Laser Reset (SP1) *2 Press the YES/START key to reset the B laser.
3. Mode
Display Status
Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchron When the polygon mirror rotates properly and is
nchronous ous stable
• When entering the output check
• When turning ON the polygon mirror
Asynchro When the polygon mirror does not rotate
nous properly
• When turning OFF the polygon mirror
Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchron When either of R/G/B laser is emitting
nchronous ous • When the polygon mirror is synchronous
and either of R/G/B laser output is turned
ON
Asynchro When all the R/G/B lasers are not emitting
nous • When entering the output check
• When the polygon mirror is asynchronous
• When the R/G/B laser output are all OFF
This part checks the output condition of each R/G/B laser.
Since the Synchronous Check cannot be carried out in the same condition as the usual printing operation even if
all the R/G/B lasers light, a problem may occur in the usual operation with no trouble at the Output Check.
OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G/B laser drivers are normal.
B Laser Light Source Status No Good The laser unit is deteriorated.
The G/B laser driver is not connected properly,
or is damaged.
##.#°C Displays the temperature of the R laser.
##.#°C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous
- When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the laser
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF unit type.
Refer to the list below for details.
ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
*1 ON When the G/B-SHG laser is normal (ready for
ON/OFF G Laser Ready Status (SP1)
ON/OFF B Laser Ready Status (SP1) *2 ON printing)
35310 2/3
35310
Maintenance
Laser unit (Type ###) G laser differentiation signal B laser differentiation signal
1 2 1 2
Type Ff, Type FfR ON OFF OFF OFF
Type EeR ON OFF ON OFF
Type BbR OFF OFF OFF OFF
Engine Section (35i)

1 R iBeam Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the R iBeam output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the R iBeam output.
2 G iBeam Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the G iBeam output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the G iBeam output.
3 B iBeam Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the B iBeam output.
3. Mode
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the B iBeam output.
NOTE
• You can confirm the each R, G and B emission condition of iBeam with the printer door open.
2 Paper advance pressure change motor Press the YES/START key to repeat pressure/release.
3 Lane select motor *1 Press the YES/START key to switch among the selection
sensor position -> left selection position -> selection position
center -> right selection position.
4 Paper advance arm motor Press the YES/START key to operate up/down repeatedly.
5 Turn motor Press the YES/START key to switch between the paper
receiving position and the standby position.
*1. Lane select motor is not available for 3501, 3501i.
35310 3/3
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [N]

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Processor
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
! Output Check
Item Specification Reference
3. Mode
Processor Section N specification ☞ Processor Section (1) (for each ☞ Processor Section (2) (for each
specification) specification)
SM specification ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2)
J specification ☞ Processor Section ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section
F specification ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2) *7
Dryer Section Common to all ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification Section specifications ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)
Tablet Replenishment Section J specification ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section
! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Processor Section (1) (for each specification)
1 Drive Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
2 CD Heater stop.
3 BF Heater
4 STB Heater
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 CD Replenisher Pump
9 BF Replenisher Pump
10 STB Replenisher Pump
11 Tank Cooling Fan
12 Cleaning Pump*1
13 Exhaust Fan
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Green)*2 Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
15 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)*2 key to turn off.
35320 1/6
35320
Maintenance
Processor Section (2) (for each specification)

*1
1 CD-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
2 BF-W Refilling Water Pump*1 stop.
3 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump*1
Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

3. Mode
1 Dryer Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
2 Dryer Heater 1 stop.
3 Dryer Heater 2
4 Dryer Heater 3
5 Dryer Lane Select Motor Press the YES/START key to stop at the position to feed
paper to the colorimeter -> Repeats stopping at the position to
feed paper to the conveyor unit
Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

1 Sorter Motor*1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Conveyor Motor
3 Manual Sorter Switch Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)

1 Paper Advance Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
2 Pressure Change Solenoid stop.
3 Colorimeter Cooling Fan
35320 2/6
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [SM]
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]

2 CD Heater stop.
3 BF Heater
3. Mode
4 STB Heater
8 Tank Cooling Fan
12 Cleaning Pump*1
13 Exhaust Fan
only for 35i.)

1 CD-A Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 CD-B Replenisher Pump
3 CD-C Replenisher Pump
4 CD-W Water Supply Pump
5 BF-A Replenisher Pump
6 BF-B Replenisher Pump
7 BF-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 STB Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
9 STB 4-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 Circulation Pump Stand-by Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
35320 3/6
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [J]
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
Processor Section
2 CD Heater stop.
3 BF Heater
3. Mode
4 STB Heater
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 CD Water Supply Pump
10 S -> B Replenishment Pump
11 STB Water Supply Pump
12 Cleaning Pump*1
13 Exhaust Fan
only for 35i.)
Tablet Replenishment Section

1 CD Operation Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
2 BF Operation Lamp key to turn off.
3 STB Operation Lamp
4 CD Drum Motor (Forward) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 CD Drum Motor (Reverse)
6 BF Drum Motor (Forward)
7 BF Drum Motor (Reverse)
8 STB Drum Motor (Forward)
9 STB Drum Motor (Reverse)
10 Elevator Motor (Up) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop. Temporarily stops if detected by the elevator middle
sensor. When two seconds passes, starts again. When detected
by the elevator upper sensor, stops.
11 Elevator Motor (Down) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop. Stops when detected by the elevator lower sensor.
35320 4/6
35320
Maintenance
Output Check (Processor) [F]
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J]

2 P1 Heater stop.
3 P2 Heater
3. Mode
4 PS Heater
5 P1 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 P2 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 PS Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 Exhaust Fan
Processor Section (2) *7

1 Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor Refer to ☞ Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation.
2 P1R Replenisher Pump YES/START moves each replenishment pump one stroke
3 P2RA Replenisher Pump (maximum) . *1
4 P2RB Replenisher Pump IMPORTANT
5 PSR Replenisher Pump • If each replenishment pump is operated, the initial
value is used for the next opening.
6 P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher YES/START operates each cartridge flushing valve and auto
Cartridge Cleaning Pump cleaning pump. *2*3*6
7 P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • Follow the steps 1-4 below.
Cartridge Cleaning Pump • 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
8 P2RB Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• 3. Open each cartridge flushing valve (maximum 10
seconds).
• 4. Close each cartridge cleaning valve. → Turn OFF the
cleaning pump.
35320 5/6
35320
Maintenance

9 P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge YES/START operates P1R agitation solenoid valve +
Cleaning Pump Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump. *2*4
• Follow the steps 1-4 below.
• 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
• 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
• 3. Open P1R agitation solenoid valve (maximum three
seconds).
• 4. Close P1R agitation solenoid valve. → Turn OFF the
cleaning pump.
IMPORTANT
• If P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump is operated, the initial
3. Mode
value is used for the next opening.
10 P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge YES/START operates each automated flushing valve and
Cleaning Pump auto cleaning pump. *2*5
11 P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • Follow the steps 1-4 below.
Cleaning Pump • 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
12 PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
Cleaning Pump
• 3. Open each automated flushing valve (maximum three
seconds).
• 4. Close each automated flushing valve. → Turn OFF
the cleaning pump.
*1. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, the replenishment pump does not work.
*2. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, each automated flushing valve does not work.
However, auto cleaning pump works regardless of the waste solution float switch. If the operation continues when either of waste solution float
switches is ON, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged.
*3. Press the YES/START key to display Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor, prepare the cleaning water does not run into the replenishment tank from the nozzle to check. For
details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump?.
*4. Press the YES/START key to display Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will
be run into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump?.
*5. Press the YES/START key to display Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will
be run into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump?.
*6. If the cleaning water gets into a tank, the amount of replenishment solution changes. Insert a hose into a cleaning nozzle and execute Output Check
without allowing any water to get in the tank.
When you insert a hose into the cleaning nozzle, we recommend you to operate Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor and move the replenishment
cartridge installation section to the lower position.
*7. SP1: Input the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation

Count Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation
First Pressing YES/START moves it from the upper position to the lower position. *1
Second Pressing YES/START moves it from the lower position to the upper position. *2
*1. Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates to right.

*2. Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates to left.
35320 6/6
35400
Maintenance
Reading and Writing Data

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data
3. Mode
S3075-00-SM00
! Explanation
! 1. Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading Data (Floppy Disk → CPU)
The data can be read or written individually when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Data can be saved via the close down checks. (User level)
When carrying out Reading Data/Writing Data via Service Data, four floppy disks are required to save the data for each printer,
processor, and scanner section.
NOTE
• The FDs shown below are required.
Details
Back Up DATA • When performing Writing Data with the user level, the data is written individually same as performing
it with the service level.
• When performing Writing Data via Service Data, the data are written separately to INITIAL DATA1
FD, INITIAL DATA2 FD, INITIAL DATA3 FD and INITIAL DATA4 FD.
• When the Reading Data is carried out via Service Data, User Setting Data appears. The Operator
Selections, IX Data Settings (except serial number) and Print Channel Setting (except image data) are
read after reading the User Setting Data. This function is very useful when creating a print channel
using the data of other system.
It is possible to read User Setting data from the INITIAL DATA1 or Back Up DATA that is saved in
the user level.
• When the Reading Data is carried out in the user level, the data cannot be read individually. All the data
is read from a floppy disk.
• Be sure to update the light source when having performed Reading Data from the floppy disk written
the data of Back Up DATA of user level or Back Up DATA of service personnel level.
☞ 7. Scanner data (Dctrl.lzh)
Details
INITIAL DATA1 Writes the data of Main, Image Processing and Pricing Unit.
INITIAL DATA2 Writes the data of Printer, Colorimeter unit, LASER (for 35), iBeam (for 35i) and Correction data for
brightness of the Edge of Image Field.
INITIAL DATA3 Writes the data of Processor.
INITIAL DATA4 *1 Writes the data of Scanner, Auto Film Carrier and Connection Unit.
*1. The default setting of the INITIAL DATA4 does not include the connection unit adjustment data.
35400 1/4
35400
Maintenance
NOTE
• For the Stand Alone Printer, there is no INITIAL DATA4 FD.
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name Remarks
Main (*1) Main.lzh
Pricing Unit (*1) Pu.lzh
Printer (*2) Printer.lzh
Colorimeter unit (*2) Color.lzh
LASER (*2) Laser.lzh (35)
iBeam (*2) Vfp.Izh (35i)
iBeam Tuning Data (*2) Unf.Izh
Correction Data for Brightness of the Edge of Image Field roi_SHD.lzh (35)
3. Mode
(*2)
Processor (*3) Proc.lzh
*1
Auto Film Carrier (*4) Afm.lzh
*1. If the S1-II is equipped with the connection unit, the connection unit includes the adjustment data.
S-4
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name
Scanner (*4) Dctrl.lzh Misreg110_1.lzh MisregAMC_7.lzh
Misreg135_1.lzh Misreg110_9.lzh MisregAMC_8.lzh
Misreg135_2.lzh Misreg110_11.lzh MisregCROP_1.Izh
Misreg135_4.lzh (*5) Misreg2B_1.lzh MisregMFC_1.Izh
Misreg135_6.lzh MisregMMC_3.lzh MisregMFC_2.Izh
Misreg240_1.lzh MisregMMC_5.lzh (*5) MisregMFC_4.Izh
Misreg240_4.lzh MisregMMC_7.lzh MisregMFC_6.Izh
Misreg135_5.lzh (*5) MisregMMC_8.lzh MisregMFC_7.Izh
Misreg240_7.lzh MisregAMC_3.lzh MisregMFC_8.Izh
Misreg240_8.lzh MisregAMC_5.lzh (*5) MisregMFC_9.Izh
S1-II
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name
Scanner (*4) Misreg135_1.lzh Misreg240_1.lzh
• (*1) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA1 for Service Data.

• (*5) This item is not contained in the backup depending on the version of the system program.
NOTE
• (*5) of the list is the data which has not been used after the upgrading the system program.
If upgrading, the data cannot be deleted automatically. So the data which has not been used after the upgrading may still be
contained in the backup.
! 2. Format Floppy Disk

Format (Initialize) floppy disks. Data can only be written onto a floppy disk which has been formatted.
IMPORTANT
• Available floppy disk: 3.5 inch type 2 HD
• Floppy disks must be 1.44 MB format but not 1.2 MB format.
35400 2/4
35400
Maintenance
! 3. Writing All Data (CPU → Media), Reading All Data (Media → CPU)
Backup the data to the media except FD.
The data to backup is as follows.
Data Description
BkData###.dat The data saved with the usual backup
idphoto.ini ID photo data
Template Frame data set in the print channel setting
Client.mdb Customer information in the edit data
PackExData.ini Package frame information set by user
SplitSize.ini Tiling data
ToneCurve.ini Data of the tone curve shape in the Edit Mode
PuFormatData.ini Data including the standard format of the pricing sheet print and the insertion image path
3. Mode
PuFormatExData.ini Data including the pricing sheet print format that the user created and the insertion image path
PuPrt All the image data included in the pricing sheet print is saved in this folder.
! 4. Reading Data (Auto Backup Data -> CPU)

At the Close Down Checks, the data automatically saved to HDD can be read.
NOTE
• If the user has failed in Daily Setup and lost backup FD then, read the data with this mode.
! 5. Reading Data (Noritsu-eNET -> Machine)

You can download the device backup data, which has been saved on Noristu-eNET server, and load it onto the system.
! 6. Data unable to back up

The following data cannot be saved in the Reading and Writing Data. When replacing the HDD or PC main unit, be sure to save the
following data beforehand.
Data name Save to Data name Save to
Image data C:\Image Image saved Data in Edit mode C:\EditData
IMPORTANT
• Saving destination of the Image data may be changed. When you back up, check the destination on the Operator
Selections display.
! 7. Scanner data (Dctrl.lzh)

Among the scanner data written in the floppy disk, the data updated by the Light Source Update is pressed and saved with setting the
data other than that of the maximum/minimum magnification to 0.
IMPORTANT
• When having read the floppy disk data made a backup, the Light Source Update is necessary after reading the data.
For this reason, the software is set as follows.
Software contents (after reading FD data)
Set to be updated the light source automatically after the daily setup.
Set the attention message urging you to update the light source to occur by switching the film carrier.
• When the daily setup is not performed after writing the FD data to QSS, be sure to update the light source.
NOTE
• The reason why the Light Source Update is necessary is that the Light Source Update data saved on the side of QSS at that point
will be available and will not be updated to the normal data even though the backup data has been read normally.
And also, the second reason is that the FD data made a backup remains as initial value after initializing the data.
• The reason why the data updated by the Light Source Update is set to 0 in writing to FD is to reduce the storage capacity and to
save in one FD.
35400 3/4
35400
Maintenance
! Functions
! Path Setting
When reading and writing data, carry out the path setting to save to the media except FD.
Only the media type set as Input/Output in option registration can be carried out the path setting.
NOTE
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel password (2260).
! Data that will not be replaced by backup data

Basically, all data are replaced by backup data if read or written.
Some data are not replaced which are listed below.
Data that are not replaced
3. Mode
Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2, net
order spooler place
Laser Operation Record*1 (35)
iBeam Record Setting*2 (35i)
*1. Laser operation record data are maintained in the laser unit body. The laser operation record data is not written or loaded when Writing or Loading
all data or service data.
*2. Neither reading all data or reading service data into the QSS replaces the data.
Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count data of iBeam Record Setting is held in the iBeam unit.
35400 4/4
35500
Maintenance
System Version Check

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → System Version Check
Display (35, 35i)
3. Mode
NOTE
• For 35i, LASER in the display above changes to iBeam.
Display (35, 35i)
! Explanation
NOTE
• The display returns to the Maintenance display by pressing NO: End, but it returns to the Software Upgrade display if pressed
it on the Software Upgrade display.
! Accessories
# CPU
The name of each control PCB is displayed.
# Version
The system program version number saved on all control PCBs is displayed.
35500 1/2
35500
Maintenance
# Version (LASER)
You can check the type of the laser unit by checking the version name of LASER.
No. Display Explanation
1 2 3 4
LASER 1.089 X1 EeR1 N OK

Bb R
Ee
Ff
1 1.089 The soft version of the laser control PCB is displayed.
2 B, E, F The type of the B or G laser driver is displayed.
• B: B laser driver (J391231), G laser driver (J391231)
3. Mode
• E: B laser driver (J391160), G laser driver (J391160)
• F: B laser driver (J391160), G laser driver (J391231)
3 b, e, f Displays the type of the laser unit.
• b: Laser unit bR (Z025601)
• e: Laser unit eR (Z025532)
• f: Laser unit fR (Z025534)/Laser unit f (Z025661)
4 R It shows that the R-AOM driver functions are installed in the laser unit.
• Example:
R: laser unit fR (Z025534)
None:laser unit f (Z025661)
# Version (scanner)
The Auto Film Carrier unit name indicates the type of the scanner used for [S-4/S1-II].
Scanner type display (S-4/S1-II)
S-4 #### S4
S1-II #### S1-2
NOTE
• If error occurs such as the system program cannot be executed or read, the boot flash version is displayed.
# Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
• Depending on the ARCNET communication feature, Communication on the System Version Check may not be able to decide if
the ARCNET communication is working or not.
• In that case, the ARCNET communication status can be checked more correctly by using Self-Diagnosis Program.
For details, check the ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.
! Profile Data
The profile data version is displayed.
NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
! DLL/Driver
The versions of DLL and SYS file (driver) are displayed.
NOTE
35500 2/2
35600
Maintenance
System update for each control PCB (CPU)

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Software Upgrade
3. Mode
S3060-00-SM00
IMPORTANT
• This section explains the procedure for updating the system of each control PCBs.
For details about how to perform Software Upgrade, refer to Updating the QSS software in Installation procedures of the
QSS software.
Refer to the PC Service Manual.
• When the external PC compatible with the CT-1 or QSS printer driver has been connected, do not receive the order or
make prints before or during software upgrading. Upgrading may not be performed normally.
! Explanation
NOTE
• When the software upgrade is completed, the alarm informs the completion of the upgrade. After 1 minute, the display changes to
the System Version Check display automatically. Pressing NO: End also changes the display to the System Version Check
display.
! Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)

Copy the system program from the program CD to the directory for software upgrade and save it.
Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data saved in the directory for software upgrade.
! Software Upgrade (HD)

Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data saved in the directory for software upgrade.
The software upgrade is carried out individually for each control PCB (CPU).
NOTE
! Operation
1. Before upgrading, backup the system data.

☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• This backup data is stored just incase that the version upgrade would be failed, and used for returning to the
previous version.
2. When Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) is selected, insert the program CD.
Each control PCB (CPU) is upgraded.
35600 1/2
35600
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Data reading after upgrading is not necessary as upgrading does not initialize the system data.
Do not read the backup data of the previous version after upgrading is successfully ended as it may
malfunction.
However, since the procedure differs depending on the versions, be sure to refer to the REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTION for details.
3. Backup the system data after upgrading.
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to backup the system data of the new version, and be careful not to mix the backup data of the
previous version with the new one.
! Data
3. Mode
! Control PCB (CPU), system file name, and software to be upgraded
At replacing any of the control PCBs, check the check box of the software to be upgraded, and then carry out upgrading (HD).
Control PCB Software to be upgraded System file name Remarks

Processor control PCB Processor proc0.sys proc1.sys
Printer control PCB Printer supply0.sys supply1.sys
AFC/scanner control PCB*1 Auto film carrier afm0.sys afm1.sys (S-4)
afm0_1.sys afm1_1.sys (S1-II)
PU control PCB Pricing Unit pu0.sys pu1.sys
Laser control PCB LASER laser0.sys laser1.sys (35)
iBeam Control PCB iBeam Control PCB Vfp0.sys Vfp1.sys (35i)
! The location of the system program

Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)
CD-ROM\Sys
Software Upgrade (HD)
C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Data\Sys
35600 2/2
35700
Maintenance
Operation Information ! Functions
! Laser Operation Record (35)

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Operation
Information
3. Mode
S3322-03
IMPORTANT
S3063-00-SM00
• The laser operation record PCB maintains Serial
NOTE Number of the laser operation records, the data of
• For 35i, Laser Operation Record in the display above the laser lighting cumulative time and operation
changes to iBeam Record Setting. count, and polygon mirror operation cumulative time
and operation count.
! Explanation The data listed above are not changed by reading
all data into the QSS using Reading and Writing
Data.
! Error Record
• The above-listed data can maintain information up
The error record is displayed in order from the latest one to five.
which has occurred.
The latest 20 errors can be checked. ! Laser Unit Serial Number
NOTE
Displays the serial No. of the laser unit.
• Up to 500 errors can be checked when the service
personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Any older data than the latest 500 errors will be deleted.
! Serial Number
Displays the serial No. of QSS that installed the laser unit.
! Daily Setup History NOTE
The daily setup history from the latest setup is displayed. • Serial Number displays the serial No. of QSS detected in
All data for the past 7 setups will be displayed, and any data Machine Specification.
prior to that will be deleted. The Serial Number data is maintained in the laser unit.
! Laser Operation Record (35) ! Laser Generation Accumulated Time

You can check operation records of laser-related parts. The lighting cumulative time of R/G/B lasers is displayed.
(unit: second)
! iBeam Record Setting (35i)
! Laser Generation Count
Displays iBeam unit Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting
Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count. The R/G/B laser turned ON operation count is displayed.
(unit: time)
! Polygon Mirror Total Operation Time

Displays the polygon mirror operation time.
(unit: second)
! Polygon Mirror Operation Count

Displays the polygon mirror operation count.
(unit: time)
35700 1/2
35700
Maintenance
! iBeam Record Setting (35i)
3. Mode
S3322-02-SM00
IMPORTANT
• Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting Time/iBeam
Lighting Operation Count data of iBeam Record
Setting is held in the iBeam unit.
In Reading and Writing Data, reading all data into
the QSS does not replace the Serial Number/iBeam
Total Lighting Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count
data of iBeam Record Setting.
• The Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting
Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count information of
iBeam Record Setting can be held as much as 5
pieces.
! iBeam Unit Serial Number

Displays the serial No. of iBeam unit.
! Serial Number
Displays the serial No. of QSS that installed the iBeam unit.
NOTE
• Serial Number displays the serial No. of QSS detected in
Machine Specification.
It also holds Serial Number data in the iBeam unit.
! iBeam Total Lighting Time

Displays the lighting cumulative time of iBeam unit.
(unit: second)
! iBeam Lighting Operation Count

Displays the Turned ON Time Record of iBeam unit.
(unit: time)
35700 2/2
35800
Maintenance
Machine Specification ! Processing Solution Display

Set the display of the chemical solution names by process
specification.
! Display
Processing solution name
Bringing up the display CD BF STB
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine P1 P2 PS
Specification
P1 P2 P3
CD BF TCS
PS1 PS2 PS3
PJ1 PJ2 PJ3
! Language (initial value: ENGLISH)

The language loaded by the system program can be set.
3. Mode
ENGLISH KOREAN
JAPANESE PEKINESE
FRENCH TAIWANESE
GERMAN DANISH
ITALIAN GREEK
SPANISH DUTCH
PORTUGUESE FINNISH
S3066-00-00
RUSSIAN SWEDISH
NOTE
INDONESIAN -
password (2260).
! HELP Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)
! Explanation The language used to display the HELP messages of

Attention/Error can be set.
! Machine Type Registration
! Installation Date
Register the machine type.
The installation date of the system can be checked and set.
IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following ! Power Supply Specification
adjustment is displayed after changing the machine
The power supply specification of the machine can be
type, carry out following settings.
checked.
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment:
☞ 33600 Power supply specification table
• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33030 1P2W 200 V 3P-3W 220 V
• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500 1P2W 208 V 3P-3W 230 V
1P2W 220 V 3P-3W 240 V
! Serial Number (Scanner Section)/Serial 1P2W 230 V 3P-4W 346 V
Number (Printer/Processor) (Input range:
1P2W 240 V 3P-4W 380 V
00000000 to 99999999)
1P-3W 100/200 V 3P-4W 400 V
The serial number of the machine can be specified and 3P-3W 200 V 3P-4W 415 V
checked for the scanner section, the printer/processor
individually. 3P-3W 208 V 3P3W/1P2W 100/200 V
At the installation, enter the production number.
! Terminal Name (Initial value: Computer
! Process Specification (Input range: 0 to 80) name)
Use this mode to set the process specification for the machine.
Setting QSS terminal name is available.
35800 1/2
35800
Maintenance
! Attached Scanner
Selecting the scanner with which the QSS is equipped is
available.
Attached Scanner
Not in use S4 S1-II
! Circulation Pump Stand-by Function

(only for SM specification)
Circulation Pump Stand-by function can be set in this mode.
! SM Replenishment Setting (only for SM

specification)
3. Mode
Forced replenishment ON/OFF can be set.
! Functions
! Program Timer Setting

The mode can be moved to the program timer setting.
At the installation, set the date/time and program timer.
! Machine Type Information

The machine type information is displayed.
35800 2/2
35920
Maintenance
Self-diagnostic

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic
Description for Self-diagnostic
In Self-diagnostic, there are Image Path Check and Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
• For the details of Media Drive Self-diagnostic, refer to ☞ Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
Display (Self-diagnostic: 35, 35i) Display (Image Path Check: 35, 35i)
3. Mode
Failed portion display
NOTE
• For 35i, images for Laser Confirmation in the Image Path Check display changes to For iBeam Confirmation.
! Explanation
! Image Path Check

Transfer the data in each data path to judge the failure part by the CRC check or data comparison.
! Film Series Image Path

Put a check mark to check when any lines and/or blur can be seen on the scanned image.
Diagnosis content for Film Series Image Path (35, 35i)
Scanner -> Main PC
Photometry Section Dirt Check
NOTE
• The Film Series Image Path is not displayed for the Stand-alone Printer.
! Test Print
Put a check mark for Test Print and perform the following checks, if an abnormal print is made from the scanned image though the
scanned image saved to the storage media was normal.
NOTE
• Also perform the checks in the following conditions.
• Lines and noises are seen on the print.
• The color on the print is not good. (Black and white are not good.)
• The color on the print gets worse by performing the setup.
• The color on the print does not become better by performing the setup.
NOTE
• ← indicates it is same as on the left.
35920 1/6
35920
Maintenance
• − stands for unused.
Diagnosis of Test Print

35 35i
Main PC -> Laser control PCB Main PC -> iBeam Control PCB
Test Print Check Result ←
AOM Setup Value Confirmation iBeam Setup Value
! Media Series Image Path/Film Series Image Path/Test Print

Model Explanation
35, 35i Put a checkmark for Film Series Image Path and Test Print to check when it is difficult to point out
the problem.
NOTE
3. Mode
• The result of the diagnosis contains all the results of Film Series Image Path and Test Print.
! Test Print Image selection

Model Explanation
35 Select the image to transfer from the images for checking the laser or the files.
35i Select the image to transfer from the For iBeam Confirmation or the files.
NOTE
• Available files are 24-bit BMP and 32-bit BMP files only.
! Paper Magazine for Test Print

Set the magazine to make a test print.
! Test Print Advance Length

Set the paper advance length to make a test print.
! Execution Time
Displays the expected time for the diagnostics.
! Start Test
The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to start the diagnostics.
! Test Print Check Result

Check the test print and put a checkmark to either of Good or No Good of Test Print Check Result. Then the result of the diagnostics
appears.
! Save Result
The result of Image Path Check can be saved in a file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result should be saved in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\LogData\DiagLogImgPass.Log.
• Only one file is available to save the result.
! Clear Result
Delete the result of Image Path Check.
! Result
The result of the test is displayed after Image Path Check is completed.
NOTE
• For 35, if AOM Setup Value is displayed as Unknown, the following may cause.
35920 2/6
35920
Maintenance
• When making the test print, Dairy Setup or Initial Setup has not been performed for the selected paper.
! Checking procedure
1. Select a Test Item.

NOTE
• When a checkmark is given to the Test Print, select a test print image.
2. The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to start the test.
3. The parts with the problems are shown in the Failed portion display.
NOTE
• ← indicates it is same as on the left.
• − stands for unused.
Failed Portion display (problem causes)
3. Mode
35 35i
Scanner unit ←
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (CCD Side) ←
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (Light Source Side) ←
Failed to diagnose. (LED light source temperature is being ←
adjusted.)*1
Failed to diagnose. (Focus Adjustment is not executed.)*1 ←
Failed to diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.) *1
←
Failed to diagnose.*1 ←
PC interface PCB ←
LVDS cable between the scanner ↔ PC interface PCB ←
USB cable between PC interface PCB ↔ Laser Control PCB −
− USB cable between PC Interface PCB ↔ iBeam Control PCB
Laser control PCB −
− iBeam Control PCB
R Laser Deterioration −
G Laser Deterioration −
B Laser Deterioration −
− R iBeam Deterioration
− G iBeam Deterioration
− B iBeam Deterioration
R Laser Failure −
G Laser Failure −
B Laser Failure −
− R iBeam Failure
− G iBeam Failure
− B iBeam Failure
Setup failure ←
R Laser failure or Setup failure −
G Laser failure or Setup failure −
B Laser failure or Setup failure −
− R iBeam failure or Setup failure
− G iBeam failure or Setup failure
− B iBeam failure or Setup failure
The processing solution is out of control. ←
*1. When the dirt in the photometry section was not checked properly, the message "Failed to diagnose." appears.
35920 3/6
35920
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• The message, Failed to diagnose. (LED light source temperature is being adjusted.), Failed to diagnose. (Focus
Adjustment is not executed.), Failed to diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.), or Failed to diagnose. may be
displayed when the self-diagnosis is not performed normally in checking the scanner unit/light source section.
3. Mode
35920 4/6
35920
Maintenance

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Media Drive Self-diagnostic
Description for Self-diagnostic
In Self-diagnostic, there are Image Path Check and Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
• For the details of Image Path Check, refer to ☞ Self-diagnostic.
3. Mode
S3406-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Media Drive Self-diagnostic

Perform Media Drive Self-diagnostic when reading and writing from/to the media drive is not performed normally.
For the media drive diagnostic, the following process is carried out to get result. The fixed data on the hard disk is written to the
specified drive and the data is returned to the hard disk. Then the fixed data on the hard disk and the data returned to the hard disk are
compared.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Media Drive Self-diagnostic when the following message appears even though the media is set to the
media drive.
• 1503:The appropriate file was not found.
• 1510:Read the data. Set the media.
• 1511:Write the data. Set the media.
• 1512:Data was not read from the media.
! Drive
The media drive with the check mark is performed the writing test.
! Name
Displays the name of media drive.
NOTE
• Displays the media that is registered at option registration.
• For CD and DVD, if type is registered at input, the name will not displayed.
For conducting self-diagnosis, register the type as output or input/output, and prepare writable disk.
! Failed Counts
The denominator shows the number of tests and the numerator shows the number of tests failed.
35920 5/6
35920
Maintenance
! Communication System
Displays the communication type of media drive.
! Failed Information
Displays the cause of error when performing the writing test of media drive.
! Executed Counts (Initial value: 5) (input range: 1 to 60)

Can set how many tests are performed to write the data set to Data Size into the media drive.
! Data Size (MB) (Initial value: 10) (input range: 1 to 500)

Can set the data size to perform the writing test to the media drive.
! Execution Time
3. Mode
Displays the time required for performing the writing test to the media drive.
NOTE
• The Execution Time varies depending on the number of drives with the check marks, Executed Counts and Data Size.
! Start Writing Test

The Media Drive Self-diagnostic dialog appears, click Yes to start the diagnostic.
! Save Result
The result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic can be saved in a file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result of writing to the media drive is saved in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\LogData\DiagLogMedia.log.
• Only one file is available to save the writing test result of the media drive.
! Clear Result
Delete the result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
1. Insert the media to perform the writing test into the media drive.
IMPORTANT
• In the case of CD-R/RW and Multi DVD drive, do not use the important media since the data is overwritten.
• In the case of other than CD-R/RW and Multi DVD drive, when the data is added then the Media Drive Self-
diagnostic is finished, the data is deleted.
2. Put a check mark for the drive to perform the writing test.
3. Set the Executed Counts and Data Size.
4. Clicking Start Writing Test displays the dialog. Click YES to start the test.
5. The cause of error is displayed in the Failed Information.
Causes of the problem
Media is not set. Data Comparison error.
The media is write protected. Failed to read and write.
Capacity error.
35920 6/6
36000
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Paper sensor adjustment ! Adjustment
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment
1. Check that each printer cover of the printer
section and printer doors are closed.
2. Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not
displayed if the service personnel password has
not been input.
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is completed normally, OK is
3. Mode
displayed.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor
is from 1 to 169
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is not completed normally, − is
displayed.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is
S3370-00-00 0 or 170 or more
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked
and set by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Paper Sensor Adjustment (standard value: 5)

(input range: 0 to 255)
It is the standard value to be used for adjusting the LED light
intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each
sensor is from 1 to 169.
• When the paper sensor LED light intensity adjustment
was finished abnormally, the numeric value input section
becomes 0 and the status section becomes -.
! Functions
! Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• With this Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
function, the sensors below are adjusted.
Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value
Adjustment
Paper end sensor A or B
Paper loading sensor
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right)
Exposure start sensor
Exposure end sensor
• The paper end sensor A is not displayed when the dual

paper magazine unit is not attached.
36000 1/1
36010
Paper Advance Unit Correction ! Paper Stop Position Correction (Initial value:
0.0) (Input range: −4.0 to +4.0)
Bringing up the display Corrects the stop position of the paper rear end where the turn
unit receive the paper from the exposure advance unit.
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Unit
Correction Arm unit 2 Paper transfer position
3. Mode
S3386-00-SM00
Turn unit Paper receiving position
NOTE
G083157
password (2260).
! Functions
! Explanation
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation
Carry out each correction for the paper advance unit.
The correction values for Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position
IMPORTANT Correction and Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position
• When the paper advance unit correction is carried Correction are canceled, and arm unit 2 moves back and forth
out by paper magazine A or B, it is complete. between the paper transfer position and the paper receiving
position.
• After replacing the paper advance unit, carry out The following operation starts by pressing YES.
adjustment by following the procedure below.
• First time: Carries out the initial operation and arm unit 2
1. Carry out ☞ Turn Unit Stop Position Correction. moves to the paper receiving position.
2. Carry out ☞ Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position • Second time: Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer
Correction. position.
3. Carry out ☞ Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position
Correction. NOTE
• The operation returns to the first operation by pressing
4. Carry out ☞ Paper Stop Position Correction.
YES, after pressing another key or opening/closing the
paper advance door.
! Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction
(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: −1.0 to +1.0) ! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation Confirmation
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 is corrected.
To test arm unit 2, apply the following two values: Arm Unit
2 Lower Stop Position Correction and Arm Unit 2 Upper
! Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction Stop Position Correction. If it is functioning properly, test
(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: −4.0 to +4.0) arm unit 2 will repeatedly move back and forth between the
The paper transfer position of arm unit 2 can be corrected. paper transfer position and the paper receiving position.
! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction (Initial ! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation (left) (3502)
value: 0.0) (Input range: −2.0 to +2.0) Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer position (left).
The paper receive position of the turn unit can be corrected.
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation (right) (3502)
Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer position (right).
36010 1/4
36010
! Test Operation for the Turn Unit Stop Position 2. Input the correction value so that the height
Correction of surface A of the turn unit is 2 mm high
from surface B of the exposure advance unit.
The correction value for Turn Unit Stop Position Correction
is canceled, and the turn unit stops at the paper receiving IMPORTANT
position.
• When checking, keep your eyes horizontal so
as not to tilt the adjustment position.
! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction Test
Operation Confirmation
The correction value for Turn Unit Stop Position Correction
becomes valid, and the turn unit stops at the paper receiving
position.
! Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position

Correction
3. Mode
The correction value for Paper Stop Position Correction is
canceled, and the paper is loaded and stops at the paper stop
position after the turn unit operates the initial operation.
! Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation

Confirmation
The correction value for Paper Stop Position Correction
becomes valid, and the paper is loaded and stops at the paper
stop position after the turn unit operates the initial operation. Surface A of the turn unit
Surface B of the exposure advance unit
! Adjustment −correction
! Before each adjustment

+correction
IMPORTANT
G074586
• For each adjustment, turn ON Interlock Switch
(Printer Door 1, 2) and keep printer door 2 opened ! Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction
on purpose and confirm that arm unit 2 and turn unit
operate correctly. Be sure not to put your hands into
the paper advance section.
1. Carry out Arm Unit 2 Test Operation
Confirmation via the F: Functions, and
• Be sure not to pull the paper advance unit out with move arm unit 2 to the paper transfer
the Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) turned ON. It
position.
may damage the machine.
Remove the printer door 2 interlock switch, attach it to the
2. Input the correction value so that surface C
main body, then turn on the switch. of arm unit 2 may come to the position 1 to 2
mm away from surface D of the processor
NOTE
loading unit.
• Attach the printer door 2 interlock switch to the main
body with tape or the like. IMPORTANT
• When checking, keep your eyes horizontal so
! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction as not to tilt the adjustment position.
• When + correction value is input too much for
1. Carry out Turn Unit Stop Position Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position
Correction Test Operation Confirmation Correction, it touches surface D of the
via the F: Functions, and stop the turn unit processor loading unit. Be careful to avoid it.
at the paper receiving position.
36010 2/4
36010
Make a clearance of 48.3 ± 0.5 mm between the surfaces E and F.

Surface D of the processor loading unit
Surface E of arm unit 2
+correction
−correction
Make a clearance of 1 to 2 mm
3. Mode
Surface C of arm unit 2 between the surfaces C and D.
+correction
−correction
G074584
! Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction
1. Carry out Arm Unit 2 Test Operation

Confirmation via the F: Functions, and
move arm unit 2 to the paper receiving
position.
2. Input the correction value so that surface E
of arm unit 2 come away 48.3 ± 0.5 mm from
surface F of the turn unit.
NOTE
• Measure surface E of arm unit 2 from the bottom
edge of the turn unit guide.
Bottom edge of the guide

Surface F of the turn unit
G074579
! Paper Stop Position Correction
1. Carry out Paper Stop Position Correction

Test Operation Confirmation via the F:
Functions, and stop the paper at the turn
unit.
Surface E of arm unit 2

G076391
36010 3/4
36010
2. Input the correction value so that the front

edge of the turn unit guide (lower) come
away −1 to 0 mm from the paper rear end.
IMPORTANT
• Check the paper rear end carefully.
From −1 to 0 mm
3. Mode
Paper
Paper rear end
Front edge of the turn unit guide (lower)
−correction +correction
G074585
3. The message Confirm the paper stop

position, then remove the paper. appears.
Press the YES: OK key.
IMPORTANT
• If one or more of the doors in the printer
section is open, paper is not fed.
4. Open the paper advance door, remove the
test paper from the bottom of the paper
advance unit, then press the YES: OK key.
36010 4/4
36020
Exposure Magnification Correction • The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
imprinting.
[35]
! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine
Bringing up the display A/B)
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment Validate each correction value to make test prints.
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification NOTE
Correction
• The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.
Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
G066121
3. Mode
• A piece of paper with the advance length 100 mm is
printed.
A B
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
imprinting.
! Adjustment
1. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.

IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the paper of 152 mm or
more.
S3318-00-SM00
2. Measure length A on the test print.
NOTE
password (2260).
! Explanation
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the
paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is
carried out for any one of magazine A, B, it is
complete. G074496
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or 3. Select the line from part A and input the
more, make a test print with the maximum paper measured value in part B.
size which you used, then measure the length
between most outside lines of it. IMPORTANT
• Measure the length of 130 line usually.
! Cyan Line Exposure Size (Initial value: 130.0 • When you do not have the paper of 152 mm
mm) (Input range: 125.0 to 135.0 mm) width or more, measure the length between
most outside lines of it.
The length of the test print image is measured, and then the
actual measurement value can be entered. 4. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
! Functions 5. Confirm that Part A on the test print is within
±0.1 mm of the specified length.
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)
6. Perform exposure center correction.
Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
☞ 36070
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 100 mm is 7. Carry out the Exposure Position
printed. Adjustment.
☞ 36030
36020 1/1
36030
Exposure Position Adjustment [35] ! BLOCK-B Yellow Offset Value of Main

Scanning
Bringing up the display Measure the dimension between the cyan and yellow lines on
BLOCK-C 0i and input the measured value if there is no
image where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position
test print BLOCK-B.
Adjustment
! BLOCK-D1 Check Image Selection 1 for Sub
Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Input the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with
the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D1.
! BLOCK-D2 Check Image Selection 2 for Sub

Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
3. Mode
Input the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with
the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
! Functions

NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 355.6 mm is
S3313-00-SM00 printed.
NOTE • The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel imprinting.
password (2260).
! Explanation A/B)
Carry out correction so that the exposure position in the laser Validate each correction value to make test prints.
unit is positioned at the center of the test print. Correct the NOTE
positions of the R, G, B laser main and sub scanning. • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
IMPORTANT print.
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
out for any one of magazine A/B, it is complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or
more, make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you used, then measure the dimension of G066121
the most outside line of it. • A piece of paper with the advance length 355.6 mm is
printed.
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 1 for Main • The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line imprinting.
Input the number and letter of the image where the cyan line
aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B. ! Adjustment
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 2 for Main 1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate
Scan Cyan Line = Yellow Line Correction has been completed.
Input the number and letter of the image where the cyan line ☞ 36020
aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B. 2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
! BLOCK-B Magenta Offset Value of Main IMPORTANT
Scanning • Make a test print with the paper whose width
is 152 mm or more.
Measure the dimension between the cyan and magenta lines
on BLOCK-C 0i and input the measured value if there is no 3. Check the number of the part where the cyan
image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the line aligns with the magenta line on the test
test print BLOCK-B. print BLOCK-B. And check the number of the
36030 1/3
36030
part where the cyan line aligns with the the part where the cyan line aligns with the
yellow line. yellow line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
Magenta line Magenta line
Yellow line
Cyan line Cyan line
3. Mode
Yellow line G068456
IMPORTANT
G074510
• Check the line using the loupe.
IMPORTANT
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to
• Check the line using the loupe. Service personnel tool list.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to ☞ 80310
Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310 7. Input each checked number.
4. Check BLOCK-C 0i and input the offset 8. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
value of main scanning and make a Test
Print again if there is no part where the cyan 9. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and
line aligns with the magenta/yellow line on yellow) of the column 0a to 0h in BLOCK-B
the test print BLOCK-B. make the straightest line comparing with the
other columns.
Check area
Plus correction
Minus correction
G068455
5. Input each checked number.

6. Check the number of the part where the cyan
line aligns with the magenta line on the test
print BLOCK-D1. And check the number of
G074511
10. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and

yellow) of the column 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1
36030 2/3
36030
and D2 make the straightest line comparing

with the other columns.
IMPORTANT
• When the print is made via Test Print
(Confirmation), it is exposed on the same
position, 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1 and D2.
Check area
3. Mode
G074512
11. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and

yellow) make a straight line in BLOCK-E. If it
is not the straight line, carry out the Exposure
Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment.
☞ 36040
IMPORTANT
• Check line 130 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm
width or more, make a test print with the
maximum paper size which you used, then
check the dimension of the most outside line
of it.
G074497
36030 3/3
36040
Exposure Magnification Fine NOTE

Adjustment [35] printed.
• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
Bringing up the display imprinting.
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification ! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine
Fine Adjustment A/B)
Validate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
print.
3. Mode
G066121
printed.
imprinting.
! Adjustment
S3329-00-SM00
1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate
Correction and Exposure Position
NOTE
Adjustment have been complete.
password (2260).
☞ 36020
☞ 36030
! Explanation 2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
This mode is used to correct dot displacement for each laser of
B, G and R on the both sides of a print. • Check line 130 usually.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification fine adjustment is maximum paper size which you used, then
carried out for any one of magazine A/B, it is
complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or
more, make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you used, then measure the dimension of
the most outside line of it.
! Magenta Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0

dot) (Input range: −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
G laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the
! Yellow Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0

dot) (Input range: −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
B laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the
! Functions

36040 1/2
36040
check the dimension of the most outside line Correcting direction of the magenta line
of it. Correcting to the right +correction
Correcting to the left −correction
4. Input the correction value.

5. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
6. Check the magenta and yellow lines make a
straight line with cyan line in the vertical
direction at 0 on the test print again.
1 dot
7. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment
again.
☞ 36030
3. Mode
M
+correction −correction
G074513
IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to
Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
3. Carry out the correction so that the magenta
and yellow lines make a straight line with
cyan line in the vertical direction at 0 on the
test print.
IMPORTANT
• Check line 130 usually.
maximum paper size which you used, then
check the dimension of the most outside line
of it.
• If there is no image where magenta and cyan
lines make one line, carry out the fine
adjustment by 0.1 dot.
• Check the line with the most outside chart of
the test print.
NOTE
• For the correcting direction of the magenta line,
refer to the list below.
36040 2/2
36050
Paper Advance Length Correction NOTE

imprinting.
• When magazines are positioned at magazine mounts A
and B, paper is firstly loaded to magazine mount A.
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Length
Correction
! Test Paper Advance checks
Validate the correction and advance the test papers of 200.0
mm for the first and 800.0 mm for the second.
NOTE
imprinting.
! Loading
3. Mode
The paper is loaded.
! Rewind
The paper is rewound.
! Adjustment
S3385-00-00 1. Set the magazine to carry out the paper
NOTE advance length correction on the magazine
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel mount A/B.
password (2260).
2. Carry out Test Paper Advance of
Functions.
! Explanation
3. Open printer door 2 and remove the test
Correct the paper advance length and the advance roller feed paper from the bottom of the paper advance
error. unit. Then, press the YES: OK key.
IMPORTANT
4. Measure each test paper length of the first
• The paper advance length correction is to be carried and second paper which are removed.
out with the basis of magazine A.
5. Enter each measurement dimension.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (1st) (Initial 6. After correcting, carry out Test Paper
value: 150.0 mm) (Input range: 145.0 to 155.0 Advance Confirmation of F: Functions
mm) and be sure to make a print and check if the
The first paper is for the correction of the paper which has just advance length is correct.
been fed out from the paper magazine (distance between the
paper loading sensor and the paper cutter) and the advance
7. If the advance length is not correct, adjust it
feed error. according to the following procedure.
When the print advance length of the first paper after
! Test Paper Measurement Value (2nd) (Initial loading is not correct.
value: 200.0 mm) (Input range: 180.0 to 220.0 When the Carry out + correction for Test Paper
mm) advance length Measurement Value (1st).
The second test paper is for the correction of the advance is long.
roller feed error. When the Carry out − correction for Test Paper
advance length Measurement Value (1st).
is short.
! Functions
When the print advance length of the second or later
! Test Paper Advance
paper after loading is not correct.
Invalidate the correction and advance the test papers of 200.0 Reset the measurement dimensions for Test Paper
mm for the first and 800.0 mm for the second. Measurement Valued (1st, 2nd) to the initial values and
IMPORTANT adjust them again.
• Be sure to enter the measurement dimensions of
the first and second test papers at the same time.
36050 1/1
36060
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction
Display (35) Display (35i)
3. Mode
NOTE
! Explanation
Correct if the image is exposed diagonally toward the paper because of the paper zigzagging.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B.
! A − B (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: −2.0 to +2.0 mm)

The correction for each magazine (paper width and surface) is necessary.
! Paper Magazine A or B
You can select paper magazine A or B.
! Functions
35, 35i Explanation
F Test Print 1 (Paper Magazine A) (magazine B) Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
• The advance length of the test print is 355.6 mm.
F Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A) (magazine Validate the correction and output two test prints.
B) *1 NOTE
F Test Print 2 (Magazine A) (magazine B) Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
F Test Print Confirmation 2 (Paper Magazine A) (magazine Validate the correction and output two test prints.
B) *1 NOTE
F Loading (Paper Magazine A) (magazine B) The paper is loaded.
F Rewind The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
36060 1/3
36060
*1. The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test print.
The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP imprinting.
G066121
! Adjustment
1. Clean pressure pins of the arm units using a cotton swab (two places).
Pressure pins are in the positions where the arrows indicate. Insert a cotton swab into the gap between the arm units to clean the
pins.
Clean the gap.
3. Mode
Arm units
Cotton swab
Clean the gap.
Cotton swab
G082875
2. Set the paper magazine to be carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction to magazine mount A/B.
IMPORTANT
• For magazine B, check if the zigzagging adjustment for paper supply unit B is completed.
☞ 25730
3. Check that the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit has been finished.
Refer to ☞ 25620.
4. Select magazine A/B.
5. Execute Test Print 1 of Functions.
6. Measure the difference of dimensions of lines A and B on the second test print. And input the value to
(A−B).
NOTE
• If the measured values of the test print are line A: 121 mm and B: 120 mm, for example, see the below.
36060 2/3
36060
• Line A (121 mm) − Line B (120 mm) = Correction value A − B (1 mm)
Line A
A
Line B
3. Mode
C
G083159
7. After the correction, make test prints by Test Print Confirmation 2 from Functions. Then, confirm that
the dimension differences between lines A and B and between lines A and C (on the second test print)
are within the values in the following table.
NOTE
• For example, if the measurement value of line A (on the second test print) is 120 mm
Check that the difference of dimension of lines A and C (on the second test print) is within the tolerance level in the
following table.
Test Print Tolerance range

355.6 mm A−B±0.5 mm, both A and B are between 119.5 mm or more and 120.5 mm
or less.
610.0 mm A−C is ±1.0 mm, both A and C are between 119 mm or more and 121 mm
or less.
IMPORTANT
• If the dimension difference of lines A and C (on the second test print) is out of the tolerance level, input the
correction value to (A−B).
• Check the test prints again and adjust the unit repeatedly until the value is within the tolerance level.
Status Correction Status Correction
A>B Plus correction A<B Minus correction
8. If the dimension differences of lines A and C both on the first and second test prints are out of the
tolerance level, check the following adjustment.
Paper magazine Adjustment
Magazine A Check the condition of the paper magazine. ☞ 22000
Magazine B Check the condition of the paper magazine. ☞ 22000
Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit B. ☞ 25730
36060 3/3
36070
Exposure Center Correction ! Master (Exposure Center Correction Value)

The exposure center correction value which is calculated from
Bringing up the display the input values of master (Exposure Center Correction Value
1) and (Exposure Center Correction Value 2) is displayed.
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment →
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Center Correction NOTE
• When the correction value is over ±2.0 mm, the
correction value display part turns red and it cannot be
registered.
! Functions
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B) without

Correction Value
Invalidate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center
3. Mode
Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each
Paper Magazine) to make a test print.
! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B)

with Master Value
Validate Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and
make a test print.
S3387-00-SM00 ! Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B)

NOTE with Master and Paper Magazine Values
• For 35i, Paper width: 82.5 to 203 mm Validate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center
Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each
! Explanation Paper Magazine) to make a test print.
NOTE
The exposure center correction can be carried out for each • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
paper width and surface. print.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out Master (Exposure Center Correction
Value) and the exposure center correction for each
paper magazine A, B.
G066121
! Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper • When making test prints in Functions, a print with the
Magazine) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: − advance length of 100 mm is made and the paper width
2.0 to +2.0 mm) 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.
The reference line is corrected to be in the center on the test
paper for each paper magazine (for each paper width and ! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B)
emulsion type). The paper is loaded.
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 1) Paper ! Rewind

Left End − Center (Initial value: 127.0 mm)
(Input range: 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm) The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Input the length from the left end to the center line on the
leading end of the test print.
! Adjustment
! Master (Exposure Center Correction 2) Center Exposure Center Correction (Master)

− Paper Right End (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input NOTE
range: 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm) • When making a test print from magazine mount B, check
Input the length from the center line to the right end on the if the zigzagging adjustment for magazine mount B is
leading end of the test print. completed.
☞ 25730
1. Check that Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction has been completed.
☞ 36060
36070 1/2
36070
2. Check that Exposure Zoom Rate 4. Measure dimension B from the left end to the
Correction has been completed. (35) center line on the test print.
☞ 36020 IMPORTANT
3. Set the paper magazine to carry out Master • When measuring the test print, use the front
(Exposure Center Correction Value) to end of the test print.
magazine mount A/B.
Center line
Front end of the test print
5. Carry out Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)
without Correction Value of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you use.
3. Mode
6. Measure the length from the left end to the
center line and the length from the center line
to the right end on the leading end of the test
print.
Center line
A
G074516
5. Carry out correction so that dimension B is

half of the paper width.
B is smaller than one half of Minus correction
the paper width.
B is smaller than one half of Plus correction
the paper width.
6. After correcting, carry out Test Print

Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B) with
Master and Paper Magazine Values of F:
Functions and be sure to make a print and
G074515 check if the exposure center is correct.
7. Input each measurement dimension.
8. After correcting, carry out Test Print
Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/B) with
Master Value of F: Functions and make a
print and check if the exposure center is
correct.
Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper

Magazine)
1. Set the paper magazine for Exposure Center
Correction (for each Paper Magazine) to the
magazine mount A/B.
3. Carry out Test Print Confirmation (Paper
Magazine A/B) with Master Value of F:
Functions.
36070 2/2
36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 Measure the length between the test print front end and 0 mm-
line, then input measured value.
Bringing up the display ! 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment Measurement Value (Initial value: 254.0 mm)
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance (Input range: 244.0 to 264.0 mm)
Adjustment 1
The Exposure Advance Motor Speed is corrected.
Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of
the test print and input measured value.
! Functions

Invalidate the correction value that is entered for Exposure
3. Mode
Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed
Correction and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 305 mm is
printed.
NOTE
imprinting.
S3316-00-SM00 ! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine

NOTE A/B)
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to bring up this
Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start
display.
Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed
! Explanation A piece of paper with the advance length of 305 mm is
printed.
Pressure rollers 1 Pressure rollers 3 NOTE
print.
G066121
imprinting.
Pressure rollers 2 ! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B)

G084437
The exposure start position correction and exposure advance The paper is loaded.
motor 2 speed correction at the time of advancing paper after
putting or releasing the pressure roller 1, 2 and 3 of the ! Rewind
exposure advance unit, can be performed.
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
IMPORTANT
• The exposure advance adjustment 1 exposure
! Adjustment
operation will be enabled for all the paper advance
lengths.
• If the exposure advance adjustment is carried out
1. Select and execute Test Print (Paper
for any one of magazine A/B, the correction is Magazine A/B) via F:Functions.
complete. 2. Measure the length between the paper front
end and 0 mm-line of the test print, then
! Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper input the measured value in Paper Front
Measurement Value (Initial value: 25.4 mm) End - 0 mm-line Test Print Measurement
(Input range: 23.4 to 27.4 mm) Value.
The Exposure Start Position is corrected.
36080 1/2
36080
3. Measure the length between 0 mm-line and

254 mm line of the test print, then input the
value in 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test
Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value

305 mm
3. Mode
0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value
G074517
4. Select and execute Test Print Confirmation

(Paper Magazine A/B) via F:Functions.
5. Check that each measurement of a test print
that is made is same as followings.
Length between the paper front end 25.4 mm
and 0 mm-line
Length between 0 to 254 mm-line 254.0 mm

A
Rear end
G074518
36080 2/2
36081
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of
the test print and input measured value.

! Functions
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance
Adjustment 2
Invalidate the correction value that is entered for Exposure
Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed
printed.
NOTE
imprinting.
3. Mode
A/B)
Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start
Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed
printed.
S3316-00-SM01 NOTE
NOTE • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to bring up this print.
display.
! Explanation
Pressure rollers 1 Pressure rollers 3 G066121

imprinting.
! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B)

! Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
Pressure rollers 2 ! Adjustment

G084437
The exposure advance motor 1 speed correction when paper
was advanced by the exposure advance unit pressure roller 1 1. Select and execute Test Print (Paper
(putting pressure) or pressure roller 2 or 3 (releasing pressure), Magazine A/B) via F:Functions.
can be performed. 2. Measure the length between 0 mm-line and
IMPORTANT 254 mm line of the test print, then input the
• The exposure advance adjustment 2 exposure
operation will be enabled when the paper advance
length is from 384 mm to 466.9 mm long.
• If the exposure advance adjustment is carried out
for any one of magazine A/B, the correction is
complete.
! 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper

Measurement Value (Initial value: 254.0 mm)
(Input range: 244.0 to 264.0 mm)
The Exposure Advance Motor Speed is corrected.
36081 1/2
36081
value in 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test

383 mm
3. Mode
0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value
G084435
3. Select and execute Test Print Confirmation

(Paper Magazine A/B) via F:Functions.
4. Check that the created test print 0 mm-254
mm line distance is 254.0 mm.
36081 2/2
36090
Paper pressure operation correction

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation Correction
3. Mode
S3389-00-SM00
NOTE
! Explanation
The banding for each magazine type can be carried out by adjusting the clearance between the pressure roller of the exposure advance
unit and the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out paper pressure operation correction for each paper type.
• Copy the paper width correction value that the correction is finished to the same paper type paper magazine.
! Paper Pressure Operation Correction (Initial value: 1) (input range: 1 to 13)

Correct the pressure release of the pressure roller.
! Functions

Prints the gray test prints (13 patterns).
Test prints with the advance length of 152 mm to 164 mm is printed.
NOTE
• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP imprinting.
! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)

Validate the Paper Pressure Operation Correction to make a test print.
A test print which number is registered to the paper pressure operation correction is made.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test print.
G066121
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP imprinting.
36090 1/3
36090
! Loading (Paper Magazine A/B)

! Rewind
The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
! Adjustment
1. Select and execute Test Print via F:Functions.

NOTE
• 13 patterns of the test prints are made as shown in the list below.
• When the CVP (optional) has been installed, the print No. and the revolution pulse count are printed on the back print.
Print No. Revolution pulse count Revolution pulse count Test print advance length (mm)
3. Mode
(pps) (pps)
(35) (35i)
1 560 1073 152
2 547 919 153
3 532 873 154
4 517 837 155
5 501 805 156
6 487 776 157
7 473 749 158
8 459 723 159
9 444 701 160
10 429 680 161
11 415 659 162
12 400 637 163
13 387 616 164
2. Banding appears around 17 mm or 26 mm from the rear end on the test print. Check the table below
and input the correction pattern No. as the correction value.
Banding position Correction Banding position Correction
Rear end: At about 26 mm +2 Rear end: At about 17 mm −2
Example: Around 26 mm at the rear end Example: Around 17 mm at the rear end
Banding (26 mm at the rear end) −2 Banding (17 mm at the rear end)
+2
10 11 12 13
Test print with no
banding
Test print with no Print No.

banding
Print No.
Paper advance direction Paper advance direction
36090 2/3
36090
3. Carry out the procedure 1 and 2 for each paper magazine type.
3. Mode
36090 3/3
36100
WB width correction ! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine

A/B)
Bringing up the display Validate the correction value to make a test print.
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → NOTE
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → WB Width Correction • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.
G066121
printed.
3. Mode
imprinting.
! WB width correction
IMPORTANT
• When the margin on the test print is 0.5 mm, the
correction is not necessary.
S3394-00-SM00
1. Check that the exposure center correction
! Explanation has been completed.
☞ 36070
The margin correction can be carried out for each paper width
and surface.
2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT 3. Measure the right and left margins on the
test print.
• When the correction is carried out for any one of
magazine A/B, it is complete.
• This correction affects the exposure position both of
WB and BL, because the image exposure position is
corrected.
! Paper Magazine (Input range: 82.5 to 210 mm)

Specify the paper magazine to be corrected.
! Left Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm)

Correct the left margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0
mm.
! Right Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm)

Correct the right margin of the test print so that it becomes 5.0
mm.
G068472
! Functions 4. Input the measured value in each item.

5. Carry out Test Print Confirmation of F:
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B) Functions and make sure that the margin is
Invalidate the correction value to make a test print. 5.0 mm.
NOTE
printed.
imprinting.
36100 1/1
36700
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment
Compact Archive Unit Initialization sequentially. This reduces the time for the hard disk drive
to access the data.
• Carry out Defrag regularly to improve the performance
Bringing up the display of the computer.
→ Compact Archive Unit Adjustment → Compact Archive Unit
Initialization
! Procedure
IMPORTANT ! Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit

• Carry out the Hard disk drive format for Compact
Archive Unit first when the compact archive unit is 1. Click F: Functions.
installed newly or the hard disk drive of the compact
archive unit is replaced.
2. Click Initialization of the Compact Archive
Refer to the PC Service Manual. Unit.
Windows 2000 format dialog is displayed.
3. Mode
S3401-00-SM00
! Explanation
G069963
The compact archive unit can be initialized or optimized.
3. Click Start.
IMPORTANT Initialization starts.
• The backup data of the compact archive unit is not IMPORTANT
made.
• You cannot change the setting of Capacity,
• If the data in the compact archive unit was initialized File system, Allocation unit size, and Enable
accidentally, it cannot be recovered. Compression on the format dialog.
• If you select the Enable Compression, it takes
! Functions approx. 35 minutes.
• If you select Quick Format, it finishes in a few
! Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit of seconds.
The image data which is saved in the hard disk drive of the
compact archive unit can be initialized. ! Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to
1. Click F: Functions.
display this.
! Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit

The hard disk drive of the compact archive unit can be
optimized.
NOTE
• A fragmented hard disk drive stores parts of a file in
many different locations. Defrag is placing all data
36700 1/2
36700
2. Click Defragmentation of the Compact

Archive Unit.
Disk Defragementer is displayed and the optimization
(defragmentation) starts.
3. Mode
G069964
IMPORTANT
• If the fragments is 7%, it takes approx. 25
minutes for defragmentation.
NOTE
• After finishing the defragmentation,
Defragmentation Complete is sometimes
displayed. When the message is displayed, select
Close.
36700 2/2
36710
Compact Archive Unit Capacity ! Drive

Check You can check the drive and capacity to use the compact
archive.
Bringing up the display Drive

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment Select the drive for the compact archive unit.
→ Compact Archive Unit Adjustment → Compact Archive Unit
Capacity Check
IMPORTANT
• Check the drive letter of the hard disk drive for
When TYPE1 is selected compact archive unit in Windows Explorer.
• The conditions for a compact archive unit are as
follows.
• Hard disk
• Drive other than C drive
• Available 5 GB or more free space
3. Mode
Capacity
All capacity of the drive which is selected is displayed.
Free Space
Free space of the drive which is selected is displayed.
! Save Data
You can check the data saved in the compact archive.
All Order Counts
S3402-00-SM00 All order counts saved is displayed.
When TYPE2 is selected All Frame Counts

All frame counts saved is displayed.
Hold on Save Frame Counts
Hold on save frame counts is displayed.
Hold on Save Used Space
Hold on save used space is displayed.
! Compact Archive Unit Capacity Setting
NOTE
• Appears when Compact Archive Unit TYPE2 is
selected.
You can set the size of the capacity used for the compact
archive unit and that of the space used for Hold on save.
Size to be used for Compact Archive Unit
S3402-00-SM01 Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for the
compact archive unit.
! Explanation Setting from 0.1 GB up to 80% of the hard disk drive capacity
is available.
You can check the compact archive unit capacity.
The size to be used for Hold on Save
! Unit Number Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for Hold on
Save.
You can set the unit number of the compact archive unit.
Setting from 0 GB up to a 50% of the capacity to be used for
NOTE Compact Archive Unit is available.
• If there are some QSS with which are equipped the
compact archive unit, change the unit number in order to Default Size
identify each archive unit. Put the settings of the size to be used to the default as for the
• When TYPE 2 is selected, the archive code (2x−xxxx⋅ ⋅ ⋅ compact archive unit and the Hold on save.
⋅) does not appear. NOTE
• The values are changed to the following.
36710 1/2
36710
• Size of the space to be used for Compact Archive

Unit: 80% of the hard disk drive capacity
• The size of the space to be used for Hold on save:
50% of the size of space to be used for Compact
Archive Unit
3. Mode
36710 2/2
37300
Laser Unit Adjustment
Laser Unit Adjustment
Laser Unit Adjustment [35] Condition Details

R laser control temperature 27.7°C to 28.3°C
IMPORTANT
Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment →
Laser Unit Adjustment • The error message of error No. 6107 R Laser
temperature is out of range. appears under the
following condition.
• R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C
and 28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature exceeds 31.0°C (upper
limit temperature) again.
• R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C
and 28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status)
and then the temperature falls under 25.0°C (lower
3. Mode
• ☞ No. 6107
! Laser Unit Thermosensor Display Section
The temperature of the laser unit temperature sensor is
displayed.
NOTE
S3271-00-SM00
• The laser unit control temperature is adjusted using the
laser unit heater and laser unit cooling fan 1and 2, which
! Explanation are installed in the laser unit, to keep it within the control
temperature range.
R Laser Thermosensor
• The laser unit control temperature becomes within the
Laser Unit Thermosensor controlled temperature, and then controlling temperature
of the R laser will start.
• When the displayed temperature is within the following
range, it is normal.
Condition Details
Laser unit control temperature 17.0°C to 42.0°C
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: When the laser unit temperature
ON sensor exceeds 30°C.
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: When the laser unit temperature
OFF sensor lowers to 27°C or less.
Laser unit heater: ON When the laser unit temperature
sensor lowers to 19°C or less.
Laser unit heater: OFF When the laser unit temperature
sensor exceeds 20°C.
Laser unit heater
IMPORTANT
Laser unit
• The error message of error No. 6177 Laser Unit
G076396
temperature is out of range. appears under the
NOTE following conditions.
• Because the R laser thermosensor and laser unit • Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C
thermosensor are inside of the laser unit, you cannot and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
check each sensor. and then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper
! R Thermosensor Display Section
• Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C
The temperature of R laser temperature sensor is displayed. and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
NOTE and then the temperature falls under 15.0°C (lower
limit temperature)again.
• Temperature control is equipped in the R laser and this
temperature control section has been adjusted to become • ☞ No. 6177
within the controlled temperature.
• When the displayed temperature is within the following
range, it is normal.
37300 1/1
37500
Operation Information
Saving the Logdata 2. Bring up the Start menu and select

Accessories via Programs.
3. Select Windows Explorer.
! Explanation
4. Select C:\NKData\LogData in the Local
If a problem occurs while the QSS is running, the operation Disc:C via My Computer.
status when the problem occurs is recorded to HDD as a
Logdata file. 5. Select the necessary Logdata file.
IMPORTANT NOTE
• The Logdata files that are stored automatically are
• Usually the Logdata file is stored automatically,
saved in compressed.
however it can be stored manually too. Select the
file to save, if necessary. • The file name is used from Logdata00.lzh to
Logdata09.lzh.
• The Logdata file is stored automatically in the
following conditions. • Select the necessary file referring to the saved
time of Logdata file.
• When an error occurs:
3. Mode
• When an abnormality occurs in the system program: 6. Press the C key while pressing the Ctrl key
• Up to 10 Logdata files that are stored automatically with the file selected.
are saved. When the number of Logdata files Copy the Logdata using the shortcut key.
exceeds 10, the files will be overwritten from the 7. Press the V key while pressing the Ctrl key.
oldest one.
Paste the Logdata using the shortcut key.
• If the problem occurs several times, or another
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time 8. The file creating time and the contents about
and the contents of the problem. the problem are recorded in the Copy of
File.
NOTE
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information 9. Save the Logdata to the storage media.
shown below with the Logdata and memory data. NOTE
• Status when the problem occurs • The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it
• Operation before the problem occurs to a storage media which has a large capacity such
as MO.
• With or without a error, its kind
• Save the paper which is used when the problem ! To obtain Logdata at present
occurs.
• Any other things you realized 1. Press the L key while pressing the Ctrl key
and the Alt key on the keyboard when the
! How to obtain problem occurs.
IMPORTANT
! To obtain Logdata recorded automatically
when the problem occurs • Carry out it immediately after the problem
occurs. The correct information cannot be
recorded after changing the mode or
1. Press the Windows key on the keyboard if performing other operations.
QSS software works.
S0100-WIN-SM00
37500 1/2
37500
2. Press the Windows key on the keyboard if

QSS software works.
3. Mode
S0100-WIN-SM00
3. Bring up the Start menu and select

Accessories via Programs.
4. Select Windows Explorer.
5. Select C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-## in the Local
Disc:C via My Computer.
NOTE
• The machine type appears in the ## of QSS-##.
6. Select Logdata.
7. Press the C key while pressing the Ctrl key
with the file selected.
Copy the Logdata using the shortcut key.
NOTE
• When the Logdata file is stored manually, it is not
compressed.
8. Press the V key while pressing the Ctrl key.
Paste the Logdata using the shortcut key.
9. The file creating time and the contents about
the problem are recorded in the Copy of
File.
10. Save the Logdata to the storage media.
NOTE
• The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it
to a storage media which has a large capacity such
as MO.
37500 2/2
37510
Saving the memory data 2. Press Memory data inhale.

The display to select CPU appears.
! Explanation
If a problem occurs during the QSS operation, the operation
status when the problem occurs can be recorded as a memory
data.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• If the problem occurs several times, or another
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time
and the contents of the problem.
NOTE
3. Mode
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information
shown below with the Logdata and memory data.
• Status when the problem occurs
S1146-02-SM02
• Operation before the problem occurs
• With or without a error, its kind 3. Select the CPU you want.
The available CPU is shown as an active button to be
• Save the paper which is used when the problem
selected.
occurs.
• Any other things you realized 4. After the dialog of Save As appears, select
output directory.
! Saving procedure
Saving the memory data

1. Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key
and the Alt key on the keyboard when the
problem occurs.
The display to acquire the memory data appears.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out it immediately after the problem
occurs. The correct information cannot be
recorded after changing the mode or
performing other operations.
S1146-06-SM01
IMPORTANT
• The acquired file should be named the store
name, date and the running number.
• Example: Noritsu12-24-01
Noritsu (store name) 12 (month) -24 (day) -01
(running number)
S1146-02-SM00
37510 1/1
37520
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time

Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard.
3. Mode
G083160
NOTE
• For 35i, VFP in the display above changes to LASER.
! Explanation
The current memory data and Logdata can be compressed and saved at the same time when a problem occurs in running the QSS.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• The recorded memory data and Logdata are not the ones recorded automatically when the problem occurs.
Be sure to save the data when the problem occurs.
• The Logdata recorded automatically when the problem occurs can be saved by Saving the Logdata.
☞ 37500
• If the problem occurs several times, or another problem occurs subsequently, it records the time and the contents of
the problem.
NOTE
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information shown below with the Logdata and memory data.
• Status when the problem occurs
• Operation before the problem occurs
• With or without a error, its kind
• Save the paper which is used when the problem occurs.
• Any other things you realized
! Save in
Shows the saving destination of the memory data and Logdata files.
! Browse
Can change the saving destination of data to each media drive or the like.
! START
Saves the memory data and Logdata to the files.
37520 1/2
37520
! CANCEL
Closes the Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display and returns to the QSS display.
! Memory data and Logdata Obtaining Procedure
1. Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs.
Be sure to carry out this operation immediately after the problem occurs. The correct information cannot be recorded after changing the
mode or performing other operations.
2. The Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display appears.
3. Click START in the display to save the memory data and Logdata to the files.
• Save the test result to C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-##_##\Log_Data\Memory\############.
3. Mode
• Before clicking START, clicking Browse in the display can change the saving destination of data to each media drive or the like.
G074618
IMPORTANT
• When closing the Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display forcibly using Ctrl+Alt+Delete, the QSS and
PC operations may be unstable.
• If you start the memory data and Logdata saving function during the QSS process (printing, outputting to the
media, etc.), the QSS process and saving data may become unstable.
4. When finishing saving the memory data and Logdata, the screen returns to the QSS display.
5. End.
37520 2/2
37530
System Version Check on ARCNET communication error

Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard.
3. Mode
G083161
! Explanation
Since communication of each control PCB cannot be performed when ARCNET communication error. occurs, it cannot go into the
System Version Check display from Extension.
If ARCNET communication error. occurs, use System Version Check in the following procedure to go into the System Version
Check display easily.
! Procedure
ARCNET communication error. occurs

1. On the error display, press NO: Stop alarm and press F: Reserve to make this error to suspension.
IMPORTANT
• Do not press NO: Error clear. If NO: Error clear is pressed, ARCNET communication is performed again by
the main CPU, then the same error recurs and it cannot go into the System Version Check display smoothly.
2. Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard.
3. The System Version Check display appears.
G083161
37530 1/2
37530
4. The System Version Check display appears by clicking System Version Check.
3. Mode
G083158
NOTE
• For 35i, LASER in the display above changes to iBeam.
5. Confirm the Version and Communication on the System Version Check display.
# Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• Since communication data has collected on the ARCNET circuit when ARCNET communication error.
occurs, therefore, it may take time until OK is displayed.
# Version
The system program version number saved on all control PCBs is displayed.
Version is displayed.: It is communicating.
Version is not displayed.: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• The version of each control PCB is displayed if main CPU receives the communication OK signal which
each control PCB sent responding to main CPU's ARCNET communication request to each control PCB.
• If OK is displayed in Communication field, a version will remain displayed even if Communication
becomes - later.
6. Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error.
Refer to the ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.
37530 2/2
37540
Machine Specification

Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard.
3. Mode
G083161
! Explanation
QSS-35 is the Stand Alone Printer at the system shipment, but Attached Scanner in Machine Specification is registered as S4 or S1-
II. Therefore, No.6901: ARCNET communication error. occurs when it is turned on.
Machine Specification is the mode that changes the Attached Scanner setting in Machine Specification to Not in use when
No.6901: ARCNET communication error. occurs.
! Procedure
ARCNET communication error. occurs

1. On the error display, press NO: Stop alarm and press F: Reserve to make this error to suspension.
IMPORTANT
• Do not press NO: Error clear. If NO: Error clear is pressed, ARCNET communication is performed again by
the main CPU, then the same error reoccurs and it cannot go into the Debug mode display smoothly.
2. Press and hold Ctrl and Alt key, and press D key. Then, click Machine Specification in Debug mode.
3. Machine Specification display will appear when Machine Specification is clicked.
Select Not in use for Attached Scanner.
S3066-00-00
37540 1/2
37540
3. Mode
37540 2/2
4000
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................ 4001

Classification of errors and attention messages ...................................................................................................4001
Suffix number display .........................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring .......... 4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) [35, 35i] ......................................................4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) [35, 35i] .............................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse ................................................. 4252
Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section) [35, 35i] .....................................4252
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart .............................................................................. 4302
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear from the Net Order display. [35] .....4302
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35] .................................... 4390
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35] ...................................................................................................4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i] ................................... 4470
4 Troubleshooting
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i] ..................................................................................................4470
White line and black line appear on a print. (vertical) [35i] ................................................................................4470
Mistake in setting of focal plane regulating guide [35i] ......................................................................................4470
Appearing the paper width line [35i] ...................................................................................................................4470
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ........................................................................................... 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment ................................................................................... 4600
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow ....................................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error ...........................................................................................4610
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error ...........................................................................................4620
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................. 40500
No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. .....................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..........................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. .............................................................40500
No. 0503[N] [SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. .................................................................................................40500
No. 0505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. .................................................................................40500
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. .......................................................................................................40500
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ................................40500
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. ........................................................................................................................40500
No. 0519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. ...........................................................................40500
No. 0520 Sensors may be dirty. .......................................................................................................................40500
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment .......................................................................... 40600
No. 0600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD .............................................................................................40600
No. 0601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. BF ..............................................................................................40600
No. 0602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty.STB .............................................................................................40600
No. 0603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .........................................................................................40600
No. 0604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. .................................................................................................40600
No. 0605[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD ..................................................................................................40600
No. 0606[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. BF ..................................................................................................40600
No. 0607[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.STB .................................................................................................40600
No. 0609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. ...............................................................................................................40600
No. 0610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### ......................................................................................................40600
4000 1/9
4000
Attention message: SM replenishment ................................................................................ 40700

No. 0700[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .......................................................40700
No. 0701[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ..................................................................................40700
No. 0702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .....................................................................................40700
No. 0703 [SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? ...........40700
No. 0704 [SM] Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package. .
40700
No. 0705[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .......................................................40700
Attention message: F replenishment ................................................................................... 40900
No. 0900[F] PSR is running out. .....................................................................................................................40900
No. 0901[F] PSR is empty. ..............................................................................................................................40900
No. 0902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge. ..................................................................................................40900
No. 0903[F] Close the replenisher section door. .............................................................................................40900
No. 0904[F] Replenish PSR. ...........................................................................................................................40900
No. 0905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge. ..........................................................................................40900
No. 0906[F] It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge. ...........................................................................40900
4 Troubleshooting
No. 0907[F] Collect the waste solution. ..........................................................................................................40900
No. 0908[F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. ......
40900
No. 0909[F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ........................................................40900
No. 0910[F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . ................................................40900
No. 0911[F] Prcessor Section is processing. One moment please. . . ............................................................40900
No. 0912[F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. 40900
No. 0913[F] Manual opening cannot be started. .............................................................................................40900
Attention message: Printer .................................................................................................. 41000
No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................41000
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ................................................................41000
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .........................................41000
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B ..........................................41000
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A .............................................................................41000
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B .............................................................................41000
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ............................................................................41000
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ............................................................................41000
No. 1012-1013 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41000
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ...................................................................41000
No. 1027 Profile data was not found. ..............................................................................................................41000
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. .....................................................................................41000
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . .........................................................41000
No. 1047 Close printer door. ...........................................................................................................................41000
No. 1065 Would you like to continue? ............................................................................................................41000
No. 1074 Sensors may be dirty. .......................................................................................................................41000
No. 1082 iBeam temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . .......................................................41000
No. 1087 Would you like to calibrate the Colorimeter? ..................................................................................41000
No. 1093 Uneven coloring may occur on the print. Would you like to stop processing? ..............................41000
No. 1094 Unit is not attached. .........................................................................................................................41000
4000 2/9
4000
Attention message: Scanner ............................................................................................... 41300

No. 1302-1320 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ...............41300
Attention message: Film carrier ........................................................................................... 41400
No. 1400-1439 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ...............41400
No. 1450-1454 Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .41400
Attention message: Disk/Media ........................................................................................... 41500
Attention message: Colorimeter .......................................................................................... 41550
No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. .................................................................................................41550
No. 1552 The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ..................................................41550
No. 1555 The calibration plate data is out of range. ........................................................................................41550
Attention message: Pricing unit ........................................................................................... 41600
Attention message: NMC ..................................................................................................... 41620
4 Troubleshooting
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................ 41800
No. 1801 Execute software upgrade. ...............................................................................................................41800
Attention message: Main ..................................................................................................... 41900
No. 1903 Proceeding. One moment please. . . .................................................................................................41900
No. 1904 Proceeding. One moment please. . . .................................................................................................41900
No. 1920-#### Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. .............................41900
No. 1921-#### Capacity Booster Key was detected. ......................................................................................41900
No. 1930 Turn ON the Flatbed Scanner. .........................................................................................................41900
No. 1931 Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test Print. .............................................................................41900
No. 1932 Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly. ............................................................................41900
No. 1946 Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter from the flatbed scanner
glass surface or test print and measure again. ...................................................................................................41900
No. 1977 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for the Corrective action of Attention message. ..................41900
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit ................................................................... 43370
Attention message: QSS-Kids ............................................................................................. 44250
No. 4250-4308 Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ...........44250
Attention message: Bravo II ................................................................................................ 44350
No. 4350-4358 Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............44350
4000 3/9
4000
Error message: Processor 1 ................................................................................................ 45500

No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD ...............................................45500
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF ................................................45500
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB .............................................45500
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ............................................................................45500
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD .......................................45500
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF ........................................45500
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB .....................................45500
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. ....................................................................45500
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. .........................................................................................45500
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. ............................................................................................45500
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. ......................................................................................................45500
No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD ............................................................................................45500
No. 5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF ............................................................................................45500
No. 5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ........................................................................................45500
4 Troubleshooting
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD ..................................................................................................................45500
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ...................................................................................................................45500
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ................................................................................................................45500
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ..............................................................................................................45500
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ............................................................................................45500
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ............................................................................................45500
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ........................................................................................45500
Error message: Processor 2 ................................................................................................ 45530
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ...................................................................................................45530
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. .............................................................45530
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. ....................................................................................45530
No. 5534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. .....................................................................................................45530
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ....................................................................................45530
No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor ..........................................................................................................45530
No. 5543 The dryer cover is removed. ............................................................................................................45530
No. 5545 Print Sensor (Left) error. ..................................................................................................................45530
No. 5546 Print Sensor error. ............................................................................................................................45530
No. 5547 Print Sensor (Right) error. ...............................................................................................................45530
No. 5549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. .................................................................45530
No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. ................................................................................................................45530
No. 5552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. ........................................................................................45530
4000 4/9
4000
Error message: Tablet replenishment ................................................................................. 45600

No. 5600[J] Tablet Drum operation error. CD ................................................................................................45600
No. 5601[J] Tablet Drum operation error. BF .................................................................................................45600
No. 5602[J] Tablet Drum operation error. STB ..............................................................................................45600
No. 5603[J] A tablet has jammed. ...................................................................................................................45600
No. 5609[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD .................................................................45600
No. 5610[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF ..................................................................45600
No. 5611[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB ................................................................45600
No. 5612[J] Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. .........................................................................45600
No. 5613[J] The processing solution level is too low. STB1 ........................................................................45600
Error message: SM replenishment ...................................................................................... 45700
No. 5700[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ..........................................................................45700
No. 5701[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ..........................................................................45700
No. 5702[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ..........................................................................45700
4 Troubleshooting
No. 5703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W .........................................................................45700
No. 5704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A ...........................................................................45700
No. 5705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ...........................................................................45700
No. 5706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB .............................................................................45700
No. 5708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45700
No. 5709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45700
No. 5710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...................................................................................45700
No. 5711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W ....................................................................................45700
No. 5712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...............................................................................45700
4000 5/9
4000
Error message: F replenishment ......................................................................................... 45900

No. 5900[F] Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. .....................................................................45900
No. 5901[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R .........................................................................45900
No. 5902[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA ......................................................................45900
No. 5903]F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB ......................................................................45900
No. 5904[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR .........................................................................45900
No. 5905[F] P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. .
45900
No. 5906[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
No. 5907[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
No. 5908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. .....................................................................................45900
No. 5909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R ........................................45900
No. 5910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA .....................................................45900
No. 5911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB ......................................................45900
No. 5912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. ...........................................................................45900
4 Troubleshooting
No. 5913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. ..............................................................................45900
No. 5914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. .....................................................................................45900
No. 5916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 ..............................45900
No. 5917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 ..............................45900
No. 5918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 ............................45900
No. 5922[F] Replenisher section door is open. ...............................................................................................45900
No. 5923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. ...............................................................................45900
4000 6/9
4000
Error message: Printer 1 ..................................................................................................... 46000

No. 6012 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ...........................................................................................46000
No. 6013 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ............................................................................................46000
No. 6014 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .......................................................................................46000
No. 6015 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B .......................................................................................46000
No. 6016 Paper Cutter operation error. ...........................................................................................................46000
No. 6054 The Initial Setup was not executed. .................................................................................................46000
No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. ...............................................................................................................46000
No. 6074 B Laser control error. .......................................................................................................................46000
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ......................................................................................................................46000
No. 6076 Polygon Mirror control error. ..........................................................................................................46000
No. 6077 Interlock error. .................................................................................................................................46000
No. 6081 Backup data error. Printer ...............................................................................................................46000
No. 6082 Setup error. ......................................................................................................................................46000
No. 6087 Laser Control PCB system error. .....................................................................................................46000
No. 6101 Paper Hold Motor operation error. ..................................................................................................46000
4 Troubleshooting
No. 6104 Printer Door is open. ........................................................................................................................46000
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46000
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46000
No. 6107 R Laser temperature is out of range. ................................................................................................46000
No. 6135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 6136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. .......................................................46000
No. 6137 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. .......................................................46000
No. 6144 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor operation error. ................................................................46000
No. 6145 Lane Select Motor operation error. ..................................................................................................46000
No. 6146 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. ....................................................................................46000
No. 6147 Turn Motor operation error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 6148 Paper End Sensor A error. ...............................................................................................................46000
No. 6149 Paper End Sensor B error. ...............................................................................................................46000
No. 6151 Paper Loading Sensor error. ............................................................................................................46000
No. 6152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. .....................................................................................46000
No. 6153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. ...................................................................................46000
4000 7/9
4000
Error message: Printer 2 ..................................................................................................... 46100

No. 6155 Exposure Start Sensor error. ............................................................................................................46100
No. 6156 Exposure End Sensor error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 6173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. ....................................................46100
No. 6177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. ...........................................................................................46100
No. 6179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 6182 iBeam Unit control error. .................................................................................................................46100
No. 6183 iBeam Control PCB control error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 6184 iBeam Control PCB system error. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 6185 Roller Move Motor operation error. ................................................................................................46100
No. 6187 Setup calculation error. ....................................................................................................................46100
No. 6194 Laser Control PCB control error. .....................................................................................................46100
No. 6198 Laser Unit EE-PROM control error. ................................................................................................46100
No. 6203 Setup error. ......................................................................................................................................46100
No. 6204 Setup error. ......................................................................................................................................46100
No. 6205 Setup error. ......................................................................................................................................46100
4 Troubleshooting
No. 6208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. ..................................................................................46100
No. 6209 Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit. ..........................................................................46100
No. 6210 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. .........................................................................................46100
No. 6211 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. ................................................................................46100
Error message: Scanner ...................................................................................................... 46300
No. 6303-6337 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .....................46300
Error message: Film carrier ................................................................................................. 46400
No. 6400-6446 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .....................46400
No. 6447-6459 Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. ........46400
Error message: Disk/Media ................................................................................................. 46500
No. 6506 Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). .................................................................46500
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................ 46550
No. 6551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. .....................................................................................46550
No. 6554 Calibration Plate advance error. ......................................................................................................46550
Error message: Pricing unit ................................................................................................. 46600
No. 6600 Pricing Unit communication error. ..................................................................................................46600
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................46600
No. 6602 Pricing Unit Printer operation error. ................................................................................................46600
No. 6603 Backup data error. PU .....................................................................................................................46600
Error: NMC .......................................................................................................................... 46620
No. 6620 Remote Control was not finished. ...................................................................................................46620
No. 6621 Could not connect to the server. ......................................................................................................46620
No. 6622 There is no backup data in the server. .............................................................................................46620
No. 6623 Noritsu-eNET was not started. ........................................................................................................46620
Error message: Software upgrade ....................................................................................... 46802
No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. ...............................46802
4000 8/9
4000
Error: Main ........................................................................................................................... 46900

No. 6900 Main control system error. ...............................................................................................................46900
No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. ......................................................................................................46900
No. 6903 Serial communication error. ............................................................................................................46900
No. 6906 Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? ......................................................................46900
No. 6907 The file was not found. ....................................................................................................................46900
No. 6908 Processing response error. ...............................................................................................................46900
No. 6909 CPU was reset. Abort the process. ..................................................................................................46900
No. 6910 Flatbed Scanner diagnosis error. ......................................................................................................46900
No. 6911 Flatbed Scanner operation error. ......................................................................................................46900
No. 6912 Flatbed Scanner communication error. ............................................................................................46900
No. 6913 System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. ......................................................................46900
No. 6921 PCB error. ........................................................................................................................................46900
No. 6922 Device control error. ........................................................................................................................46900
No. 6926 PC Interface PCB control error. .......................................................................................................46900
Error: Compact Archive Unit ................................................................................................ 48350
4 Troubleshooting
No. 8361 Archive File read error. ....................................................................................................................48350
No. 8362 Archive File write error. ..................................................................................................................48350
No. 8363 Compact Archive Unit processing error. .........................................................................................48350
No. 8364 Compact Archive Unit cannot be used. ...........................................................................................48350
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................. 49000
No. 9000 Edit mode System error. .................................................................................................................49000
No. 9001 Edit mode Information file error. ....................................................................................................49000
No. 9002 Edit mode Image data error. ...........................................................................................................49000
No. 9003 Edit mode Image read error. ...........................................................................................................49000
Error message: QSS-Kids ................................................................................................... 49250
No. 9250-9311 For error corrective action, refer to QSS-Kids Service Manual. ...........................................49250
Error message: Bravo II ....................................................................................................... 49350
No. 9350-9376 For error corrective action, refer to Bravo II Service Manual. ..............................................49350
4000 9/9
4001
Error and attention message regulation
Classification of errors and

attention messages
! Attention message
The message informed through the normal processing appears
as an attention message.
• When the replacement of consumable parts is necessary
• When the judgment of operator is necessary
• When a simple operation mistake has been made
! Error
The message informed when some abnormal error occurs
appears as an error.
• When there is something wrong with the system
• When a serious operation mistake has been made,
performing the operation not allowed to be performed
4. Troubleshooting
! Error/Attention message number
Error/Attention message number are separated to main and
suffix numbers. In case of 1234-0001, 1234 is the main
number and 0001 is the suffix number.
Main number
It distinguishes the content of Error/Attention message.
Operator takes a corrective action judging with the content of
the main number and the countermeasure.
Main number
Error 0001 to 4999
Attention message 5000 to 9999
Suffix number
It distinguishes error occurring place and condition.
Service personnel figures out the error occurring condition
judging with the content of the suffix number and performs
the diagnosis.
NOTE
• For the content of suffix number, refer to Descriptions of
suffix number.
☞ 4002
4001 1/1
4002
Suffix number display For example, 3 is for the multiple condition of 1 and 2,
and 5 is for that of 4 and 1.
! The types of suffix number display ! How to determine the condition from
the total of bit operation
The procedure for bringing up the suffix number is classified
in the following three types. This section describes the procedure of determining the target
• Without suffix number condition from the displayed suffix number without the
knowledge of the bit operation theory.
• Displaying the condition with suffix number
• Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix number
1. Divide the displayed suffix number into each
digit.
! Without suffix number
NOTE
When the occurring condition is single • When the displayed suffix number is 13, it is
Example 1 divided into 1 and 3.
Suffix Condition 2. Replace them with the bits (1, 2, 4, 8)

number according to the object table below.
- The cover is opened. NOTE
• 1 → 1, 3 → 2 and 1
4. Troubleshooting
! Displaying the condition with suffix number (Object table)
If the occurring condition is multiple and only one of them is
Suffix number display Suffix number (bit)
the object of the occurring cause, its suffix number appears
with four digits. F 8 4 2 1
E 8 4 2
Example 2
D 8 4 1
Suffix Condition C 8 4
number
B 8 2 1
0001 The sensor has not turned to DARK.
A 8 2
0002 The sensor has not turned to LIGHT.
9 8 1
8 8
! Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix
number 7 4 2 1
6 4 2
If the occurring condition is multiple and some of them are
possible to be the objects of the occurring cause, the total of 5 4 1
the target suffix numbers (bit) appears. 4 4
NOTE 3 2 1
• The bit operation value appears by hexadecimal digit. 2 2
Example 3 1 1
0
Suffix Condition
number NOTE
(bit)
• It can be calculated by replacing the suffix number
0001 The sensor 1 does not detect. of hexadecimal digit with decimal and assigning it
0002 The sensor 2 does not detect. from the larger number.
0004 The sensor 3 does not detect. 3. Add 0 to the second digit or later to make the
0008 The sensor 4 does not detect. number of digits same as the original one.
0010 The sensor 5 does not detect. NOTE
• 1→10 (second digit), 2 and 1 are remained (first
NOTE digit).
• When the sensors 1 and 3 of example 3 are the objects,
• For the second digit, add 0 once. For the third
0005 appears. When all the sensors are the objects, 001F
digit, add 0 two times.
appears.
• The suffix number (bit) assigned to each condition is
necessarily consisted of 1, 2, 4, 8 and 0.
As for the bit display, the other 3, 5, 6, 7... are used for
the multiple conditions.
4002 1/3
4002
(Example of determining) with the decimal digit and three digits with the
hexadecimal digit.
13 4C0 Thus, the number of digits can be less when there are
↓ ↓ more combinations which can be expressed as one digit.
Divide into each digit.
NOTE
1 3 4 C (12) 0
• A to F of the hexadecimal digit are handled as a number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
in the operation.
Replace with the suffix number of each condition.
(Conversion table)
1 2, 1 4 8, 4 Not in use
Return the number of digits by adding 0. Hexadecimal Decimal numeral Binary number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ numeral
10 2, 1 400 80, 40 Not in use 0 0 0
↓ ↓ 1 1 1
10, 2 and 1 400, 80 and 40 are the objects. 2 2 10
are the objects.
3 3 11
4 4 100
4. Check each condition by the target suffix 5 5 101
number (bit), and specify the occurring
6 6 110
condition.
4. Troubleshooting
7 7 111
NOTE
8 8 1000
• When the suffix number of 13 appears in the
condition of example 3, the numbers of 1, 2 and 9 9 1001
10 are the objects of the suffix numbers (bit). A 10 1010
From this, the occurring condition is recognized as B 11 1011
The sensors 1, 2 and 5 do not detect.
C 12 1100
Example 3 D 13 1101
Object Suffix Condition E 14 1110
number F 15 1111
(bit) 10 16 10000
$ 0001 The sensor 1 does not detect. FF 255 11111111
$ 0002 The sensor 2 does not detect. 3FF 1023 1111111111
0004 The sensor 3 does not detect.
0008 The sensor 4 does not detect.
Bit operation
$ 0010 The sensor 5 does not detect.
• When assigning sensor 1 of example 3 to the first digit
and sensor 2 to the second digit as in order, the bit
NOTE operation value is as follows in the case that only each
• To know more details of the bit operation mechanism, condition is ON.
refer to the following explanatory notes. This hexadecimal digit value is assigned as the bit of
single condition.
Digit When multiple conditions are the objects, the total bit
• Binary digit is the basic value of computer calculation assigned to each condition appears.
and expresses the state of ON and OFF of the signal.
Condition Suffix number (bit)
A digit of the binary digit is called as bit. It expresses two
types of numbers, 0 and 1, as one digit. Hexadecim Decimal Binary
When there are two types of bit (condition), it is al numeral numeral number
expressed by the binary digit with two digits and called as Sensor 1 1 1 1
2 bit. Sensor 2 2 2 10
• Decimal digit is generally used to express ten kinds of Sensor 3 4 4 100
numbers, 0 to 9, as one digit.
Sensor 4 8 8 1000
The combinations expressed as one digit are ten kinds.
Sensor 5 10 16 10000
• Hexadecimal digit is used to express 16 kinds of
numbers, 0 to F, as one digit. The combinations
expressed as one digit are 16 kinds.
• Each digit can be converted into other digits.
When there are ten types of conditions, it is 10 bit (ten
digits) by expressing with the binary digit, four digits
4002 2/3
4002
(Example) When the errors of sensors 1, 2 and 5

have occurred at the same time
Condition Suffix number (bit)
Hexadecim Decimal Binary
al numeral numeral number
Sensors 1, 2 and 5 13 19 10011
4. Troubleshooting
4002 3/3
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) [35, 35i]
For how to confirm condition of wiring connection failure and conditions, refer to ☞ Checking condition of wiring connection failure.
Reference (for both 35 and 35i)

☞ PC interface PCB (35, 35i) ☞ Printer control PCB (35, 35i) ☞ Dual paper magazine PCB (35, 35i)
☞ CVP PCB (35, 35i) ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS3) (35, 35i) ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS10) (35, 35i)
☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS12) (35, 35i) ☞ PC (35, 35i)
Reference (35 only)

☞ Laser control PCB (35) ☞ B laser driver (35) ☞ G laser driver (35)
☞ Printer power supply 4 (PS17) (35) ☞ Laser power supply (PS16) (35) ☞ B-AOM driver (35)
☞ G-AOM driver (35) ☞ R-AOM driver (35)
Reference (35i only)

☞ iBeam unit (35i) ☞ iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ Printer power supply 4 (PS17) (35i)
! PC (35, 35i)
4. Troubleshooting
Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.
Connector No. Symptom

RS-232C No.6903-0002 Serial communication error. occurs.
ATX motherboard (J/P955)-Colorimeter
SW/LED PCB (J/P215)-Printer control The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after starting up the PC
PCB forcibly.
ATX power supply (J/P312)-Processor The PC does not start.
relay PCB The PC will not start even using forced start by pressing the power button of the PC.
! PC interface PCB (35, 35i)

ARCNET No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs.
J/P73, 74 • For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication
diagnosis manual.
J/P455 Connecting to the laser No.6194-0008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
control PCB (LVPECL)
(35)
Connects to iBeam control The system starts up normally. No.6184-0003 iBeam Control PCB system error. and
PCB (LVPECL) No.6183-0008 iBeam Control PCB system error. occur when printing is started in the PJP
(35i) mode.
J/P436 Connects the scanner unit After starting the scanning, the message One moment please... appears and it does not
(LVDS). change. NO is selected and scanning can be stopped.
! Printer control PCB (35, 35i)


J/P200 Connects the dual paper No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
magazine PCB.
J/P201 Connects to the CVP PCB. The CVP unit does not operate.
J/P202 Roller Position Sensor (for No. 6185-0002 Roller Move Motor operation error. occurs.
35i)
4200 1/8
4200

J/P203 Connects the paper The magazine is not detected. (All magazine code sensor A are DARK.)
magazine code sensor A.
J/P204 Connecting paper magazine The magazine is not detected. (All magazine code sensor B are DARK.)
code sensor B
J/P205 Connecting to the laser The system starts up normally.
control PCB No.6087-0022 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP
(35) mode.
Connects to iBeam control The system starts up normally.
PCB. If printing is started from the PJP mode, No.6183-0004 iBeam Control PCB control error.
(35i) appears. When this error message is canceled, the system does not start printing but Insert
negative. appears on the Order display.
J/P206 Connects exposure advance No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
motor 1, 2 and exposure
advance pressure change
motor 1, 2.
J/P207 Connects the zigzagging No. 6135-0002 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
correction sensor (right and No.6211-0002 Paper remains inside the exposure advance unit occurs.
left), exposure advance
4. Troubleshooting
pressure change sensor 1, 2,
the exposure start sensor and
the exposure end sensor.
J/P208 Connects the paper advance The system starts up normally.
motor 1. No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started in
the PJP mode.
J/P209 Connects the paper hold No. 6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
motor, cut motor, paper
advance motor 2, paper
supply arm motor right and
paper supply arm motor left
J/P210 Connects the paper hold No. 6016-0005 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
sensor, cut home sensor, cut No. 6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
end sensor, paper loading
sensor and paper end sensor
A
J/P211 Connects to paper advance No. 6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
motor 3, paper advance
pressure change motor, turn
motor and paper advance
arm motor.
J/P212 Connects the lane select No.6145-0001 Lane Select Motor operation error. occurs.
motor and the lane select
sensor. (For 3502)
J/P213 Arm sensor, Turn sensor, No. 6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
Paper advance pressure
change sensor
J/P214 Lane select sensor No. 6145-0002 Lane Select Motor operation error. occurs.
(3502)
J/P215 Connects to the SW/LED The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after starting up the PC
PCB. forcibly.
J/P216 Connects to the buzzer. The buzzer does not sound.
J/P217 Connects the printer control The printer control box cooling fan (FAN24) and inner cooling fan (FAN23) do not work.
box cooling fan (FAN24)
and inner cooling fan
(FAN23)
J/P218 Connects the counter The counter does not operate.
(option).
J/P219 Connects the interlock No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
switch (printer door 1, 2).
4200 2/8
4200

J/P220 Connecting to the laser No.6077-0002 Interlock error. occurs.
control PCB
(35)
J/P221 Connects to the interlock No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
relay.
J/P222 Inputs the power supply (+5 The PC does not start automatically.
V) from printer power No.6901-0001 ARCNET communication error. Printer occurs after starting up the PC
supply 1. forcibly. The alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
J/P223 Inputs the power supply The PC does not start automatically.
(+24 V) from printer power No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs after starting up the PC forcibly.
supply 4.
J/P224 Inputs the power supply No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
(+24 V) from printer power
supply 2.
J/P225 Inputs the power supply The system starts up normally.
(+36 V) from printer power No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started in
supply 3. the PJP mode.
J/P226 Supplies power (+36 V-2) to The system starts up normally. No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
4. Troubleshooting
the dual paper magazine occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
PCB.
J/P229 Roller Move Motor (for 35i) No. 6185-0002 Roller Move Motor operation error. occurs.
diagnosis manual.
! Laser control PCB (35)


J/P1501 Connects to the B-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is light purple only is made.
driver.
J/P1502 Connects to the G-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is green only is made.
driver.
J/P1503 Connects to the R-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is light pink only is made.
driver.
J/P1506 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.6901-0009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs. The alarm
V) from laser power supply. (buzzer) does not sound.
No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs.
J/P1508 Connects to the B, G and R- The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error.
AOM drivers. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
J/P1513 Connects to the PC interface No.6194-0008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
(LVPECL)
J/P1515 Connects to the laser unit. The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No. 6076-0001 Polygon Mirror control
error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
4200 3/8
4200

J/P1516, 1517, 1527, 1528, 1523, 1524, • For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication
1545, 1546, 1547, 1548 diagnosis manual.
J/P1519 Connects to the B and G No.6075-0007 G Laser control error. occurs.
laser drivers. No.6074-0007 B Laser control error. occurs.
J/P1520 Connects to the printer The system starts up normally.
control PCB. No.6087-0022 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP
mode.
J/P1522 Connects to the laser unit The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U).
and connects the inner Via input check, the laser unit temperature sensor is 0.
thermosensor.
J/P1532 Connects to the laser unit. The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R).
J/P1534 Connects to the printer No.6077-0002 Interlock error. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P1541 Inputs the power supply The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U).
supply 4.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P1542 Connects to the B-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is blue only is made.
driver.
J/P1543 Connects to the G-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is green only is made.
driver.
J/P1544 Connects to the R-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is pink only is made.
driver.
J/P1551 Connects laser unit cooling Laser unit cooling fan 1, 2, laser control box cooling fan 1, 2 and 3, and laser unit heater do
fan 1, 2, laser control box not operate.
cooling fan 1, 2, 3 and laser Any malfunction in the operations does not occur on this condition.
unit heater.
! iBeam unit (35i)


J/P900 Inputs power (+5 V and +12 No. 6182-0001 iBeam Unit control error. occurs.
V) from iBeam Control
PCB.
J/P901 Connects to iBeam control
PCB.
4200 4/8
4200
! iBeam Control PCB (35i)


J/P1101 Inputs power (+5 V and +12 No. 6182-0001 iBeam Unit control error. occurs.
V) to iBeam unit.
J/P1102 Connects to the iBeam unit
J/P1506 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.6901-0009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs. The alarm
V) from iBeam power (buzzer) does not sound.
supply. No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs.
J/P1513 Connects to the PC interface The system starts up normally. No.6184-0003 iBeam Control PCB system error. and
(LVPECL) No.6183-0008 iBeam Control PCB system error. occur when printing is started in the PJP
mode.
J/P1516, 1517, 1527, 1528, 1523, 1524, • For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication
1545, 1546, 1547, 1548 diagnosis manual.
J/P1520 Connects to the printer The system starts up normally.
control PCB. If printing is started from the PJP mode, No.6183-0004 iBeam Control PCB control error.
appears. When this error message is canceled, the system does not start printing but Insert
4. Troubleshooting
negative. appears on the Order display.
J/P1522 Connects the inner The system starts up normally. Paper Temperature Correction function of Master Data is
thermosensor. being used, the quality may be affected.
0 appears in the Inner Thermosensor field at Input Check.
J/P1541 Inputs the power supply The system starts up normally.
(+24 V) from printer power If printing is started from the PJP mode, icon "Printing" blinks.
supply 4. The paper is advanced to the exposure advance unit, but the system does not start printing
and the error does not occur.
! B laser driver (35)

NOTE
• Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring is already checked with B laser driver for the laser unit type B1.

J/P1653 Connects to the laser unit. The system starts up normally. The print whose color is light purple only is made.
J/P1654 Connects to the laser control No.6074-0007 B Laser control error. occurs.
PCB.
J/P1655 Inputs the power supply (+5 When Laser temperatures are being adjusted. About ##sec of the order display is
V) from laser power supply. completed, No.6105-0001 B Laser light source status error. occurs.
! G laser driver (35)

NOTE
• Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring is already checked with G laser driver for the laser unit type B1.

J/P1663 Connects to the laser unit. The system starts up normally. The print whose color is green only is made.
4200 5/8
4200

J/P1664 Connects to the laser control No.6075-0007 G Laser control error. occurs.
PCB.
J/P1665 Inputs the power supply (+5 When Laser temperatures are being adjusted. About ##sec of the order display is
V) from laser power supply. completed, No.6106 G Laser light source status error. occurs.
! B-AOM driver (35)


J/P1631 Connects to the laser control The system starts up normally. The print whose color is light purple only is made.
PCB.
J/P1632 Connects to the laser unit.
J/P1633 Connects to the laser control
J/P1634 PCB.
! G-AOM driver (35)
4. Troubleshooting

J/P1636 Connects to the laser control The system starts up normally. The print whose color is green only is made.
PCB.
J/P1639 PCB.
! R-AOM driver (35)


J/P1641 Connects to the laser control The system starts up normally. The print whose color is light pink only is made.
PCB.
J/P1644 PCB.
! Dual paper magazine PCB (35, 35i)


J/P277 Connects printer door 3 No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
sensor.
J/P278 Connects to the printer No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P279 Connects paper end sensor No.6210-0002 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
B.
J/P280 Inputs the power from The system starts up normally. No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
Printer Control PCB (+36 V- occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
2)
J/P281 Connects the paper supply The system starts up normally. No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
motor A. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
J/P282 Connects paper supply The system starts up normally. No.6013-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
motor B. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
4200 6/8
4200
! CVP PCB (35, 35i)


J/P500 Connects to the printer The CVP unit does not operate.
control PCB.
J/P501 Inputs the power supply The CVP unit does not operate.
supply 3.
J/P502 Connects the dot head and The CVP unit does not operate.
ribbon advance motor.
! Printer power supply 1 (PS3) (35, 35i)


J/P313 Inputs the AC power supply The PC does not start automatically.
from the Processor relay No.6901-0001 ARCNET communication error. Printer occurs after starting up the PC
4. Troubleshooting
PCB. forcibly. The alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
J/P328 Supplies the power to the
printer control PCB (+5 V).


J/P317 Inputs the AC power supply No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
from the Processor relay Via output check, no motor of the exposure advance unit works.
PCB.
printer control PCB (+24 V).
J/P327 GND


J/P318 Inputs the AC power supply The system starts up normally.
from the Processor relay No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started in
PCB. the PJP mode.
J/P325 printer control PCB and
CVP PCB (+36 V,GND).
! Printer power supply 4 (PS17) (35)


from the Processor relay No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs after starting up the PC forcibly.
PCB. Via input check, Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) displays OFF.
J/P316 printer control PCB, laser
control PCB and PU control
PCB (+24 V,GND).
4200 7/8
4200
! Printer power supply 4 (PS17) (35i)


from the Processor relay No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs after starting up the PC forcibly.
PCB. Via input check, Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) displays OFF.
printer control PCB, iBeam
control PCB and PU control
PCB (+24 V,GND).
! Laser power supply (PS16) (35)


J/P309 Inputs the AC power supply No.6901-0009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs. The alarm
from the Processor relay (buzzer) does not sound.
PCB. No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P412 Supplies power to the laser
control PCB, B laser driver
PCB and G laser driver PCB
(+5 V, GND)
! iBeam power supply (PS16) (35i)


J/P309 Inputs the AC power supply No.6901-0009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs. The alarm
from the Processor relay (buzzer) does not sound.
PCB. No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs.
iBeam control PCB (+5 V).
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure

In the table below, it explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with each connector
unplugged (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate, or the like).
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not plugged.
• As for the optional PCBs, only some of them are described about.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a connector is
unplugged from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.
4200 8/8
4203
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) [35, 35i]
For how to confirm condition of wiring connection failure and conditions, refer to ☞ Checking condition of wiring connection failure.

☞ Processor control PCB ☞ Processor relay PCB ☞ Processor power supply (PS1)
☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB1) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 (NFB2) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 (NFB3)
! Processor control PCB


J/P670 Connects the processing No. 5519 to 5521 Thermosensor error. occurs.
solution temperature sensor, No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
dryer temperature sensor.
J/P673 Connects the CD digital No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
flowmeter.
4. Troubleshooting
diagnosis manual.
J/P676 Power supply from the No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
processor power supply (+5
V)
J/P677 Connects to the processor No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
relay PCB. No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
J/P679 Connects to the No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
replenishment solution level
sensor
Connects the refilling water No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
tank level sensor
J/P680 Connects the STB4 No. 5518 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 occurs.
circulation pump.
Connects the STB3 No. 5517 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 occurs.
circulation pump.
circulation pump.
circulation pump.
Connects the BF circulation No. 5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
pump.
Connects the CD circulation No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
pump.
J/P681 Supplies the power from the No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
processor relay PCB (+24 V). No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P682 Processing tank cooling fan Processing tank cooling fans 1, 2, 3 and 4 do not work.
1, 2, 3 and 4
J/P683 Connects to the effluent float No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
switch.
J/P684 Connects to the refilling The refilling water pump and the cleaning pump do not operate.
water pump and the cleaning
pump.
4203 1/4
4203

J/P686 Connects to the replenisher The replenisher pump (CD BF STB) do not operate.
pump.
J/P687 Connects to the processor No malfunction occurs on this condition.
relay PCB.
J/P688 Power supply from the No.6903-0002 Serial communication error. occurs.
processor power supply (+24 No.5552-0001 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
V)
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
No.5521 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF occurs.
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD occurs.
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. CD occurs.
No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
J/P689 Connects the chilling unit. No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P691 Connects the processor The processor status lamp does not light.
condition lamp.
J/P692 Connects to the manual Even though the manual sorter switch is pressed, the conveyor unit does not operate.
sorter switch
J/P693 Connects the sorter unit. No. 5534-0001 Print Sorter Unit operation error. occurs when prints are fed out of the dryer,
and the conveyor unit does not operate.
J/P694 Connects the conveyor unit. The conveyor unit does not operate.
J/P696 Connects the paper advance When performing the dairy setup, No.6554-0001 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
motor, pressure change By Output Check, the paper advance motor, pressure change solenoid and cooling fan do not
solenoid and cooling fan operate.
J/P698 Connects the chilling unit. No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P699 Connects the minute meter The hour meter does not operate.
J/P702 Connects the drive motor. No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P703 Connects the paper sensor When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
(emission PCB) and paper
sensor 1 and 2 (detection
PCB).
J/P704 Connects to the colorimeter. The display of initializing colorimeter unit disappears, No.6903-0002 Serial communication
error. colorimeter occurs.
J/P705 Connecting the print sensor The system does not operate even though the print is put on the conveyor unit.
(3501 and 3501i) If over 5 prints are printed, No.5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. occurs.
Connects the print sensor
(right) (left).
(3502)
J/P706 Lane select home sensor No.5552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
J/P708 Dryer lane select motor No.5552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
! Processor relay PCB


J/P640 Connects to the processor All the systems do not start.
power supply
4203 2/4
4203

J/P641 Supplies power to printer Turn on the processor drive.
power supply 1, 2, 3 and 4, The PC does not start.
laser power supply, iBeam The PC will not start even using forced start by pressing the power button of the PC.
power supply, the display
monitor and the PC.
J/P642 Connects the dryer heater. The dryer heater does not operate.
J/P643
J/P644 Connects the processing The processing solution heater (CD, BF and STB) do not operate.
solution heater.
J/P646 Connects the processor Processor control box cooling fan does not operate.
control box cooling fan
J/P648 Connects the interlock switch No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
(dryer cover).
J/P649 Connects the processing No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
solution float switch. No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
J/P650 Supplies the power to the No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
processor control PCB (+24 No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
V).
J/P651 Connects to the processor No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
control PCB. No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
J/P652 Connects the refilling water No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
tank level sensor
J/P653 Connects the processor No malfunction occurs on this condition.
control PCB.
J/P654 Inputs the power (+24 V) All the systems do not start.
from processor power
supply.
J/P655 Connector for setting the All the dryer heater do not operate.
input voltage of the dryer
heater.
J/P656 Connects the dryer safety No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
thermostat.
J/P657 Connects the dryer fan. No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P658 Connects the drive motor. No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P659 Connects the interlock switch No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
(processor top cover).
! Processor power supply (PS1)


J/P793 Power supply from the All the systems do not start.
processor relay PCB
processor control PCB (+24
V).
Supplies the power to the
processor relay PCB (+24 V).
4203 3/4
4203
! Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB1)


Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the CD, BF and STB heaters turns to
OFF.)


Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the dry heater turns to OFF.))


Power supply from TA2 to TA3 All the systems do not start.
4. Troubleshooting
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure
In the table below, it explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with each connector
unplugged (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate, or the like).
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not plugged.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a connector is
unplugged from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the equipped options, cable connecting position and/or ARCNET communication
feature.
4203 4/4
4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor

section) [35, 35i]
For how to check the fuse blowout and conditions, refer to ☞ Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse.

☞ Printer control PCB ☞ CVP PCB ☞ Processor control PCB
☞ Power supply
! Printer control PCB

Fuse No. Symptom
F32 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
+24 V-1 input power supply
from printer power supply 4)
F33 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
+24 V input power supply
4. Troubleshooting
F34 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 6101-0001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
F35 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
F36 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of The system starts up normally. No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs
+36 V input power supply when printing is started in the PJP mode.
F37 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of The system starts up normally. No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs
+36 V input power supply when printing is started in the PJP mode.
! CVP PCB
Fuse No. Symptom

F25 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of The CVP unit does not operate.
! Processor control PCB

Fuse No. Symptom

F14 T3.15 A/125 V (24 V power The replenisher pumps (CD, BF, STB) do not operate.
supply protection)
4252 1/3
4252
Fuse No. Symptom

F15 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No.6903-0002 Serial communication error. occurs.
input power supply +24 V-2 No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
from processor power supply)
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
No.5521 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF occurs.
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD occurs.
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. CD occurs.
No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
F16 T3.15 A/125 V (AC24 V-3 Processing tank cooling fans 1, 2, 3 and 4 and exhaust fan do not work.
input power supply The conveyor motor and sorter motor do not rotate.
protection)
F17 T3.15 A/125 V (AC24 V-4 No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
4. Troubleshooting
input power supply No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
protection)
F18 T3.15 A/125 V (AC24 V-5 No.5552-0001 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
input power supply
protection)
! Processor relay PCB

Fuse No. Symptom

FL1, FL2, FL3, FL4 (T5A/250 V: This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
power supply surge protecting circuit)
F41 T10 A/250 V (protection of All the processing solution heater do not operate.
power supply for processing
solution heater)
F42 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of The CD heater does not operate.
power supply for CD heater)
F43 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of The BF heater does not operate.
power supply for BF heater)
F44 T3.15 A/250 V (protection of The STB heater does not operate.
power supply for STB heater)
F45, F50 (T10A/250 V: dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F46, F47, F48, F49 (T6.3A/250 V: The dryer heater does not operate.
dryer heater)
F51 T3.15 A/250 V (AC24 V-1-1) No. 5516 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
(Circulation pump power No. 5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
supply protection)
No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
F52 T3.15 A/250 V (AC24 V-2-1) No. 5518 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 occurs.
(Circulation pump power No. 5517 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 occurs.
supply protection)
No. 5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
F53 T3.15 A/250 V (AC24 V-2) All the systems do not start.
(Dryer fan, drive motor The processor condition light blinks red.
power supply protection) The processor control box cooling fan rotates.
! Power supply
For each power supply PCB, the fuse has not been confirmed because it is irremovable.
4252 2/3
4252
! Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

In the table below, it explain the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with each fuse removed
(for example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate, or the like).
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulting from blowout of fuse when the fuse on each PCB is blowout.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the machine on condition that a fuse is
removed from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the fuse in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single fuse.
4. Troubleshooting
4252 3/3
4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear
from the Net Order display. [35]
1. Confirm that the system is used in the environment of room temperature 15°C to 30°C.
2. Restart the system.
3. Check if the displayed temperature on Laser Unit Thermosensor goes up when turning on the laser
unit heater via Output Check.
Check if laser unit cooling fan 1/2 operate when turning on laser unit cooling fan 1/2 via Output Check.
☞ 35310
4. Check if the displayed temperatures of the laser unit temperature sensor and R laser temperature
sensor change via Output Check.
☞ 35210
5. If there is a change in the displayed temperature, wait for a while. If the temperature does not change,
check the unit for faults.
4. Troubleshooting
Symptom Cause
☞ The display of Laser temperatures is being adjusted. (U) The temperatures are not within the processable range of the laser
remains unit (17.0°C to 42.0°C).
☞ The display of Laser temperatures is being adjusted. (R) remains The temperatures are not within the processable range of R laser
(27.7°C to 28.3°C).
! The display of Laser temperatures is being adjusted. (U) remains
1. Check if there is a wiring connection failure.

Wiring connection failure
• If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P 1522) ↔ laser unit, or between the laser control PCB (J/P
1541) ↔printer power supply 4, (+24 V) the display above will appear when the system is turned on.
2. Make a diagnosis via the displayed temperature on the laser unit temperature sensor.
Checking point Checking content How to check Failure part
Laser unit heater Laser unit heater resistance value Remove P855 (relay) and measure the Laser unit (laser unit heater)
resistance value between Pin 1 and 2. It is
normal if the resistance value is 15 ± 1.5 Ω.
Laser Unit Laser unit thermosensor resistance Remove P1526 (relay) and measure the Laser unit (laser unit
Thermosensor *1 value resistance value between Pin 1 and 3. It is thermosensor)
normal if the resistance value is the same as
the value in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB Laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the voltage between Pin 3 (+) Laser control PCB
voltage of P1522 and the ground is 1.0 V.
Power supply to the laser unit It is normal if the voltage between Pin 7 (+)
heater*2 of P1551 and Pin 8 is as follows.
• When the heater is turned on: 24 V
• When the heater is turned off: 0 V
*1. The list below shows laser unit thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance TEMPER Resistance

ATURE ATURE ATURE ATURE
5 23 kΩ to 25 kΩ 10 18 kΩ to 20 kΩ 15 14 kΩ to 16 kΩ 20 11 kΩ to 12 kΩ
25 9.2 kΩ to 9.8 kΩ 30 7.4 kΩ to 7.9 kΩ 35 6.0 kΩ to 6.4 kΩ
*2. Check the status by turning on the Laser unit heater on Output Check.
4302 1/2
4302
☞ 35310
! The display of Laser temperatures is being adjusted. (R) remains
1. Check if there is a wiring connection failure.

Wiring connection failure
• If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P 1532) ↔ laser unit, the display above will appear when the system
is turned on.
2. Make a diagnosis via the displayed temperature on the R laser unit temperature sensor.
Checking point Checking content How to check Failure part
R laser temperature Peltier control voltage If the voltage between Pin 10 (+) and 11 (−) Laser unit (R laser
control section of J1532 is over -2 V and less than 0 V temperature control section)
• When heated: greater than -2 V and
less than 0 V
• When cooled: equal to or greater than 0
V and less than 2 V
4. Troubleshooting
R Laser R laser unit thermosensor resistance Remove J1532 and measure the resistance Laser unit (R laser unit
Thermosensor*1 value value between Pin 7 (+) and 8(−). It is thermosensor)
normal if the resistance value is the same as
the value in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB R laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the standard voltage between Laser control PCB
voltage Pin 7 (+) and 6 (−) of J1532 is 1 V.
R laser unit thermosensor It is normal if the voltage between Pin 8 (+)
measuring voltage and 6 (−) of J1532 is around 350 mV under
28°C temperature.
*1. The list below shows R laser thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPE Resistance TEMPER Resistance

RATUR RATUR RATUR ATURE
E E E
5 11.4 kΩ to 12.7 kΩ 10 9.2 kΩ to 10.3 kΩ 15 7.4 kΩ to 8.5 kΩ 20 6.0 kΩ to 7.0 kΩ
25 5.0 kΩ to 5.8 kΩ 30 4.1 kΩ to 4.8 kΩ 35 3.4 kΩ to 4.0 kΩ
4302 2/2
4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35]
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35]
Specifying the occurring place (35)

The line appears inputting from the film. The line (irregular print) appears
in the setup print.
↓YES ↓YES
The line occurs in the image saved from a film NO ☞ Inputting side is not good. (around the
to a media. → scanner and around the AFC)
↓YES
The line appears inputting from the media. NO Perform Image Path Check of Self-
→ diagnostic.☞ 35920
↓YES Around the laser unit is not
→ good.
NOTE
• ← in the list below is the paper advance direction.
Around the laser unit is not good.

Symptom Image Countermeasure
4. Troubleshooting
The light density line (white) in • Clean the glass surface of the laser unit.
the paper advance direction is Refer to ☞ Cleaning the laser dustproof glass.
occurred. • Clean the focal plane regulating guide of the
• Replace the following parts if there is no
improvement after cleaning the laser unit and
Laser unit
The print whose color is light • Check the connection status between the laser
purple only is made. control PCB and B-AOM driver.
• Check the connection status between B laser
driver and laser unit.
• Replace the following parts if no improvement
can be recognized after checking any
The print whose color is blue connection failure.
only is made. B-AOM driver
B laser driver
Laser unit
The print whose color is green • Check the connection status between the laser
only is made. control PCB−G-AOM driver.
• Check the connection status between G laser
driver and laser unit.
connection failure.
G-AOM driver
G laser driver
Laser unit
4390 1/3
4390

The print whose color is light • Check the connection status between the laser
pink only is made. control PCB−R-AOM driver.
connection failure.
The print whose color is pink R-AOM driver
only is made. Laser unit
The monochrome line • Replace the laser unit if there is no

perpendicular to paper advance improvement after resetting the power supply.
direction is occurred.
4. Troubleshooting
The stripped pattern like a wavy
line in the whole part of print is
occurred.
There is noise allover the print.
The light color is appeared in • Process the control strip and check the color of
unexposure position. the white part. If the problem occurs, the
chemical has deteriorated. Replace the
chemical.
• Shield the center of the laser dustproof glass
cover of the laser unit with a splicing tape and
make a setup print. If there is a difference
between the unexposed position shielded by the
splicing tape and regular unexposed position,
the abnormal print is caused by leakage of laser
beam.
• Replace the laser unit.
4390 2/3
4390

There is a color shift. • Check the Exposure Zoom Rate Correction.
Approx. 0.5 mm ☞ 36020
Check the Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
Check the Exposure Magnification Fine
Adjustment. ☞ 36040
← • If the problem reoccurs after the adjustments
above, replace the AOM driver or laser unit.
Approx. 18 to 19 mm • Replace the AOM driver or laser unit.
4. Troubleshooting
Banding is occurred. ☞ 25820
White/black lines (Horizontal) ☞ 36090
! Cleaning the laser dustproof glass

• When the line is not clear, the dust may adhere to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit or inside of the laser unit. When the line
is clear, the dust may adhere around the focal plane regulating guide.
1. Open the exposure advance unit and clean the laser dustproof glass using the attached cleaning sheet
(soft cloth).
IMPORTANT
• When cleaning the laser dustproof glass, clean it with the soft cloth in the direction from far to near or from near
to far at one stroke.
• If cleaning several times, wipe in the same direction. If wiping in the opposite direction, the dust which has been
removed adheres on the dustproof glass again. Use the different side of the cleaning cloth every time in order
not to adhere the removed dust again.
• Do not use the alcohol when cleaning. Using alcohol may affect the print quality.
Laser dustproof glass
G085852
4390 3/3
4470
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
! Explanation
If an abnormal image occurs, diagnose referring to the trouble list below.
NOTE
• ↑ in the list below is the paper advance direction.
Trouble list Image Reference

Line White line (Vertical) Refer to ☞ White line and black line
Black line (Vertical) appear on a print. (vertical) [35i].
White line (Vertical) Refer to ☞ Mistake in setting of

focal plane regulating guide [35i].
4. Troubleshooting
Paper Width line Example: 89 mm or 127 mm NOTE
• The paper width line does not
occur due to the iBeam unit
failure.
• For details, refer to
☞ Appearing the paper width
line [35i].
203 mm
White line (Horizontal) NOTE

Black line (Horizontal) • For details, refer to banding
shooting of the exposure
advance unit ☞ 25820.
4470 1/7
4470
White line and black line appear on a print. (vertical) [35i]
! Specifying the occurring place
The line appears inputting from the film.

The line (irregular print) appears
in the setup print.
YES
YES
YES
The line occurs in the image saved from a film ☞ Inputting side is not good. (around the
to a media. scanner and around the AFC)
NO
The line appears inputting from the media. NO

Carry out Image Path Check of Self-
diagnostic.
☞ 35920
4. Troubleshooting
YES
☞ Outputting side is not good. (exposure

advance unit, iBeam unit)
Do the white line or the black line disappear? YES

End
NO
☞ Problems of the flatbed scanner
Do the white line or the black line disappear? YES

End
NO
Carry out Image Path Check of Self-diagnostic.

☞ 35920
NO
Carry out iBeam Engine Check of Paper Specification Registration/Setup.

☞ 32512
The MAX-MIN Light Intensity Dispersion of any one of B, G, R exceeds 50%?

YES
The Adjacent Light Intensity Dispersion of any one of B, G, R exceeds 20%?
iBeam unit replacing
4470 2/7
4470
! Inputting side is not good. (around the scanner and around the AFC)
1. Clean the AFC.
Slot of AFC (135/240 AFC-II) Slot of AFC (120 AFC-II)
4. Troubleshooting
Lens unit
G078470
2. Clean the scanner lens and the LED light source unit glass.
LED light source unit Scanner lens
G078471
3. After cleaning the AFC, the scanner and the LED light source unit, perform the Light Source Update.
4. If the condition is not improved after cleaning the AFC, the scanner and the LED light source unit, the
LED light source unit or the Scanner unit may be defective.
5. Operation is completed. (Return to the workflow.)
4470 3/7
4470
! Outputting side is not good. (exposure advance unit, iBeam unit)
1. Clean the focal plane regulating guide of the exposure advance unit.
Focal plane regulating guide
4. Troubleshooting
G082678
2. Clean the iBeam unit.
iBeam unit
G082676
3. Confirm the flatbed scanner glass and clean it if it is soiled.
4. Perform iBeam Tuning via Paper Specification Registration/Setup.

For details of iBeam Tuning, refer to ☞ 32511.
4470 4/7
4470
! Problems of the flatbed scanner
1. Confirm that the image scanned with the flatbed scanner at iBeam Tuning.
If the scanned image is not normal, confirm the connection, replace or reinstall the driver software of the flatbed scanner.
IMPORTANT
• Save the result of the scanned image to C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\Tmp.
Three images of PreScan Tmp (prescanning image), ScanTmp_Left (scanning image: left) or
ScanTmp_Right (scanning image: right) are saved in Tmp.
• The image data in Tmp is overwrote every time you perform iBeam Tuning. If reset the power supply, the
image data in Tmp will be deleted.
PreScan Tmp ScanTmp_Left ScanTmp_Right
4. Troubleshooting
G082762
2. If the error occur in scanning the image data, confirm it referring to the diagnosis in Chapter 4.
4470 5/7
4470
Mistake in setting of focal plane regulating guide [35i]
Line
G082764
! Cause
The error above occurs if you print in condition that the focal plane regulating guide is not securely attached.
4. Troubleshooting
! Corrective action
Check that the focal plane regulating guide is securely attached.
G082679
4470 6/7
4470
Appearing the paper width line [35i]
Example: 89 mm or 127 mm
203 mm
G082762
4. Troubleshooting
! Cause
The error above occur when printing with the bigger size paper (203 mm etc.) after you print hundreds of images with the smaller size
paper (89 mm etc.) repeatedly.
The paper width line does not occur due to the iBeam unit failure.
! Corrective action
Carry out iBeam Tuning via Paper Specification Registration/Setup to delete the line.
For the details of iBeam Tuning, refer to ☞ 32511.
4470 7/7
4500
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type)
The following table shows the conditions and the corrective action when error messages appear.
Error message Condition Countermeasure

The copy may be improperly The copy is out of the edge of the copy deck in the Put the copy properly on the copy deck in the
positioned, or the selected area is flatbed scanner. flatbed scanner so that it is not out of the deck.
too small. Set the image frame for the copy manually.
The outline of copy is not clear. Set the image frame for the copy manually.
The message appears when the image frame is too Remove the check mark for the DIGITAL
small with the digital ICE function valid. ICE Technology(TM) function.
Resize the image frame manually.
Flatbed Scanner Communication When the driver software for FB scanner has not Check the conditions shown on the left and
Error been installed then start the FB scanner execution display by
When the power of FB scanner is OFF pressing again on the Order
display.
When the cable is not connected properly to USB
port 1 or SCSI2 which the FB scanner has been
connected to
When the lock of FB scanner has not been released
4. Troubleshooting
There is insufficient memory. The memory of the personal computer is not Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
enough. image smaller.
There is nothing to scan. There is no copy on the copy deck. Place the copy correctly.
Cancel When the user interrupt the previewing or scanning Carry out the same previewing or scanning
Quit the process. operation operation again after deleting the message in
the message box.
There is insufficient space left on The hard disk space is not enough. Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
the hard disk. image smaller.
The copy may be improperly When the copy is protruded from the deck Place the copy on the deck not to protrude.
positioned.
When the copy is not protruded from it, release
the error message and enlarge or move the
image frame to fit the image.
Capturing communication error When using the FB scanner with QSS software Check the conditions shown on the left and
while using the FB scanner with another software then start the FB scanner execution display by
When the power of FB scanner is OFF pressing Preview again on the Order Display.
When the cable is not connected properly to USB
port 1 or SCSI2 which the FB scanner has been
connected to
All Data included the Tone Curve When the Setting Initialization button is clicked If you would like to initialize, select OK. If
and the Save Data are initialized. on the FB scanner execution display not, select Cancel.
Are you sure you want to initialize
them?
Cut Position Error When the upper left corner of brought area is Press the Preview button again.
recognized as placed in a wrong position (The
position of copy is not wrong.)
Cut Angle Error When the inner angle of brought area is not
recognized 90-degree (The angle of copy is not
wrong.)
DLL Load Completed When trying to load the DLL again although it is Quit the message display and execution display
already loaded of FB scanner by pressing the CLOSE button
DLL Load Failed When the DLL is not recognized as already and restart the FB scanner execution display by
installed pressing YES key in the order display.
When the installation of DLL is failed
The DLL was not loaded. When the DLL is not loaded
4500 1/2
4500
IMPORTANT
• If the messages of DLL Load Completed, DLL Load Failed or The DLL was not loaded. appears repeatedly, the DLL
data may be damaged or broken. Reinstall the QSS software as a corrective action. Refer to the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• DLL is a driver for running the FB scanner execution display on the Order Display of QSS.
Location: My Computer\C\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Exe\NKC_ImageFBScan.dll
4. Troubleshooting
4500 2/2
4600
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow
The replenisher section door is open. Check the setting of the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section
Door).
YES
NO
Remove the processor rear cover or open the replenisher section door.
NOTE
• If the replenisher section door does not open, unlock the door inserting the driver through the door gap.
Refer to ☞ How to open/close the replenisher section door.
4. Troubleshooting
Remove the replenishment cartridge.
If the replenishment cartridge is in the lower position, move the replenishment cartridge installation section to the upper position in the Output Check,
and remove the replenishment cartridge.
Confirm that there is no objects in the replenishment cartridge installation section.
Confirm that the Light Lock Door Motor operates

normally in the Output Check.
Confirm that the replenishment cartridge installation sensor is
normal.
Operating
Not operating
The operation sound of opening motor is heard. Confirm that the drive systems such as gear operate normally.
Yes
No
The replenishment cartridge opening motor or F replenishment I/O PCB is failed.
Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.

☞ 4610
4600 1/2
4600
! How to open/close the replenisher section door

If the replenishment cartridge installation section is lowered and the replenisher section door is locked, insert the flathead driver into
the slits beside the processor rear cover, lift the lever, unlock it, then open/close the replenisher section door.
Slits
Lever
4. Troubleshooting
Processor rear cover
G085896
4600 2/2
4610
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error
YES Replenishment solution is left in the replenisher cartridge.

The replenisher cartridge is open.
Replenishment solution leaks in the solution tank.
NO
YES NO
1. Discharge all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank.

If the replenish cartridge is not open, perform Manual Open in
2. Attach new replenish cartridge. After the problems are solved,
F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
☞ 33030 perform Manual Open in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount
Setting.
☞ 33030
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
4. Troubleshooting
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
• Add water until all the replenishment solution level sensors turn ON while checking the
status of P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor at Input Check.
The maximum additional water (ml)

P1R P2RA P2RB
3695 642.5 642.5
IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment solution level sensor turns ON, immediately stop adding
water.
Adding too much water may cause the following errors.
• ☞ No. 5905[F]−0001P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution

level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5906[F]−0001P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment
solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5907[F]−0001P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment
solution level management is abnormal.
After the problems are solved, perform Manual Open in F: Functions of Pump Output
Amount Setting and initialize the replenishment data.
☞ 33030
The printing process can be continued.
4610 1/1
4620
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error
The solution levels (P1R/P2RA/P2RB) are even at the ### YES P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
(upper) replenishment solution level sensor. (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
NO
Add a small amount of water to turn ON all of the P1R (Upper)

Drain all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper)
(P1R/P2RA/P2RB). Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor.
Attach new replenisher cartridge.
4. Troubleshooting
After the problems are solved, perform Manual Open in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
☞ 33030
4620 1/1
40500
Attention message: Processor
No. 0500[N] No. 0501[N]

Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. The replenisher switch is turned on.
Attention message release Attention message release

YES YES or automatic release
• The replenisher switch turns ON by pressing the YES key.
Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Suffix Condition
- The refilling water tank level sensor turns OFF. number
- After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, a
Diagnosis specified number of seconds of replenishment lack
time has passed.
Blown fuses Manual No.
- After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, a
F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 specified time has passed with the replenishment
solution sensor ON.
Failed parts Manual No. - After the replenisher switch was turned OFF, manual
Refilling water tank level sensor ☞ 63290 replenishment or output amount measurement is
4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 carried out.
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure

Failed parts
☞ 4203
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Failed parts
☞ 4252
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 1/5
40500
No. 0502[N] No. 0503[N] [SM]

Add replenishment solution to the Empty the Effluent Tank.
replenishment tank.
Attention message release
Attention message release YES or automatic release
YES • This attention message will be automatically released when
the effluent tank is emptied.
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
01 CD replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF. number
02 BF replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF. 01 The CD effluent float switch turns ON.
03 STB replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF. 02 The BF effluent float switch turns ON.
04 The STB effluent float switch turns ON.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Blown fuses Manual No. • At the removal of two solutions, when the suffix number 04
☞ 66200 appears, BF+STB will appear.
4. Troubleshooting
F15 Processor control PCB
Failed parts Manual No. Check Point

Replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63290 1 Check the solution level of the effluent tank.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 2 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves
up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Failed parts
☞ 4203 Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse Failed parts Manual No.
Failed parts Effluent float switch ☞ 63290
☞ 4252 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure

• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Failed parts
Wiring diagram ☞ 4203
☞ 89000
Failed parts
☞ 4252
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 2/5
40500
No. 0505 No. 0507

Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Close the Processor Top Cover.
Unit.
YES or automatic release • When the interlock switch (processor top cover) is ON,
• This attention message will be automatically released when automated release is activated.
prints are removed.
Condition
NOTE
• While this message appears, the sorter is not activated. Suffix Condition
number
Condition - While prints are not being made, the interlock switch
(processor top cover) turns OFF.
Suffix Condition
- When auto cleaning is to be carried out, the interlock
number
switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
- The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns
- When refilling with water is to be carried out, the
DARK.
interlock switch (processor top cover) turns OFF.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point NOTE
1 Check that the print receiving tray and the print full • The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump,
sensor are not soiled. and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch
(processor top cover) turns OFF.
Diagnosis
Check Point
Failed parts Manual No.
1 • Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.
Print full sensor ☞ 63510
• Check that the processor top cover is securely
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 closed.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63290
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

Failed parts
☞ 4203
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 3/5
40500
No. 0508 No. 0518

Paper remains in the processor. Are you Set the Dryer Cover.
sure you want to turn the drive off?
Attention message release YES/START or automatic release
YES or NO • This message will be released automatically when the dryer
• Select YES to turn OFF the drive. cover is closed.
• Select NO to finish the print mode with the drive being ON.
Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
number
Suffix Condition
number - When starting to print, the interlock switch (dryer
cover) was OFF.
- Although paper still remains in the processing rack or
dryer rack, an attempt is made to turn off the drive. - While prints are not being made, the interlock switch
(dryer cover) turns OFF.
NOTE
NOTE
• Processing time of the processor varies depending on the
specification. • When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive
4. Troubleshooting
motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
Check Point
Check Point
1 Check if all pieces of paper come out.
1 Check that the dryer section or dryer cover is securely
attached.
Diagnosis
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63290

Failed parts
☞ 4203
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 4/5
40500
No. 0519 No. 0520

Remove the prints from the Print Sensors may be dirty.
Conveyor Unit.
Countermeasure message
Attention message release Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
YES manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity again.
Condition Attention message release
YES
Suffix Condition
number Condition
- When the print with over 420 mm of the paper
Suffix Condition
advance length does not remain inside the processor
number
at the time of detecting the rear end of the print with
over 420 mm of the paper advance length at the print - When the light source level when the sensor status
sensor changes from DARK to LIGHT is 170 or more, when
carrying out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
- When the print with over 420 mm of the paper
Adjustment via Functions in Print Sensor LED
advance length occurs 20 times consecutively inside
Light Intensity Adjustment.
the processor at the time of detecting the rear end of
4. Troubleshooting
the print with over 420 mm of the paper advance
length at the print sensor Suffix Condition
number
- When the first print of the next order entered at the
time of detecting the rear end of the print with over 0001 Print Sensor (Left) (3502)
420 mm of the paper advance length at the print Print Sensor (3501, 3501i)
sensor 0002 Print Sensor (Right) (3502)
Check Point
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor
Adjustment.
Refer to ☞ 33001.
Diagnosis
Print sensor ☞ 63510
(3501 and 3501i)
Print sensor (right) (left)
(3502)
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 5/5
40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment
No. 0600[J] No. 0603[J]

The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD Add water to the Water Supply Tank.
No. 0601[J] Attention message release
The Tablet Cartridge is empty. BF YES
No. 0602[J] Condition

The Tablet Cartridge is empty.STB
Suffix Condition
number
Replace the Tablet Cartridge with the flashing lamp. - The SW tank level sensor turns OFF.
YES or automatic release Diagnosis
• The message will be automatically released when the cartridge
is replaced.
SW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
Condition Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Error message No. Condition NOTE
No. 0600 CD Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
4. Troubleshooting
tablet even though the CD Drum motor
was started. Wiring diagram
No. 0601 BF Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect ☞ 89000
tablet even though the BF Drum motor
was started.
No. 0602 STB Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect
tablet even though the STB Drum motor
was started.
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches
Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor
Status→Change→Tablet Drop Reservoir is set to ON.
(Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Tablet Sensor ☞ 63310
Drum motor
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40600 1/3
40600
No. 0604[J] No. 0605[J]

Add water to the SW/DW Tank. Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD

No. 0606[J]
YES Attach the Tablet Cartridge. BF
Condition No. 0607[J]

Attach the Tablet Cartridge.STB
Suffix Condition
number
- The SW/DW tank level sensor turns OFF. YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically released when
Diagnosis you attach the tablet cartridge.
Condition
SW/DW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Error message No. Condition
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 No. 0605 The CD Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT
when you attempted to operate a drum or
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE elevator.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) No. 0606 The BF Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT
Wiring diagram elevator.
☞ 89000 No. 0607 The STB Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT
elevator.
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches
Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor
Status→Change→Tablet Drop Reservoir is set to ON.
(Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Cartridge Sensor ☞ 63310
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40600 2/3
40600
No. 0609[J] No. 0610[J]

The Tablet kit is empty. Empty the Effluent Tank.###
Countermeasure message Attention message release

Replace all the Tablet Cartridges with new ones. YES or automatic release
Attention message release • This attention message will be automatically released when
YES the effluent tank is emptied.
Condition NOTE
• If the Effluent Float Switch turns ON, all water supply pumps
Suffix Condition and cleaning pumps stops physically.
number
- All tablets of CD in a kit are dropped. Condition
NOTE Suffix Condition

number
• If all tablets of CD in a kit are dropped, Tablet Operation is to
be carried out and tablets of BF and STB are to be dropped up 01 The CD effluent float switch turns ON.
to Drop Limit. 02 The BF effluent float switch turns ON.
04 The STB effluent float switch turns ON.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• At the removal of two solutions, when the suffix number 04
appears, BF+STB will appear.
Check Point
1 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves
up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Effluent float switch ☞ 63290
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40600 3/3
40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
Check Point
No. 0700[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with 1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not
soiled.
a new one.P-#
Diagnosis
YES Adjustment failure point Manual No.
This attention message will be released only when the Sensitivity of the replenishment solution ☞ 27830
replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the sensor
replenishment package sensor once.)
Condition
Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
Suffix Condition SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
number
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not NOTE
refilled forcibly.
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not Wiring diagram
refilled forcibly. ☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly.
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns
refilled forcibly.
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns
refilled forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns
refilled forcibly.
NOTE
• When the tank is not refilled forcibly whether or not to set SM
Replenishment Setting via Machine Specification, these
messages appear. When the following conditions, the tanks
are not refilled forcibly.
SM Detecting condition of the replenishment
Setting
ON The replenishment solution is not detected
when the power is ON.
The replenishment solution is not detected
when the replenishment package is replaced.
during output checks.
while measuring the output amount.
while initial replenishing.
Each replenishment solution in the
replenishment package is not detected at the
same time.
OFF Forced replenishment is not carried out.
• A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.
40700 1/4
40700
No. 0701[SM] No. 0702[SM]

Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# Add water to the Water Supply Tank.

YES or automatic release YES
• When the replenishment package is set, the message is
released automatically and attention message No. 703 Would Condition
you like to initialize the remaining amount of the
Suffix Condition
Replenishment Package? appears.
number
Condition - The water supply tank level sensor turns OFF.
Suffix Condition Diagnosis

number
0001 Replenishment package sensor P-1 turns OFF. Failed parts Manual No.
0002 Replenishment package sensor P-2 turns OFF. Water supply tank level sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Diagnosis Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment failure point Manual No. NOTE
Failure in the attaching position adjustment − • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
of the replenishment package sensor
Wiring diagram
Failed parts Manual No. ☞ 89000
Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40700 2/4
40700
No. 0703 [SM] No. 0704 [SM]

Would you like to initialize the remaining Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the
amount of the Replenishment Package? remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.
YES or NO Attention message release
• Select YES to bring up the message No. 0704: Press the YES or NO
[YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of • Select YES to initialize the remaining amount of the
the Replenishment Package. replenishment package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display. • Select NO to return to the regular print display.
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• If the replenishment package is replaced before it • If the replenishment package is replaced before it
becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the
remaining amount of the replenishment package. remaining amount of the replenishment package.
Otherwise, the messages No. 5708 and 5709 Otherwise, the messages No. 5708 and 5709
Replenishment Package solution remaining error. Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
will be displayed because the actual remaining amount will be displayed because the actual remaining amount
of the replenishment solution differs from the remaining of the replenishment solution differs from the remaining
4. Troubleshooting
amount in data. amount in data.
☞ No. 5708[SM] ☞ No. 5708[SM]
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but • If the replenishment package is not replaced but
attached again, the process will be continued without attached again, the process will be continued without
initializing the remaining amount of the replenishment initializing the remaining amount of the replenishment
package. package.
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- Before the replenishment package is completely - Before the replenishment package is completely
empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns
OFF. OFF.
Diagnosis Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment − Failure in the attaching position adjustment −
of the replenishment package sensor of the replenishment package sensor
Failed parts Manual No. Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300 Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600 SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 ☞ 89000
40700 3/4
40700
NOTE
No. 0705[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with
a new one.P-# Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
YES
This attention message will be released only when the
replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the
replenishment package sensor once.)
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns
4. Troubleshooting
refilled forcibly.
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns
refilled forcibly.
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns
refilled forcibly.
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns
refilled forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns
refilled forcibly.
NOTE
• If the tank is refilled forcibly after SM replenishment has been
set via Machine Specification, these messages appear.
• A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not
soiled.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution ☞ 27830
sensor

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
40700 4/4
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
No. 0900[F] No. 0901[F]

PSR is running out. PSR is empty.
Countermeasure message Countermeasure message

Add eight liters PSR to the PSR replenishment tank. Add twelve liters PSR to the PSR replenishment tank.
YES YES
NOTE NOTE
• Even if the above attention message appears, the printing • When the above attention message appears, printing process
process can be continued until the message ☞ No. 0901[F] stops.
PSR is empty. occurs.
• The above attention message starts condition check after Start Condition
Up Check is performed.
Suffix Condition
number
Condition
- • PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Suffix Condition Sensor turns OFF.
number • The power supply is turned on when PSR
- • PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is
Sensor turns OFF. off.
4. Troubleshooting
• The power supply is turned on when PSR
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is Check Point
off.
Add PSR. -
Check Point Check the PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution ☞ 35220
Level Sensor status via Input Check.
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution ☞ 35220 Diagnosis
Level Sensor status via Input Check.
Diagnosis PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311
Sensor
Failed parts Manual No. F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 NOTE
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) ☞ 89000
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 1/7
40900
No. 0902[F] No. 0903[F]

Install the replenisher cartridge. Close the replenisher section door.

YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
- Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor turns OFF when - The replenishment cover opens when cartridge
performing the cartridge opening process. opening process is performed.
Check Point For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.

Check that replenisher cartridge is correctly set. -
Check Point
Check the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor ☞ 35220
status via Input Check. Check if the replenisher section door is closed -
securely.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section ☞ 35220
Door) status via Input Check.
Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor ☞ 63311 Diagnosis
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63311
NOTE F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Wiring diagram
NOTE
☞ 89000 • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 2/7
40900
No. 0904[F] No. 0905[F]

Replenish PSR. Install the new replenisher cartridge.

Add eight liters PSR to the PSR replenishment tank. YES
YES Condition

number
Suffix Condition - After opening the cartridge, all the following sensors
number remain off though a specified time has passed.
- PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor • P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
turns OFF when performing the cartridge opening
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
process.
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
Check Point
NOTE
Add PSR. - • The cartridge installation section is raised, and the attention
☞ 35220 message appears.
4. Troubleshooting
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor status via Input Check. For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.
Diagnosis Check Point

Failed parts Manual No. Check that an empty replenisher cartridge is not -
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311 set.
Sensor Check the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor ☞ 35220
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 status via Input Check.
Diagnosis
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Failed parts Manual No.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution ☞ 63311
Wiring diagram Level Sensor
☞ 89000 • P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 3/7
40900
No. 0906[F] No. 0907[F]

It is ready to replace the replenisher Collect the waste solution.
cartridge.
YES • This attention message will be automatically released when
the effluent tank is emptied.
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
- When creating the replenishment solution (opening number
the cartridge) is completed 01 P1 Effluent Float Switch turns ON.
04 P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch turns ON.
NOTE
• When creating replenishment solution on the previous day,
Check Point
this message appears while Start Up Checks are performed.
The empty replenisher cartridge can be beforehand replaced Check the solution level of the effluent tank. -
with a new one. When the replenishment solution runs out, Check the effluent float switch status via Input ☞ 35220
4. Troubleshooting
creating the solution is automatically performed again. Check.
Check Point
Diagnosis
1 Set a new cartridge.

• P1 Effluent Float Switch ☞ 63311
• P2 Effluent Float Switch
• PS Effluent Float Switch
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 4/7
40900
No. 0908[F] No. 0909[F]

Open operation was not completed Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot
correctly. Replenishment solution start the operation.
preparation will resume.
Attention message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition When trying to measure the output amount or perform the initial
number replenishment when the replenishment solution level sensor for
- The system is shut down with opening operation replenishment tank is under the conditions below.
remaining incomplete and the system is started.
Suffix Condition
Check Point number
01 P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor:
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created OFF
(opening operation) completely.
4. Troubleshooting
02 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor: OFF
04 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor: OFF
08 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor:
OFF
Check Point
Create the replenishment solution. -
Check each replenishment solution level sensors ☞ 35220
status via Input Check.
Diagnosis
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution ☞ 63311
Level Sensor
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 5/7
40900
No. 0910[F] No. 0911[F]

Preparing the replenishment solution. Prcessor Section is processing. One
One moment please . . . moment please. . .

YES YES
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
While preparing the replenishment solution, the system has The message appears when executing the following operation
printed up to the maximum number of printed sheets (approx. while refilling the water or creating the replenishment solution.
330 sheets for L size). • Close Down Checks, Output Check, Pump Output
Amount Measurement, Initial Replenishment Operation,
Check Point Manual Open, Software Upgrade etc.
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created

(opening operation) completely.
4. Troubleshooting
40900 6/7
40900
No. 0912[F] No. 0913[F]

Replenishment solution was created. Manual opening cannot be started.
Initialize replenishment data and restart
replenishment. Countermeasure message
Drain the replenishment solution from the tank.
YES
YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the replenishment data. Condition
• When manual opening is performed by mistake while the
replenishment solution is created normally, select NO. Condition
Maintain the status without initializing the replenishment data. When the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of
P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on after the Manual Open and Create
Condition Replenishment Solution (Manual Open) buttons are clicked
Condition
Suffix Condition
If all the (upper and lower) replenishment solution level sensors number
of P1R, P2RA and P2RB are turned on when starting the manual
0001 P1R
opening operation.
0002 P2RA
4. Troubleshooting
• For restarting the process without draining the 0004 P2RB
replenishment solution of P1R/P2RA/P2RB at the
countermeasure for replenishment error: the message For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.
No.912 occurs if adding the water to the replenishment tank
and performing manual opening with turning on all the NOTE
(upper and lower) replenishment level solution sensors for • When any one of the (lower) replenishment solution level
P1R/P2RA/P2RB. sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB is on after clicking Manual
Open and Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open)
and a specified time has passed, ☞ No. 5923[F] occurs.
Countermeasure
1. Drain replenishment solution completely from the
replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB.
2. Perform Manual Open with each replenishment tank
empty.☞ 33030
Check Point
Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment ☞ 35220
solution level sensors of each processing solution
with Input Check.
Diagnosis
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311
Sensor
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 7/7
41000
Attention message: Printer
No. 1000 No. 1002

The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Would you like to feed the leading edge of
Paper Magazine A paper? Paper Magazine A
No. 1001 No. 1003
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Would you like to feed the leading edge of
Paper Magazine B paper? Paper Magazine B

Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the YES or NO
printing. • Select YES to feed out the first piece of paper without
Attention message release exposing.
YES or NO
• Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.
• Select YES to restart printing.
• Select NO to stop printing. Condition

number
Suffix Condition - An attempt is made to feed out the first piece of paper
4. Troubleshooting
number when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is
- Paper end sensor A or B is turned LIGHT while carried out or after you replaced the paper magazine.
printing.
Model Details
Diagnosis 3501 1. When the paper size of the magazine which
Failed parts Manual No. 3501i is in use changes from narrow to wide: One
piece of paper is advanced by 200 mm
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200 advance.
Dual paper magazine PCB (in case of B) ☞ 64190 NOTE
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 • Advancing a piece of paper by 200 mm
advance in detail 1 above is for cleaning
NOTE the processing rack.
2. For 3501i, two pieces of paper are advanced
Wiring diagram by 200 mm before printing the test print of
☞ 89000 iBeam Tuning.
NOTE
• If printing the test print of iBeam
Tuning, the paper is advanced for the
same purpose of when the paper size
changes from narrow to wide, because
the test prints are printed over the
maximum paper width of normal print.
Two pieces of paper are advanced
because the system advances paper in
both left and right directions against the
advancing direction.
3. Other than Details Nos. 1 and 2: One piece of
paper is advanced by 82.5 mm advance.
3502 1. One piece of paper is advanced by 82.5 mm
advance.
NOTE
• Refer to ☞ 55800 for other conditions.
41000 1/14
41000
No. 1004 No. 1010

Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Change the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine A Magazine A
No. 1005 No. 1011
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Change the Paper Magazine. Paper
Magazine B Magazine B

YES or automatic release YES or automatic release
• If you set the specified paper size magazine, the message will • If you set the specified paper size magazine, the message will
be automatically released. be automatically released.
Condition Condition
number number
- The paper magazine code sensor A or B cannot detect - The paper magazine is set which is different from the
the paper magazine code. (All the code sensors turn specified paper magazine prior to printing.
4. Troubleshooting
LIGHT.)
Check Point
Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
soiled. 2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.
correctly set. 3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.
will go. 4 Check the print channel setting.
Diagnosis Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
The adjusting position of the paper magazine ☞ 61050 The adjusting position of the paper magazine ☞ 61050
code sensor is defective. code sensor is defective.
Failed parts Manual No. Failed parts Manual No.

Paper magazine code sensor A or B ☞ 61050 Paper magazine code sensor A or B ☞ 61050
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
NOTE NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 ☞ 89000
41000 2/14
41000
No. 1012−1013 No. 1014

Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for The system is being initialized, one
Corrective action of Attention message. moment please. . .

Condition YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released automatically after
IMPORTANT system initialization is completed.
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above Condition
manual.
Suffix Condition
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective
number
action of Attention message.
- After the power supply has been turned ON, the
Attention message (Printer) system is being initialized.
Attention message table
IMPORTANT
No.1012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print
channel. • If the message No.1014 The system is being
initialized, one moment please. . . is displayed for
4. Troubleshooting
No.1013 Outputting. . .
longer time than the time for usual QSS start up when
turning ON the QSS, ARCNET communication error
NOTE may cause this situation.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described. • Check the ARCNET communication status on the
Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm
the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
Diagnosis
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service
Manual
PC interface PCB PC Service
Manual

Failed parts
☞ 4200
☞ 4203
Failed part(s) [S-4]

NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
41000 3/14
41000
Wiring diagram table [scanner]

No. 1017−1024
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for
Corrective action of Attention message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
Attention message (Printer)
No.1017 Would you like to stop printing?
No.1024 Would you like to register the correction value?
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41000 4/14
41000
Suffix Condition
No. 1027 number
Profile data was not found. 0091 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the parameter file for gray control is not included in
Attention message release the hard disk.
YES
Diagnosis
Condition
Failure in the profile data Manual No.
Suffix Condition Install the profile data from the profile CD PC Service
number corresponding to the main software. Manual
0001 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the monitor profile data is not included in the hard
disk.
the monitor initial setting file is not included in the
hard disk.
the profile data of paper type 1 is not included in the
hard disk.
4. Troubleshooting
hard disk.
the profile data of paper types 1 and 2 are not
included in the hard disk.
hard disk.
the profile data of paper types 1, 2 and 3 are not
the flatbed scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
the flatbed scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
the positive scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
the positive scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
the reference table data (monitor) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
the reference table data (printer) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
the parameter file for chroma enhancement is not
41000 5/14
41000
No. 1029
The measurement failed. Measure it again.
Press the [YES] key to measure the print again. If this error recurs,
press the [NO] key then clean the Advance Roller of the
Colorimeter Unit. For details, refer to the manual. Between steps
G083195
YES or NO
• Select YES to measure the print again. Diagnosis
• Select NO to stop the operation.
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ
depending on the suffix number.
Condition
When the test print color density is normal.
Suffix Condition
number Suffix The countermeasure action
Manual No.
0001 The test print paper type for measurement was not number and the failed part
correct. 0001 Adjust the height of the ☞ 27110
When measuring the daily setup test print, the density 0002 colorimeter unit.
4. Troubleshooting
between steps did not rise consecutively. Clean the advance rollers of the
0002 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was colorimeter with a cleaning sheet.
below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
were not ready. 0003 Clean the calibration plate.
0003 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was 0004 Replace the calibration plate ☞ 27100
below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days 0005 when it is scratched on.
did not change consecutively day by day and changed 0006
suddenly.
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100
0004 The Dmax is within the range of 0.9 and 3.8, but
when calculating the daily setup correction value, the 0006 Problems may occur if the
correction value density was over 10 times as high as process of performing morning
the previous value. daily setup, then performing
emulsion number change setup
0005 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the
on the main paper when the air
correction value density was over 3 key. And minus
temperature has risen, is repeated
correction (print density has been risen) has been
for several days.
carried out.
In that case, perform the paper
0006 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the specification registration setup,
total correction value (density), which started as soon then perform the paper magazine
as the initial setup or paper specification registration registration setup of other
setup was completed, is beyond the limit value. And magazines.
minus correction (print density has been risen) has
been carried out.
When the test print color density is abnormal.
NOTE Suffix The countermeasure action
Manual No.
• Refer to the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup. number and the failed part
☞ 56620 0001 Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
• For a setup other than the daily setup, the suffix number 0001 0002 (35)
only occurs. 0003 Laser power supply ☞ 64250
0004 (35)
Check Point 0005
0006
Laser unit ☞ 61450
1 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the (35)
colorimeter. iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
2 Check that the test print is correctly made. (35i)
Printhead module ☞ 26720
(35i)
41000 6/14
41000
Suffix The countermeasure action

Manual No. No. 1030−1041
number and the failed part
0005 Problems may occur when the
processing solution has been Corrective action of Attention message.
replaced.
specification registration setup, Condition
then perform the paper magazine
registration setup of other
IMPORTANT
magazines.
NOTE Service Manual are described in the table in above
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) manual.
Wiring diagram action of Attention message.
☞ 89000 Attention message (Printer)
No.1030 Wait until printing is complete.
No.1031 Paper Specification Registration Setup was not
4. Troubleshooting
completed.
No.1032 One moment please. . .
No.1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not
completed.
No.1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set.
No.1039 Paper type specification is not set.
No.1040 Press the [ORDER] key.
No.1041 Unable to accept additional processing at this time.
The order will be counted. Wait until the output
process is complete.
NOTE
41000 7/14
41000
NOTE
No. 1043
Laser temperature is being adjusted. One
moment please. . . Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
YES or automatic release.
• When the temperature adjustment of the lasers B, G and R are
completed and the machine becomes processable, it returns
automatically.
Condition
Condition
The count down timer The B and G lasers are waited until the
is displayed in the temperatures become to be processable.
Order Display.
The count down timer The laser unit or R laser is waited until
is not displayed in the the temperature becomes to be
Order Display. processable.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The attention message appears until B and G lasers are
processable.
• When the laser unit is waited until the temperature becomes to
be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(U)
is displayed.
• When the R laser is waited until the temperature becomes to
be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(R)
is displayed.
• Processable range of the laser unit is 23.0°C to 42.0°C.
• Processable range of the R laser is 27.7°C to 28.3°C.
• The laser unit heater works to shorten the time required for
adjusting the temperature to processable.
• You can check the temperatures of R laser and laser unit in
Laser Unit Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Check Point
1 Wait until the laser temperature adjustment has been
completed.
2 The message, Laser temperatures are being
adjusted. does not disappear from the Net Order
display. Refer to ☞ 4302.
Diagnosis
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 61050
B and G laser drivers ☞ 61450
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
Laser power supply ☞ 64250
41000 8/14
41000
No. 1047 No. 1048−1051

Close printer door. Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for
YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released automatically when Condition
the printer door is closed.
IMPORTANT
Condition • The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Suffix Condition Service Manual are described in the table in above
number manual.
0001 The interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) turns OFF.
0002 Printer door 3 sensor turns off.
NOTE
• The power is not supplied to some electrical parts when the
No.1048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has
interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) turns OFF.
completed.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point No.1050 Additional Picture CD's cannot be made in this
order. Press the [ORDER] key.
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are securely No.1051 Multiple input media cannot be used to create a
closed. Picture CD.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Adjustment failure point Manual No. • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
Adjustment failure in the attaching position - the QSS does not currently use may be described.
of the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2)
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the printer door 3 sensor

Interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) ☞ 61050
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61050
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190

Failed parts
☞ 4200

Failed parts
☞ 4252
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
41000 9/14
41000
No. 1065 No. 1074

Would you like to continue? Sensors may be dirty.
Attention message release Countermeasure message

YES Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light
Condition Intensity again.
Suffix Condition YES
number
- Printer door 3 sensor turns off while printing using Condition
paper magazine A.
Condition
NOTE The light source level when the sensor status changes from
• This attention message occurs after 6173:Printer Door 3 is DARK to LIGHT is 170 or more, when carrying out Paper
open. It may be adversely affect print quality. is released. Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment via Functions in
Paper Sensor Adjustment.
• It occurs for the dual paper magazine system.
Check Point Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
1 Check that printer door 3 is securely closed. (bit)
0001 Paper end sensor A (SE13)
Diagnosis 0002 Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Adjustment failure point Manual No. 0004 Paper loading sensor (SE14)
of the printer door 3 sensor NOTE
• The corresponding sensor is displayed in the second line of the
message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61050 For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190 Suffix number display.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 ☞ 4002
NOTE Check Point
Wiring diagram 2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor
☞ 89000 Adjustment display. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor
LED light intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Paper end sensor A (SE13) ☞ 61200
Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Zigzagging correction sensor (left) (SE19) ☞ 61300
Zigzagging correction sensor (right) (SE20)
Exposure start sensor (SE22)
Exposure end sensor (SE24)
41000 10/14
41000
NOTE
No. 1079−1081
Wiring diagram Corrective action of Attention message.
☞ 89000
Condition
IMPORTANT
manual.
No.1079 If you would like to make a Picture CD, using the
current data, press the [ORDER] key.
4. Troubleshooting
No.1080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time.
Press the [ORDER] key.
No.1081 The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
NOTE
41000 11/14
41000
No. 1082 No. 1087

iBeam temperature is being adjusted. Would you like to calibrate the
One moment please. . . Colorimeter?

YES or automatic release. YES or NO
Condition Condition
1033 The system waits for the iBeam unit to become stable. number
- This attention message appears when the test print is
Check Point not printed within one minute after calibrating the
colorimeter.
1 Wait until the stabilization has been completed.
2 If the power supply is not turned on for 20 or more
days, the system performs the forced pre-emission for
approximately 30 minutes.
☞ 32510
4. Troubleshooting
41000 12/14
41000
No. 1093 No. 1094

Uneven coloring may occur on the print. Unit is not attached.
Would you like to stop processing?
Countermeasure message Pull out the Unit, then attach it completely.
Execute iBeam Tuning. For details, refer to the manual. Attention message release
Attention message release YES
YES or NO
• Select YES to stop printing process. Condition
NOTE Condition
• After selecting YES, iBeam Tuning is carried out from When the motor protection circuit of paper supply unit A or paper
Paper Specification Registration/Setup at F: advance unit operates
Functions.
☞ 32511 Suffix Condition
• Select NO to continue printing process. number
NOTE (bit)
• If printing process proceeded after selecting NO, confirm 0001 Paper supply unit A
the finished quality of print and conduct iBeam Tuning 0002 Paper advance unit
4. Troubleshooting
if necessary. 0003 The Paper Supply Unit A and Paper Advance Unit
☞ 32511
NOTE
Condition • The corresponding unit is displayed in the second line of the
Suffix Condition message.
number
IMPORTANT
- When selecting to print to a wide paper size after
printing more than the specified number of prints in • This attention message occurs due to the wiring
succession at a single narrower paper size (default: connection failure at the drawer connector connected
300 prints), uneven print caused by hysteresis may when having set each unit, each motor failure and
occur. Encourage iBeam Tuning. printer control PCB failure.
Follow the diagnostic procedure shown below when the
NOTE problem recurs even after inserting and unplugging
• This notification is not displayed if configuring 0 of each unit.
Notification of Print quality confirmation (in the service
mode) of printing operation tab at Operator Selections Diagnosis
because notification function become invalid. Paper supply unit A
Paper advance motor 1 ☞ 61200
Paper advance motor 2
Paper supply arm motor (left)
Roller Move Motor (35i only)
Paper supply unit A drawer connector failure -
(J/P485, J/P486)
Paper advance unit

Turn motor ☞ 61400
Paper advance arm motor
Paper advance motor 3
Paper advance pressure change motor
Lane select motor (3502 only)
Paper advance unit A drawer connector -
failure (J/P493, J/P494)
41000 13/14
41000

NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
41000 14/14
41300
Attention message: Scanner
Attention message: Scanner
No. 1302−1320
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for
Condition
IMPORTANT
manual.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective
Attention message (Scanner)
No. 1302 Would you like to stop scanning?
No. 1305 Photometry Section may be dirty.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 1306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film
Carrier, remove it.
No. 1313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet.
No. 1314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range.
No. 1315 LED Light Source temperature is being adjusted.
process cannot be continued.
No. 1316 Focus Adjustment failed.
No. 1317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto
Correction.
No. 1318 Close the Scanner Unit Cover.
No. 1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be
restarted.
No. 1320 There may be dust on the AFC opening.
NOTE
41300 1/1
41400
Attention message: Film carrier

No. 1400−1439
No. 1435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for film from the rear end (end with largest frame
Corrective action of Attention message. number).
No. 1438 Set the attachment.
No. 1439 Light Source was not updated. Would you like to
Condition scan?
IMPORTANT NOTE
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
Service Manual are described in the table in above the QSS does not currently use may be described.
manual.
Attention message (Film carrier)
No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier.
No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 1402 Attach the 135/240 AFC.
No. 1303 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.
No. 1404 The IX frame data is incomplete.
No. 1405 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier.
No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier.
No. 1412 The film is upside down. Would you like to
continue processing?
No. 1413 Input the frame number
No. 1414 The FID number was not detected.
No. 1416 Select the 240 lane.
No. 1417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover.
No. 1420 Select the DX code.
No. 1421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be
processed.
No. 1422 Select the 135 lane.
No. 1423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.
Remove the film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being
executed.
No. 1425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is
complete.
No. 1426 Attach the 110 AFC.
No. 1427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If
film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 1428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier.
No. 1429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly.
No. 1430 Confirm the frame size.
No. 1431 Attach the 120 AFC.
No. 1432 Attach the MMC.
No. 1433 Attach the AMC.
41400 1/2
41400
No. 1450−1454
Refer to the Connection Unit Service
Manual for Corrective action of Attention
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
manual.
Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for
Attention message (connection unit)
No.1450 Attach the Connecting Unit.
4. Troubleshooting
No.1451 Remove the film from the Connecting Unit.
No.1452 Film Processor was not detected.
No.1454 Close Film Advance Guides 1 and 2.
NOTE
41400 2/2
41500
Attention message: Disk/Media
Attention message: Disk/Media

No. 1501−1549
No.1531 The data was not written to the Network Folder.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Make sure the Network is connected.
Corrective action of Attention message. No.1532 Write the data.
No.1533 Data was saved to the storage media.
No.1534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you
Condition
like to delete the image file(s)?
IMPORTANT No.1535 USB Flash Memory is not set.
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS No.1536 The data has already been written to this media.
Service Manual are described in the table in above Format this media?
manual. No.1537 The appropriate file was not found.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective No.1538 There are still orders remaining for output. Click
action of Attention message. the Output Media icon to output.
Attention message (Storage Media) No.1539 The data has already been written to this media. Set
a new media.
No.1540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the
No.1500 Would you like to stop outputting media? media drive setting.
No.1501 The media is write protected. No.1541 The data for media output is waiting to be written.
Settings cannot be changed until the data is written
4. Troubleshooting
No.1502 Replace the media.
No.1503 The appropriate file was not found. to media.
No.1504 Image Destination for the print channel is not set. No.1542 The same order number data already exists. Would
you like to overwrite?
No.1505 Exif Information could not be read.
No.1543 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted
No.1506 Would you like to remove the USB Flash Memory? correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No.1508 There are some files that could not get written to the No.1545 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was
media. Would you like to stop processing? not written.
No.1509 Write the data. No.1546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm
No.1510 Read the data. Set the media. that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity
No.1511 Write the data. Set the media. Setting.
No.1512 Data was not read from the media. No.1547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the
media.
No.1513 Data was not written to the media. Format the
media? No.1548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the
image file(s)?
No.1514 Remove the USB Flash Memory.
No.1549 Data is too small to read.
No.1515 Data is too large to write.
No.1516 Data is too large to read. NOTE
No.1517 Invalid image format. Failed to read. • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
No.1518 Output media is the same as Input media. Select the QSS does not currently use may be described.
different one.
No.1519 Data has been written to this media. Would you
like to delete all the written files?
No.1520 Select the template.
No.1521 Template information does not match to make the
Album Print.
No.1522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except
selected one?
No.1523 It was not registered as an option.
No.1524 CD-R External Writing System is being output.
No.1526 Cannot remove the USB Flash Memory. Retry?
No.1527 Write the data. Set the media.
No.1528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for
normal printing.
No.1529 Failed to read the bar code.
No.1530 The data was not written to the Network Folder.
Make sure a Network Folder exists.
41500 1/1
41550
Attention message: Colorimeter
No. 1550 No. 1552

Register the Calibration Plate Data. The paper in the Colorimeter is too short.
It cannot be measured.
YES Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Condition Attention message release
YES
Suffix Condition
number
Condition
- The unavailable data is registered in the current
calibration plate data. Suffix Condition
number
Check Point 0001 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper
sensor 1 turned DARK. After that, paper sensor 1
1 Update the calibration plate data. ☞ 27100 turned LIGHT before advancing a specified amount
of paper.
Diagnosis 0002 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper
sensors 1 and 2 turned DARK. After that, paper
sensor 1 turned LIGHT before advancing a specified
4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 amount of paper.
NOTE
NOTE • Refer to the setup print color measuring operation flow.
Wiring diagram
Check Point
☞ 89000
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
2 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 63520
Paper advance motor
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
41550 1/2
41550
NOTE
No. 1555
The calibration plate data is out of range.
Wiring diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000
Make sure that the Calibration Plate is clean and placed correctly.
For details, refer to the manual.
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When calibrating the colorimeter, the difference
between the two photometry values obtained by the
calibration plate measurements at the 9 mm point
(black position) and 18 mm point (white position)
from the leading end is the determined value or less.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Refer to the setup print judgment operation flow. ☞ 56620
Check Point
1 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
2 Check that the calibration plate is correctly inserted.
3 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• The calibration plate may not be inserted correctly or be
soiled. Check and clean the calibration plate, and then
install it properly.
• Check if there is no dirt on the calibration plate, and
inserted it properly, then calibrate the colorimeter unit
again.
If the same attention message appears again, perform
Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
☞ 27100
• Then carry out Updating the Calibration Plate Data. If
the same attention message appears, the corrective
action should be taken according to the following
diagnosis.
Diagnosis
In case of adjusting failure
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 27110
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
For defective parts
Replace the calibration plate when it is ☞ 27100
scratched on.
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the
colorimeter unit failure.

41550 2/2
41600
Attention message: Pricing unit
Attention message: Pricing unit
No. 1600−1604
Condition
IMPORTANT
manual.
Attention message (Pricing unit)
No.1600 Reload the Pricing Unit.
No.1601 Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a pricing sheet.
4. Troubleshooting
No.1602 The rest 10 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit.
No.1603 The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit.
No.1604 Pricing Sheet Print Out Check
NOTE
41600 1/1
41620
Attention message: NMC
Attention message: NMC

No. 1621−1717
No.1701 The order waiting for judgment remains. Switch to
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for the Order Controller Display.
Corrective action of Attention message. No.1702 Meida is being written. One moment please. . .
No.1703 Would you like to delete all the finished orders?
No.1704 The order will be late. Confirm in the Order
Condition
Controller Display.
IMPORTANT No.1705 Would you like to cancel the order?
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS No.1706 Order Controller is busy.
Service Manual are described in the table in above No.1707 Enable the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE 1) to use
manual. the Order Controller.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective No.1708 This order number already exists. Change the order
action of Attention message. number.
Attention message (NMC) No.1709 Reorder cannot be started.
No.1710 No more orders can be registered to the Spooler.
No.1711 The CAU drive and the Spooler are placed in the
No.1621 Would you like to delete the order?
same location. Spooler will be relocated.
No.1622 Would you like to quit the Net Order Receipt?
No.1712 The CAU drive and the Spooler are placed in the
4. Troubleshooting
No.1634 Data could not be received. Would you like to same location. Relocate the Spooler.
delete the order?
No.1713 The Spooler has orders remaining. Would you like
No.1636 Check whether the Print Type in the QSS Print to delete them?
Channel Setting is Normal Print.
No.1714 The Spooler has some orders. Delete all the orders.
No.1637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not
No.1715 The order will be late for the promised Delivery
accepted.
Time. Confirm in the Net Order Display.
No.1638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not
No.1716 Proceeding. This function cannot be used.
Normal Print. The order was not accepted.
No.1717 The order waiting for judgment remains. Would
No.1639 Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not
you like to switch to the Order Controller Display?
accepted.
No.1641 Print Channel of QSS is not set. Confirm the Print NOTE
Channel. • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
No.1642 Destination to save image is not set for the QSS the QSS does not currently use may be described.
Print Channel. Confirm the Print Channel.
No.1643 The appropriate file was not found.
No.1644 Exif Information was not read.
No.1645 Data is too large to read.
No.1646 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No.1647 The appropriate file was not found.
No.1648 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted
correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No.1649 The Aspect Ratio of image size is incorrect. Failed
to write.
No.1650 Data is too small to read.
No.1651 Remote Control was not started.
No.1653 The output media size is too large. The data cannot
be output to the External System.
No.1656 When outputting in the HS mode, set the Media
Print Paper Fitting to either "Cut", "Overall" or
"Real Size".
No.1657 Hold On Save could not be executed. Secure
enough space, then restart processing.
No.1658 The Picture CD could not be created because there
are more frames than can be saved.
No.1659 Calibrating... Would you like to stop the
calibration?
No.1700 Would you like to stop printing?
41620 1/1
41800
Attention message: Software upgrade
Attention message: Software upgrade
Wiring diagram
No. 1801 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
Execute software upgrade.
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase.
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Although the version of each control PCB is checked
when the power supply is turned ON, it is not correct.
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
0001 Printer control PCB
4. Troubleshooting
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB (35)
iBeam Control PCB (35i)
NOTE
• The name of PCB where the attention message arises is
displayed in the second line of the message.
• Carry out the corrective actions according to the following
diagnosis for the displayed PCB as a reference.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Upgrade the software. ☞ 35600
Diagnosis
Manual
PU control PCB ☞ 64241
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
41800 1/1
41900
Attention message: Main
No. 1900−1902 No. 1903

Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Proceeding. One moment please. . .
YES
Condition
Condition
IMPORTANT Condition
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS 1 The F key is selected via the Order Display during
Service Manual are described in the table in above processing.
manual.
2 The interrupt process is carried out while test prints
are made during setup.
3 On the display subsequent from menu, an operation
Attention message (Main) that influences any of the control PCBs was
attempted while processing.
No.1900 It was not registered as an option. NOTE
No.1901 Selected optional function is not available. If you • The suffix number varies depending on the operation in
need to use, Install it. progress.
4. Troubleshooting
No.1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu,
Suffix Condition
Quit the Adobe Photoshop.
number
NOTE 0001 Interrupting
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that 0002 Initializing
the QSS does not currently use may be described. 0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing
0009 Outputting data to Bravo remains.
0010 Removing media
0011 When one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
• After main scanning is completed until
registration is completed by the Order Controller
• In Output Media, until the message about
writing is displayed
NOTE
• In the service mode, attention number 1904 appears instead of
condition 3 of attention message No. 1903.
Diagnosis
The following part may have some problem when the error with
suffix number 0001 (interrupting) occurs.
Manual
41900 1/9
41900
NOTE
No. 1904
Proceeding. One moment please. . .
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Attention message release
YES or NO
Wiring diagram table [scanner] • Select YES to proceed the operation.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual. • Select NO to bring up the next display on your responsibility.
Condition
Condition
- On the display subsequent from menu, an operation
that influences any of the control PCBs was
attempted while processing.
NOTE
• The suffix number varies depending on the operation in
progress.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Interrupting
0002 Initializing
0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing
NOTE
• This message is displayed only in the Service Mode.
Diagnosis
The following part may have some problem when the error with
suffix number 0001 (interrupting) occurs.

Manual
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
Wiring diagram table [scanner]

41900 2/9
41900
No. 1905−1902 No. 1920-####

Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Capacity Booster Key was not detected.
Corrective action of Attention message. Confirm the connection status.

Condition YES
• Select YES to operate as the low capability type input section.
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Condition
Condition
manual.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective During the start-up, the capacity booster cannot be detected.
Suffix Condition
Attention message (Main)
number
Attention message table 0008 Capacity booster D (for 3502)
No.1905 Program Timer was not set.
No.1908 A Picture CD could not be made. Confirm the Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
settings.
1 Check that the booster hard key is set properly.
No.1908 A Picture CD could not be made. Confirm the
settings. 2 Check if the booster software is installed properly.
No.1909 Title was not set.
Diagnosis
No.1910 There is no frame. The format will be deleted.
No.1911 This Title data already exist. Failed parts Manual No.
No.1912 There is no format. New format will be created. Capacity booster PC Service
ATX motherboard Manual
No.1913 This format is used in a Print Channel. Would you
like to edit?
NOTE
No.1914 The format has reached maximum capacity. No
more data can be added. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
NOTE
☞ 89000
41900 3/9
41900
No. 1921-#### No. 1922−1926

Capacity Booster Key was detected. Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for
YES
• Select YES to operate as the high capability type input Condition
section.
IMPORTANT
Condition Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
For the machine with the capacity booster equipped, the capacity
booster has been detected again after the message, No. 1920
Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the
connection status. appears. Attention message (Main)
Suffix Condition
number No.1922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the
settings.
0008 Capacity booster D (for 3502)
4. Troubleshooting
No.1923 Set the destination of Media Output to other than
External System.
No.1925 Would you like to quit the Net Scan Mode?
No.1926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to
"Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size".
NOTE
41900 4/9
41900
No. 1930 No. 1931

Turn ON the Flatbed Scanner. Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test
Print.
YES/START Attention message release
The attention message disappears. YES/START
The attention message disappears.
Condition
Condition Condition
The flatbed scanner is not connected or its power supply is OFF Condition
at the start of iBeam Tuning. Incorrect paper type was attached when measuring the test print
in iBeam Tuning.
NOTE
• Power supply is checked after Test Print and before Scanning. NOTE
• For details about Conditions, refer to Flatbed Scanner • Paper type is checked while pre-scanning on the flatbed
Operation. scanner.
☞ 55910 • For details about Conditions, refer to Flatbed Scanner
Operation.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point ☞ 55910
1 Confirm that the flatbed scanner power supply is ON.
IMPORTANT
2 Confirm that the USB cable is connected to the
• You can check the image of the test print scanned by the
flatbed scanner.
flatbed scanner at C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\Tmp.
For details, refer to ☞ Problems of the flatbed scanner
Diagnosis 4470.
Check Point
Flatbed scanner −
1 Confirm the type of the test print.
Diagnosis
Flatbed scanner −
41900 5/9
41900
No. 1932 No. 1933−1081

Make sure that the Test Print is placed Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for
correctly. Corrective action of Attention message.

YES/START Condition
The attention message disappears.
IMPORTANT
Conditions of pre-scanning Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
Condition Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective
Two test prints cannot be detected. action of Attention message.
Both of the two test prints are for the left side, or both are for the Attention message (Main)
right side.
The reference line of test prints cannot be detected.
No.1933 Select an input media other than the Compact
The test print tilt calculated based on the reference line is more
Archive Unit.
than 30 degrees.
4. Troubleshooting
No.1935 There is insufficient space on the disk for the Order
Controller. Are you sure you want to delete the
Conditions of scanning
Compact Archive Unit data automatically?
Condition No.1936 Compact Archive Unit data was not deleted. Delete
No dot to determine coordinates cannot be detected. them manually.
No.1937 The file was not found.
Condition in calculating No.1939 The String is too long to register.
Condition No.1940 Invalid format. Failed to read.
Enough number of dots for calculation cannot be detected. No.1941 Would you like to delete the selected Print Menu?
No.1943 The setting has changed. Would you like to
NOTE register?
• For details about Conditions, refer to Flatbed Scanner No.1944 Appropriate Print Menu was not found. Stop the
Operation. process.
☞ 55910 No.1945 A tab where the Print Menu has not been set exists.
Would you like to continue?
IMPORTANT
• You can check the image of the test print scanned by the NOTE
flatbed scanner at C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\Tmp. • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
For details, refer to ☞ Problems of the flatbed scanner the QSS does not currently use may be described.
4470.
Check Point
1 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the
flatbed scanner.
Diagnosis
Flatbed scanner −
41900 6/9
41900
No. 1946 IMPORTANT

Foreign matter was detected on the • You can check the image of the test print scanned by the
flatbed scanner at C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\Tmp.
flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter For details, refer to ☞ Problems of the flatbed scanner
from the flatbed scanner glass surface or 4470.
test print and measure again.
Diagnosis
Attention message release Failed parts Manual No.
YES or NO
Flatbed scanner −
• Select YES to measure the print again.
• Selecting NO cancels the attention message.
Condition
Condition
Dirt or dust was adhered on the test print if it was scanned by
flatbed scanner.
When a test print scanned, dust was adhered on the glass of the
flatbed scanner.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check if there are no dirt or dust or while line on the
test print.
2 Check the flatbed scanner glass and clean it if
necessary.
NOTE
• It there are white line on the test print, clean the iBeam head
and focal plane regulating guide of the exposure advance unit.
iBeam head
Focal plane regulating guide

G083090
• For details about Conditions, refer to Flatbed Scanner
Operation.
☞ 55910
41900 7/9
41900
No. 1947−1081 No. 1959−1972

Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Refer to the Connection Unit Service
Corrective action of Attention message. Manual for Corrective action of Attention
message.
Condition
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS IMPORTANT
Service Manual are described in the table in above • The Attention messages not described in the QSS
manual. Service Manual are described in the table in above
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective manual.
action of Attention message. Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for
Attention message (Main) Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message table Attention message (Main)

No.1947 The selected Print Channel is used as a Print Menu Attention message table
Icon. Would you like to delete? No.1959 Scanning is not available, film processing cannot
4. Troubleshooting
No.1949 The mode cannot be changed during input start.
processing. No.1960 Scanner focus has not been adjusted, film
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.) processing cannot start.
No.1951 In the Normal Mode, the film will not advance No.1961 While the scanner is working, the film will not
automatically to the scanner. Would you like to advance automatically to the scanner. Would you
switch to the Normal Mode? If the mode is like to insert the film manually? If the scanning is
changed to the Order Reservation Mode before the completed before the film is ejected from the Film
film is ejected from the Film Processor, the film Processor, the film will advance automatically to
will advance automatically to the scanner. the scanner.
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.)
No.1962 Film remains in the processor.
No.1952 This Order Check Number already exists.
No.1968 Now inputting. After inputting, the mode will
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.)
change to the Normal Mode. From now on, the film
No.1957 Reserve the order. ejected from the Film Processor will not be loaded
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.) automatically. Would you like to change the mode?
No.1958 It is not in the Order Reservation Mode, the film No.1969 Now inputting. After inputting, manual film
process cannot start. loading will be accepted. From now on, the film
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.) ejected from the Film Processor will not load
automatically. Would you like to change the mode?
NOTE
No.1970 The input process is complete. The mode will
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that change to the Normal Mode.
No.1971 The input process is complete. Manual film loading
will be accepted.
No.1972 To enable the option of T15 + S1-II, enable the
Order Controller.
NOTE
41900 8/9
41900
No. 1977 No. 1979−1982

Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Refer to the Connection Unit Service
the Corrective action of Attention Manual for Corrective action of Attention
message. message.
Condition Condition
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS • The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual. manual.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for
action of Attention message. Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Main) Attention message (Main)
Attention message table Attention message table
No.1977 There is insufficient space left on the disk. Stop the No.1979 Auto Reservation cannot be executed. The Print
4. Troubleshooting
process. Menu selected in the Auto Reservation Print Menu
was not found. Change the Reservation Method to
NOTE Manual.
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that No.1982 Reserved orders remain. Delete all the reserved
the QSS does not currently use may be described. orders.
NOTE
41900 9/9
43370
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit

No. 3371−4052
No.4023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for of range.
Corrective action of Attention message. No.4024 Select the layer.
No.4025 This template has more than 16 layers. This
template cannot be used.
Condition
No.4026 The image size is too large to insert.
IMPORTANT No.4027 The same data already exists. Would you like to
overwrite?
Service Manual are described in the table in above No.4028 Failed to export the Image Save File.
manual. No.4029 The drive is empty.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective No.4030 Failed to delete the Exported Image Save Data.
No.4031 There is insufficient space left on the disk.
Attention message (Compact archive unit) No.4032 Template size is too large to read.
Attention message table No.4033 Vertical templates cannot be used to make frame
prints. Select a horizontal template.
No.3371 Could not execute Hold On Save.
No.4034 A pupil could not be detected in the specified area.
No.3372 There is insufficient space left for Hold on Save.
No.4035 Additional phrases could not be saved.
4. Troubleshooting
No.3373 The data could not be saved to the Compact
Archive Unit. Would you like to continue? No.4036 The image size is too small to insert.
No.3374 The Compact Archive Unit could not be used. No.4037 The same file name already exists. Would you like
Confirm the setting. to overwrite?
No.3375 The data could not be saved to the Compact No.4038 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted
Archive Unit. Stop the process. correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No.4039 Image size during editing is too large.
Attention message (Edit) No.4040 The database was not changed. Confirm the
property of each field.
No.4041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used.
No.4001 Are you sure about deleting?
No.4042 Single Form is not positioned.
No.4002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more.
No.4043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area.
No.4003 Image cannot be inserted into the specified position.
No.4044 Single Form is overlapped.
No.4004 Graphics are too large to insert.
No.4045 No more than three Single Form types can be
No.4005 Image save is complete. positioned.
No.4006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. No.4046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current
Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width. position information is canceled.
No.4007 The Letter Information was not read successfully. No.4047 The selected font was not found.
No.4008 Display the preview without CMM correction. No.4048 The image size is too small to make a Test Print.
No.4009 Template file was not found. Select the folder No.4049 No more items can be added.
including the files.
No.4051 Adobe Photoshop was not started. Confirm
No.4010 Specify the image area. whether the option has been registered correctly.
No.4011 Are you sure you want to exit? No.4052 Are you sure to update?
No.4012 No more UNDO can be executed.
NOTE
No.4013 No more REDO can be executed.
No.4014 The saved data cannot be read with this version.
No.4015 Selected file already exists.
No.4016 The area cannot be overlapped in Album Print.
No.4017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the
selected area is too small.
No.4018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode?
No.4019 If you Import, all customer information will be
deleted. Are you sure you want to Import?
No.4020 Failed to write the file.
No.4021 Failed to read the file.
No.4022 Select one or more images.
43370 1/1
44250
Attention message: QSS-Kids
Attention message: QSS-Kids
No. 4250−4308
Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for
Condition
IMPORTANT
manual.
Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective
Attention message (QSS-Kids)
No.4250 Output QSS are not registered.
No.4251 Data could not be updated. Try again?
4. Troubleshooting
No.4252 The version of destination QSS is incorrect.
Execute by offline mode.
No.4253 The proceeding order remains. Would you like to
execute the Close Down Checks?
No.4254 Destination QSS was not found. Execute by offline
mode.
No.4255 This order number already exists. Change the order
number.
No.4256 There is insufficient Spooler Capacity. The order
was not accepted.
No.4259 The Receipt Number already exists. Process the
orders that remain in QSS-Kids.
No.4260 The version of destination QSS is incorrect. Match
the version.
No.4300 The version of destination QSS is incorrect. Match
the version.
No.4302 The versions of QSS-Kids and QSS of selected
destination are different. %s Match the versions.
No.4303 The capacity of the files to transfer exceeds 500
MB. Reduce the file capacity to upload.
No.4304 The .tar file of the same name already exists.
Would you like to overwrite?
No.4305 Would you like to delete the selected file?
No.4306 Would you like to delete the Accept Record?
No.4307 The destination QSS is not selected. Select the
destination QSS.
No.4308 The QSS selected as the destination is a model
which cannot be used. Match the model and the
version.
NOTE
44250 1/1
44350
Attention message: Bravo II
Attention message: Bravo II
No. 4350−4358
Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for
Condition
IMPORTANT
manual.
Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective
Attention message (Bravo II)
No.4350 The input bin is empty. Set the media and press the
Ink Cartridge button on the Bravo.
No.4351 The quantity of ink in the color ink cartridge ran
4. Troubleshooting
short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the
Ink Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge.
When continuing processing without replacing the
cartridge, press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4352 The quantity of ink in the black ink cartridge ran
short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the
Ink Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge.
cartridge, press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4353 The quantity of ink in both ink cartridges ran short.
Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink
Cartridge button, then install the new cartridges.
cartridges, press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4354 The Bravo Top Cover is open. Close the cover.
No.4355 The shared folder of PTBurn is full. Wait until the
writing of CD is completed.
No.4356 The power supply of Bravo is not ON. Turn ON the
Bravo.
No.4357 The data has already been written to this media. Set
a new media.
No.4358 Write the data. Set the media.
NOTE
44350 1/1
45500
Error message: Processor 1
In the case of a cooling failure Manual No.

No. 5500
Chilling unit -
The processing solution temperature is
Processing tank cooling fan 1, 2, 3 ☞ 63290
above the safety range. CD
No. 5501
The processing solution temperature is When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.
above the safety range. BF Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Thermosensor ☞ 63290
No. 5502
The processing solution temperature is NOTE
above the safety range. STB • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 5500 The CD processing solution temperature
exceeds the safety range (setting
temperature + 1°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (CD
thermosensor)
No. 5501 The BF processing solution temperature
adjustment has been completed. (BF
thermosensor)
No. 5502 The STB processing solution temperature
adjustment has been completed. (STB
thermosensor)
NOTE
• There is a specific process
specification whose safe range of
STB is setting temperature +7°.
Check Point
1 Check that the value measured via Thermosensor
Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit
(only when equipped with the chilling unit).
3 Check that the cooling water solenoid valve for CD,
BF or STB works well (only when equipped with the
cooling water unit).
4 Check that the tank cooling fans operate properly.
Diagnosis
In the case of a cooling failure Manual No.
Cooling water solenoid valve ☞ 63290
Transistor PCB ☞ 63200
45500 1/8
45500
No. 5503 No. 5504

The dryer temperature is above the safety The processing solution temperature is
range. below the processing range. CD
No. 5505
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of The processing solution temperature is
purchase. below the processing range. BF
Alarm release
NO No. 5506
Error message release The processing solution temperature is
NO
below the processing range. STB
Condition
Suffix Condition Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
number purchase.
- The dryer temperature exceeds the safety range Alarm release
(setting temperature + 10°C) after temperature NO
adjustment has been completed. (dryer temperature Error message release
4. Troubleshooting
sensor) NO
NOTE
Diagnosis • The processing solution temperature will be adjusted when the
error display is canceled.
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
Dryer heater ☞ 63510 Condition
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Error message No. Condition
No. 5504 The CD processing solution temperature
When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.
falls below the processing range (setting
Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63510 temperature − 1°C) after the temperature
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 adjustment has been completed. (CD
temperature sensor)
NOTE No. 5505 The BF processing solution temperature
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) falls below the processing range (setting
temperature − 3°C) after the temperature
Wiring diagram adjustment has been completed. (BF
☞ 89000 temperature sensor)
No. 5506 The STB processing solution temperature
falls below the processing range (setting
temperature − 5°C) after the temperature
adjustment has been completed. (STB
temperature sensor)
Check Point
1 Check that the value measured via Thermosensor
Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit
(only when equipped with the chilling unit).
Diagnosis
Processing solution heater ☞ 63510

45500 2/8
45500

No. 5507
The dryer temperature is below the
NOTE processing range.
Wiring diagram Countermeasure message

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
☞ 89000 purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
The dryer temperature will be adjusted when the error display is
canceled.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The dryer temperature falls below the processing
range (setting temperature − 10°C) during paper
4. Troubleshooting
processing. (dryer thermosensor)
Diagnosis
Dryer heater ☞ 63510

Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63510
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45500 3/8
45500
[SM] specification
No. 5508
The processing solution level is too low. When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Replenisher pump ☞ 63300
Countermeasure message Water Supply Pump ☞ 63300
Refer to the manual for corrective action. SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Alarm release Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NO
YES [J] specification
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Condition
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63310
Suffix Condition Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
number
- The processing solution level detectors of the [F] specification
processing solution float switches (CD, BF, and STB)
turned OFF. When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
P1R Replenisher Pump ☞ 63311
NOTE P2RA Replenisher Pump
4. Troubleshooting
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing P2RB Replenisher Pump
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
heaters and circulation pumps turn OFF.
Check Point
Common to all specifications
Failed parts
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the ☞ 4203
tank.
2 Clean the replenishment pump, strainer units of water
supply pump or a hose. Check the output amounts. # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
3 Check if the float of the processing solution float
Failed parts
switch moves up and down smoothly.
☞ 4252
Diagnosis
NOTE
Wiring diagram
F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 ☞ 89000
F17

When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63290
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 64250
[N] specification
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Replenisher pump ☞ 63290
Refilling water pump
45500 4/8
45500
No. 5509 No. 5510

The circulation amount has decreased. Processor A/D conversion error.

Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
manual. purchase.
Alarm release Alarm release
NO NO
Error message release Error message release
YES NO
NOTE
• This error message will be displayed only when the machine is Condition
equipped with the optional digital flowmeter. Suffix Condition
number
Condition
- The analog data detected by each thermosensor
Suffix Condition cannot be converted to digital data.
number
- The circulation amount of the CD processing solution IMPORTANT
4. Troubleshooting
measured by the digital flowmeter falls below • The A/D conversion is a process to convert analog data
3L/min. of the temperature measured by the processing solution
- Although the machine is not equipped with a digital thermosensor, the dryer thermosensor and the inner
flowmeter, the digital flowmeter is set to ON via thermosensor into digital data via the processor control
Option Registration. PCB.
NOTE Diagnosis
• This error will not be displayed when the digital flowmeter is
set to OFF via Option Registration.
Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
2 Check if the circulation pump and the hose connected
to the pump are clogged. Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63510
Diagnosis
Digital flowmeter ☞ 63290 Failed parts
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 ☞ 4203

Failed parts
Failed parts
☞ 4252
☞ 4203
NOTE
NOTE • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
☞ 89000
45500 5/8
45500
Diagnosis
No. 5511
The circulation pump has stopped. CD No. Blown fuses Manual No.
5511 F51 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
No. 5513 5513 F52
The circulation pump has stopped. BF 5515 F51
No. 5515 5516 F51
The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 5517 F52

5518 F52
No. 5516
The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 Failed parts Manual No.
Circulation pump ☞ 63290
No. 5517
The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 Failed parts Manual No.
No. 5518 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Countermeasure message # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
4. Troubleshooting
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Failed parts
Alarm release
NO ☞ 4203
YES
Condition Failed parts
Error message No. Condition ☞ 4252
No. 5511 The rotation detector built in the CD
circulation pump detects that the pump NOTE
has stopped rotating.
No. 5513 The rotation detector built in the BF
circulation pump detects that the pump Wiring diagram
has stopped rotating. ☞ 89000
No. 5515 The rotation detector built in the STB
circulation pump detects that the pump
No. 5516 The rotation detector built in the STB2
Check Point
45500 6/8
45500
No. 5519 No. 5522

Thermosensor error. CD Dryer Thermosensor error.
No. 5520 Countermeasure message
Thermosensor error. BF Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
No. 5521 Alarm release
Thermosensor error. STB NO
Countermeasure message NO
purchase. Condition
Alarm release Suffix Condition
NO
number
NO - The temperature detected by the dryer thermosensor
is not within a specified range.
Condition
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
No. 5519 The temperature detected by the CD Blown fuses Manual No.
thermosensor is not within a specified F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
range.
No. 5520 The temperature detected by the BF Failed parts Manual No.
thermosensor is not within a specified Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63510
range.
No. 5521 The temperature detected by the STB
thermosensor is not within a specified
range.
Failed parts
Diagnosis ☞ 4203
No. Blown fuses Manual No.
5520 F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
5521
Failed parts
Failed parts Manual No. ☞ 4252
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 NOTE
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Wiring diagram
Failed parts ☞ 89000
☞ 4203

Failed parts
☞ 4252
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45500 7/8
45500
NOTE
No. 5524
• The CD, BF and STB4 processing solution float switches have
Refilling water operation error. CD-W a processing solution level detector, a refilling water level
detector and a safety thermostat for each.
No. 5525 The STB3, 5 and 6 processing solution float switches have a
Refilling water operation error. BF-W refilling water level detector for each.
No. 5526 Check Point

Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
No. 5527 tank.
Refilling water operation error. STB2-W 2 Check if the float of the processing solution float
No. 5528 3 Check that the hoses from the refilling water pumps
Refilling water operation error. STB3-W CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, and
STB4-W to the sub-tank are not clogged.
No. 5529
Refilling water operation error. STB4-W Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
Refer to the manual for corrective action. Refilling water pump ☞ 63290
NO
Error message release When refilling water is incorrectly
Manual No.
YES detected
Condition
Error message No. Condition Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5524 The refilling water level detector of the
CD processing solution float switch does NOTE
not turn ON even though approximately • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
26 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started. Wiring diagram
No. 5525 The refilling water level detector of the ☞ 89000
BF processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though approximately
26 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started.
STB1 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though
approximately 26 seconds have passed
since refilling water operation started.
45500 8/8
45530
No. 5530 No. 5532

The Processor Top Cover is open. The Processing Solution Safety
Thermostat has activated.
Close the cover. Countermeasure message
Alarm release Contact us or your place of purchase.
NO Alarm release
Error message release NO
YES Error message release
YES
Condition
- While prints are being made, the interlock switch number
(processor top cover) turns OFF. - The safety thermostat of the processing solution float
switches CD, BF or STB turns OFF.
NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump, NOTE
and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch • The processing solution safety thermostat is activated at the
4. Troubleshooting
(processor top cover) turns OFF. following temperatures.
Check Point Standard processing Time reduction processing

Temperature Temperature
1 • Check that the rack stopper is securely placed. Status Status
(°C) (°C)
• Check that the processor top cover is securely OFF 46±3 OFF 51±3
closed.
ON 36±3 ON 41±3
Diagnosis
• If the safety thermostat of the processing solution float switch
Failed parts Manual No. turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and circulation
Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63290 pumps will stop.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 Check Point
NOTE 2 Check if the hose connected to the circulation pump
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) are clogged.
Wiring diagram
Diagnosis
☞ 89000
F17

When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.


In the case of a circulation failure Manual No.

Circulation pump ☞ 63290
45530 1/8
45530
In the case of a circulation failure Manual No.

No. 5533
The Dryer Safety Thermostat has
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 activated.
Failed parts Contact us or your place of purchase.
☞ 4203 Alarm release
NO
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse YES
Failed parts Condition

☞ 4252
Suffix Condition
number
NOTE - The dryer safety thermostat turns OFF.
NOTE
Wiring diagram
• The dryer safety thermostat is activated at the following
☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
temperatures.
Status Temperature (°C)
OPEN(OFF) 95±2.8
CLOSE(ON) 65±4.4
• When the dryer safety thermostat goes OFF, the dryer heater
and dryer fan go OFF.
Check Point
1 Check if the dryer fan is rotating.
Diagnosis
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.

Dryer fan ☞ 63290

When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.

Dryer safety thermostat ☞ 63290

Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63290

Failed parts
☞ 4203
45530 2/8
45530

No. 5534
Failed parts Print Sorter Unit operation error.
☞ 4252
NOTE Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) purchase.
Alarm release
Wiring diagram NO
☞ 89000 Error message release
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Although a specified time has passed since the print
sorter unit started operating, the sorter home sensor
does not turn LIGHT.
0002 Although a specified time has passed since the sorter
4. Troubleshooting
home sensor turned LIGHT, it does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Clean the sorter home sensor using a blower brush.
Diagnosis
In case of an operation failure Manual No.
Sorter motor ☞ 63510
In case of a detection failure Manual No.

Sorter home sensor ☞ 63510

Failed parts
☞ 4203
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45530 3/8
45530
In case of adjusting failure Manual No.

No. 5535
Check the ejection guide 1 position in the ☞ 27224
Paper has jammed in the processor dryer rack (for automated color
section. measurement).
Countermeasure message When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.
Refer to the manual for corrective action. Dryer fan ☞ 63510
Alarm release
NO
Error message release Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
YES
When the drive motor is defective Manual No.
Condition Drive motor ☞ 63290
Status Condition Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Normal After feeding out the paper from the printer to the Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
operation processor, the print sensors in the dryer section do
not turn DARK within a specified time and this In case of a detection failure Manual No.
happens consecutively six times.
Automated When the colorimeter unit paper sensor 1 does not (3501 and 3501i)
4. Troubleshooting
Color turn DARK within a specified time in performing
Measurem the automated color measurement of setup print
Print sensor (right) (left) ☞ 63510
(3502)
ent
Paper sensor 1 ☞ 63520
NOTE Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
• For details, refer to ☞ 56100 Processor paper advance
operation. # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
Check Point Failed parts

☞ 4203
1 Check that the upper guides and the squeegee unit are
securely attached.
2 Make sure that the gears and the rollers rotate NOTE
smoothly after removing the paper processing rack • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
from the processing solution tank.
Wiring diagram
3 Check if the lower turn belt of the paper processing
☞ 89000
rack is damaged.
4 Check that no paper remains in the dryer rack.
5 Check if the print sensor is soiled.
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET
communication status is not normal.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the
☞ 37530
☞ 50520
Diagnosis
Check Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position ☞ 36010
Correction, Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop
Position Correction and Paper Stop
Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit
Correction.
45530 4/8
45530
No. 5538 No. 5543

Backup data error. Processor The dryer cover is removed.

Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the Contact us or your place of purchase.
manual. Alarm release
NO
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above appears, it cannot be YES
canceled for approx. 5 to 10 minutes until the Order
Display is displayed. Condition
Alarm release
Suffix Condition
NO
number
NO - While prints are being made, the interlock switch
(dryer cover) turns off.
Condition - When paper is advancing inside the processor, the
interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off.
Suffix Condition
number NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
0### The backup data of the processor control PCB is • When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive
abnormal. motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the
processor control PCB are abnormal. Check Point
NOTE 1 Check that the dryer section or dryer cover is securely

attached.
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three
digits of the suffix number.
Diagnosis
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
being OFF or if the processor control PCB has been replaced Failed parts Manual No.
with a new one, this error message will appear.
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63290
IMPORTANT Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
• If the error message above appears, the backup data of Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
the processor control PCB saved in HDD is sent to the
processor control PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes NOTE
while the error cannot be canceled. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
After the completion of sending the backup data, the
Wiring diagram
error above can be canceled.
However, the backup data saved in HDD may have a ☞ 89000
problem. If the error above occurs, we recommend you
to read the backup data on the media saved at the close
down check.
Diagnosis
When the data is erased Manual No.
Read the backup data saved in media at the ☞ 35400
close down check.

NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45530 5/8
45530

No. 5545
Print sensor (right) (left) ☞ 63510
Print Sensor (Left) error. (3502)
No. 5546 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Print Sensor error. NOTE
No. 5547
Print Sensor (Right) error. Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
- When performing Print Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment, the system could not adjust it
normally.
Suffix Condition
number
01 When the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the
light source level was set to 0, the print sensor did not
change to LIGHT.
02 When the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the
light source level was set to 255, the print sensor did
not change to LIGHT.
Furthermore, even after the standard voltage was set
to 3.0 V, the print sensor did not change to LIGHT.
03 Even after the standard voltage was changed from 7.5
V to 3.0 V for the light source level, the print sensor
did not turn to LIGHT.
Check Point
2 Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor
Adjustment.
Refer to ☞ 33001.
NOTE
the Print Sensor Adjustment Display.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Print Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor
LED light intensity changes.
Diagnosis
(3501 and 3501i)
45530 6/8
45530
No. 5549 No. 5550

Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Drive Motor has stopped.
Adjustment error.
Countermeasure message Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
Contact us or your place of purchase. purchase.
NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
- It was not adjusted properly when Drive Motor - The drive motor has stopped due to the protected
Revolution Count Auto Adjustment was performed operation.
in Functions of Drive Motor Revolution Count
Setting. Diagnosis
NOTE Failed parts Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is Drive motor ☞ 63290
currently processed. Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Suffix Condition Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
number
0001 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
to 255, it was smaller than the required count.
Failed parts
0002 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set
to 0, it was more than the required count.
☞ 4203
NOTE
Diagnosis • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Failed parts Manual No. Wiring diagram

Drive motor ☞ 63290 ☞ 89000
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45530 7/8
45530
NOTE
No. 5552
Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error.
Wiring diagram
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
NOTE
• It occurs only when the system has the automated color
measurement function.
Condition
Condition
0001 Even though the dryer selection home sensor operates
the dryer selection guide from the DARK status
4. Troubleshooting
position to the colorimeter side for a certain period of
time, the dryer selection home sensor does not
become LIGHT.
0002 Even though the dryer selection home sensor operates
the dryer selection guide from the LIGHT status
position for a certain period of time, the dryer
selection home sensor does not become DARK.
0003 At the initial operation, even though the dryer select
motor was operated in the left direction for a certain
period of time, the dryer selection home sensor did
not change to DARK.
0004 When performing the automated color measurement,
even though the dryer selection guide was operated in
the colorimeter direction, the test print was not
ejected to the colorimeter side but onto the print
conveyor.
Diagnosis

Dryer selection home sensor ☞ 63510
Dryer lane select motor

Failed parts
☞ 4203

Failed parts
☞ 4252
45530 8/8
45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment
NOTE
No. 5600[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. CD
Wiring diagram
No. 5601[J] ☞ 89000
Tablet Drum operation error. BF
No. 5602[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. STB
Remove the Tablet Cartridge and take corrective action. For
details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
- Even though the drum was moved for a specified
time to return it to the home position, the home
position was not detected.
- Even though the system attempted to move the drum
for a specified time to exit the home position, the
drum remained at that position.
- Even though the drum is reversed, tablet sensor 1
does not turn DARK after a specified time.
- Even though a specified time has passed since tablet
sensor 1 passed the home position and turned DARK,
tablet sensor 1 doens not turn LIGHT.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2
are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge
and drum.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not soiled.
3 Check if the elevator does not tilt.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690

Position adjustment failure of elevator lower ☞ 27680
sensor

Check if the tablet sensor 1 or 2 is not soiled. ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB
45600 1/4
45600

No. 5603[J]
A tablet has jammed.
NOTE
No. 5604[J] • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
No. 5605[J] ☞ 89000
Remove the Tablet Cartridge and take corrective action. For
details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
- Even though a specified time has passed since the
drum was moved from the home position and tablet
sensor 1 turned DARK, tablet sensor 1 does not turn
LIGHT.
- Even though the drum was moved from the home
position, tablet sensor 1 does not turn DARK.
- Even though a specified time has passed since tablet
sensor 1 passed the home position, it does not turn
DARK.
- Even though the drum is reversed, the home position
is not detected after a specified time.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2
are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge
and drum.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not soiled.
3 Check if the elevator does not tilt.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690

sensor

Check if the elevator does not tilt. -
Check if the tablet sensor 1 or 2 is not soiled. ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB
45600 2/4
45600
No. 5609[J] No. 5612[J]

Printing cannot continue without Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation
replenishment. CD error.
No. 5610[J] Countermeasure message
Printing cannot continue without Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
replenishment. BF purchase.
Alarm release
No. 5611[J] NO
Printing cannot continue without Error message release
NO
replenishment. STB
Condition
Contact us or your place of purchase. Suffix Condition
Alarm release number
NO 0001 Even though a specified time has passed after the
Error message release elevator moves up, the elevator lower sensor does not
YES turn LIGHT.
4. Troubleshooting
0002 When the elevator was raised, the elevator middle
Condition sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator
Error message No. Condition lower sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time
passed.
No. 5609 The Reservoir Count exceeds the drop
limit in Basic Kit Setting when Order 0003 When the elevator was raised, the elevator upper
No. 5610 sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator
Display→Processor
No. 5611 middle sensor turned DARK and a specified time
Status→Change→Tablet Drop
Reservoir is set to ON. passed.
0004 Even though the elevator was lowered for a specified
NOTE time, the elevator upper sensor did not turn LIGHT.
• To reset the reservoir count, set the reservoir count of 0005 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator middle
Counter to 0. Refer to ☞ 33010. sensor did not turn LIGHT even though it turned
• To reset the Water Supply Reservoir Amount, reset it via DARK and a specified time passed.
Functions in Counter. Refer to ☞ 33010. 0006 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator lower
sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator
middle sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time
passed.
Diagnosis
sensor
Position adjustment failure of elevator middle ☞ 27670
sensor
Position adjustment failure of elevator upper ☞ 27660
sensor

Confirm that the elevator lower sensor, ☞ 63310
elevator middle sensor and elevator upper
sensor are not soiled.
Elevator motor
45600 3/4
45600
NOTE
No. 5613[J]
The processing solution level is too low.
Wiring diagram STB1
☞ 89000
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the processing solution level detector of the
STB1 processing solution float switch turns OFF and
water supply is carried out for a given amount of
time, the processing solution level detector keeps
4. Troubleshooting
OFF.
Check Point
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
tank.
2 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
3 Clean the strainer.
4 Check if the replenisher hose are not clogged.
5 Check the output amount.
6 Check if the float of the processing solution float
Diagnosis
STB1 processing solution float switch ☞ 63310
STB water supply pump ☞ 63310
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45600 4/4
45700
Error message: SM replenishment

No. 5700[SM]
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-
A
NOTE
No. 5701[SM] • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
B
☞ 89000
No. 5702[SM]
C
No. 5703[SM]
W
No. 5704[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-
A
4. Troubleshooting
No. 5705[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-
B
No. 5706[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. STB
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump
sensor stays DARK even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.
0002 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump
sensor stays LIGHT even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.
Check Point
3 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply
hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Replenisher pump and water supply pump ☞ 63300
45700 1/3
45700
NOTE
No. 5708[SM]
Replenishment Package solution
remaining error. Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
No. 5709[SM]
Replenishment Package solution
remaining error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
The attention message No. 0700 Replace the Replenishment
Package with a new one. will be displayed when the
4. Troubleshooting
replenishment alarm value is set to -5% (initial value) in Package
Capacity Setting and either replenishment package becomes
empty. In this case, the error messages Nos. 5708 and 5709
Replenishment Package solution remaining error. will not be
displayed.
Suffix Condition
number
- The percentage of the replenishment remaining
amount (internal calculated value) to the
replenishment package capacity became smaller than
the replenishment alarm value. (Replenishment
remaining amount < Package capacity ×
Replenishment remaining amount / 100) But the
replenishment solution sensor does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Check if the actual package capacity is same as the
one set in the Package Capacity Setting.
2 Check if the replenishment alarm value is sufficient.
5 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply
hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ☞ 27830
replenishment solution sensor

Replenishment solution sensor CD-A, CD-B, ☞ 63300
CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, or STB
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
45700 2/3
45700
Check Point
No. 5710[SM]
Refilling water operation error. CD-W 1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
tank.
No. 5711[SM] 2 Check that the hoses from the water supply pump and
Refilling water operation error. BF-W refilling water pump are not clogged.
3 Check that the processing float switch moves
No. 5712[SM] smoothly.
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
Diagnosis
No. 5713[SM]
Refilling water operation error. STB2-W When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63300
No. 5714[SM] SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Refilling water operation error. STB3-W Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5715[SM]
When refilling water is incorrectly
Refilling water operation error. STB4-W Manual No.
detected
4. Troubleshooting
NO
Error message release NOTE
YES • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
Condition
☞ 89000
CD processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though a specified time
has passed since refilling water operation
started.
BF processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though a specified time
has passed since refilling water operation
started.
does not turn ON even though a specified
time has passed since refilling water
operation started.
operation started.
operation started.
operation started.
45700 3/3
45900
Error message: F replenishment
Suffix Condition
No. 5900[F] number
Replenisher cartridge open motor 0008 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
operation error. moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the
cap, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
Countermeasure message (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified
Contact us or your place of purchase. time has passed.
Alarm release 0009 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
NO moved to the cap cleaning position to clean the cap,
Error message release Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper)
NO detects the error.
Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has
Condition been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge
Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even
Suffix Condition after a specified time has passed.
number (When restarting after operation stop such as instant-
0001 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is off)
moved to the lower position for opening the 0010 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
replenishment cartridge, the Replenisher Cartridge moved to the lower position for draining the water
Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after cleaning the cap, the Replenisher Cartridge
after a specified time has passed. Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even
4. Troubleshooting
0002 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is after a specified time has passed.
moved to the lower position for opening the 0011 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
replenishment cartridge, the Replenisher Cartridge moved to the lower position for draining the water
Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after cleaning the cap, the Replenisher Cartridge
after a specified time has passed. Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even
0003 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is after a specified time has passed.
moved to lower position to open the replenishment 0012 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
cartridge, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor moved to the cap cleaning position to clean the cap,
(Lower) detects the error. Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper)
Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has detects the error.
been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has
Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge
even after a specified time has passed. Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant- after a specified time has passed.
off) (When restarting after operation stop such as instant-
0004 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is off)
moved to the upper position after the replenishment 0013 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
cartridge was failed to be opened, the Replenisher moved to the upper position after the replenishment
Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to cartridge is opened or cap is cleaned, the Replenisher
LIGHT even after a specified time has passed. Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to
0005 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
moved to the upper position after the replenishment 0014 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
cartridge was failed to be opened, the Replenisher moved to the upper position after the replenishment
Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to cartridge is opened or cap is cleaned, the Replenisher
DARK even after a specified time has passed. Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to
0006 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is DARK even after a specified time has passed.
moved to upper position due to the failure in opening 0015 Opening or cleaning the replenishment cartridge is
the replenishment cartridge, Replenisher Cartridge completed and Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error. (Upper) detects it.
Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has
been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge
Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even
after a specified time has passed. after a specified time has passed.
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant- (When restarting after operation stop such as instant-
off) off)
0007 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.
cap, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a
specified time has passed.
45900 1/9
45900
• For suffix numbers 0001 to 0006, making approx. 330 prints

for L size is available after the error occurs. No. 5901[F]
• Regarding the suffix numbers 0007 to 0015, print proceeds Replenishment solution level sensor
if an error message is cleared by pressing YES. error. P1R
Countermeasure
No. 5902[F]
1. Check whether the replenishment cartridge setting part
Replenishment solution level sensor
malfunctions or not. error. P2RA
☞ 4600
2. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.
No. 5903]F]
☞ 4610 Replenishment solution level sensor
error. P2RB
Check Point
No. 5904[F]
Check that the replenishment cartridge setting ☞ 35320 Replenishment solution level sensor
part operates normally.
error. PSR
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No. Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
4. Troubleshooting
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor ☞ 63311 purchase.
(Upper) Alarm release
NO
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor Error message release
(Lower) YES
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) Condition
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 Suffix Condition
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 number
- When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level
NOTE sensors of each processing solution are ON and when
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are
OFF
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors
of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220
Diagnosis
Replenisher solution level sensor ☞ 63311
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45900 2/9
45900
Diagnosis
No. 5905[F]
P1R replenishment solution output Failed parts Manual No.
amount/replenishment solution level Replenisher solution level sensor ☞ 63311

management is abnormal. P1R Replenisher Pump
P2RA Replenisher Pump
No. 5906[F] P2RB Replenisher Pump
P2RA replenishment solution output F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
amount/replenishment solution level Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
management is abnormal. NOTE
No. 5907[F] • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
P2RA replenishment solution output Wiring diagram
amount/replenishment solution level ☞ 89000
management is abnormal.
Alarm release
4. Troubleshooting
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When opening process is complete, # # # (upper)
replenishment solution level sensors of each
processing solution do not turn off even a specified
amount of processing solution is added.
0002 When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level
sensors of each processing solution turned off, the
processing solution less than the specified amount
was added and # # # (lower) replenishment solution
level sensors of each processing solution also turned
off.
0003 After # # # (upper) replenishment solution level
sensors turned off, # # # (lower) replenishment
solution level sensors of each processing solution do
not turn off even though the processing solution
exceeding the specified amount has been added.
• Making approx. 330 prints for L size is available after the

error occurs.
Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors
of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220
☞ 4620
Check Point
Confirm that the hoses from each replenishment -
pump are not jammed.
Check each replenishment pump output amount ☞ 33030
again.
45900 3/9
45900
No. 5908[F] No. 5909[F]

Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation
solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
Contact us or your place of purchase. No. 5910[F]
Alarm release Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is
NO abnormal. P2RA
YES No. 5911[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is
Condition
abnormal. P2RB
Suffix Condition
number Countermeasure message
- After it was opened and a specified time passed, # # # Contact us or your place of purchase.
(lower) replenishment solution level sensor for each Alarm release
processing solution does not turn on. NO
4. Troubleshooting
number
0001 P1R Condition
0002 P2RA ERROR Condition
0004 P2RB No.
5909 When the replenishment cartridge is cleaned, P1R
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010. cartridge flushing valve and P1R agitation solenoid
valve are opened and the auto cleaning pump is
turned on for a specified time. However, P1R (Upper)
• Making approx. 330 prints for L size is available after the Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn
error occurs. on.
5910 When the replenishment cartridge is cleaned, P2RA
Countermeasure cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto
1. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error. cleaning pump is turned on for a specified time.
☞ 4610 However, P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor does not turn on.
Check Point 5911 When the replenishment cartridge is cleaned, P2RB
cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto
Check the status of the replenishment solution ☞ 35220 cleaning pump is turned on for a specified time.
level sensors of each processing solution with However, P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Input Check. Level Sensor does not turn on.
Diagnosis For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.

P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311 • Making approx. 330 prints for L size is available after the
Sensor error occurs.
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution • If creating the replenishment solution with the
Level Sensor replenishment tank completely empty, the replenishment
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level solution is not filled up until P2RA (Upper) Replenishment
Sensor Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 Solution Level Sensor turn on.
Therefore, only for Manual Open and Create
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Replenishment Solution (Manual Open), no error occurs
even if P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
NOTE and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor do
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) not turn on.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Countermeasure
☞ 4610
45900 4/9
45900
Check Point
No. 5912[F]
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump ☞ 33590 Predetermined process amount was
+ each automated cleaning valve again.
exceeded.
Check the status of the replenishment solution ☞ 35220
level sensors of each processing solution with
Input Check. Countermeasure message
Alarm release
Diagnosis NO
Failed parts Manual No. Error message release
YES
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311
Sensor
Condition
P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor Condition
P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level When an error in the following error list occurred and printing
Sensor was processed before the error was cleared, the integrated value
Auto cleaning pump of P1R replenishment amount has exceeded the specified amount
(approx. 330 sheets for L size).
Automated cleaning valve
☞ 66700
4. Troubleshooting
F replenishment I/O PCB
Error list
☞ No. 5900[F] ☞ No. 5905[F] ☞ No. 5906[F]
NOTE ☞ No. 5907[F] ☞ No. 5908[F] ☞ No. 5909[F]
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) ☞ No. 5910[F] ☞ No. 5911[F] ☞ No. 5913[F]
Wiring diagram
• Even if an error is cleared, it reoccurs until the
☞ 89000 replenishment cartridge is opened (replenishment solution is
created).
Diagnosis
Take the corrective action in the error list. -
45900 5/9
45900
No. 5913[F] No. 5914[F]

An error occurred in the replenisher Temperature and humidity sensor error.
section.
Countermeasure message Restart the system. If this error recurs, contact your place of
Contact us or your place of purchase. purchase.
NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
Condition ERROR Condition

No.
When an error in the following error list occurred, the system
was restarted or started before the error was cleared. 0001 The measured environmental temperature is not
within the range between −10° C and +60° C.
Error list 0002 The measured environmental humidity is not within

the range between 0 % and 100 %.
☞ No. 5900[F] ☞ No. 5905[F] ☞ No. 5906[F]
4. Troubleshooting
☞ No. 5907[F] ☞ No. 5908[F] ☞ No. 5909[F] • An error occurs when Automatic is selected at Operator
☞ No. 5910[F] ☞ No. 5911[F] ☞ No. 5913[F] Selections→Processor→Humidity.
• If errors occur frequently, water is not refilled when
• Making approx. 330 prints for L size is available after the evaporated.
error occurs. In such cases, select one of the Standard , Low or High,
except Automatic, in Operator
Diagnosis Selections→Processor→Humidity. Then, water is refilled
and the system can be used again.
Take the corrective action in the error list. - Check Point
Check the status of the temperature and humidity ☞ 35220
sensor via Input Check.
Check that there is no dust on the temperature and -
humidity sensor.
Check that there is no connection failure in the -
wiring between the temperature and humidity
sensor and processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
Temperature and humidity sensor ☞ 61050
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45900 6/9
45900
Diagnosis
No. 5916[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes Blown fuses Manual No.
below the processable level. P1 F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

F17
No. 5917[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
below the processable level. P2 Processing solution float switch ☞ 63311
No. 5918[F] Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Solution level of the processing tank goes Processor power supply 1 ☞ 64250
below the processable level. PS1
No. 5919[F] When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Solution level of the processing tank goes Replenisher pump ☞ 63311

below the processable level. PS2 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5920[F] NOTE

Solution level of the processing tank goes
4. Troubleshooting
below the processable level. PS3 Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
No. 5921[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes
below the processable level. PS4
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the water level of the float switches of each
processing solution is less than the processable level.
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution
heaters and circulation pumps turn OFF.
Check Point
Check if the processing solution is leaking from -
the tank.
Check if the float of the processing solution float -
Check the status of the float switches of each ☞ 35220
processing solution via Input Check.
Check each replenishment pump output amount ☞ 33030
again.
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump ☞ 33590
+ each automated cleaning valve again.
45900 7/9
45900
No. 5922[F] No. 5923[F]

Replenisher section door is open. Solution remains in the replenishment
tank.
Refer to the manual for corrective action. Countermeasure message
Alarm release Drain the replenishment solution from the tank.
NO Alarm release
YES Error message release
YES
Condition
Condition Condition
When the replenisher section door is opened while the Condition
replenishment cartridge is open (replenishment solution is being When the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R,
created). P2RA or P2RB is on after the Manual Open and Create
Replenishment Solution (Manual Open) buttons are clicked
Suffix Condition and a specified time has passed.
number
4. Troubleshooting
0001 When the replenisher section door is opened before Suffix Condition
the cap is cleaned. number
0002 When the replenisher section door is opened while 0001 P1R
the cap is being cleaned. 0002 P2RA
0004 P2RB
• For suffix number 0001, making approx. 330 prints for L
size is available after the error occurs.
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.
• For the suffix number 0002, print proceeds if an error
message is cleared by pressing YES. NOTE
• When the Manual Open and Create Replenishment
Countermeasures for the suffix number 0001 Solution (Manual Open) buttons are clicked and the (lower)
1. Close the replenisher section door. replenishment solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA or P2RB
is on, the following attention message is displayed.
☞ 4620 ☞ No. 0913[F] Manual opening cannot be started.
The above-mentioned error can be canceled when one of the
Check Point following conditions are fulfilled.
• Manual Open and Create Replenishment Solution
Check if the replenisher section door is closed -
(Manual Open) are performed without solution in each
securely.
replenishment tank.
Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section ☞ 35220 • All the (lower) and (upper) replenishment solution level
Door) status via Input Check.
sensors of each replenishment tank are on.
Diagnosis Countermeasure
Failed parts Manual No. 1. Drain replenishment solution completely from the
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63311 replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB.
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 2. Perform Manual Open with each replenishment tank
empty.☞ 33030
NOTE Check Point
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment ☞ 35220
Wiring diagram solution level sensors of each processing solution
with Input Check.
☞ 89000
45900 8/9
45900
Diagnosis
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311
Sensor
Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
45900 9/9
46000
Error message: Printer 1
In the case of a detection failure (paper

No. 6012 Manual No.
loading sensor)
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A Paper loading sensor ☞ 61200
No. 6013 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
Countermeasure message Failed parts
Refer to the manual for corrective action. ☞ 4200
Alarm release
NO
Error message release # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
YES
Failed parts
Condition ☞ 4252
No. 6012 Paper cannot be loaded from paper NOTE
magazine A. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
No. 6013 Paper cannot be loaded from paper Wiring diagram
magazine B.
☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced
after the paper loading has started, paper end sensors
A and B do not turn DARK.
after the paper end sensors A and B have turned
DARK, the loading sensor does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the
paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
Diagnosis
No. Blown fuses Manual No.
6012 F36 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
F37
In the case of an advance failure Manual No.

Paper supply motors A, B
Printer power supply 3 ☞ 64250

Manual No.
end sensor)
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200
46000 1/19
46000

No. 6014 Manual No.
loading sensor)
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
No. 6015 NOTE
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. ☞ 89000
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
No. 6014 Paper cannot be rewound into paper
magazine A.
No. 6015 Paper cannot be rewound into paper
4. Troubleshooting
magazine B.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound
after the paper rewinding has started, the paper
loading sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound
after the paper loading sensor has turned LIGHT,
paper end sensors A and B do not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the
paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end
sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
In the case of an advance failure Manual No.
Paper supply motors A, B

Manual No.
end sensor)

Manual No.
loading sensor)
Paper loading sensor ☞ 61200
46000 2/19
46000
NOTE
No. 6016
Paper Cutter operation error.
Wiring diagram
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The cut home sensor does not detect LIGHT even
though a specified time has passed after the cut
operation started.
0002 The cut end sensor does not turn DARK even though
4. Troubleshooting
a specified time has passed after the cut operation
started and the cut home sensor turned LIGHT.
0003 The cut end sensor does not turn LIGHT for a while
even though the cut operation started and the cut
home sensor turned DARK.
0004 The cut home sensor does not turn LIGHT for a while
even though the cut operation started and the cut end
sensor turned DARK.
0005 The cut home sensor and cut end sensor are DARK in
the initial operation.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may
occur.
NOTE
• The cutter blade may be locked or seized.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.
Diagnosis
Cutter unit ☞ 25620
Cut motor ☞ 61200

Cut home sensor ☞ 61200
Cut end sensor

Failed parts
☞ 4200
46000 3/19
46000
No. 6054 No. 6073

The Initial Setup was not executed. Synchronous Sensor error.

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number number
- An attempt is made to carry out printing without 0001 All the synchronous signals of B, G, R lasers did not
initial setup. enter within the specified period to the synchronous
sensor PCB.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Check the points and follow the diagnosis mentioned below Diagnosis
even though the initial setup has been finished.
IMPORTANT
Check Point • The output lines of R, G and B from the laser control
1 Allow the computer to read the backup data. PCB to laser unit are individual.
• Carry out R Laser Output ON, G Laser Output ON and
Diagnosis G Laser Output ON of Output Check → Printer →
Engine Section. If the results are shown below, each
In the case of failure Manual No. laser is normal.
Carry out initial setup. - ☞ 35310
• Laser Synchronous Sensor:Synchronous
• Polygon Mirror Frequency:1380±7
• If all lasers are abnormal, the synchronous sensors (in
the laser unit) may be defective.
Point
If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P
1508) ↔ B-AOM, G-AOM or R-AOM driver, the above error
will appear when the system is turned on.

B-AOM driver ☞ 64230
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver

Failed parts
☞ 4200
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 4/19
46000
No. 6074 No. 6076

B Laser control error. Polygon Mirror control error.
No. 6075 Countermeasure message
G Laser control error. Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Countermeasure message Alarm release
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of NO
purchase. Error message release
Alarm release NO
Stop Alarm
Error message release Condition
Error Clear
Suffix Condition
number
Condition
0001 The polygon mirror does not rotate properly.
Suffix Condition 0002 The polygon mirror frequency is out of range.
number
From A communication or control error occurred between NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
0006 to the laser control PCB and the laser unit. • The processable range of polygon mirror frequency is from
0011 1373 Hz to 1387 Hz.
• You can check the polygon mirror frequency via Input
Diagnosis Check.
Point
Diagnosis
If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P
1519) ↔B or G laser driver, the above error will appear when Point
the system is turned on. If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P
1515 ) ↔ laser unit, the above display will appear when printing
Failed parts Manual No. starts.
B laser driver ☞ 64210 Failed parts Manual No.
G laser driver Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
Laser unit ☞ 61450 AOM driver (In case of suffix number 0002) ☞ 64230
Failed parts
☞ 4200 Failed parts
☞ 4200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 5/19
46000
No. 6077 No. 6081

Interlock error. Backup data error. Printer

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
purchase. manual.
Alarm release
IMPORTANT
NO
Error message release • If the error message above appears, it cannot be
NO canceled for approx. 5 to 10 minutes until the Order
Display is displayed.
Condition Alarm release
NO
Suffix Condition
number
NO
0001 Unused
0002 The printer control PCB is detecting the interlock of Condition
the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2) while the laser
control PCB is not detecting the interlock. Suffix Condition
number
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis 0### The backup data of the printer control PCB is
abnormal.
Point 1### The backup data of the system HDD and the printer
The errors described above occur at the system startup if a control PCB are abnormal.
connection failure exists between the printer control PCB
(J/P220) ↔ laser control PCB (J/P1534). NOTE
Failed parts Manual No. digits of the suffix number.
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150 • If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
being OFF or if the printer control PCB has been replaced
with a new one, this error message will appear.
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure IMPORTANT

Failed parts • If the error message above appears, the backup data for
☞ 4200 the printer control PCB saved in HDD is sent to the
printer control PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes while
the error cannot be canceled.
NOTE After the completion of sending the backup data, the
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) error above can be canceled.
However, the backup data saved in HDD may have a
Wiring diagram problem. If the error above occurs, we recommend you
☞ 89000 to read the backup data on the media saved at the close
down check.
Diagnosis
When the data is erased Manual No.
Read the backup data saved in media at the ☞ 35400
close down check.

46000 6/19
46000
Suffix Condition
No. 6082 number
Setup error. 0108 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
Countermeasure message specification registration setup. (G)
Refer to the manual for corrective action. 0109 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
Alarm release carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
NO specification registration setup. (B)
YES 0301 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
(R)
Condition
0302 The center correction is out of allowable range when
Suffix Condition carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
number (G)
0001 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0303 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
in the initial setup. (R) (B)
0002 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0304 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
4. Troubleshooting
in the initial setup. (G) (R)
in the initial setup. (B) (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R) carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
0005 The center correction is out of allowable range when (B)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G) 0401 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0006 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B) 0402 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0007 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R) 0403 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0008 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G) 0404 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0009 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B) 0405 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0101 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup 0406 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
in the paper specification registration setup. (R) carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
0102 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0501*1 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup when carrying out each setup. (R)
in the paper specification registration setup. (G) 0502*1 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
0103 The center correction is out of allowable range when when carrying out each setup. (G)
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup 0503*1 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
in the paper specification registration setup. (B) when carrying out each setup. (B)
0104 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0504 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper when carrying out each setup. (R)
specification registration setup. (R)
0505 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
0105 The center correction is out of allowable range when when carrying out each setup. (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
specification registration setup. (G) 0506 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
when carrying out each setup. (B)
0106 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper 0507 The target density setting value is out of allowable
specification registration setup. (B) range when carrying out each setup. (R)
0107 The tone correction is out of allowable range when 0508 The target density setting value is out of allowable
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper range when carrying out each setup. (G)
specification registration setup. (R) 0509 The target density setting value is out of allowable
range when carrying out each setup. (B)
*1. Not displayed for QSS-35i.
46000 7/19
46000
Check Point
No. 6087
1 Calibrate the colorimeter. Laser Control PCB system error.
2 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
Diagnosis Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100 NO
In case of colorimeter failure Manual No. YES
Colorimeter unit failure ☞ 27100
Condition
Calibration plate failure
Condition
35 An error occurs on the laser control PCB.
Suffix Condition
B-AOM driver ☞ 64230 number
G-AOM driver
0001 RAM at data output side mounted on the laser control
4. Troubleshooting
R-AOM driver PCB is abnormal.(at power input and during initial
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150 operation)
Laser unit ☞ 61450 0002 SD-RAM mounted on the laser control PCB is
abnormal.
35i 0003 The image data sent from the PC interface PCB to the
laser control PCB via LVPECL and the image
Failed parts Manual No. information sent via ARCNET communication is not
iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151 the same.
Printhead module ☞ 26720 0004 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the
image data is small or large.
NOTE 0005 RAM at data output side mounted on the laser control
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) PCB is abnormal.(while printing)
Wiring diagram 0006 Exposure does not complete even though a specified
time has elapsed after starting the exposure.
☞ 89000
0007 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the
0008 Lookup table data and shading table sent from the
main PC cannot be transferred to the laser control
PCB successfully.
Communication between the main PC and laser
control PCB via ARCNET line ended abnormally at
turning on the power supply.
• LUT data from the main PC is identified as
abnormal.
• Shading data from the main PC is identified as
abnormal.
0009 Received LUT magazine code and exposure-
specified magazine code do not match at starting the
printing operation.
0010 No exposure-specified magazine code from the main
PC exists.
0011 No instruction of the laser output from the main PC
exists.
46000 8/19
46000
Suffix Condition # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure

number
Failed parts
0019 There are two mode of communication of main
☞ 4200
PC→laser and main PC→printer→laser.
When exposing, these two communications have the
same negative No. and frame No. NOTE
This message appears if differences have been found • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
between the negative No. and frame No. of the two
communications. Wiring diagram
0022 Cable connection error between the printer control ☞ 89000
PCB and laser control PCB occurs.
This error occurs when turning the power supply on or off, or

printing.
Diagnosis
depending on the suffix number (bit).
Suffix
4. Troubleshooting
number Countermeasure
(bit)
0001 Laser control PCB may be defective.
0002 ☞ 64150
0005
0006
0003 Check the cable connection between PC interface
PCB and laser control PCB. (LVPECL)
• Failure in the laser control PCB
☞ 64150
• Failure in the PC interface PCB
PC Service Manual
This error may occur when the ARCNET
communication status is abnormal.
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication,
refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual.
0004 It does not occur normally.
0007
0008 This error may occur when the ARCNET
0009 communication status is abnormal.
0010 • Check the ARCNET communication status on
0011 the Version Check display.
0019 ☞ 37530
☞ 50520
refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual.
0022 Check the wiring connection between printer control
PCB (J/P205) ↔ laser control PCB (J/P1520).
• Failure in the laser control PCB
☞ 64150
• Failure in the printer control PCB
☞ 64140
46000 9/19
46000
NOTE
No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.
Wiring diagram
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The paper hold sensor does not turn DARK from
LIGHT even though a specified time has elapsed
after starting the paper hold motor operation.
0002 The paper hold sensor does not turn LIGHT from
4. Troubleshooting
DARK even though a specified time has elapsed after
starting the paper hold motor operation.
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55200

☞ 55210.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may
occur.
Check Point
Diagnosis
F34 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140

Paper hold sensor ☞ 61200

Paper hold motor ☞ 61200

Failed parts
☞ 4200

Failed parts
☞ 4252
46000 10/19
46000
No. 6104 No. 6105

Printer Door is open. B Laser light source status error.
No. 6106
Remove any paper that remains then close Printer Doors 1 and 2. G Laser light source status error.
Alarm release
NO Countermeasure message
Error message release Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
YES purchase.
Alarm release
Condition NO
Suffix Condition NO
number
0001 While prints are being made, the interlock switch Condition
(printer doors 1 or 2) turns OFF.
0002 While prints are being made, the printer door 3 Error message Condition
sensor turns off. No.
6105 An error occurs in the light source state of
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
B laser.
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock 6106 An error occurs in the light source state of
switch (printer door 1 or 2) or printer door 3 sensor turns OFF. G laser.
Check Point NOTE

• This error lets you know that the B/G laser head in the laser
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are securely unit has deteriorated.
closed.
• When the error is released once, the error does not recur until
the power supply is reset or the system is started by the
Diagnosis program timer.
IMPORTANT
of the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) • If an error occurs every time the power supply is reset or
the system is started by the program timer, check the
contents of Point. When there is no problem, it is highly
possible that the laser unit is defective.
• Check each of G Laser Light Source Status and B
Failed parts Manual No. Laser Light Source Status for Input Check → Printer
Interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2) ☞ 61050 → Engine Section, and if it is OK, it is highly possible
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61050 that each part at the Failed parts is normal.
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190 ☞ 35210
• Follow the diagnostic procedure shown below if either G
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 Laser Light Source Status or B Laser Light Source
Status is No Good.
NOTE
Diagnosis
Wiring diagram
No. Point
☞ 89000
6105 The errors described above occur at the system startup if
a connection failure exists between the B laser driver
(J/P16550) ↔ laser power supply (J/P412).
6106 The errors described above occur at the system startup if
a connection failure exists between the G laser driver
(J/P1665) ↔ laser power supply (J/P412).

B laser driver ☞ 64210
G laser driver
46000 11/19
46000

No. 6107
Laser power supply ☞ 64250
R Laser temperature is out of range.
Failed parts Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
☞ 4200 purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NOTE Error message release
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) NO
Wiring diagram
Condition
☞ 89000
Suffix Condition
number
0001 R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C and
28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature exceeds 31.0°C (upper limit
temperature) again.
4. Troubleshooting
0002 R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C and
28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature falls under 25.0°C (lower limit
temperature) again.
NOTE
• The R laser thermosensor is built into the R laser.
• You can check the temperature of R laser in Laser Unit
Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Check Point
1 Refer to 4302 ☞ The display of Laser temperatures
is being adjusted. (R) remains.
Diagnosis
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450
Laser unit cooling fans 1 or 2 (Suffix number ☞ 61050
0001)
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 12/19
46000
No. 6135 No. 6136

Arm Unit 1 operation error. Exposure Advance Pressure Change
Motor 1 operation error.
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Countermeasure message
purchase. Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
Alarm release purchase.
NO Alarm release
NO Error message release
NO
Condition
0001 The zigzagging correction sensor does not turn number
DARK even though the paper supply arm motor 0001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not
moved arm unit 1 for the specified length in the turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
direction of paper advance. advance pressure change motor 1 has moved for the
4. Troubleshooting
0002 The zigzagging correction sensor does not turn specified length.
LIGHT even though the paper supply arm motor 0002 In initial operation, exposure advance pressure
moved arm unit 1 for the specified length in the change sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT from DARK
reverse direction of paper advance when zigzag even though the exposure advance pressure change
correction sensor is DARK. motor 1 has moved for the specified length.
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55200 For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55300
☞ 55210. ☞ 55310.
Diagnosis Diagnosis
In case of an operation failure Manual No. In case of an operation failure Manual No.
Paper supply arm motor (right or left) ☞ 61200 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 ☞ 61300
In case of a detection failure Manual No. In case of a detection failure Manual No.
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 61300 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 ☞ 61300
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure NOTE
Failed parts
☞ 4200 Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 13/19
46000
NOTE
No. 6137
Exposure Advance Pressure Change
Motor 2 operation error. Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not
turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 2 has moved for the
4. Troubleshooting
specified length.
0002 In initial operation, exposure advance pressure
change sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT from DARK
even though the exposure advance pressure change
motor 2 has moved for the specified length.

☞ 55310.
Check Point
1 Check that the focal plane regulating guide is
securely attached.
Diagnosis

Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 ☞ 61300
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 64250

Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 ☞ 61300

Failed parts
☞ 4200

Failed parts
☞ 4252
46000 14/19
46000
No. 6144 No. 6145

Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor Lane Select Motor operation error.
operation error.
Countermeasure message Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
purchase. Alarm release
Alarm release NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition number
number 01 In initial operation, even though arm unit 2 operates
01 In initial operation, even though the paper advance for a specified amount, the lane select sensor does not
pressure change motor operates a specified amount, change from LIGHT to DARK.
the paper advance pressure change sensor does not 02 Even though arm unit 2 operates for a specified
4. Troubleshooting
turn DARK. amount, the lane select sensor does not change from
02 Even though the paper advance pressure change DARK to LIGHT.
motor operates a specified amount, the paper advance 03 In lane select operation, even though arm unit 2
pressure change sensor does not change from DARK operates a specified amount from the home position,
to LIGHT. the lane select sensor does not change from LIGHT to
03 Even though the paper advance pressure change DARK.
motor operates a specified amount from the home
position, the paper advance pressure change sensor For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55420.
does not change from DARK to LIGHT.
IMPORTANT
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55400 • The lane select sensor is attached only in one place of
☞ 55420. far side.
Therefore, the stop position of lane select operation is
Diagnosis supervised only on far side lane, but the stop position of
near side lane and center lane is not supervised.
In case of an operation failure Manual No. If the error cannot be detected in initial operation, by
Paper advance pressure change motor ☞ 61400 communication is unstable, the prints of near side lane
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 and center lane are transported, but an error may occur
on the print of far side lane.

Diagnosis
Paper advance pressure change sensor ☞ 61400
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 Blown fuses Manual No.
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) In case of an operation failure Manual No.
Wiring diagram Lane select motor ☞ 61400
☞ 89000 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140

Lane select sensor ☞ 61400

Failed parts
☞ 4200
46000 15/19
46000

No. 6146
Failed parts Paper Advance Arm Motor operation
☞ 4252 error.
NOTE Countermeasure message
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Wiring diagram
Alarm release
☞ 89000 NO
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
01 In initial operation, even though arm unit 2 goes
down in a specified length, the arm sensor does not
change from LIGHT to DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
02 Even though arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length,
the arm sensor does not change from DARK to
LIGHT.
03 Even though arm unit 2 goes down in a specified
length from the home position, the arm sensor does
not change from LIGHT to DARK.

☞ 55420.
Diagnosis
Paper advance arm motor ☞ 61400

Arm sensor ☞ 61400

Failed parts
☞ 4200
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 16/19
46000
No. 6147 No. 6148

Turn Motor operation error. Paper End Sensor A error.
No. 6149
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Paper End Sensor B error.
purchase.
Alarm release Countermeasure message
NO Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
Error message release manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light
NO Intensity again.
Alarm release
Condition NO
number
01 In initial operation, even though the turn unit operates Condition
a specified amount, the turn sensor does not change
from LIGHT to DARK. Condition
02 Even though the turn unit operates a specified - Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
4. Troubleshooting
amount, the turn sensor does not change from DARK Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
to LIGHT. was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
03 Even though the turn unit operates a specified amount Adjustment.
from the home position, the turn sensor does not
change from LIGHT to DARK. NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.
☞ 55420. Suffix Condition
number
Diagnosis 0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
Turn motor ☞ 61400 set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
In case of a detection failure Manual No. not turn DARK.
Turn sensor ☞ 61400 0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
NOTE
Check Point
Wiring diagram
1 Clean the paper end sensor using a blower brush.
☞ 89000
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor
Adjustment display. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
light intensity changes.
Diagnosis
46000 17/19
46000
NOTE
No. 6151
Paper Loading Sensor error.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Countermeasure message
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity again.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Suffix Condition
number
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
not turn DARK.
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper loading sensor using a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor
NOTE
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
Diagnosis
Paper loading sensor ☞ 61200
46000 18/19
46000
NOTE
No. 6152
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 No. 6153
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right)
error.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
4. Troubleshooting
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.
NOTE
Suffix Condition
number
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
not turn DARK.
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the zigzagging correction sensor (right or left).
☞ 61300
2 Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
Diagnosis
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 61300
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 19/19
46100
No. 6155 No. 6156

Exposure Start Sensor error. Exposure End Sensor error.

Contact us or your place of purchase. Contact us or your place of purchase.
NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when - Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment. Adjustment.
NOTE NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is • The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
4. Troubleshooting
currently processed. currently processed.
number number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is 0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK. set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT. set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK. not turn DARK.
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT. turn LIGHT.
Check Point Check Point

1 Clean the exposure start sensor using a blower brush. 1 Clean the exposure end sensor using the blower
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor brush.
Adjustment display. ☞ 36000 2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in NOTE
the Paper Sensor Adjust. • In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light the Paper Sensor Adjust.
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED • After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
light intensity changes. Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Exposure start sensor ☞ 61300 Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 Exposure end sensor ☞ 61300
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 1/15
46100
NOTE
No. 6173
Printer Door 3 is open. It may be
Wiring diagram adversely affect print quality.
☞ 89000
Close the printer door. When you inspect the paper currently
processing, check whether it is satisfactory.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- The print door 3 sensor turns OFF while printing
from paper magazine A.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• This error appears to let the operator know that opening
printer door 3 during printing is a wrong operation and that
adversely affects the print quality.
Check Point
1 Check that printer door 3 is securely closed.
Diagnosis

Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61050
• Unplug the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If there is
no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side when
you place a magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor, the
sensor is defective.
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 2/15
46100
No. 6177 No. 6179

Laser Unit temperature is out of range. B/G Laser Output Unit error.

purchase. purchase.
NO Stop Alarm
NO Error Clear
Condition Condition
number number
0001 Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C 0001 The type detection of the laser unit differs between
and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) 0002 lasers B and G.
and then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper limit
0003 When the type detection of the laser unit is abnormal
temperature) again.
among the B laser driver, G laser driver and laser
4. Troubleshooting
0002 Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C unit
and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
0004 The type detection of the laser unit differs between
and then the temperature falls under 15.0°C (lower
the laser driver B or the laser driver G and the laser
limit temperature)again.
unit.
NOTE
NOTE
• The laser thermosensor is built into the laser unit.
• The laser unit type judgment is performed at two places, the B
• You can check the temperature of laser unit in Laser Unit laser driver or the G laser driver and laser unit.
Adjustment.
☞ 37300 Check Point
Check Point 1 Check that the wiring of the laser drivers B, G and
laser unit have been securely connected.
1 Refer to 4302 ☞ The display of Laser temperatures
2 Check that the wiring of the laser drivers B, G and
is being adjusted. (U) remains.
laser unit have been securely connected.
3 Confirm the laser unit type via Input Check.☞ 35210
Diagnosis
4 Confirm that the types of the B and G laser drivers
Failed parts Manual No. and laser unit are adequate.☞ 61450
Laser unit ☞ 61450 Diagnosis
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450 Failed parts Manual No.
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 61050 B laser driver ☞ 64210
G laser driver
IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.
NOTE
NOTE • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram ☞ 89000
☞ 89000
46100 3/15
46100
No. 6182 No. 6183

iBeam Unit control error. iBeam Control PCB control error.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number number
0001 Though the iBeam control PCB communicated 0001 Control error of the Flash Memory on the iBeam
against iBeam unit, it is not replied even a given time 0002 control PCB
have passed.
0003
0002 Though the iBeam control PCB communicated
0004 Poor contact of a cable between the Printer Control
4. Troubleshooting
against iBeam unit, the response is not right.
PCB and iBeam Control PCB
0005 Control of expose arrangement for iBeam control
0006 PCB has not been completed.
printing.
0007 The exposure does not finish after a specified time
Diagnosis has passed after starting the exposure.
0008 Communication is impossible completely
Suffix Point
0009 When the connection is disconnected while receiving
number
valid frame data
0001 The errors described above occur at the system
0010 When the valid frame data differs between the
startup if a connection failure exists between iBeam
sending terminal and receiving terminal (e.g. data
control PCB (J/P1101, 1102) ↔ iBeam unit (J/P900,
loss)
901).
0011 When having received unspecified data
Failed parts Manual No. 0012 When having received unspecified codes
iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
Diagnosis
iBeam unit ☞ 26720
Suffix Point
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure number
Failed parts
startup if a connection failure exists between iBeam
☞ 4200 control PCB (J/P1520) and printer control PCB
(J/P205).
NOTE 0008 The errors described above occur at the system
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) startup if a connection failure exists between iBeam
control PCB (J/P1513) ↔ PC Interface PCB
Wiring diagram (J/P455).
☞ 89000
Failure in the printer control PCB (suffix ☞ 64140
number 004)
Manual
iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
46100 4/15
46100

No. 6184
Failed parts iBeam Control PCB system error.
☞ 4200
NOTE Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) purchase.
Alarm release
Wiring diagram YES
☞ 89000 Error message release
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0003 The image data sent from the PC interface PCB to the
iBeam control PCB via LVPECL and the image
information sent via ARCNET communication do not
match.
4. Troubleshooting
0008 When the lookup table data and shading table data
from the main PC cannot be sent to the iBeam control
PCB successfully.
Communication between the main PC and the iBeam
control PCB via ARCNET line at power input had an
error.
• LUT data from the main PC is identified as
abnormal.
• Shading data from the main PC is identified as
abnormal.
0009 Received LUT magazine code and exposure-
specified magazine code do not match at starting the
printing operation.
0010 No exposure-specified magazine code from the main
PC exists.
0019 There are two communication modes, main
PC→iBeam and main PC→printer→iBeam.
During the exposure, these two communications have
the same negative No. and frame No.
This message occurs when differences between these
negative No. and frame No. are detected.

printing.
46100 5/15
46100
Diagnosis
No. 6185
Roller Move Motor operation error.
Suffix Countermeasure message
number Countermeasure Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
(bit) purchase.
0003 Check the cable connection between PC interface Alarm release
PCB and iBeam control PCB. (LVPECL) NO
• The errors described above occur at the system Error message release
startup if a connection failure exists between NO
iBeam control PCB (J/P1513) ↔ PC Interface
PCB (J/P455). Condition
• Failure of the iBeam control PCB Suffix Condition
☞ 64151 number
• Failure in the PC interface PCB 0001 Even though the roller move motor moves a specified
PC Service Manual amount, the roller position sensor does not change
This error may occur when the ARCNET from DARK to LIGHT.
communication status is abnormal. 0002 Even though the roller move motor moves a specified
4. Troubleshooting
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, amount, the roller position sensor does not change
refer to the ARCNET Communication from DARK to LIGHT.
Diagnosis Manual.
0004 It does not occur normally. Diagnosis
0007
0008 This error may occur when the ARCNET
0009 communication status is abnormal. Roller position sensor ☞ 61200
0010 • Check the ARCNET communication status on Roller move motor
0019 the Version Check display. Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path. # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
☞ 50520
Failed parts
refer to the ARCNET Communication ☞ 4200
Diagnosis Manual.
NOTE
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Failed parts Wiring diagram

☞ 4200 ☞ 89000
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 6/15
46100
No. 6187 No. 6194

Setup calculation error. Laser Control PCB control error.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number A communication failure has occurred between the PC interface
0001 Problematic setup calculation result detected. PCB and laser control PCB.
0002
Suffix Condition
NOTE number
4. Troubleshooting
• Perform initial setup again if the error shown above occurs. 0008 Communication is impossible completely
0009 When the connection is disconnected while receiving
Diagnosis valid frame data
Failed parts Manual No. 0010 When the valid frame data differs between the
Carry out initial setup. - sending terminal and receiving terminal (e.g. data
loss)
0011 When having received unspecified data
0012 When having received unspecified codes
IMPORTANT
☞ 37530
☞ 50520
Diagnosis
Suffix Point
number
startup if a connection failure exists between the
laser control PCB (J/P1513) ↔ PC Interface PCB
(J/P455).

Manual
46100 7/15
46100

No. 6198
Failed parts Laser Unit EE-PROM control error.
☞ 4200
NOTE Condition
Suffix Condition
Wiring diagram number
☞ 89000 0001 When a failure occurs in EE-PROM write
0002 When a failure occurs in EE-PROM read
IMPORTANT
• Error display does not appear for this error
This error will be recorded in the Error Record of
Operation Information.
The occurrence of this error does not interrupt the
normal process.
4. Troubleshooting
46100 8/15
46100
Diagnosis
No. 6203
Setup error. depending on the suffix number.
Alarm release When the test print color density is normal.

NO
Error message release Manual No.
YES
0002 Clean the calibration plate.
Condition 0003 Replace the calibration plate ☞ 27100
0004 when it is scratched on.
Suffix Condition 0005
number 0006
0001 When measuring the daily setup test print, the density 0001 Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100
for specific colors between steps did not rise 0002 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
consecutively. 0003
0002 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was 0004
above 3.8, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days 0005
were not ready. 0006
0003 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was 0006 Problems may occur if the
4. Troubleshooting
above 3.8, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days process of performing morning
did not change consecutively day by day and changed daily setup, then performing
suddenly. emulsion number change setup
on the main paper when the air
0004 The Dmax is within the range of 0.9 and 3.8, but temperature has risen, is repeated
when calculating the daily setup correction value, the for several days.
correction value for specific colors was over 10 times In that case, perform the paper
as high as the previous value. specification registration setup,
0005 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the then perform the paper magazine
correction value for specific colors was over 3 key. registration setup of other
0006 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the magazines.
total amount of the correction value (specified color) Process the control strip and
after completing the initial setup or paper check the condition of the
specification registration setup exceeded the limit processing solution.
value.
When the test print color density is abnormal.
Manual No.
0001 B-AOM driver ☞ 64230
0004 (35)
0005 G-AOM driver
0006 (35)
Between steps R-AOM driver
(35)
G083195
IMPORTANT (35)
• It occurs when an abnormal correction value is Laser power supply ☞ 64250
calculated. Confirm that the color density state of the (35)
test print have not changed too much in comparison with Laser unit ☞ 61450
the previous print. (35)
NOTE iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
• Refer to the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup. (35i)
☞ 56620 Printhead module ☞ 26720
(35i)
0004 It may occur when the
contamination has occurred.
Process the control strip and
check the condition of the
processing solution.
46100 9/15
46100

Manual No. No. 6204
0005 Problems may occur when the
Setup error.
processing solution has been
replaced. Countermeasure message
In that case, perform the paper Process a control strip and confirm the condition of the processing
specification registration setup, solutions.
then perform the paper magazine Alarm release
registration setup of other NO
magazines. Error message release
YES
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Condition
Wiring diagram Suffix Condition
☞ 89000 number
0001 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was
below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days
did not change consecutively (the Dmax is decreasing
day by day)
4. Troubleshooting
correction value density was over 3 key. And plus
correction (print density has been decreased) has
been carried out.
total correction value (density), which started as soon
as the initial setup or paper specification registration
setup was completed, is beyond the limit value. And
plus correction (print density has been decreased) has
been carried out.
Between steps
G083195
IMPORTANT
• It may occur when the processing solution is
deteriorated. Confirm that the color density state of the
test print have not changed too much in comparison with
the previous print.
NOTE
• Refer to the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup.
☞ 56620
46100 10/15
46100
Diagnosis
No. 6205
depending on the suffix number.
Setup error.
When the test print color density is normal. Countermeasure message
Calibration Plate may be dirty. Clean the Calibration Plate.
Manual No. Alarm release
NO
0002 Clean the calibration plate. Error message release
0003 Replace the calibration plate ☞ 27100 YES
when it is scratched on.
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100 Condition
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Suffix Condition
0003 Problems may occur if the number
process of performing morning 0001 When the test print was measured, the Dmax was
daily setup, then performing above 3.8, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days
emulsion number change setup did not change consecutively (the Dmax is increasing
on the main paper when the air day by day)
temperature has risen, is repeated
for several days.
4. Troubleshooting
specification registration setup,
then perform the paper magazine
registration setup of other
magazines.
Even though the color density
state of the test print have not
changed too much in comparison Between steps
with the previous print, the
G083195
correction value may have
become high due to the gradual NOTE
deterioration of the processing • Refer to the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup.
solution. ☞ 56620
In that case, process the control
strip and check the condition of Diagnosis
the processing solution.
When the test print color density is normal.
When the test print color density is abnormal. Suffix The countermeasure action
Manual No.
Manual No. 0001 Clean the calibration plate.
0001 Process the control strip and Replace the calibration plate ☞ 27100
0002 check the condition of the when it is scratched on.
0003 processing solution.
NOTE
Clean the strainer units of the
replenisher pumps and the hoses. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Check the output amounts. Wiring diagram
NOTE
☞ 89000
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 11/15
46100
Diagnosis
No. 6208
Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply In case of an operation failure Manual No.
Unit. Paper hold motor ☞ 61200

Paper supply arm motor (left)
Countermeasure message Paper supply arm motor (right)
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. Exposure advance motor 1 ☞ 61300
Alarm release Exposure advance motor 2
NO
Error message release Exposure pressure change motor 1
YES Exposure pressure change motor 2
Condition
Suffix Condition In case of a detection failure Manual No.
number Exposure start sensor ☞ 61300
0001 The exposure start sensor does not turn DARK even Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
though a specified length of paper was fed from the
exposure standby position. NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55300 Wiring diagram
☞ 55310.
☞ 89000
Check Point
1 Check that the exposure start sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor
IMPORTANT
• When the error above occurs, if paper whose advance
length is 320.1 mm or longer stops somewhere close to
Roller 1 in the Exposure Advance Unit during
processing, examine the dimensions of the gap
between Paper Supply Unit A and the Exposure
Advance Unit.
Roller 1 and surrounding area
G081998
• In case of adjusting failure Manual No.
Verify that the paper advance length of the ☞ 55200
Paper supply operation is 320.1 mm or ☞ 55210
longer.
Check the length between paper supply unit ☞ 26910
A and the exposure advance unit.
46100 12/15
46100

No. 6209 Paper hold motor ☞ 61200
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Paper supply arm motor (left)
Advance Unit. Paper supply arm motor (right)
Exposure advance motor 1 ☞ 61300
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. Exposure advance motor 2
Alarm release Exposure pressure change motor 1
NO Exposure pressure change motor 2
YES
Condition In case of a detection failure Manual No.

Exposure start sensor ☞ 61300
Suffix Condition
number Exposure end sensor
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
after the exposure start sensor has turned DARK, the
exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT. NOTE
0002 The exposure end sensor does not turn DARK even
4. Troubleshooting
though a specified length of paper was fed from the Wiring diagram
exposure standby position. ☞ 89000
after the exposure end sensor has turned DARK, the
exposure end sensor does not turn LIGHT.

☞ 55310.
Check Point
1 Check that the exposure start sensor and exposure
end sensor are not soiled.
IMPORTANT
• When paper is jammed in the turn unit, confirm the state
of pressure release arm.
Turn unit
G083099
Diagnosis
Paper Advance Unit Correction ☞ 36010
46100 13/15
46100
Diagnosis
No. 6210
Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. In case of a detection failure Manual No.
Countermeasure message Paper loading sensor
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Alarm release Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
NO
YES # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
Failed parts
Condition
☞ 4200
Condition
- After turning on the system, releasing the error of NOTE
paper jam, or opening or closing the printer door, the • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
status of each sensor was DARK.
Wiring diagram
NOTE ☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Paper end sensor A
0002 Paper end sensor B
0003 Paper loading sensor
0004 When there is paper between the paper loading sensor
and exposure start sensor
Check Point
1 Confirm whether the paper remains at each sensor in
the printer.
2 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
3 Check that paper magazine is correctly placed.
NOTE
• When suffix number 0001 or 0002 was displayed, the printer
door may have been shut in the state where the paper
magazine is not correctly placed.
• The above mentioned is occurred by having blocked the paper
end sensor with a normal magazine code has not been detected
by the paper magazine code sensor.
In case of adjusting failure or defective

Manual No.
parts
Confirm whether the paper magazine -
positioning hole smoothly enters the
positioning pin.
Adjustment failure of the paper magazine -
code sensor
Confirm whether the paper magazine -
pressure spring of printer door is functioning
correctly.
46100 14/15
46100
No. 6211
Paper remains in the Exposure Advance
Unit.
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Condition
- After turning on the system, releasing the error of
paper jam, or opening or closing the printer door, the
status of each sensor was DARK.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Exposure start sensor
0002 Exposure end sensor
Check Point
1 Confirm whether the paper remains at each sensor in
the printer.
2 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
Diagnosis
Exposure start sensor ☞ 61300
Exposure end sensor

Failed parts
☞ 4200
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 15/15
46300
Error message: Scanner
Error message: Scanner
No. 6303−6337
Corrective action of Error message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service
Manual are described in the table.
action of Error message.
Error message (Scanner)
Error message table
No. 6303 Scanner Zoom 1 operation error.
No. 6304 Scanner Zoom 2 operation error.
No. 6305 Scanner Focus operation error.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 6306 Scanner IRIS operation error.
No. 6309 Scanner change of light error.
No. 6319 Backup data error. Scanner AFC
No. 6321 Focus auto adjustment error.
No. 6322 Scanner input balance error.
No. 6324 F stop value range error.
No. 6327 Scanner Light Source Section temperature
adjustment error.
No. 6329 Analog setting communication error.
No. 6330 Digital setting communication error.
No. 6331 Line scanning communication error.
No. 6332 Light Source adjustment error.
No. 6333 The Line Data is out of the Standard Range Error.
No. 6334 Lane change operation error.
No. 6335 The Scanner Unit Cover is open.
No. 6336 Scanner Zoom operation error.
NOTE
• In the Error No. message table, the error message No. that the
QSS does not use currently may be described.
46300 1/1
46400
Error message: Film carrier
Error message table

No. 6400−6446
No. 6445 End Perforation Sensor error.
No. 6446 Film was set to the incorrect lane.
NOTE
• In the Error message table, the error message No. that the QSS
Condition does not use currently may be described.
IMPORTANT
Error message (Film carrier)
Error message table
No. 6400 Perforation Sensor error.
No. 6401 Loading Sensor error.
No. 6402 Ready Sensor error.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 6403 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
No. 6407 Spool Key operation error.
No. 6408 The Film Carrier is unlocked.
No. 6409 The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 6410 Film Sensor error.
No. 6411 Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not
executed.
No. 6412 135 DX Sensor 1 error.
No. 6423 Auto focus error.
No. 6424 Mount Unit operation error.
No. 6425 Mount detection error.
No. 6426 The lane is out of position.
No. 6429 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB)
No. 6431 Auto focus error.
No. 6432 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 6433 Mount detection error.
No. 6434 Mount detection (inlet) error.
No. 6435 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 6436 Mount elevator operation error.
No. 6437 Mount eject operation error.
No. 6438 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 6439 The film strip is too short for processing.
No. 6441 The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 6442 The perforation of the film may be broken.
No. 6443 Move Table operation error.
No. 6444 Cartridge is out of position.
46400 1/2
46400
No. 6447−6459
Refer to the Connection Unit Service
Manual for Corrective action of Error
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for
Error (Connection unit)
Error message table
No. 6447 I/O extension PCB could not be detected.
No. 6448 The Connecting Unit was unlocked.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 6449 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was not
executed.
No.6450 Film Sensor 1 error.
No.6451 Film Sensor 2 error.
No.6453 Film has stopped in the Connecting Unit.
No.6454 Guide switching operation error
No.6455 Film cut operation error.
No.6456 Arm operation error.
No.6457 Interlock error.
No.6458 Film Processor error. Film will be ejected to the
Negative Stocker.
No.6459 Manual insertion was detected. Film auto loading
cannot continue to the Scanner. Quit the process.
No.6460 Advance Motor control error.
No.6461 Film Advance Guide 1 has opened. The process was
stopped.
No.6462 The Cleaning Leader has stopped in the Connecting
Unit.
NOTE
does not use currently may be described.
46400 2/2
46500
Error message: Disk/Media
Error message: Disk/Media
No. 6506
Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary
image file(s).
Alarm release
NO
• Select NO to bring up the File Delete dialog box. Delete
unnecessary files in the hard disk.
• Select PASS to stop the operation.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the power supply is turned on or the data is to
be written to the hard disk, the free space of hard disk
4. Troubleshooting
drive is below 4 GB.
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding drive is displayed in the third
line of the message.
C:
• Read only files will not be deleted.
Check Point
1 Delete unnecessary files.
46500 1/1
46550
Error message: Colorimeter
Error message: Colorimeter
No. 6551 No. 6554

Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. Calibration Plate advance error.

Remove the paper and clean the Colorimeter Unit Advance Roller. Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
For details, refer to the manual. Alarm release
Alarm release NO
Error message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
number 0001 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a
0001 Although a specified length of paper is fed to lead the specified length, paper sensor 2 dose not turn DARK.
front end of the paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn 0002 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor
DARK. 1 turns LIGHT from DARK.
0002 When paper is being fed in paper advance operation, 0003 In initial operation, although a specified length of
paper sensor 2 turns LIGHT. moving to the home position was attempted to the
4. Troubleshooting
0003 When ejecting paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn calibration plate, paper sensors 1 does not turn
LIGHT although a specified length of paper is fed to LIGHT.
lead the front end of the paper. 0004 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor
1 turns LIGHT.
NOTE
0005 Not occur
• Refer to the setup print color measuring operation flow.
☞ 56610 0006 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a
specified length, paper sensor 1 dose not turn DARK.
Check Point
NOTE
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted. • Refer to the colorimeter calibration operation flow. ☞ 56600
2 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a
cleaning sheet. Check Point
3 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit 1 If the errors of suffix number 0003 or 0006 may
Adjustment. occur with the calibration plate placed on the standby
4 If the error of suffix number 0003 may occur without position, clean the paper sensor 1.
a paper in the colorimeter unit, clean the paper sensor
2. Diagnosis
Diagnosis Failed parts Manual No.

Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 63520
Paper advance motor
Paper sensor 2 ☞ 63520 ☞ 66200
Processor control PCB
Paper advance motor
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100 # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
NOTE Failed parts
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46550 1/1
46600
Error message: Pricing unit
No. 6600 No. 6601-##

Pricing Unit communication error. Pricing Unit operation error.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number number
- Power of the Pricing Unit was not on when issuing 0001 Although a specified time has passed since printing
Pricing sheet. started, printing is not completed.
0002 Since excessive communication data is sent to the
NOTE 0003 pricing unit, the printing operation is delayed.
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is 0004
4. Troubleshooting
different.
NOTE
Suffix Type
number • Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is
different.
0002 Type A
Bar code pricing unit Suffix Type
number
0003 Type B
0001 Standard
Card printer pricing unit
Pricing Unit
0004 Type C
0002 Type A
Bar code pricing unit
0003 Type B
Check Point Card printer pricing unit
1 Check that the pricing unit power supply is ON. 0004 Type C
Diagnosis
• When the pricing unit specification via Machine
Blown fuses Manual No. Specification is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64241
Diagnosis
PU control PCB ☞ 64241 F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64241
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Failed parts Manual No.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46600 1/2
46600
No. 6602 No. 6603

Pricing Unit Printer operation error. Backup data error. PU

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the
purchase. manual.
NO NO
NO NO
• Select YES to read the backup data in the hard disk.
Condition
Condition Condition
Abnormal data is sent from the card printer. Suffix Condition
Continuous check for two or more seconds detects that an error number
signal has been sent. 0### The backup data of the PU control PCB is abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the PU
Suffix Type control PCB are abnormal.
4. Troubleshooting
number
0003 Type B NOTE
Card printer pricing unit
digits of the suffix number.
NOTE
Diagnosis
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is
different. When the data is erased Manual No.
• When the pricing unit specification via Machine Specification Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400
is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.
Diagnosis
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64241 NOTE
Failed parts Manual No. Wiring diagram
PU control PCB ☞ 64241 ☞ 89000
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46600 2/2
46620
Error: NMC
Error: NMC
No. 6620 No. 6621

Remote Control was not finished. Could not connect to the server.

NO Contact us or your place of purchase.
Error message release Alarm release
YES NO
Condition YES

number
- It is shown when the DRM Access service was Suffix Condition
unable to finish. number
- It is shown when you attempt to download backup
Check Point data via Reading Data (Noritsu-eNET → CPU)
display, but the backup data has not been downloaded
1 If it recurs, reinstall the Noritsu-eNET system after a certain period of time.
program.
Check Point
4. Troubleshooting
1 Restart the computer.
Diagnosis
Confirm the connection to the server. −
46620 1/2
46620
Error: NMC
No. 6622 No. 6623

There is no backup data in the server. Noritsu-eNET was not started.

NO Contact us or your place of purchase.
Error message release Alarm release
YES NO
Condition YES

number
- The error will be shown when you attempt to Suffix Condition
download backup data via Reading Data (Noritsu- number
eNET → CPU) display, but there is no backup data in - The error will be displayed when you attempt to
the server. check Noritsu-eNET mail, but there is no mail
display software.
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Reinstall the Noritsu-eNET software. −
46620 2/2
46802
Error message: Software upgrade
Error message: Software upgrade
No. 6803
Language version of message data is
incorrect. Message display in English.
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the power supply is turned on or when the
language of the system specification is to be changed,
the selected language does not appear.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
46802 1/1
46900
Error: Main
Error: Main

No. 6900 Version Check display.
Main control system error. ☞ 37530
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of • For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm
purchase. the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
Alarm release • When the CPU of main PC is occupied by the
NO processing of those other than the QSS system
Error message release program, this error may be occurred.
NO When an error occurs to specific condition or timing,
confirm whether the problem has occurred about the
Condition equipment or software by which processing was
performed.
Condition
• Communication (Ethernet etc.)
Because of QSS control system, it is in a condition that the main
control system cannot assume, such as that there is no necessary • Hardware (Media drive etc.)
file, the file is damaged and the data to be collated is not • Software (Antivirus software etc.)
consistent.
Diagnosis
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
(bit)
0001 ARCNET or LVDS cannot be used. Suffix
number Countermeasure Manual No.
0002 There is no enough memory, failed to operate.
(bit)
0004 There is no initial data file.
0004 Reinstall the QSS system PC Service
0008 It loses one frame of the scanned images (0 frame). 0010 program. Manual
0010 The temporary file can not be made. 0040
0020 The number of scanned images is too many. 0080
0040 Check the error of the backup data. 0001 Carry out the recovery.
0002
0080 Check the error of the backup data.
0100
0100 Communication error between tasks 0200
0200 The backup file of the frame format cannot be found. 0400 Initialize the Compact Archive ☞ 36700
0400 The data base file of the archive is damaged. Unit.
0800 • The image data cannot be sent normally from 0800 • Check the LVPECL -
Main PC → Laser control PCB or iBeam communication between
Control PCB (LVPECL). Main PC → Laser control
• The data mainly processed is not consistent. PCB or iBeam Control
PCB.
1000 When writing the data to the input media like MO,
the image data is not written normally. • When recurs, get the log ☞ 37500
data.
NOTE 1000 Check the connection of each PC Service
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation. media drive. Manual
Suffix number display. Suffix
☞ 4002 number Failed parts Manual No.
(bit)
Check Point 0040 Hard disk (for system) PC Service
0080 Manual
1 Reset the power supply.
0200
2 Read the system data.
☞ 35400 0001 Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
(35)
3 When recurs, get the log data.
☞ 37500 iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
(35i)
IMPORTANT PC interface PCB PC Service

(35, 35i) Manual
0008 Scanner unit Scanner Service
0020 Manual
46900 1/11
46900
Error: Main
Suffix
number Failed parts Manual No.
No. 6901
(bit) ARCNET communication error.
0800 LVPECL cable -
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150 Countermeasure message
(35) Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151 Alarm release
(35i) NO
PC interface PCB PC Service Error message release
(35, 35i) Manual NO
NOTE
Condition
Condition
Wiring diagram
When the power supply is turned ON, the version is checked, or
☞ 89000 software is upgraded, an ARCNET communication error occurs.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the
Wiring diagram instant power failure.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
0100 PU control PCB
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the operation may not be
continued. It is necessary to reset the power supply of
QSS.
• The PCB without reference to the error may be
displayed in the second line depending on the equipped
options or ARCNET communication feature.
Check the ARCNET communication path other than the
displayed PCB.
☞ 50520
☞ 37530
NOTE
• The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in
the second line of the message.
☞ 4002
Check Point
46900 2/11
46900
Error: Main
Diagnosis
No. 6903
Suffix Point Serial communication error.
number
0010 For the Stand Alone Printer at installation, check if
Machine Specification→Attached Scanner setting
is Not in use if the above error occurs when turned
purchase.
ON.
Alarm release
☞ 37540 NO
Failed parts Manual No. YES or NO
ARCNET cable - • Select YES to continue the communication.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 • Select NO to abort the communication.
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Condition
Manual Suffix Condition
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150 number
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151 (bit)
PC interface PCB PC Service 0002 • There was a communication error between the
4. Troubleshooting
Manual colorimeter and processor control PCB.
PU control PCB ☞ 64241 • There was a serial communication error between
the ATX motherboard and colorimeter.
Multi power supply (scanner) Scanner Service
Manual
NOTE
Laser power supply ☞ 64250 • The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in
iBeam power supply the second line of the message.
Failed parts Manual No. For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
If the connecting unit is installed in S1-II Connection Unit Suffix number display.
• The above error occurs if the multi Service Manual ☞ 4002
power supply (scanner) does not provide
the I/O extension PCB with 5 V. Diagnosis
I/O extension PCB Suffix Point
number
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure 0002 An error happens if the following symptoms occur.
Failed parts • Connection failure between the motherboard

and colorimeter (RS-232C).
☞ 4200
• Supply failure from the processor power and
☞ 4203 processor control PCB (+24 V).
• Connection failure between the processor
Failed parts control PCB (J/P 704) ↔ and colorimeter.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual. • (F15) of the processor control PCB has blown.
NOTE Blown fuses Manual No.

• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Failed parts Manual No.
Serial cable -
Wiring diagram Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual. Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100

Failed parts
☞ 4203
46900 3/11
46900
Error: Main

No. 6906
Failed parts Failed to change the mode. Enter to the
☞ 4252 next mode?
NOTE Countermeasure message
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Wiring diagram
Alarm release
☞ 89000 NO
• Select PASS to change the mode again.
• Select NO to stop the change.
• Select YES to enter the next mode.
Condition
Condition
Each control PCB does not return any signal when the mode is
4. Troubleshooting
changed.
The first figure of suffix number:

The mode which you are going to bring up is displayed.
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
1### Normal mode
2### Input/Output mode
3### Setup mode
4### Adjustment mode
5### Start Up Checks mode
6### Close Down Checks mode
7### Program timer mode
8### Input Check mode
F### Unknown
The last three digits of suffix number:

Each control PCB which was failed to change the mode is
indicated by the total of the bit operation.
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
#002 AFC/scanner control PCB
#008 Printer control PCB
#080 Processor control PCB
#100 PU control PCB
#800 Laser control PCB (35)
NOTE
☞ 4002
46900 4/11
46900
Error: Main
Diagnosis
No. 6907
Failed parts Manual No. The file was not found.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 Countermeasure message
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Contact us or your place of purchase.
Manual Alarm release
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 NO
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150 NO
PU control PCB ☞ 64241 Condition
NOTE Suffix Condition

number
0001 The required file for setup does not exist.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 NOTE
• The file name where the error arises will be displayed in the
Wiring diagram second line of the message.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
46900 5/11
46900
Error: Main
NOTE
No. 6908
Processing response error.
Wiring diagram
purchase. Wiring diagram
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
When the processing command is given, each CPU does not
return any signal.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the
instant power failure.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
0100 PU control PCB
8000 Colorimeter unit
NOTE
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be
☞ 4002
Check Point
Diagnosis
ARCNET cable -
Manual
Manual
46900 6/11
46900
Error: Main
No. 6909 No. 6910

CPU was reset. Abort the process. Flatbed Scanner diagnosis error.

Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
Functions. Then turn off the circuit breaker and turn on again. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
The CPU is reset due to power failure. There is a problem in measuring the test prints with the flatbed
scanner.
Suffix PCB
(bit) number
4. Troubleshooting
0200 Laser control PCB (35) 0001 The space of hard disk is tight in reading the image
iBeam Control PCB (35i) data.
0002 Not occur
NOTE 0003 PC memory was insufficient during scanning.
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be
Check Point
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to 1 Restart the system.
Suffix number display. 2 For the suffix No. 0001, delete the unnecessary file,
☞ 4002 and secure free space.
Check Point Diagnosis

1 Reset the power supply. Failed parts Manual No.
Hard disk PC Service
Diagnosis Manual
Failed parts Manual No. Flatbed scanner -
NOTE
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151 • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
NOTE Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46900 7/11
46900
Error: Main
No. 6911 No. 6912

Flatbed Scanner operation error. Flatbed Scanner communication error.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
There is a scanning problem in measuring the test prints with the The communication error has been occurred in measuring the test
flatbed scanner. prints with the flatbed scanner.
Suffix Condition Check Point

number
1 Confirm that the power supply of the flatbed scanner
4. Troubleshooting
0001 During the prescan, the error is informed from driver. is turned on.
0002 During the scanning, the error is informed from 2 Restart the system.
driver.
3 Reinstall the flatbed scanner driver.
0004 During the scanning, there is a problem with the
image.
Diagnosis
Check Point Failed parts Manual No.
1 Restart the system. Flatbed scanner -
2 Reinstall the flatbed scanner driver. NOTE
Diagnosis
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
Flatbed scanner -
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46900 8/11
46900
Error: Main

No. 6913
System was shut down forcibly. Restart Manual
the system. Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150
purchase. iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151
Alarm release PU control PCB ☞ 64241
NO
HDD PC Service
Error message release Manual
NO
NOTE
Condition • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Condition Wiring diagram
System has shut down forcibly while processing. ☞ 89000
Suffix Condition Wiring diagram
number
4. Troubleshooting
0001 QSS_SEQ.exe file has shut down forcibly.
0002 QSS_Dsp.exe file has shut down forcibly.
0004 NMC-related .exe file has shut down forcibly.
0008
0010
0020
0040 Image processing software has shut down forcibly.
0080 Media I/O transformer has shut down forcibly.
IMPORTANT
☞ 37530
☞ 50520
• If the error above may occur while printing or during the
data process, also confirm the connection status of the
data transfer cable described in the data flow while
printing.
☞ 50700
Check Point
2 If the error above may occur when reading data,
confirm the image data is a readable format with
QSS.
Diagnosis
ARCNET cable -
46900 9/11
46900
Error: Main
Wiring diagram
No. 6921 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
PCB error.
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from
Functions. Then turn off the circuit breaker and turn on again. If
this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
NO
Condition
Condition
When turning on the power supply or upgrading the program
version, each CPU judged that the PCB was abnormal.
Suffix PCB
4. Troubleshooting
number
(bit)
0100 PU control PCB
NOTE
☞ 4002
Check Point
Diagnosis
ARCNET cable -
Manual
NOTE
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46900 10/11
46900
Error: Main
No. 6922 No. 6926

Device control error. PC Interface PCB control error.

Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from
purchase. Functions. Then restart the personal computer.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number An error occurred during the PC laser interface diagnostic check.
0001 An error of Windows about the USB flash memory is
detected using the self-diagnostic function of the Check Point
main control system.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
1 Confirm whether the USB flash memory is not being
removed during reading data from the USB flash Countermeasure Manual No.
memory. PC interface PCB PC Service
2 Failure in the USB flash memory Manual
NOTE
Diagnosis
Wiring diagram
Failure in the USB Flash Memory PC Service
☞ 89000
Compatible Kit Manual
46900 11/11
48350
Error: Compact Archive Unit
No. 8361 No. 8362

Archive File read error. Archive File write error.

Refer to the manual for corrective action. Refer to the manual for corrective action.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number number
- Reading image data is failed while printing from the - Writing data is failed while saving the image to the
compact archive unit. compact archive unit.
Diagnosis Check Point

Failed parts Manual No. 1 Conduct Defragmentation of the Compact Archive
4. Troubleshooting
Hard disk drive PC Service Unit.
Manual
Diagnosis
NOTE
Hard disk drive PC Service
Circuit diagram Manual
☞ 89000
NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ 89000
48350 1/2
48350
No. 8363 No. 8364

Compact Archive Unit processing error. Compact Archive Unit cannot be used.

Refer to the manual for corrective action. Contact us or your place of purchase.
NO NO
NO NO
Condition Condition
number Compact Archive Unit cannot be used at the start-up of QSS or
- Cannot communicate with the Compact Archive Unit when reading back-up data.
(TYPE2) in order to save to, or print from the
Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2). Suffix Condition
number
NOTE
0001 There is no hard disk drive available for use.
4. Troubleshooting
• This message appears only in the case of Compact Archive
Unit (TYPE2). 0002 Not occur in 35 and 35i.
0003 The hard disk drive has not been formatted.
Check Point 0004 The capacity of the hard disk drive has become below
the lower limit.
1 Check the settings for Option Registration and
Operator Selections of the Compact Archive Unit
(TYPE2). Check Point
2 If this occurs while using the QSS-Kids, check the 1 Reset Option Registration of the Compact Archive
connection between the QSS-Kids and the machine. Unit (TYPE2) and reset the power supply.
3 Initialize the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2). Restart the machine, carry out Option Registration
again, and check.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Hard disk drive PC Service Failed parts Manual No.
Manual Hard disk drive PC Service
Manual
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) NOTE
Circuit diagram
☞ 89000 Circuit diagram
☞ 89000
48350 2/2
49000
Error message: Edit
Error message: Edit
No. 9000 No. 9001

Edit mode System error. Edit mode Information file error.

purchase. purchase.
NO NO
YES YES
Condition Condition
number number
0001 There is no msimg32.dll in Windows 2000. 0001 The image insertion information is defective when
0002 AlhpaBlend function is not supported in Windows reading an information file in the Edit mode.
2000. 0002 The letter information is defective when reading an
0003 The image information file is broken when entering information file in the Edit mode.
in image editing mode. 0003 There is an unknown information data when reading
4. Troubleshooting
0004 There is not the image information file when entering information file extend data in the Edit mode.
in image editing mode.
NOTE
0005 Making data for frame printing is failed.
• This message appears when reading an information file in the
0006 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering Edit mode.
in image editing mode.
0007 Changing the size of template image is failed when Check Point
entering in image editing mode.
0008 Changing the magnification of inserted image data is 1 Check if the information file is not broken in the
failed. template information correction screen.
0009 Reading the letter information file in the template 2 Install the option template again.
selection display is failed.
0010 Reading phrase data is failed.
0011 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering
the information file correction display.
0012 Changing the size of template image is failed when
entering the information file correction display.
0013 Opening the file is failed.
0014 Memory mapping is failed.
NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.
Diagnosis
Install the QSS software again. PC Service
Carry out the recovery. Manual
49000 1/2
49000
Error message: Edit
No. 9002 No. 9003

Edit mode Image data error. Edit mode Image read error.

This file format cannot be read, or this file is broken. Select the Saved image is broken. Remake the data, and save it.
correct file. Alarm release
Alarm release NO
Error message release YES
YES
Condition
Condition
Suffix Condition
number 0001 The image saved data to read is broken.
0001 Reading PSD file is failed. 0002 There is not the information file in the image saved
0002 Copying the image inserted in Inserted Graphics is data to read.
failed. 0003 There is not the template file in the image saved data
0003 The inserted image data cannot be read by Plug-in. to read.
4. Troubleshooting
0004 Reading PSD file is failed.
NOTE
0005 Reading PSD image file is failed.
• This message appears when reading an image in the Edit
0006 There is not the image file to insert. mode.
0007 Reading image file to insert is failed.
0008 The layer information to read image is defective. Check Point
0009 Reading Bitmap file in the preview screen is failed. 1 Make the image data again.
0010 Reading thumbnail file in the template selection
screen is failed. Diagnosis
0011 Writing thumbnail file in the template selection
screen is failed. Countermeasure Manual No.
0012 There is not a file when receiving the template file Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
name. Install the QSS software again. PC Service
Manual
NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.
Check Point
1 Check if the corrective image data is selected.
2 Carry out the operation using another image data.
Diagnosis
Install the QSS software again. PC Service
Manual
49000 2/2
49250
Error message: QSS-Kids
Error message: QSS-Kids
No. 9250−9311
For error corrective action, refer to QSS-
Kids Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective
Error message (QSS-Kids)
Error message table
No.9250 Language version of message data is incorrect.
Order Management Software is displayed in
English.
No.9251 Version error. Confirm the version of Order
4. Troubleshooting
Management Software.
No.9252 Order Management Software was shut down
forcibly. The system will be restarted.
No.9253 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The Order
Store Folder Path was not obtained from the Order
Management Software.
No.9254 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The order
data was not found.
No.9255 QSS-Kids Main system control error. Accepted
order has been completed.
No.9256 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The order has
been completed.
No.9257 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The number
of files in the Order Store Folder and the number of
frames are not in agreement.
No.9300 The processed order could not be deleted.
No.9301 Log file could not be written.
No.9302 There is insufficient memory. Quite other
applications.
No.9303 The Folder Name for the order data could not be
changed.
No.9304 Order Data Folder could not be created.
No.9305 Recorded Data could not be created.
No.9306 Initial Setting Information File could not be saved.
No.9307 The Order Process Information Management file
could not be saved.
No.9308 Processable Order Check File could not be created.
No.9309 Processable Order Check File could not be deleted.
No.9310 Spooler Domain Check File could not be deleted.
No.9311 Spooler Domain Check File could not be created.
NOTE
does not use currently may be described.
49250 1/1
49350
Error message: Bravo II
NOTE
No. 9350−9376
For error corrective action, refer to Bravo does not use currently may be described.
II Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective
Error message (Bravo II)
Error message table
No.9350 The setting file could not be read. Start by default
setting.
No.9351 DLL version is incorrect.
4. Troubleshooting
No.9354 PTIF.DLL process response error.
No.9356 The selected order was not deleted.
No.9357 Failed to write to the CD.
No.9358 PTBurn system error.
No.9359 Tray Operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge
button on the Bravo.
No.9360 The ink cartridges were not found. Open the cover
of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge button.
Make sure the cartridges are installed.
No.9361 Bravo Internal Printer communication error. Press
the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9362 The media was not picked. Press the Ink Cartridge
button of the Bravo.
No.9363 Arm operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge button
of the Bravo.
No.9364 Arm Picker error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of
the Bravo.
No.9365 There are no user authorizations on the personal
computer. Login as Administrator, and restart the
software.
No.9366 PTBurn Internal Software error. Restart the
software.
No.9367 CD-R drive for Bravo was not found. Disconnect
all the cables from the Bravo (including power
supply). Then reconnect all the cables to the Bravo
and restart the computer.
No.9369 The Bravo Utility was not started.
No.9370 The PTBurn was not started.
No.9371 The shared folder of PTBurn could not be accessed.
No.9373 Job history information file error.
No.9374 An error has occurred when data writing was
executed on the Bravo.
No.9375 The media was not picked. Remove the media and
turn ON the power supply of the Bravo.
No.9376 An error has occurred when data writing was
executed on the Bravo.
49350 1/2
49350
4. Troubleshooting
49350 2/2
5000
Start up/Closing down sequence ......................................................................................... 50500

Startup sequence [35, 35i] .................................................................................................................................50500
ARCNET communication ..................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................................50520
Data flow chart ..................................................................................................................... 50700
Data flow in printing [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................................................50700
Data flow in data saving [35, 35i] .....................................................................................................................50710
Data flow to the CAU [35, 35i] .........................................................................................................................50730
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................. 55000
Paper path diagram [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................................55000
Printer paper advance operation ......................................................................................... 55100
Paper loading operation [35, 35i] ......................................................................................................................55100
Paper supply operation (advance length of 383.9 mm or less) [35, 35i] ...........................................................55200
Paper supply operation (advance length of 384.0 mm or more) [35, 35i] .........................................................55210
Exposure advance operation (paper advance length of 383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more) [35, 35i] ..........55300
Exposure advance operation (advance length of 384.0 mm to 469.9 mm) [35, 35i] ........................................55310
Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [35, 35i] ..........................................................................55400
5 Operation sequence
Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [3502] ...................................................................................55420
Paper rewind operation [35, 35i] .......................................................................................................................55500
Paper splicing processing operation [35, 35i] ...................................................................................................55600
Paper end processing operation [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................................55700
Fogged paper processing operation [35, 35i] ....................................................................................................55800
iBeam Tuning operation ...................................................................................................... 55900
iBeam Tuning test print operation [35i] ............................................................................................................55900
iBeam Tuning Operation [35i] ..........................................................................................................................55910
Processor paper advance operation .................................................................................... 56100
Processor paper advance operation (normal print) ............................................................................................56100
Processor paper advance operation (Setup print) ..............................................................................................56200
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped device] .................................................................56300
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device] .....................................................................56400
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device] ..........................................................................56500
Colorimeter unit operation ................................................................................................... 56600
The calibration operation of the colorimeter .....................................................................................................56600
Automatic colorimetry operation of setup print ................................................................................................56610
Judgment operation of setup print .....................................................................................................................56620
Replenishment operation ..................................................................................................... 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [35, 35i] .....................................................................................................57010
5000 1/1
50500
Start up/Closing down sequence
Startup sequence [35, 35i]
• This section covers starting up flow.
1. The program timer goes off or you press the manual sorter switch.
2. The power supply relay of 200 V turns ON.

• The processor control PCB turns ON the relay (X2) of the processor relay PCB.
• See the Wiring diagram.
3. The control PCBs turn ON.
4. The system starts adjusting the processing solution temperature.

• Turns ON SSR1 (CD heater), SSR2 (BF heater) and SSR3 (STB heater) of the processor relay PCB.
5. The printer control PCB turns ON the power supply of the internal personal computer.
• The power is supplied to each part of the PC to start it up.
6. The PC starts up and it starts up the QSS software.
• The PC checks the free space on the C drive of the hard disk drive while it starts up the QSS software.
If the main software does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6900 Main control system error.
If the free space on the C drive of hard disk drive is 4 GB or less.
• ☞ No. 6506 Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s).
7. The following error occurs if each control PCB is not turned on properly after checking the communication
status between the main software and each control PCB.
Control PCB Error

Processor control PCB AFC/scanner control PCB PU control PCB • ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET
Printer control PCB Laser control PCB (35) communication error.
PC interface PCB iBeam Control PCB (35i)
8. Checks the status of backup data on the hard disk drive.

• When starting the main software, the status of backup data of each control PCB in the hard disk drive is checked.
If the backup data in the hard disk drive is not normal
• ☞ No. 6900 Main control system error.
9. Checks the conditions of all the control PCBs.
If the conditions of all the control PCBs were abnormal.

• ☞ No. 6921 PCB error.
10. Checks the backup data of all the control PCBs.

NOTE
• Applicable models are indicated with $ and inapplicable models are indicated with −.
50500 1/4
50500
Symptom Error
• If the backup data of the processor control PCB is abnormal. • ☞ No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor
• If the backup data of the printer control PCB is abnormal. • ☞ No. 6081 Backup data error. Printer
• If the backup data of the AFC/scanner control PCB is abnormal. • No.6319 Backup data error. Scanner AFC
• If the backup data could not be read into the laser control PCB from the • ☞ No. 6194 Laser Control PCB control error.
hard disk drive. (For 35)
• If the backup data could not be read into the iBeam control PCB from • ☞ No. 6183 iBeam Control PCB control error.
the hard disk drive. (For 35i)
*1. The system checks the communication status of the PCBs only when these options are registered for Option Registration.
NOTE
• If the backup data of each control PCB is abnormal, backup data is written to each control PCB from the hard disk drive after
Backup data error is displayed.
• Since the laser control and iBeam control PCBs do not maintain the backup data, they are written from the hard disk drive
everytime the power supply is turned on.
• If the iBeam control PCB has been used, backup data is written to the hard disk drive from the iBeam unit.
• After writing the backup data, the exposure engine will be controlled.
11. Checks the communication status between the software and colorimeter.
Description
If there was a communication error between the ATX motherboard and colorimeter.
1. Displays Initializing colorimeter unit.*1
2. Initializing colorimeter unit ends, and ☞ No. 6903 Serial communication error. will appear.*1
*1. This screen may not be displayed at normal operation.
12. Checks the communication status from the PC interface PCB to the laser control or iBeam control PCB via
LVPECL.
If there was a communication error between the PC interface PCB and laser control PCB. (for 35)
• ☞ No. 6087 Laser Control PCB system error.
• ☞ No. 6194 Laser Control PCB control error.
If there was a communication error between the PC interface PCB and iBeam control PCB. (for 35i)
• ☞ No. 6183 iBeam Control PCB control error.
• ☞ No. 6184 iBeam Control PCB system error.
13. The laser control PCB checks the conditions of the B/G laser drivers and laser unit. (for 35)
If the conditions of the B/G laser driver was abnormal.
• ☞ No. 6074 B Laser control error.
• ☞ No. 6075 G Laser control error.
If the condition of the laser unit was abnormal.
• ☞ No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error.
• ☞ No. 6076 Polygon Mirror control error.
14. Checks the communication from the iBeam control PCB to the iBeam unit. (for 35i)
If there was a communication error between the iBeam control PCB and the iBeam unit.
• ☞ No. 6182 iBeam Unit control error.
15. The system starts adjusting the LED light source temperature.
50500 2/4
50500
16. Controls the exposure engine.
Model Description
35 The system starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.
1. Displays Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U).
2. Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U) ends, and Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) will be
displayed.*1
3. Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) ends, and Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx. ##sec
will be displayed.
35i The system waits for that the iBeam unit becomes stable.
NOTE
• Displays iBeam temperatures are being adjusted. .
*1. This screen may not be displayed at normal operation.
17. Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx. ##sec ends, and the laser control PCB checks the
light source state of the laser unit. (for 35)
If the light source state of the laser unit was abnormal.

• ☞ No. 6105 B Laser light source status error.
• ☞ No. 6106 G Laser light source status error.
18. The process for starting the QSS software completes.
NOTE
• After the QSS software starts up, the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode? appears if any key is
pressed.
• The system shows the order display when the YES key is pressed.
• The system shows the display of the temperature adjustment when the NO key is pressed.
19. It displays the message The processing solution temperatures are being adjusted.
20. The temperature adjustment of the processing solutions is completed.
21. Arrangement of the exposure engine is completed.
Model Description
35 Temperature adjustment of the laser unit is completed.
35i Stabilization of the iBeam unit has finished.
22. Displays LED Light Source Standby and Scanner temperature is being adjusted..
• The scanner temperature adjustment ends, and the light source update will be performed.
23. The system performs the light source update.

NOTE
• When starting up in the program timer, the light source update is carried out for the mounted film carrier automatically.
If pressing the manual sorter switch or turning on the breaker to start up, No. 1306: Update the light source. If film
remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. will be displayed after the Start-up checks is completed if it is necessary.
50500 3/4
50500
24. After all temperature adjustments are completed, the message Would you like to proceed to the
operation mode? appears.
25. The YES key is pressed.
26. It displays Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality.
27. The system displays an attention/error message if any.
28. The system displays Start Up Checks mode.
50500 4/4
50520
ARCNET communication
ARCNET communication
ARCNET communication flow [35, 35i]
Order of the ARCNET communication (with option)

3 PU control PCB
5 Laser (iBeam) Control PCB
ARCNET (Connector emission side)
ARCNET (Connector detection side)
35 Series:
Laser control PCB
Printer control PCB 35i Series: Processor control PCB
iBeam Control PCB
J/P1528
J/P1527
J/P1548 J/P1517
J/P1524 J/P1516
J/P1547 J/P1545
J/P1523 J/P1546 J/P674 J/P675
J/P232 J/P233
ARCNET ARCNET
ATX MOTHER
BORD
J/P73
J/P288 J/P300
J/P74
PU control PCB (option)
PC interface PCB
J/P20 J/P21
AFC/scanner control PCB
G083162
IMPORTANT
• ARCNET communication figure appears above. You can connect the ARCNET cable to any port if IN/OUT is correct.
The actual connecting position of the ARCNET cable may be different from the above ARCNET communication figure.
! Order of the ARCNET communication

35, 35i
No. Order of the ARCNET communication No. Order of the ARCNET communication
1 Processor control PCB 4 Printer control PCB
2 AFC/scanner control PCB 5 Laser control PCB (35)
3 PU control PCB
For ARCNET communication error diagnosis, refer to ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
50520 1/1
50700
Data flow chart
Data flow chart
Data flow in printing [35, 35i]
Print data
Actual scanning data
Prescanning data
Data coming from the media drive

Media drive
35 Laser unit
ATX MOTHER
BORD VIDEO
R laser R-AOM BOARD
driver
HDD
Bl
ase G-AOM
r
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
PC interface PCB
Laser control PCB
LVDS
35i
LVPECL
iBeam Control PCB
iBeam unit
G084483
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is printing
operation.
1. When input is film, scan the film in the scanner unit.

NOTE
• Pre-scanning data is used for index print.
2. Process data by the PC interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC interface PCB rectifies the gap in the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap in RGB due to CCD).
3. Processing the image with PC.
IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.
NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
PC.
50700 1/2
50700
Data flow chart
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.
• Prescanning data goes through the PC interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to be
displayed on the monitor.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is printed via the HDD.
4. The image data goes through the laser (iBeam) control PCB and is output to the exposure engine.
Model Exposure engine

35 Laser unit
35i iBeam unit
5. The exposure engine exposes the paper.
50700 2/2
50710
Data flow chart
Data flow in data saving [35, 35i]
Actual scanning data
Prescanning data
Saving Data
Media drive
35 Laser unit
ATX MOTHER
BORD VIDEO
R laser R-AOM BOARD
driver
HDD
Bl
ase G-AOM
r
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
PC interface PCB
Laser control PCB
LVDS
35i iBeam Control PCB LVPECL
iBeam unit

G084484
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is media writing
operation (including the Bravo).
1. The scanner unit scans a film.

NOTE
NOTE

IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed on DIGITAL ICE Technology CorrectionPC.
NOTE
PC.
50710 1/2
50710
Data flow chart
4. On the PC, the color and density correction of scanning data is preformed and the image data is
written to each media.
50710 2/2
50730
Data flow chart
Data flow to the CAU [35, 35i]
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE1, 2)

Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2)
Prescanning data
CAU HDD
35 Laser unit
ATX MOTHER
HDD BORD VIDEO
R laser R-AOM BOARD
driver
Bl
ase G-AOM
r
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
PC interface PCB
Laser control PCB
LVDS
35i iBeam Control PCB LVPECL
iBeam unit
G084485
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is the CAU.
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE1, 2)
NOTE
• The operations of data writing to the CAUs (TYPE1: 12 bit, TYPE2: 8 bit) are the same.
1. The scanner unit scans a film.

NOTE
NOTE
IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.
50730 1/2
50730
Data flow chart
NOTE
PC.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is saved to the CAU via
the HDD.
4. On the PC, the color and density correction of scanning data is preformed and the image data is saved
to the HDD of CAU.
IMPORTANT
• In case of the CAU (TYPE1), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data and the image data are saved in the HDD of the CAU. In case of
reading from the CAU, the Correction value shows the value corrected.
• The image data saved in the CAU (TYPE1) is raw data for the scanner. It is not general data. It cannot be
used unless the QSS processes the data.
• In case of the CAU (TYPE2), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data is not saved to the HDD of the CAU. In case of reading from the
CAU, all Correction value is N.
• Save the image data saved to the CAU (TYPE2) as JPEG data.
NOTE
• In case of CAU (TYPE2), you can save the composite image made using in the Edit mode, to the CAU.
• For the details about the difference between the CAU (TYPE1) and the CAU (TYPE2), refer to Compact Archive Unit
Operator's Manual, Difference between TYPE1 and TYPE2.
Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2)
1. The image data is output to the laser (iBeam) control PCB via the HDD of the CAU → standard HDD
→ PC laser interface PCB. Image data is outputted to the laser control PCB via HDD of CAU, standard
HDD, and the PC-laser interface PCB.
2. Outputs the image data to the exposure engine.
Model Exposure engine

35 Laser unit
35i iBeam unit
3. The exposure engine exposes the paper.
50730 2/2
55000
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram [35, 35i]
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the printer by dotted lines.
35, 35i
Paper cutter unit
Paper advance unit

Paper supply unit A Arm unit 1
Viewed from the arrow
Arm unit 2
Correction value printing
unit
Turn unit
Paper magazine B Paper magazine A

Paper supply unit B
G083196
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the processor.
35, 35i
Print conveyor unit Dryer rack
No. 1 upper guide
Normal print
Processing tanks and processing racks
Automatic colorimetry of setup print
G083167
55000 1/1
55100
Printer paper advance operation
Paper loading operation [35, 35i]
This section explains the paper loading operation of paper magazine A or B on the dual paper magazine machine.
The single paper magazine machine uses only paper magazine A.
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper cutter
Paper magazine B
Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)
Paper magazine A
Paper supply motor A (PM42)
Paper end sensor A (SE13)
G074569
Paper loading starts.
Paper supply motor A or B: ON (forward)

Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)
Did paper end sensor A or B detect the paper leading end? NO Error ☞ No. 6012-01
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
Error ☞ No. 6013-01
YES Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
Paper supply motor A or B: OFF

Paper advance motor 1: OFF
Did the paper loading sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6012-02
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
Error ☞ No. 6013-02
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
YES

The paper leading end is advanced to just before the cut

position.
After the paper loading sensor detects the paper and then a certain time passes, paper supply motor A or B turns OFF.
The loading is completed.
55100 1/1
55200
Paper supply operation (advance length of 383.9 mm or less) [35, 35i]
The paper supply operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is 384.0 mm or more, refer to ☞ Paper supply operation (advance length of 384.0 mm or more) [35, 35i].
This section explains the operations of paper advance, cut and transfer to the exposure advance unit for the advance length of 383.9 mm or
less.

Paper cutter
Paper hold position
Papers

Arm unit 1
Paper supply motor A (PM42) Paper advance motor 2 (PM21)
Paper supply motor B (PM43)
G085791
Paper advance is started with it is loaded (the paper leading end is before the cut position).

A specified length of the paper is advanced and stopped where the paper end comes to the hold
position.

The paper is held with arm unit 1.
Paper hold motor: ON/OFF
Does the paper hold sensor turn DARK? NO Error ☞ No. 6101-0001
YES
55200 1/5
55200
Paper hold position

Papers Paper cutter
Cut position
Arm unit 1
Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Paper supply arm motor (left or right)
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Cut motor (M5)
G085792
According to the paper advance length, the paper is advanced
to the paper cut position.
Paper supply motor A or B: ON (forward) /OFF

Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)/OFF
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (forward)/OFF
NOTE
• Arm unit 1, paper advance motors 1 and 2, and paper supply motor A or B operate
simultaneously.
The paper is cut.
Cut motor: ON/OFF
Rewind a specified length of paper in the magazine so that

the paper leading end is before the cut position.
Paper supply motor A or B: ON (reverse)/OFF

Paper advance motor 1: ON (reverse)/OFF
55200 2/5
55200
Cut position
Paper transfer position

Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right) (SE19

CVP unit
and 20)
Arm unit 1
Paper supply arm motor (left or right)
G085789
Is the paper advance length not more than 357.0 mm? NO The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the exposure
advance unit.
At the same time, paper advance motor 2 starts to turn.
YES Paper advance motor 2: ON (forward)/OFF
The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the exposure
advance unit.
This immediately turns Paper Advance Motor 2 until the paper rear
edge comes to the CVP printing position.

Did the zigzag correction sensors (right and left) detect arm NO Error ☞ No. 6135-0001
unit 1? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Further move the arm unit 1 by the correction value entered in the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction of the Printer Mechanical Adjustment from the paper transfer position.
55200 3/5
55200
Paper hold position

Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position
Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Zigzag correction sensors (left and
right) (SE19 and 20)
CVP unit Exposure advance roller 1

Arm unit 1
Paper supply arm motor (left or Exposure advance pressure change

right) motor 1 (PM25)
G085790
With pressuring exposure advance roller 1 of the exposure

advance unit, the hold of the arm unit 1 is released.
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON/OFF
Reposition the arm unit 1 from Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position to Paper Transfer Position.
Paper supply arm motors (left or right): ON (reverse)/OFF

NOTE
• The initial operation does not include this operation.
Exposure advance operation starts.

☞ 55300
NO Turns Paper Advance Motor 2 until the paper rear edge comes to
Is the paper advance length 357.0 mm or less?
the CVP printing position.
YES
NO Arm unit 1 stands by at the transfer position until the rear end of
Is the paper advance length 320.0 mm or less?
paper enters to the exposure advance unit.
YES
Arm unit 1 is moved to the paper hold position.
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (reverse)
55200 4/5
55200
Paper hold position

CVP unit
Arm unit 1
G085793
Did the zigzag correction sensors (left and right) turn NO Error ☞ No. 6135-0002
LIGHT? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): OFF
After the zigzag correction sensor (left or right) turn LIGHT,
a specified amount of the arm unit is advanced and it stops at
the paper hold position.
End
55200 5/5
55210
Paper supply operation (advance length of 384.0 mm or more) [35, 35i]
The paper supply operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is 383.9 mm or less, refer to ☞ Paper supply operation (advance length of 383.9 mm or less) [35, 35i].
This section explains the operations of paper advance, cut and transfer to the exposure advance unit for the paper advance length of
384.0mm or more.

Paper cutter
Paper hold position
Papers

Arm unit 1
G085791
Paper advance is started with it is loaded (the paper leading end is before the cut position).

A specified length of the paper is advanced and stopped where the paper end comes to the hold
position.

Does the paper hold sensor turn DARK? NO Error ☞ No. 6101-0001
YES
55210 1/5
55210
Paper hold position

Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right) (SE19

and 20)
Paper advance motor 1 (PM20) Arm unit 1
G085789
The paper is advanced from the paper hold position to the paper transfer position.
NOTE
• Arm unit 1, paper advance motors 1 and 2, and paper supply motor A or B operate simultaneously.
Arm unit 1 stops at the paper transfer position while the paper is being held by arm unit
1 (paper advance is continued to make a loop)
NOTE
• The advance for the loop varies depending on the paper advance length.
If the paper advance length is between 384.0 mm and 420.0 mm, the necessary advance for a loop is a few millimeters (the loop
necessary is as much amount of paper as arm unit 1 advances for adjustment.)
If the paper advance length is 420.1 mm or more, the necessary advance for a loop is approximately 30 mm (the loop is necessary in
order to keep the paper from being advanced until it is cut).
Did the zigzag correction sensors (right and left) detect arm NO Error ☞ No. 6135-0001
unit 1? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Further move the arm unit 1 by the correction value entered in the Arm Unit 1
Zigzagging Correction of the Printer Mechanical Adjustment from the paper transfer
position.
55210 2/5
55210

Paper supply motor B (PM43) Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position

Exposure advance
unit
CVP unit Exposure advance roller 1

Arm unit 1
Paper supply arm motor (left or Exposure advance pressure change

Paper supply motor A (PM42) right) motor 1 (PM25)
G085794
With pressuring exposure advance roller 1 of the exposure

advance unit, the hold of the arm unit 1 is released.
Reposition the arm unit 1 from Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position to Paper Transfer Position.
Paper supply arm motors (left or right): ON (reverse)/OFF

NOTE
• The initial operation does not include this operation.
Exposure advance operation starts.

☞ 55300
According to the paper advance length, the paper is advanced

to the paper cut position.

55210 3/5
55210

Paper cutter
Exposure advance
unit
CVP unit Arm unit 1
Cut motor (M5)

Paper supply arm motor (left or
Paper supply motor A (PM42) right)
G085795
The paper is cut.
Cut motor: ON/OFF



Turns Paper Advance Motor 2 until the paper rear edge comes to
the CVP printing position.

Arm unit 1 stands by at the transfer position until the rear end of
paper enters to the exposure advance unit.
55210 4/5
55210
Paper hold position

Zigzag correction sensors (left and
Exposure advance
unit
Arm unit 1
G085796
Arm unit 1 is moved to the paper hold position.
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (reverse)
Did the zigzag correction sensors (left and right) turn NO Error ☞ No. 6135-0002
LIGHT? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
After the zigzag correction sensor (left or right) turn LIGHT,

a specified amount of the arm unit is advanced and it stops at
the paper hold position.
End
55210 5/5
55300
Exposure advance operation (paper advance length of 383.9 mm or

less/470.0 mm or more) [35, 35i]
Exposure advance operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is between 384.0 mm and 469.9 mm, refer to ☞ Exposure advance operation (advance length of 384.0 mm
to 469.9 mm) [35, 35i].
This section explains exposure advance operation for printing with the paper advance length of 383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more.
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25)
Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)

Roller 2
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
Paper
Arm unit 1
Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure change motor 2
(PM27)
G074571
55300 1/5
55300
When the paper leading end is loaded in front of the paper cutter blade, the roller 2 and 3 of the
exposure advance unit starts driving.
Exposure advance motor 2: ON
At the position the arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is moved to arm unit 1 zigzag correction
position, exposure advance starts.
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from the roller 1, crimp the roller 1.

Roller 1: Released pressure→Pressured
Roller 2: Released pressure
If the exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not change from LIGHT to DARK
Error ☞ No. 6136-0001:Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error.
The pressure of arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is released.
NOTE
• If the paper advance length is 357.1 to 383.9 mm/470.0 mm or more, the motor stops until the laser unit
or the iBeam unit completes exposure arrangement.

Roller 2 Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
Exposure advance pressure change motor 2

(PM27)
G074571
55300 2/5
55300
The paper is advanced by driving roller 1.
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6208-0001
Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit.
Exposure advance motor 1: OFF

YES Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
NOTE
• If the paper advance length is less than 357.0 mm, stop the driving of roller 1 until the laser unit or the iBeam unit completes
exposure arrangement.
Exposure advance motor 1: OFF/ON
Paper leading end position: The position a few millimeter short of roller 2
Roller 1: Pressured

Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position

(PM27)
G074571
55300 3/5
55300
The pressure of roller 1 is released at the position of the paper in front of the exposure
position.

Roller 1: Pressured→Pressure released
Roller 2: Pressured
The drive of roller is stopped.
Exposure starts.

Roller 2: Pressured
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0002
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
YES

Roller 3
Exposure position Rollers of the turn unit

G074571
55300 4/5
55300
The pressure at roller 2 is released when the paper rear end comes around the position before the exposure
start sensor.

Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0001
YES
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by
several millimeters, the exposure completes.
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by several millimeters, the
pressure of roller 3 is released.

Start advancing the paper.

☞ 55400
Process of the next paper
Is there a paper to be exposed next?
1
Process of the current paper
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0003
YES
After the paper is rewound, rollers 2, 3 stops their driving.
End
55300 5/5
55310
Exposure advance operation (advance length of 384.0 mm to 469.9 mm)

[35, 35i]
Exposure advance operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is 383.9 mm or less, or 470.0 mm or more, refer to ☞ Exposure advance operation (paper advance length of
383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more) [35, 35i].
This section explains exposure advance operation for printing with the paper advance length of 384.0 mm to 469.9 mm.

Roller 2
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
Paper
Arm unit 1
Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure change motor 2
(PM27)
G074571
55310 1/5
55310
When the paper leading end is loaded in front of the paper cutter blade, the roller 2 and 3 of the
exposure advance unit starts driving.
At the position the arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is moved to arm unit 1 zigzag correction
position, exposure advance starts.

The pressure of arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is released.
NOTE
• Stands by until the exposure arrangement of the laser unit or the iBeam unit completes.

Roller 1
Exposure position
G074571
55310 2/5
55310
The paper is advanced by driving roller 1.
Is the paper advance length 420.0 mm or less? NO
YES
The driving of roller 1 is stopped during the paper cutting in front of the exposure start
sensor.
The drive of roller 1 is restarted.
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6208-0001
Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit.
YES

Roller 2
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position

(PM27)
G074571
55310 3/5
55310
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from the roller 2, crimp the roller
2.
Roller 1: Pressured
Exposure starts.
Then, the pressure of pressure roller 1 is released.

Roller 2: Pressured
The driving of roller 1 is stopped in front of the roller 1.
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0002
YES
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25) Roller 2 Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)
Roller 3
Exposure position Rollers of the turn unit

G074571
55310 4/5
55310
The pressure at roller 2 is released when the paper rear end comes around the position before the exposure
start sensor.

Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0001
YES
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position
by several millimeters, the exposure completes.
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by several millimeters, the
pressure of roller 3 is released.

Start advancing the paper.

☞ 55400
Process of the next paper
Is there a paper to be exposed next?
1
Process of the current paper
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0003
YES
After the paper is rewound, rollers 2, 3 stops their driving.
End
55310 5/5
55400
Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [35, 35i]
Paper advance unit operation explains the operation of the turn unit and arm unit 2 in the paper advance unit.
When performing the lane selection and not performing it, the paper advance operation is different.
If the lane is selected, refer to ☞ Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [3502].
Conditions of the lane is not selected (for 3502)
Condition
The paper width is 102.1 mm or more. When the paper advance length is 420.1 mm or more
First print in an order Cleaning print (one sheet out of 50 sheets or 82 sheets depending on
the type)
First print after the sorter operates. Unexposed paper (leading edge processing paper, fogged paper,
splicing paper)
Test print for system adjustment Setup print (only when measuring color with the colorimeter)
Inserting position
Arm
Arm unit 2 Arm

Standby position
Receiving
position
Paper
Turn unit
Exposure Advance Section
G074572
55400 1/4
55400
Turn unit
Exposure position
Advance roller
Roller 3
Exposure end sensor
Paper advance pressure change

motor (PM29) Paper advance unit
G085797
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by several
millimeters, crimp the advance roller and start driving it.
Paper advance pressure change motor: ON/OFF

Advance rollers: pressure release → pressure
Paper advance motor 3: ON
If the paper advance pressure change sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK, ☞ No. 6144-0003:Paper Advance Pressure Change
Motor operation error. appears.
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0003

Advance a specified length of paper, and stop the rear end of the paper near
the inlet of the turn unit.

NOTE
• The stop position of the rear end of the paper is where the length from the front edge of the turn unit guide (lower) to the rear end
of the paper is − 1 to 0 mm.
For details, refer to Paper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
55400 2/4
55400
Inserting position
Arm
Arm unit 2
Arm
Standby
position
Receiving
position Exposure position Advance roller
Paper
Turn unit
Exposure Advance Section Turn sensor
Turn motor (PM32) Paper advance pressure change
motor (PM29)
G078385
The turn unit turns 90 degrees, and arm unit 2 moves to the receiving position from the standby position.
Turn motor: ON/OFF

If the turn sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT, ☞ No. 6147-0003:Turn Motor operation error. appears.
Paper advance arm motor: ON/OFF
If the arm sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK, ☞ No. 6146-0003:Turn Motor operation error. appears.
NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
The advance roller starts driving.
A specified length of paper is advanced, the advance roller stops driving and the pressure of advance roller
is released.

Advance rollers: pressure → pressure release
Paper leading end: Position where a specified length of paper is advanced from the roller of the arm
If the paper advance pressure change sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT, ☞ No. 6144-0002:Paper Advance Pressure Change
Arm unit 2 starts going up.
Paper advance arm motor: ON

If the arm sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT even though the arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length, ☞ No. 6146-0002:Paper
Advance Arm Motor operation error. appears.
55400 3/4
55400
Arm
Arm
Inserting
position
Arm unit 2
Paper

Standby Arm sensor
position
Exposure position
Receiving
position
Turn unit
Exposure Advance
Section Turn sensor
Paper advance arm motor (PM31)
Turn motor (PM32)
G074572
After the paper rear end is fed out of the turn unit, the turn unit turns 90 degrees.
Turn motor: ON/OFF

Arm unit 2 stops going up at the inserting position.
Paper advance arm motor: OFF

NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
Arm unit 2 starts going down.
Arm unit 2 stops going down at the standby position.
End
55400 4/4
55420
Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [3502]
Paper advance unit operation explains the operation of the turn unit and arm unit 2 in the paper advance unit.
When performing the lane selection and not performing it, the paper advance operation is different.
If the lane is not selected, refer to ☞ Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [35, 35i].
Conditions of the lane is selected
• If the paper width is 102 mm or less
Inserting
position
Arm
Arm unit 2 Arm
Standby Paper Advance Section

position
Receiving
position
Turn unit
G074572
55420 1/6
55420
Turn unit
Exposure position
Advance roller
Roller 3
Exposure end sensor
Paper advance pressure change

motor (PM29) Paper advance unit
G085797
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by several
millimeters, crimp the advance roller and start driving it.
Paper advance pressure change motor: ON/OFF

Advance rollers: pressure release → pressure
If the paper advance pressure change sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK, ☞ No. 6144-0003:Paper Advance Pressure Change
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0003

Advance a specified length of paper, and stop the rear end of the paper near
the inlet of the turn unit.

NOTE
• The stop position of the rear end of the paper is where the length from the front edge of the turn unit guide (lower) to the rear end
of the paper is − 1 to 0 mm.
For details, refer to Paper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
55420 2/6
55420
Inserting
position
Arm
Arm
Arm unit 2

Standby
position
Exposure position
Advance roller
Receiving
position
Paper
Turn unit
Exposure Advance Section Turn sensor
Turn motor (PM32) Paper advance pressure change
motor (PM29)
G074572
The turn unit turns 90 degrees, and arm unit 2 moves to the receiving position from the standby position.
Turn motor: ON/OFF

Paper advance arm motor: ON/OFF
If the arm sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK, ☞ No. 6146-0003:Turn Motor operation error. appears.
NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
The advance roller starts driving.
A specified length of paper is advanced, the advance roller stops driving and the pressure of advance roller
is released.

Advance rollers: pressure → pressure release
Paper leading end: Position where a specified length of paper is advanced from the roller of the arm
If the paper advance pressure change sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT, ☞ No. 6144-0002:Paper Advance Pressure Change
Arm unit 2 starts going up.

If the arm sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT even though the arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length, ☞ No. 6146-0002:Paper
Advance Arm Motor operation error. appears.
55420 3/6
55420
Arm
Inserting Arm
position Lane select motor
Arm unit 2 (PM30)
Lane select
Paper
sensor (SE26)

Standby Arm sensor
position
Exposure position
Receiving
position
Turn unit
Exposure Advance
Section Turn sensor
Paper advance arm motor (PM31) Turn motor (PM32)
G074572
After arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length, while continuing going up the arm selection operation
starts.
Lane select motor: ON

Even though arm unit is moved from the center lane to the far side lane, the lane select sensor does not change from LIGHT to DARK,
☞ No. 6145-0003:Lane Select Motor operation error. appears.
NOTE
• The stop position of lane select operation is supervised only on far side lane, but the stop position of near side lane and center lane
is not supervised.
After the paper moves to the selection position, the arm selection operation stops.
Lane select motor: OFF
After the paper rear end is fed out of the turn unit, the turn unit turns 90 degrees.
Turn motor: ON/OFF

Arm unit 2 stops going up at the inserting position.

NOTE
• For details about the arm unit 2 stop position, refer to the Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction.
☞ 36010
Arm unit 2 starts going down at the inserting position.
55420 4/6
55420
If the paper advance length is 183 mm or less
Inserting
position
Lane select Paper

sensor (SE26) Arm
Arm
Arm unit 2
Lane select motor
Paper Advance Section (PM30)
Standby Arm sensor
position
Receiving
position

(PM31)
G074572
After arm unit 2 goes down in a specified length, while continuing going down the arm selection operation starts.

Even though arm unit is moved from the far side lane to the center lane, the lane select sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT,
NOTE
• The stop position of lane select operation is supervised only on far side lane, but the stop position of near side lane and center lane is
not supervised.
After the paper moves to the center, the arm selection

operation stops.
Lane select motor: OFF
End
55420 5/6
55420
If the paper advance length is 183.1 mm or more
Inserting
position
Lane select Paper

sensor (SE26) Arm
Arm
Arm unit 2
Lane select motor
(PM30)
Standby Exposure Advance Arm sensor
position
Receiving
position

(PM31)
G074572
After the paper rear end is fed out from arm unit 2, the arm
selection operation starts.

Even though arm unit is moved from the far side lane to the center lane, the lane select sensor does not change from DARK to LIGHT,
NOTE
• The stop position of lane select operation is supervised only on far side lane, but the stop position of near side lane and center lane
is not supervised.
After the paper moves to the center, the arm selection

operation stops.
End
55420 6/6
55500
Paper rewind operation [35, 35i]
This section explains the paper rewinding operation of paper magazine A or B on the dual paper magazine system.
The single paper magazine system is only operation of paper A.
Paper rewind conditions
• →Paper was rewound.
• After paper cutting was finished and then 30 seconds passed, the paper was automatically rewound.
• The paper end sensor is DARK when turning on the power supply.
• The error of paper jam occurred on the printer and processor.
• The magazine to be used is changed when the paper is being loaded from the magazine.
• When the paper is end
• ☞ 55700
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper cutter
Paper magazine B Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)
Paper magazine A
Paper supply motor A (PM42) Paper end sensor A (SE13)

G074569
Paper rewinding is started.
Paper advance motor 1: ON (reverse)

Paper supply motor A or B: ON (reverse)
Did the paper loading sensor turn LIGHT? NO Error ☞ No. 6014-01
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
Error ☞ No. 6015-01
YES Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B

Did paper end sensor A or B turn LIGHT?

NO Error ☞ No. 6014-02
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
Error ☞ No. 6015-02
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B
YES
The paper is rewound into the magazine. Paper advance motor 1: OFF
After paper end sensor A or B turns LIGHT, a specified time has passed:
Rewinding is completed.
55500 1/1
55600
Paper splicing processing operation [35, 35i]
This section explains the splicing detection with the loading sensor while printing.
Splice section (hole) detecting condition
Splice hole
Splice section
Paper cutters
Paper
advance
direction
Y X
Cut prohibitive area (253.1 mm) Exposure possible area
G074573
• X = Paper length come out the paper cutter
• Y = Paper length between the leading end of the cut-forbidden area and the cutter
! Operation outline:
! Condition 1: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is the print advance length or more (X + Y ≥ Print advance length)
1. Load the paper so that X is same as the print advance length and cut it, and then carry out the printing
normally.
2. Then load the splice section and cut it, and then feed out the splice section.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + Y mm)
! Condition 2: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is less than the print advance length (X + Y < Print advance length)
X + Y < 82.5 mm
1. Load the splice section and cut it, and then feed it to the processor.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + X + Y mm)
X+Y ≥ 82.5 mm, and the print advance length is 82.5 to 420.0 mm.
1. Cut the rear end of the exposure capable area and feed out the unexposed paper to the processor.
2. Cut the rear end of the cut-forbidden area and feed it to the processor.
X+Y ≥ 82.5 mm, and the print advance length is over 420.1 mm.
1. Cut the rear end of the exposure capable area and feed out to the processor after exposure.
55600 1/2
55600
2. Cut the rear end of the cut-forbidden area and feed it to the processor.
NOTE
• It is necessary to reprint since the print is not the specified advance length.
55600 2/2
55700
Paper end processing operation [35, 35i]
This section explains the paper end processing operation in printing.

• The paper is rewound into the magazine in paper end.
• Remove the rewound paper when replacing with the new one.
• Except in printing, the paper end processing is also carried out in the following timing.
• Printing was started, and the paper end was detected when the paper leading end was advanced.
• The paper end was detected in processing of the fogged paper.
• When the loading operation was carried out on the Various Adjustment mode (Focus Adjustment, Printer Mechanical
Adjustment, etc.), the paper end was detected.
Paper length that rewound into the magazine with the paper end processing
• For paper magazine A of the single or dual paper magazine system, the paper end length is about min. 184 mm to max. 794 mm.
(184 + Paper advance length → maximum of 184 + 610 = 794 mm )
Advance length of paper leading end
Approx. 184 mm
Paper cutter Exposure advance unit
Paper magazine A Paper end sensor A (SE13)
G074575
• For paper magazine B of the dual paper magazine system, the paper end length is about min. 292 mm to max. 648 mm.
(292 + Paper advance length → maximum of 292 + 610 = 902 mm )
Paper end sensor B (SE41) Paper cutter
Approx. 292 mm
Advance length of paper leading

end
Paper magazine B
G074576
55700 1/3
55700
Did paper end sensor A (or B) turn LIGHT? NO The paper processing is continued.
YES
The CVP printing and paper advancing are stopped.
Is the paper leading end held by arm unit 1? NOTE

(= Is the paper front end advance length 82.5 mm or more?)
• If the advance length of paper leading end from a paper cutter is
82.5 mm or more, the paper is held with Arm unit 1.
NO YES
Cut the paper, and advance the front end to the exposure advance
unit.
NO
Is the paper advance length 384.0 mm or more? Advance to the processor as unexposed.
UNEXPOSED is printing on the paper base.
YES
Advance to the processor after exposed.

UNEXPOSED is printing on the paper base.
NOTE
• It is necessary to reprint since the print is not the specified
advance length.
The paper is rewound into the magazine.
Attention message ☞ No. 1000

The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
55700 2/3
55700
Do you continue the printing operation? NO Click NO.
YES
The film is ejected from the film carrier and the processing is
completed.
Did you replace the paper magazine with a new one?
NO
YES
Click YES.

Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B
NO
Do you feed out the first piece of paper without exposing?
Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.
YES
Select YES to eject the first piece of paper without exposing.
The paper processing is continued.
55700 3/3
55800
Fogged paper processing operation [35, 35i]
This section explains the fogged paper operation when the paper is loading (print standby) with the printer door opened.
Timing when the fogged paper is processed
• When the first print is made after the fogged paper was made
When the fogged paper is made
Paper supply section A
Y = approx. 210 mm X
Paper cutter

Paper magazine A
Rewinding position
G074577
Paper supply section B
Paper cutter
Rewinding position
X
Y = approx. 318 mm
Paper magazine B
G074578
! Operation outline
Condition 1: Paper leading end is at the rewinding position.
Model Operation specification
35, 35i 1. When the paper size of the magazine which is in use changes from narrow to wide: One piece of
paper is advanced by 200 mm advance.
NOTE
• For cleaning of the processing rack, carry out the work above.
2. For 35i, the two paper is advanced by 200 mm before printing the test print of iBeam Tuning.
NOTE
• If printing the test print of iBeam Tuning, the paper is advanced for the same purpose of when
the paper size changes from narrow to wide, because the test prints are printed over the
maximum paper width of normal print.
Two pieces of paper are advanced because the system advances paper in both left and right
directions against the advancing direction.
3. Other than No.1 of Condition 1: A paper is advanced by 82.5 mm advance.
55800 1/2
55800
Condition 2: Paper leading end is before the paper cutter or at the position less than 2.07 in away from the
paper cutter.
35, 35i 1. Cut the paper from the paper leading end by 117 mm and feed it out. Feed out the paper of the length
of Y which is shown in the above.
NOTE
• When the paper leading end is at the position 200 mm away from the rewinding position, 234
mm (117 mm x 2) is to be advanced.
Condition 3: Paper leading end is at the position 52.5 mm away from the paper cutter.
35, 35i 1. The paper after the paper cutter is to be cut in the initial operation after the printer doors are closed.
Take the cut paper out of the printer.
Cut the paper left to be cut by 117 mm and the cut papers are fed out including the rewinding
position.
55800 2/2
55900
iBeam Tuning operation
iBeam Tuning test print operation [35i]
This section describes the test print operation at iBeam Tuning.

NOTE
• If performing iBeam Tuning, the two unexposed prints (advance length: 200 mm) and the two test prints (advance length: 89 mm) are
printed.
To confirm the exposure condition of which paper width is less than ±3.5 mm, move the paper advance roller 2 to the paper width
direction and select the lane.
This selecting operation is not performed for normal print operation and hold the paper advance roller 2 at home position (rear).
• The two unexposed prints (advance length: 200 mm) are printed to remove the dirt of the processing racks.
The advance position of test print has not been used for normal print. So the unexposed prints are printed without the confirmation
message.
Unexposed prints are output when performing iBeam Tuning for the first time or changing the paper size from narrow to wide.
Paper cutter Roller position sensor

Roller move motor (PM33)
Paper
Arm unit 1
Test Print
(89 mm)
Unexposed print
(200 mm)
Paper advance roller 1 Paper advance roller 2

Rear: Home position
Front: Information of paper lane
G082074
55900 1/6
55900
Paper hold position

Paper cutter
Papers

Arm unit 1
Paper supply motor A (PM42) Paper advance motor 2 (PM21)
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Cut motor (M5)

G074570
Paper advance is started with it is loaded (the paper leading

end is before the cut position).
A specified length of the paper is advanced and stopped

where the paper end comes to the hold position.

The paper is advanced to the cut position.

Unexposed print: paper advance length 200 mm
Test print: paper advance length 89 mm

NOTE
• Arm unit 1, paper advance motors 1 and 2, and paper supply
motor A or B operate simultaneously.
55900 2/6
55900
Paper hold position

Paper feed position
Paper cutter Refuge position in sliding the paper
advance roller 2
Paper Paper
Arm unit 1
G082077
Arm unit 1 releases pressure.
Moves the arm unit 1 to the direction of the exposure
advance section.
NOTE
• When sliding the paper advance roller 2, moves the arm
unit 1 to the position that the front ends of guide is not
to contact the paper with holding the paper edge.
The paper is cut.
Cut motor: ON/OFF
Arm unit 1 releases pressure.
55900 3/6
55900

Arm unit 1
Paper advance roller 1
G082074


Paper advance roller 2 moves to the front.
Roller move motor: ON/OFF

Roller position sensor: DARK → LIGHT
Did the roller position sensor turn LIGHT? NO Error ☞ No. 6185-02
YES
Roller move motor: OFF
Moves the arm unit 1 to the direction of the paper advance

roller 2.
NOTE
• The unit returns from the refuge position to the paper
holding position.
55900 4/6
55900

Arm unit 1
G082074
The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the

exposure advance section, and feed the first print.
NOTE
• The following operations are same as normal print
operation.

Paper advance motor 2: ON/OFF
Perform the operation before the paper advance unit 2 slides

against the second test print.
NOTE
• Be sure to stay the paper advance roller 2 in the position
after processing the first test print (front).
55900 5/6
55900

Arm unit 1
G082074
Paper advance roller 2 moves to the rear.
Roller move motor: ON/OFF

Roller position sensor: LIGHT → DARK
Did the roller position sensor turn DARK? NO Error ☞ No. 6185-01
YES
Roller move motor: OFF
Following operations are same as the first test print

operation. The second test print is advanced to the exposure
advance section.
End
For the unexposed print, process the next test print in same
way.
NOTE
• Operation for the unexposed prints and the test prints
are same. Only the advance length differ.
55900 6/6
55910
iBeam Tuning Operation [35i]
This section describes about test prints and the flatbed scanner operation for iBeam Tuning Operation.
1. Output the test print of iBeam Tuning.

• The two test prints are printed moving each 3.5 mm to front side and rear side from the Exposure Center.
Exposure Center
Paper advance
direction
Test print 2
(Rear)
Test print 1
(Front)
Paper width direction

G082776
2. Confirm the flatbed scanner connection.

• Confirm the flatbed scanner connection after outputting test prints and before scanning.
• Even if the flatbed scanner lamp is turned OFF, the lamp turns on when operating iBeam Tuning.
IMPORTANT
• The lamp turns off automatically if the flatbed scanner does not operate for 15 minutes.
• It takes about 4 minutes to stabilize the lamp of flatbed scanner since the lamp turns ON.
If the flatbed scanner cannot be recognized
• No. 1930
Turn ON the Flatbed Scanner.
3. Place the test print ejected from the processor to the flatbed scanner.
• Place the test print face up with the arrow up (rear side).
NOTE
• The position of test prints does not affect on the measurement.
55910 1/4
55910
Flatbed scanner
Arrow
Glass surface Test Print
G082692
4. Prescanning
Long Short
Image check line
Coordinate check
Measurement
Coordinate check
Paper type check

line
Paper type Date and time Direction
G082775
• Detect the test prints first.
Compare the length of two blocks in image judgment line to judge test print 1 (front) and test print 2 (rear).
Test print 1 (front) If the left block is longer than another in direction of that the paper type and date can
be read correctly. (see the illustration above)
Test print 2 (rear) If the right block is longer than another in direction of that the paper type and date
can be read correctly.
NOTE
• The blocks are detected from the center to the end of paper without image.
If the line is on the longer block, the system may recognize the line as the paper edge and judge the block as the shorter
one.
• The data on the shorter block is not used for correction.
• Confirm the test print tilt with the image check line.
Measure the test print if its tilt is less than 30 degrees.
55910 2/4
55910
• Confirm the paper type with the number of blocks at the center of paper type check line.
4 Paper Type 1
6 Paper Type 2
8 Paper Type 3
• Decides the scanning area referring to the image check line and the paper type check line.
If the two test prints are not detected or the test print in same side is detected
• No. 1932
Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly.
If the test print tilt is 30 degrees or more
• No. 1932
If the paper type is different
• No. 1931
Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test Print.
If the space of the hard disk is run out in processing or the memory is not enough
• No. 6910
Flatbed Scanner diagnosis error.
If the error has been informed from driver software
• No. 6911
Flatbed Scanner operation error.
If the communication error occurred in measuring
• No. 6912
Flatbed Scanner communication error.
5. Scanning
Long Short
Image check line
Coordinate check
Measurement
Coordinate check
Paper type check

line
G082775
• Calculates each dot coordinate with the coordinate check line.
Measure the amount of light for each dot with the calculated coordinate.
If any dot cannot be detected with the coordinate check line
• No. 1932
55910 3/4
55910

If the space of the hard disk is run out in processing or the memory is not enough
• No. 6910
Flatbed Scanner diagnosis error.
If the error has been informed from driver software
• No. 6911
Flatbed Scanner operation error.
If the communication error occurred in measuring
• No. 6912
Flatbed Scanner communication error.
6. Calculates the correction value of iBeam Tuning.
Long Short
Image check line
Coordinate check
Measurement
Coordinate check
Paper type check

line
G082775
• Calculates the correction value with the amount of light for each dot in the measurement part.
If the measured dots is below the specified number
• No. 1932
If dust is detected on the flatbed scanner.
• No.1946
Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter from the flatbed scanner glass surface or test
print and measure again.
7. The result is displayed and confirm the print quality.

• Confirm the quality with the sample print and perform iBeam Tuning if necessary.
☞ 32511
55910 4/4
56100
Processor paper advance operation
Processor paper advance operation (normal print)
This section explains the operation from entering of normal print paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit. It is a
precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is completed.
Paper advance operation of setup print varies normal print operation.
1. Transmit the paper advance signal from the printer to the processor before loading paper, the processor is
in the conditions below.
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON
• Processor drive motor: ON
• If the temperature of the dryer section has not reached 50 degree C, the paper loading is paused.
2. Load paper, and start exposure advance operation.
3. The paper rear end passed through the exposure end sensor of the printer.
Position A
Exposure end sensor
Normal Print
Setup print
G083167
4. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.
• The following data are transmitted to the processor by the printer.
Transmission data list

1 Information of paper advance length 5 Information of print counts
2 Information of paper width 6 Information of paper advance position
3 Information of paper surface 7 Information of paper lane
4 Order information 8 Information of splice
5. The paper leading edge passes through the print sensor in the dryer rack.
If the print sensor fails to detect the paper consecutive six times, the next message is displayed.
• ☞ No. 5535
Paper has jammed in the processor section.
56100 1/3
56100
Print sensor (left): SE30

Print sensor (right): SE29
Print conveyor unit
G084586
IMPORTANT
• When performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit and not performing it, the detection status of the
print sensor is different.
• When performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit, the print sensor (left) or the print sensor (right)
detects paper.
When performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit (3502)
Print sensor (left)
3 5
1
2 4 6
Dryer rack
Print sensor (right)
G078449
• When the lane selection with the paper advance unit is not performed, the paper is detected only with the print
sensor (right). The print sensor (left) is not used.
For 3501 and 3501i, the print sensor (left) is not equipped since the lane is not selected.
When not performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit (3501, 3501i, 3502)
Print sensor (left)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Dryer rack
Print sensor (right)

G078450
56100 2/3
56100
6. The prints are ejected to the print conveyor unit.

• For the details of print conveyor unit operation, refer to the following.
Reference
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped device]
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device]
NOTE
• After the fixed time has passed since the last print was ejected to the print conveyor unit;
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF
56100 3/3
56200
Processor paper advance operation (Setup print)
This section explains the operation that entering of setup print paper into the processor and ejecting from the colorimeter unit. It is a
precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is completed.
Normal print paper advance operation varies setup operation.
NOTE
• Print to measure color with the colorimeter will be explained.
The following prints that do not measure color with colorimeter unit are same as normal print operation.
• iBeam Tuning print (35i only)
• iBeam engine check print (35i only)
• Monitor setup print
• Black Balance Adjustment (manual) print
1. Transmit the paper advance signal from the printer to the processor before loading paper, the processor is
in the conditions below.
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON
• Processor drive motor: ON
• If the temperature of the dryer section has not reached 50 degree C, the paper loading is paused.
2. Load paper, and start exposure advance operation.
3. The paper rear end passed through the exposure end sensor of the printer.
Position A
Exposure end sensor
Normal Print
Setup print
G085799
4. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.
5. Calibrate the colorimeter automatically.

• For the details of colorimeter unit operation, refer to the following.
☞ 56600
56200 1/2
56200
Print sensor
Dryer selection guide

Colorimeter unit
Dryer lane select motor
Dryer selection home sensor

Normal Print Paper sensor 1
Setup print
G085798
6. Switch the dryer selection guide to the colorimeter unit.

• Dryer select motor: ON/OFF
• Dryer selection home sensor: Dark to LIGHT
If the dryer selection guide was not operated normally
☞ No. 5552-0001
•
If the paper is detected in the print sensor before print was detected in the paper sensor 1
• ☞ No. 5552-0004
If there are something like fogged parts in the previous process, the selection guide is switched to the colorimeter unit after they are
ejected from the processor.
7. The prints are advanced to the colorimeter unit, and the prints are ejected after measured.
• For the details of setup print color measuring operation, refer to the following.
☞ 56610
NOTE
• After the fixed time has passed since the last print was inputted to the colorimeter unit.
• Processor drive motor: OFF
• Dryer fan: OFF
• Dryer heater: OFF
8. Switch the dryer selection guide to the belt conveyor.

• Dryer select motor: ON/OFF
• Dryer selection home sensor: LIGHT to Dark
If the dryer selection guide was not operated normally
• ☞ No. 5552-0002
56200 2/2
56300
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped device]
The print conveyer unit operation varies with or without print sorter unit.
Reference
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device]
This section explains the progress from the paper goes through the dryer section to the print conveyor unit is operated.
1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, refer to
☞ 56100.
2. Detects the paper leading end of the first order with the print sensor.
3. The conveyor belt starts to operate (movement direction differs according to the paper size).
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular/reverse rotation)
When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the print conveyor moves.
Condition 1: The print sensor detects the paper leading edge of the next order.
Condition 2: A fixed time has passed after the sensor detects the rear edge of the paper of the previous order.
NOTE
• When the condition 2 is not fulfilled, the print conveyor waits for a specified time before it starts to work.
Dryer rack
A specified time A specified time
Order Order Order
Conveyor motor: ON Conveyor motor: ON
Conveyor motor: OFF

Longer than the Shorter than the specified
specified time time
G084536
56300 1/4
56300
• The print conveyor operation varies according to each print size.
Print size condition Print conveyor operation Operatio

n pattern
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm The print conveyor moves 130 mm each to the print receiving 1
or less × the paper advance length from 82.5 mm to 305 box by each order. (Rotation in regular direction) *1
mm When the paper width is under 130 mm
Dryer rack
Print conveyor unit
When the paper width is 130 mm or more
Dryer rack
Print conveyor unit
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm Move to the receiving tray on the back side (Reverse rotation) 2
or less × the paper advance length over 305 mm to 420
mm or less
Paper with the paper width over 152 mm to 210 mm or
less × the paper advance length from 82.5 mm to 420
mm or less
Feed Leading Edge
Fogged paper
Spliced paper
Paper with the paper width over 152 mm to 210 mm or The print conveyor is not moved (collecting on the print 3
less × the paper advance length from 82.5 mm to 420.1 conveyor) *2
mm or less
*1. If the print width is 130 mm or more, it is collected to overlap the next order. It is possible to collect until 3-order specification.
*2. If the print sensor detects the print rear end with the advance length 420.1 mm or more, ☞ No. 0519Remove the prints from the
Print Conveyor Unit. displays with the following conditions.
The advance length of the next print is under 420 mm
The next print is not processed
The next print is the first print in an order
20 paper is collected on the print conveyor with the advance length over 420.1 mm.
56300 2/4
56300
• The print conveyor operation varies according to previous print type.

IMPORTANT
• When mixing the print of the operation 1 to 3 in the same order, the print conveyor is operated as the following
table.
The print type in the previous The first print type in the next Print conveyor operation pattern
order order
The print type of the operation The print type of the operation Operate with the pattern 1 in the above table
pattern 1 in the above table pattern 1 in the above table
The print type of the operation Operate with the above operation pattern 2 after removing all
pattern 2 in the above table print to the print receiving box on the print conveyor
The print type of the operation Operate with the above operation pattern 3 after removing all
pattern 3 in the above table print to the print receiving box on the print conveyor
The print type of the operation The print type of the operation Operate with the above operation pattern 1 after moved the
pattern 2 in the above table pattern 1 in the above table previous order print to receiving tray on the back side
The print type of the operation Operate with the pattern 2 in the above table
pattern 2 in the above table
The print type of the operation Operate with the above operation pattern 3 after moved the
pattern 3 in the above table previous order print to receiving tray on the back side
The print type of the operation All print type Operate with the pattern 3 in the above table When the
pattern 3 in the above table additional order is received to be operated with that operation
pattern, the print is also moved if the long print was not
removed.
Receiving tray
Reverse rotation Rotation in

Print receiving box
Print conveyor unit
G084533
4. The receiving number of prints on the conveyor unit exceeds 50.

• Conveyor motor: ON (after the fixed time has passed: OFF)
NOTE
• The conveyor motor is operated when the next print leading end is detected after the number of prints on the conveyor
unit exceeds 50.
However, Control strip processing, splicing paper, Paper Leading Edge Advance, fogged paper, paper end and cleaning
paper are not counted.
• The operation condition of the conveyor motor is same as ☞ Detects the paper leading end of the first order with the
print sensor..
56300 3/4
56300
Print sensor (left): SE30

Print sensor (right): SE29
Print conveyor unit
G084586
5. Conveyor belt stops moving after the fixed time.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.
56300 4/4
56400
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device]
The print conveyer unit operation varies with or without print sorter unit.
Reference
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped device]
This section explains the progress from the paper goes through the dryer section to the print conveyor unit is operated.
1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, refer to
☞ 56100.
2. The print sensor detects the paper trailing edge.
3. The prints are ejected to the print conveyor unit.

Dryer rack
Print sensor (left)
A specified time Conveyor motor: ON (reverse rotation)
Conveyor motor: OFF Conveyor motor: ON (regular rotation)
G080228
IMPORTANT
• For 3501 and 3501i, the print sensor (left) is not equipped since the lane is not selected.
In case of a control strip:
• Conveyor motor: does not operate
4. The conveyor belt starts to operate (movement direction differs according to the paper size).
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular/reverse rotation)
Condition: When a specific time passes after ☞ 2 The print sensor detects the paper trailing edge.
Condition The direction of the conveyor motor
operation
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm or less × the paper advance Rotating in regular direction (Print sorter
length from 82.5 mm to 305 mm unit)
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm or less × the paper advance Reverse rotation (the receiving tray on
length over 305 mm to 420 mm or less the back side)
Paper with the paper width over 152 mm to 210 mm or less × the paper advance
length from 82.5 mm to 420 mm or less
Feed Leading Edge
Fogged paper
56400 1/3
56400

operation
Paper with the paper width over 152 mm to 210 mm or less × the paper advance Not rotated (collecting on the print
length from 82.5 mm to 420.1 mm or less conveyor) *1
*1. If the print sensor detects the print rear end with the advance length 420.1 mm or more, ☞ No. 0519Remove the prints from the Print
Conveyor Unit. displays with the following conditions.
The advance length of the next print is under 420 mm
The next print is not processed
The next print is the first print in an order
20 paper is collected on the print conveyor with the advance length over 420.1 mm.
NOTE
• Printer judges the direction of conveyor motor rotation and instruction is send to the processor.
Receiving tray
Print sorter unit
Reverse rotation
Rotation in
regular direction
Print conveyor
G084534
5. The conveyer belt operates. (The operating direction differs depending on the detection status of the print
sorter unit print full sensor.)
NOTE
• The description of Rotation in regular direction may be varied according to the print size to Reverse rotation by print size.
When the print full sensor is LIGHT
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular rotation)
When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, and changes to LIGHT before the next order is
ejecting
• ☞ No. 0505Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. occurs.
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular rotation)
When the print full sensor is LIGHT for a specified time
• ☞ No. 0505Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. occurs.
operation
The order that is ejected from the dryer rack when the messages is appeared Rotating in regular direction (Print sorter
unit)
The order that is ejected to the next time Reverse rotation (the receiving tray on
the back side) *1
*1. Though the print full sensor is turned to LIGHT while ejecting, all print of that order is ejected to the receiving tray on the back side.
6. Paper is ejected to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit or the receiving tray on the back side.
56400 2/3
56400
7. Conveyor belt stops moving.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.
8. The print receiving tray moves.

• For details about operation of the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit, refer to ☞ 56500.
56400 3/3
56500
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device]
This section explains the operation until the print receiving tray starts to move, after paper is ejected to the print sorter unit.
! Basic operation of the print receiving tray
1. The last piece of paper of an order is ejected to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit.
2. The print receiving tray moves.

• Sorter motor: ON (rotates)
When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the print receiving tray moves.
Condition 1: The print sensor detects the paper leading edge of the next order.
Condition 2: A fixed time has passed after the sensor detects the rear edge of the paper of the previous order.
NOTE
• When the condition 2 is not fulfilled, the print receiving tray waits for a specified time before it starts to work.
When the sorter home sensor does not turn LIGHT within a specified time:
• No.5534-01
Print sorter unit operation error
Sorter motor: DM4
Sorter home sensor: SE31
G084532
56500 1/3
56500
Dryer rack Paper advance direction
A specified time A specified time
Order Order Order
Sorter motor: ON Sorter motor: ON
Sorter motor: OFF

Longer than the Shorter than the specified
Print sensor (left) specified time time
G080229
IMPORTANT
• For 3501 and 3501i, the print sensor (left) is not equipped since the lane is not selected.
3. Print receiving tray operation stops.
• Sorter motor: OFF (stops)
Condition: The sorter home sensor turns DARK.
When the sorter home sensor does not turn DARK within a specified time:
• No.5534-02
Print sorter unit operation error
4. The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
• When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, the message ☞ No. 0505Remove the prints from the Print
Sorter Unit. appears.
• The print sorter unit is not activated until attention message is canceled.
• The print conveyor operation varies according to the detected status of the print full sensor. ☞ Print conveyor unit
operation [print sorter unit equipped device]
Print full sensor
G084535
56500 2/3
56500
! Condition that affects the operation of print receiving tray which changes depending
on the paper size and number of prints and so on
IMPORTANT
• The number of prints that one print receiving tray can keep on it is limited. Therefore, prints may be received by more
than one tray even the prints are within the same order.
Basic paper size The number of prints that one print receiving tray can keep on
it
Paper width Advance length 12-order specification 10-order specification
From 82.5 mm to 102 mm or From 82.5 mm to 305 mm or 50 prints 82 prints*1
less less
More than 102 mm to 152 mm or From 82.5 mm to 254 mm or 50 prints 82 prints*1
less less
More than 254 mm to 305 mm or 50 prints 50 prints
less
*1. If there is a print with paper width of more than 102 mm to 152 mm or less × the advance length of more than 254 mm to 305 mm or less is
on the same print receiving tray, the number of prints that the tray can keep is 50.
If a print with paper width of more than 102 mm to 152 mm or less × the advance length of more than 254 mm to 305 mm or less is ejected
on the print receiving tray after 50 or more prints with the basic paper size are ejected, the print receiving tray moves immediately and the
following prints are received by the next tray.
56500 3/3
56600
Colorimeter unit operation
The calibration operation of the colorimeter
This section explains the paper advance operation of colorimeter.

NOTE
• The calibrate operation of the colorimeter starts a minute before the setup print paper reaches to the colorimeter unit.
• To measure again, the calibration operation starts when YES is selected after the attention message ☞ No. 1029 appears.
Paper advance motor

Measuring
position
Colorimeter
Calibration plate
Paper sensor 2 Paper sensor 1
Pressure solenoid
G084566
1. Release the pressure of the measuring position, start to move Black of the calibration plate to the
measuring position.
• Pressure solenoid: ON
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)
2. After the calibration plate detects the paper sensor 2, it moves for a specified length and stops at the
measuring position of Black.
• Paper sensor 1: LIGHT to DARK

• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)/OFF
When paper sensor 2 does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 6554-0001
Calibration Plate advance error.
When paper sensor 1 turns LIGHT
• ☞ No. 6554-0002
3. Pressure the Black of the calibration plate, and measure the density.
• Pressure solenoid: OFF/ON
56600 1/3
56600
Measuring
position
Calibration plate
Paper sensor 1
Paper sensor 2
Pressure solenoid
G084567
4. Move the calibration plate for a specified length and stop at the measuring position White of the calibration
plate.

• ☞ No. 6554-0004
5. Pressure the White of the calibration plate, and measure the density.
6. The calibration plate starts to move to the standby position.

• Paper advance motor: ON (reverse)
Measuring
position
Calibration plate
Pressure solenoid
G084568
7. After the paper sensor 1 detects that the calibration plate passed, moves for a specified length, the
calibration plate stops at the standby position.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK to LIGHT

• Paper advance motor: ON (reverse)/OFF
• ☞ No. 6554-0006
56600 2/3
56600
8. Pressure the measuring position without the calibration plate.

• Pressure solenoid: OFF
9. Judge and register the result of the calibration plate, calibrate the colorimeter.
For details of the judgment, refer to ☞ Judgment operation of setup print.
56600 3/3
56610
Automatic colorimetry operation of setup print
This section explains the colorimetry of the setup print in the colorimeter unit.
NOTE
• When attention messages or error messages appear after failed to measure the setup print, the setup print is ejected without registering
the result.
• When the measurement would be failed and the attention message ☞ No. 1029 appears, you can measure the setup print again if
inputted to the colorimeter unit manually.
1. The print was inputted to the colorimeter unit.

• The drive switching lever that is placed on the inlet of the colorimeter unit is pressed with the paper leading end, and the
driving mode is switched from the calibration plate drive to the paper advance drive.
Paper advance motor
Remeasurement inlet
Colorimeter Paper
Measuring
position
Drive switching lever
Pressure solenoid
G084569
2. Detect the paper leading end in paper sensor 1, and release the pressure of the measurement position.
• ☞ No. 5535
Paper has jammed in the processor section.
3. After detected the paper leading end in paper sensor 1, wait for a specified time and start to advance the
paper.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK

• ☞ No. 1552-0001
The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured.
56610 1/4
56610
Measuring
position
Pressure solenoid
G084569
4. After detected the paper leading end in paper sensor 2, advance a specified length of paper and stop.
• ☞ No. 6551-0001
Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit.
5. Pressure the paper at the measuring position, and measure the density.
6. Move the paper for a specified pitch of each measuring format.

• ☞ No. 1552-0002
The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured.
• ☞ No. 6551-0002
7. Repeat from Step 5 to Step 6 for reaching to the final measurement position, and measure the density of
each step.
• For details of the judgment, refer to ☞ 56620.
8. When the density measurement of each step is completed, release the pressure of the measurement
position and eject the paper.
56610 2/4
56610
Measuring
position
Pressure solenoid
G084569
9. After detected the paper rear end in paper sensor 2, advance a specified length of paper and stop.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK to LIGHT to DARK
• ☞ No. 6551-0003
NOTE
• Since the paper rear end is taken off from the drive switching lever while advancing paper, the drive mode is switched from
paper advance drive to the calibration drive, and the calibration plate is moved from the standby position to the measurement
position. Paper sensor 1 turns DARK in the calibrating plate, however it is not supervised on the software.
10. Return the calibration plate to the standby position.

Reverse the rotation of the paper advance motor. Advance for a specified length and stop after detected the calibration plate in
paper sensor 1.
• Paper advance motor: ON (reverse)/OFF
• ☞ No. 6554-0006
Calibration plate
Measuring
position
Drive switching lever
Pressure solenoid
G084569
NOTE
• Since the calibration plate is stopped at the standby position though pull out the ejected paper, the oneway clutch is equipped
in the advance roller on the exit side.
56610 3/4
56610
11. Pressure at the measuring position without paper.

• Pressure solenoid: OFF
12. After judged the result, register the correction value.
56610 4/4
56620
Judgment operation of setup print
This section describes the judgment operation to measure the setup print at the daily setup.
NOTE
• When the daily setup is automatically performed after the startup of the program timer, the measurement is stopped to eject the paper
when attention messages or error messages appear.
• When the daily setup is performed from the Menu or Start Up Checks, all the papers are ejected after the measurement even though
attention messages or error messages appear.
Performing a setup print

After attention message ☞ No. 1029 appears, select YES to measure
again.
(Input the print failed to measure or the print with the correct paper
type to the colorimeter unit.)
Performing a colorimeter calibration
NO
Measurement value difference of between Black and White
of the calibration plate is above the specified value. The calibration plate data is out of range.
YES YES
A
Measurement of print density
Paper type is correct.

NO Attention message ☞ No. 1029-0001
YES
Density between each step is consecutively increasing. NO
YES NO
All three colors of Y, M and C have the similar tendency. Error ☞ No. 6203-0001
Setup error.
YES
Attention message ☞ No. 1029-0001

56620 1/3
56620
NO A
Dmax is above 0.9.
YES NO
Stores Dmax data for 15 days. Attention message ☞ No. 1029-0002
YES
NO
Dmax data is sequentially changing daily. Attention message ☞ No. 1029-0003
YES
Error ☞ No. 6204-0001 A

Setup error.
NO
Dmax is below 3.8.
NO
YES
Stores Dmax data for 15 days. Error ☞ No. 6203-0002
Setup error.
YES
Dmax data is sequentially changing daily. Error ☞ No. 6203-0003

Setup error.
YES NO
Error ☞ No. 6205-0001

Setup error.
Calculation of the correction value.
The correction value is within 10 fold of the previous NO

value.
YES NO
Setup error.
YES

The measurement failed. Measure it again. A
56620 2/3
56620
NO
The correction value is below 3 key of the previous value.
NO
YES
Setup error.
YES
NO
Requires plus correction. (Print density has been
decreased.)
YES
Error ☞ No. 6204-0002 A

Setup error.
The correction value is within 2 times of the value at Initial

NO
Setup or paper specification registration setup.
YES NO
Setup error.
YES
NO
Requires plus correction. (Print density has been
decreased.)
YES
Error ☞ No. 6204-0003 A

Setup error.
Correction value registration
56620 3/3
57010
Replenishment operation
Replenishment operation sequence [35, 35i]
• This section explains the replenishment operation flow.
1. Create Replenishment Solution or Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open) has been
performed.
2. Is PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor on?

• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: ON
If PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off
• ☞ No. 0904[F] Replenish PSR.
3. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are off.

• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
If P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are on
• ☞ No. 0913[F] Manual opening cannot be started.
4. The replenisher cartridge is set.
• Replenisher cartridge set sensor: ON
When the replenisher cartridge is set
• Shift to Step 5.
If the replenisher cartridge is not set
• ☞ No. 0902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge.
5. The replenisher section door is closed.

• Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door): ON
When the replenisher section door is closed
• Shift to Step 7.
If the replenisher section door is not closed
• ☞ No. 0903[F] Close the replenisher section door.
6. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are off.

• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
If P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are on
• ☞ No. 5923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank.
7. The replenisher cartridge is moved to lower position.

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): DARK → LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT
• ☞ No. 5900[F] −0001Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
57010 1/5
57010
8. The replenisher cartridge is stopped at lower position.

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK
9. Wait until the replenishment solution falls.
10. The replenishment solution level sensor (lower) detects the replenishment solution.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If some replenishment solution level sensors (lower) are not on
• ☞ No. 5908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
If all replenishment solution level sensors (lower) are not on
• ☞ No. 0905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge.
11. Operate the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.
• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: OFF → ON
12. Open and clean the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, close it.
• P1R cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
13. Open and clean the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, close it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
• P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is not on
• ☞ No. 5910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
NOTE
• No error occurs at Manual Open or Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open).
14. Open the P2RB cartridge flushing valve, and clean for a certain period of time, close the valve.
• P2RB cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
• P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is not on
• ☞ No. 5911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
NOTE
• No error occurs at Manual Open or Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open).
15. Open the P1R agitation solenoid valve, agitate P1R replenishment solution for a certain period of time,
and close the valve.

• P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
57010 2/5
57010
If P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is not on

• ☞ No. 5909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
16. Stop the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: ON → OFF
17. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (upper) replenishment solution level sensors detect all replenishment solution
• If creating the replenishment solution with the replenishment tank completely empty, the replenishment solution is not filled
up until P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turn
on.
Therefore, only for Manual Open and Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open), no error occurs even if P2RA
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor do not turn on.
18. The replenish cartridge moves to the cap cleaning position (upper position).
• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON → OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK
19. Operate the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: ON
20. Open and clean the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, close it.
21. Open and clean the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, close it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
22. Open the P2RB cartridge flushing valve, and clean for a certain period of time, close the valve.
• P2RB cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
23. Stop the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: OFF
24. The replenishment cartridge moves from the cap cleaning position (upper position) to the lower position to
discharge washing water.

• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK
57010 3/5
57010
25. The replenisher cartridge is moved from the lower position to the upper position.
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK
26. End
57010 4/5
57010
57010 5/5
6000
6. Electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ........................................................................... 60100

Compatibility of QSS-35 series PCBs and electrical parts [35, 35i] .................................................................60100
Position of electrical parts (printer section) .......................................................................... 61000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) [35, 35i] .....................................................................................................61000
Printer section (position and description of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ..............................................................61050
Paper supply section (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ............................................................................61200
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35] ...................................................61300
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35i] ..................................................61310
Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ..................................................61400
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) [35] .............................................................................61450
PCB position (Processor section) [35, 35i] .......................................................................... 63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N] [SM] [J] [F] ....................................................................................63200
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i] .......................................................... 63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J] ...........................................................................63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] .......................................................................................63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J] ...........................................................................................63310
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F] ...........................................................................................63311
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F] ...................................................63312
Processor (fan operation specification) (35, 35i) ................................................................. 63321
Processor section (fan operation specification) .................................................................................................63321
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) .......................... 63510
6 Electrical parts
Dryer section, conveyor section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ........63510
Conveyor unit/Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ...........................................................63520
Description of PCB (printer section) .................................................................................... 64110
Keyboard PCB (J391193) [35, 35i] ...................................................................................................................64110
Printer control PCB (J391183) [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................................64140
Laser control PCB (J391318)[35] ......................................................................................................................64150
iBeam Control PCB (J391180) [35i] .................................................................................................................64151
Dual paper magazine PCB (J391184) [35, 35i] .................................................................................................64190
B laser driver and G laser driver [35] ................................................................................................................64210
AOM driver [35] ................................................................................................................................................64230
CVP PCB (J391182) [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................................................64240
PU Control PCB (J391321) [35, 35i] ................................................................................................................64241
Power supply (printer section, processor section) [35, 35i] ................................................. 64250
Power supply (Printer/Processor section) [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................64250
Description of PCB (processor section) ............................................................................... 66200
Processor control PCB (J391329) [35, 35i] ......................................................................................................66200
Processor relay PCB (J391339, J391186) [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................66220
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J306328) [J] [35] ........................................................................................66500
SM I/O PCB (J391191) [SM] [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................66600
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] [35, 35i] .............................................................................................66700
Cables ................................................................................................................................. 68100
Precautions for handling the cable [35, 35i] ......................................................................................................68100
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) [35, 35i] .......................................................68550
6000 1/1
60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts
Compatibility of QSS-35 series PCBs and electrical parts [35, 35i]
! Explanation
• The PCB and the parts No. used in the PCB installed on QSS differs depending on the type.
• The corrective actions after replacing the PCBs may differ depending on system model though the parts No. of PCB is the same in
the list. Be sure to confirm the explanation of each PCB when replacing the parts.
NOTE
• $ is used and − is unused.
• (J# # # # # #) in the list stands for that the part is no more available.
! Control PCB
Name Part No. Manual No. 3 3 Remarks
5 5
i
Printer control PCB J391183 ☞ 64140 $ $
Laser control PCB J391187 ☞ 64150 $ −
iBeam Control PCB J391180 ☞ 64151 − $
Processor control PCB J391329 ☞ 66200 $ $ Equipped with the control function of
(J391181) the colorimeter.
PU control PCB J391321 ☞ 64241 $ $ Option
! PCB (other parts)

5 5
i
6. Electrical parts
PC interface PCB J391179 − $ $ The PC Service Manual explains PCB.
B-AOM driver I124032 ☞ 64230 $ − Each PCB must be replaced depending
G-AOM driver (I124020) $ − on the laser unit type.
R-AOM driver $ −
B laser driver J391160 ☞ 64210 $ −
G laser driver $ −
B laser driver J391231 $ −
G laser driver $ −
Keyboard PCB J391193 ☞ 64110 $ $ Option
Processor relay PCB J391339 ☞ 66220 $ $
(J391186)
CVP PCB J391182 ☞ 64240 $ $ Option
Dual paper magazine PCB J391184 ☞ 64190 $ $
Transistor PCB J490339 − $ $
SM I/O PCB J391191 ☞ 66600 $ $ [SM] specification only
Tablet replenishment driver PCB J306328 ☞ 66500 $ $ [J] specification only
F replenishment I/O PCB J391322 ☞ 66700 $ $ [F] specification only
Temperature and humidity sensor I096003 ☞ 63311 $ $
60100 1/2
60100
! Power supply PCB

5 5
i
Printer power supply 1 I038404 ☞ 64250 $ $
Printer power supply 2 I038405 $ $
Printer power supply 3 I038406 $ $
Printer power supply 4 I038403 − $
I038405 $ −
iBeam power supply I038404 − $
Laser power supply I038408 $ −
Processor power supply I038401 $ $
! Exposure engine
5 5
i
Laser unit (Type ###) − ☞ 61450 $ − When replacing laser unit, pay attention
to the combination of the laser unit and B
and G laser drivers.
iBeam unit Z025627 − − $
(Z024775)
6. Electrical parts
60100 2/2
61000
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Printer section (positions of PCBs) [35, 35i]
! Layout diagram
The external view of the machine differs depending on the model.
35i 35
13 12 8 9 10
7 14
11
15
6
16
6. Electrical parts
Printer door side
5 3 4 2 1
G077195
IMPORTANT
• The keyboard switch PCB, PU control PCB and PC interface PCB are described in the PC Service Manual.
Refer to the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
61000 1/3
61000
Printer section
No. Name Symbol Model Manual No. Remarks
35 35i
1 Printer control PCB $ $ ☞ 64140 *1
2 Printer power supply 1 PS3 $ $ ☞ 64250

3 Printer power supply 2 PS10 $ $
6 Laser power supply PS16 $ − *2
7 iBeam power supply PS19 − $

8 B-AOM driver $ − ☞ 64230
9 G-AOM driver $ −
10 R-AOM driver $ −
11 Laser control PCB $ − ☞ 64150
12 B laser driver $ − ☞ 64210
13 G laser driver $ −
14 iBeam Control PCB − $ ☞ 64151
15 CVP PCB $ $ ☞ 64240 Option
16 Dual paper magazine PCB $ $ ☞ 64190 Option
17 Keyboard connecting PCB $ $ ☞ 64110 Option
Inside the operation
keyboard
17
6. Electrical parts
*1. To check these electrical parts, PCB cover 1, 2, and the guide need to be removed. ☞ 20020
*2. To check these electrical parts, the PC control unit needs to be opened or the PC control unit cover needs to be removed. ☞ 21170☞ 21180
NOTE
• For details of the parts No. for each PCB, refer to ☞ 60100.
! Arrangement plan (PC control unit)

1
G084478
61000 2/3
61000
Printer section (PC control unit)

No. Name Symbol Model Manual No. Remarks
35 35i
1 PU control PCB $ $ ☞ 64241 Option*1
*1. To check these electrical parts, the table cover needs to be removed. ☞ 20020
6. Electrical parts
61000 3/3
61050
Printer section (position and description of electrical parts) [35, 35i]
Position (front side)
9 10
6. Electrical parts
6 1 12
5 7
11
G083169
NOTE
61050 1/2
61050
Printer main body (front side)

No. Name Symbol Model Remarks
35 35i
1 Printer control box cooling fan FAN24 $ - Intake (the fan is always ON.)
2 Paper magazine code sensor B SE40 $ $
3 Printer door 3 sensor LS10 $ $
4 Inner cooling fan FAN23 $ $ Intake (the fan is always ON.)
5 Paper magazine code sensor A SE12 $ $
6 Interlock switch (printer door 1) LS6 $ $
7 Interlock switch (printer door 2) LS7 $ $
8 Counter C $ $
*1
9 Interlock relay X37 $ $
10 Inner thermosensor TH5 $ $
11 Buzzer BZ1 $ $ *2
12 Temperature and humidity sensor SE69 $ $
*1. To check these electrical parts, PCB cover 1, 2, and the guide need to be removed. ☞ 20020
*2. To check these electrical parts, the PC cover needs to be removed. ☞ 20020
! Position (back side)
1 2
6. Electrical parts
3
G083189
Printer main body (back side)

No. Name Symbol Model Remarks
35 35i
1 Laser control box cooling fan 2 FAN17 $ − Exhaust (the fan is always ON.)
*1
2 Laser control box cooling fan 1 FAN16 $ −
3 Laser unit cooling fan 2 FAN15 $ − Go to ☞ 37300*1 for ON/OFF
4 Laser unit cooling fan 1 FAN14 $ − controlling of laser unit cooling
fans 1 and 2.
*1. To check these electrical parts, the printer rear cover needs to be removed. ☞ 20020
61050 2/2
61200
Paper supply section (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i]
! Layout diagram
Paper supply unit A
17
16
Paper supply unit B 8
12 14
7
2 9
5
6
11
6. Electrical parts
13 10 15
G083185
Paper Supply Section

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Paper end sensor A SE13
2 Paper loading sensor SE14
3 Cut home sensor SE15
4 Cut end sensor SE16
5 Paper hold sensor SE17
6 Paper end sensor B SE41 Option (dual paper magazine)
61200 1/2
61200

7 Paper advance motor 1 PM20 When one of the interlock switches (printer
8 Paper supply arm motor (left) PM22 doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation.
9 Paper supply arm motor (right) PM23
10 Paper advance motor 2 PM21 When one of the interlock switches (printer
doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation.
11 Paper supply motor A PM42 Option (dual paper magazine)
12 Paper Supply Motor B PM43 When one of the interlock switches (printer
doors 1 and 2, and printer door 3 sensor) is
off, not in operation.
13 Cut motor M5 When one of the interlock switches (printer
14 Paper hold motor M7 doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation.
15 Ribbon advance motor M6
16 Roller Move Motor (35i only) PM44
17 Roller Position Sensor (35i only) SE43
6. Electrical parts
61200 2/2
61300
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35]
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) differ between 35 and 35i.
Reference
☞ Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35i]
! Layout diagram
4 7 10
6. Electrical parts
2 9 3 8
6
5
G083183

1 Zigzag correction sensor (left) SE19 *1
2 Zigzag correction sensor (right) SE20

3 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 SE21
4 Exposure start sensor SE22
6 Exposure end sensor SE24
7 Exposure advance motor 1 PM24 When one of the interlock switches (printer
8 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 PM25 doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation. *1
9 Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 PM27
doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation. *1
*1. To check these electrical parts, the exposure advance needs to be removed.
☞ 25810
61300 1/1
61310
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts)

[35i]
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) differ between 35 and 35i.
Reference
☞ Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35]
! Layout diagram
1 4
6. Electrical parts
8 2
7 10 9
G084444

*1
1 Zigzag correction sensor (left) SE19
2 Zigzag correction sensor (right) SE20
4 Exposure start sensor SE22
6 Exposure end sensor SE24
61310 1/2
61310

8 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 PM25 doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation. *1
9 Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 PM27
doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation. *1
*1. To check these electrical parts, the exposure advance needs to be removed.
☞ 25810
6. Electrical parts
61310 2/2
61400
Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35,

35i]
! Layout diagram
3501, 3501i 3502
9
3
3
7
4
6 6
5 5 1
8
6. Electrical parts
2
2
G084447

1 Lane select sensor SE26 (3502)
2 Paper advance pressure change sensor SE25
3 Arm sensor SE27
4 Turn sensor SE28
5 Turn motor*1 PM32
6 Paper advance arm motor*1 PM31
7 Paper advance motor 3*1 PM28
8 Paper advance pressure change motor*1 PM29
9 Lane select motor *1 PM30 (3502)
*1. When one of the interlock switches (printer doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation.
61400 1/1
61450
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) [35]
! Type of the laser unit and identifying its type

There are the following types of laser units. There is no difference in functions and quality.
Laser unit (Type ###) Laser unit (# #) #-Laser driver #-AOM driver
Type EeR (Z025651) eR Z025532 B J391160 B I124032
Label: first five digits No. G G (I124020)*1
03065
Serial No.: the first three
digits B10
Type FfR (Z025652) fR Z025534 B J391160 B I124032
Label: first five digits No. G J391231 G (I124020)*1
03045
digits B11
Type Ff (Z025660) f Z025661 B J391160 B I124032
Label: first five digits No. G J391231 G (I124020)*1
03000 R
Type BbR (Z025653) bR Z025601 B J391231 B I124032
Label: first five digits No. G G (I124020)*1
03075
digits B12
*1. (I# # # # # #) in the table stands for that the part is no more available.
• The laser unit (type ###) contains a laser unit and the B and G laser drivers as a set, but not the AOM driver.
• For replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit, refer to ☞ 26710.
6. Electrical parts
• There are two ways to identify the type of the laser unit which is equipped as described below.
1. It can be identified by the version of the LASER on the System Version Check display.
☞ 35500
2. It can be identified by the label placed on the laser unit.
Serial No.: the first three digits
B-AOM driver
G laser driver B10
G-AOM driver
B laser driver Laser unit
R-AOM driver
03000
Label: first five digits

G085832
IMPORTANT
• When replacing laser unit, pay attention to the combination of the laser unit and B and G laser drivers.
61450 1/2
61450
We recommend that you replace a laser unit with the same type of laser unit. However, depending on our stock
conditions, there may be situations when we cannot obtain the same type or have a different type in stock. In those
cases, pay attention to the combination of the laser unit and B and G laser drivers, and then replace the laser unit.
Example) When replacing the laser unit (fR) with the laser unit (f).
Composition of parts before replacement Composition of parts after replacement
Laser unit (Type fR) → Replacing → Laser unit (Type f)
B laser driver (J391160) → No need for → B laser driver (J391160)
G laser driver (J391231) → replacement → G laser driver (J391231)
B-AOM driver (I124020) → → B-AOM driver (I124020)
G-AOM driver (I124020) → → G-AOM driver (I124020)
- Addition → R-AOM driver (I124020)
• If you need to add the R-AOM driver like the above example, prepare the two cables listed below.
Laser control PCB
J/P1503 J/P1641
Laser unit
R-AOM
1
J/P1544 J/P1643
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
6 6
7 7
6. Electrical parts
Cables
G085835
! Layout diagram
Laser unit
1 Back view of laser unit
G084482
Laser unit
1 Laser unit heater H5 Go to ☞ 37300 for ON/OFF controlling of
the laser unit heater.
61450 2/2
63200
PCB position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N] [SM] [J] [F]

Some PCBs are additionally installed depending on the system specification. See below for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of PCBs) [SM] [35, 35i] ☞ Processor section (positions of PCBs) [J] [35]
! Layout diagram
[N], [SM] and [J] specifications
8
2
6. Electrical parts
[F] specification
4 1
G083182
Processor section
No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
2 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
3 Processor power supply PS1 ☞ 64250
4 Transistor PCB Cooling water solenoid valve
(option)
5 F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 F specification only
NOTE
63200 1/2
63200
! Processor section (positions of PCBs) [SM] [35, 35i]
1
G070039
SM replenishment unit
1 SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
! Processor section (positions of PCBs) [J] [35]
6. Electrical parts
1
G083231
Tablet replenishment unit

1 Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
NOTE
63200 2/2
63290
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J]

This section describes only the common sections among [N], [SM] and [J] specifications. For sections differ on each specification, refer to
the section below.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical
parts) [SM] parts) [J] parts) [F]
! Layout diagram
The appearance of the system varies depending on the Process Specification.
13
14
1 to 12
15 to 20
21
6. Electrical parts
22
23 to 25 36
29 to 35 26 to 28
G083192
Processor section (front face)

1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level *3
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat
2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
BF refilling water level *3
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3 STB1 processing solution float switch FS3
STB1 refilling water level *3
4 STB2 processing solution float switch FS4 There is no J specification.
STB2 refilling water level *3 There is no J specification.
5 STB3 processing solution float switch FS5 There is no J specification.
STB3 refilling water level *3 There is no J specification.
63290 1/3
63290

6 STB4 processing solution float switch FS6
STB4 refilling water level *3
STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
7 CD thermosensor TH1
8 BF thermosensor TH2
9 STB thermosensor TH3
10 CD heater H1
11 BF heater H2
12 STB heater H3
13 Interlock switch (processor top cover) LS2
14 Exhaust fan FAN3 Exhaust*1
15 CD circulation pump P1
16 BF circulation pump P3
17 STB1 circulation pump P5
21 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4 Intake *2
The installation position differs for J

specification.
22 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
The installation position differs for J
6. Electrical parts
specification.
23 CD replenisher pump RP1 There is no [J] specification.*1
24 BF replenisher pump RP2 There is no [SM] specification, or the
mounting position is wrong.
25 STB replenisher pump RP3
Refer to ☞ 63300*1
26 CD replenishment solution level sensor LSE1
27 BF replenishment solution level sensor LSE2
28 STB replenishment solution level sensor LSE3
29 CD-W refilling water pump *3 P9
*3
30 BF-W refilling water pump P10
31 STB1-W refilling water pump *3 P11
*3
32 STB2-W refilling water pump P12
35 Cleaning pump 1 *3 P15
*3
36 Refilling water tank level sensor LSE4
*1. It is different from [N] specification for other specifications.
*2. For details about processor section fan operation specification, refer to ☞ 63321.
*3. 35i is optional.
63290 2/3
63290
! Layout diagram
1 2 3
15 14 13
4
5
6
7
10
9
11
12
16 17 18
6. Electrical parts
G083191
NOTE
• Processor sections (back side) are all same for [N], [SM] and [J] specifications.
Processor section (back face)
1 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS1
2 Tank cooling fan 2 FAN5 Exhaust*1
3 Drive motor M11 If replaced, carry out Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33600
4 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB1
7 Minute Meter CO Option
8 Terminal strip 2 TA2
10 Processor control box cooling fan FAN29 Exhaust*1
13 CD effluent float switch FS7
14 BF effluent float switch FS8
15 STB effluent float switch FS9
16 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3
17 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2
18 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1
63290 3/3
63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM]

For the specifications other than [N] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [SM] specification. For the
common section with [N] specification, refer to the section below.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J]
! Positions of electrical parts (SM replenishment unit)

25 2 26 3 21 13 22 23
29
24 6
4 28
27
6. Electrical parts
19
12
18
10
17
20
9 16
14
15 11
8 7
G070041
SM replenishment unit
1 CD-A replenisher pump sensor SE32
2 CD-B replenisher pump sensor SE33
3 CD-C replenisher pump sensor SE34
4 BF-A replenisher pump sensor SE35
5 BF-B replenisher pump sensor SE36
6 STB replenisher pump sensor SE37
7 CD-A replenishment solution sensor SE38
8 CD-B replenishment solution sensor SE39
9 CD-C replenishment solution sensor SE40
10 STB replenishment solution sensor SE41
63300 1/2
63300

11 BF-A replenishment solution sensor SE42
12 BF-B replenishment solution sensor SE43
13 CD-W water supply pump sensor SE44
14 Water supply tank level sensor LSE5
15 Replenishment package sensor P-1 LS6
16 Replenishment package sensor P-2 LS7
20 Cleaning pump 1 P15
21 CD-W water supply pump RP1
22 BF-W water supply pump RP2
23 STB4-W water supply pump RP3
24 CD-A replenisher pump RP5
25 CD-B replenisher pump RP6
26 CD-C replenisher pump RP7
27 BF-A replenisher pump RP8
28 BF-B replenisher pump RP9
29 STB replenisher pump RP10
6. Electrical parts
63300 2/2
63310
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J]

For the specifications other than [N] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [J] specification. For the
common section with [N] specification, refer to the section below.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J]
! Position (front side)
1 to 3
5 6
6. Electrical parts
4
G085887

1 CD water supply pump RP1
2 BF water supply pump RP2
3 STB water supply pump RP3
4 Cleaning pump 1 P15 Option
5 SW/DW Tank Level Sensor LSE3
6 SW Tank Level Sensor LSE4
7 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4
63310 1/2
63310
! Position (Tablet replenishment unit section)
11 10
7 8 9
18
19 3 20
1
5
2
6
6. Electrical parts
14 17
15 4 12 16
G085848
Tablet replenishment unit section

1 CD Tablet Sensor 1 SE48
2 CD Tablet Sensor 2 SE49
3 BF Tablet Sensor 1 SE50
4 BF Tablet Sensor 2 SE51
5 STB Tablet Sensor 1 SE52
6 STB Tablet Sensor 2 SE53
7 CD Cartridge Sensor SE54
8 BF Cartridge Sensor SE55
9 STB Cartridge Sensor SE56
10 Upper sensor for elevator SE57
11 Middle sensor for elevator SE58
12 Lower sensor for elevator SE59
13 CD Drum motor M4
14 BF Drum motor M5
15 STB Drum motor M6
16 Elevator motor M7
17 CD Operation Lamp L5
18 BF Operation Lamp L6
19 STB Operation Lamp L7
63310 2/2
63311
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F]

This section is for [F] specification only.
For the [N], [SM] and [J] specification, refer to the section below.
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical
parts) [N] [SM] [J] parts) [SM] parts) [J]
! Layout diagram
14 13
15 to 20
22
23 to 26 21
27
28
6. Electrical parts
1 to 12
G085855

1 P1 processing solution float switch FS1
P1 processable level
P1 processing solution level
P1 safety thermostat
2 P2 processing solution float switch FS2
P2 processable level
P2 processing solution level
P2 safety thermostat
3 PS1 processing solution float switch FS3
PS1 processable level
7 CD thermosensor TH1
8 BF thermosensor TH2
9 STB thermosensor TH3
63311 1/4
63311

10 P1 Heater H1
11 P2 Heater H2
12 PS Heater H3
13 Interlock switch (processor top cover) LS2
14 Exhaust fan FAN3 Exhaust*1
15 CD circulation pump P1
16 BF circulation pump P3
21 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4 Intake *1
22 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
23 P1R Replenisher Pump RP1 *2
24 P2RA Replenisher Pump RP2

25 P2RB Replenisher Pump RP3
26 PSR Replenisher Pump RP4
27 Minute Meter CO Option
28 Processor control box cooling fan FAN29 Exhaust*1
*2. After replacing each electrical part, refer to Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) ☞ 63312.
6. Electrical parts
63311 2/4
63311
! Layout diagram
2 1
14 13 12
3
33 27
7
10
34
11
4
5 35
28
6 29
30
8
11
25 24 23 22
17 16 15
6. Electrical parts
26
31
32
18 19 20 21
G085884
Processor section (back face)

1 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS1
3 Drive motor M11 If replaced, carry out Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33600
7 Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) LS8
12 CD effluent float switch FS7
13 BF effluent float switch FS8
63311 3/4
63311

14 STB effluent float switch FS9
15 P1 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve MV1 *3
16 P2 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve MV2

17 PS Cooling Water Solenoid Valve MV3
18 P1R cartridge flushing valve MV4
19 P2RA cartridge flushing valve MV5
20 P2RB cartridge flushing valve MV6
21 P1R agitation solenoid valve MV7
22 P1 automated cleaning valve MV8
23 P2 automated cleaning valve MV9
24 PS automated cleaning valve MV10
25 Automated cleaning valve - Unused
*3
26 Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump P17
*3
27 Replenishment cartridge opening motor DM5
*2*3
28 P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE63
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE64
29 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE65
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE66
30 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE67
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE68
31 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE7
32 PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE8
*3
33 Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor SE60
34 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) SE61
6. Electrical parts
35 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) SE62
*2. For details about # # # replenishment solution level sensors, refer to the following image.
For the replacement of the replenishment solution level sensor, refer to ☞ 27930.
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor # # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
G085885
*3. After replacing each electrical part, refer to Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) ☞ 63312.
63311 4/4
63312
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F]
Item Adjustment option after replacement Reference

P1R Replenisher Pump Replacing • Carry out the Pump Output Amount ☞ 33030
P2RA Replenisher Pump Measurement.
P2RB Replenisher Pump
PSR Replenisher Pump
P1R cartridge flushing valve*1 Replacing • Carry out Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output ☞ 33590
P2RA cartridge flushing valve *1 Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount
Setting.
P2RB cartridge flushing valve*1
P1R agitation solenoid valve*1 • If necessary, perform Output Check for the ☞ 27940
P1 automated cleaning valve*2 cartridge flushing valve and replenishment
cartridge cleaning pump.
P2 automated cleaning valve*2
PS automated cleaning valve*2
Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump Replacing • Carry out Initial Replenishment Operation of Auto ☞ 33590
Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting.
• Carry out Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount
Setting.
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Replacing • Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 27930
Sensor*3 • If necessary, perform Recovery procedure from the ☞ 4610
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level replenishment error 1 or Recovery procedure ☞ 4620
Sensor*3 from the replenishment error 2.
P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor*3
Level Sensor*3
6. Electrical parts
P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor*3
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor*3
Replenishment cartridge opening motor Replacing • If necessary, perform Replenishment cartridge ☞ 4600
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor installation section troubleshooting flow.
(Upper)
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower)
*1. P1R, P2RA, P2RB and P1R cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*2. P1, P2 and P3 cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*3. # # #(upper) replenishment solution level sensor and # # #(lower) replenishment solution level sensor are to be replaced as a set.
63312 1/1
63321
Processor (fan operation specification) (35, 35i)
Processor (fan operation specification) (35, 35i)
Processor section (fan operation specification)
! Operation specification of the fan

Name Symbol Operation condition
Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4 When the CD or BF processing solution temperature is more than the setting
Tank cooling fan 2 FAN5 temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is ON. If the CD or BF processing solution
temperature is less than the setting temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is OFF.
Tank cooling fan 3 FAN6
Tank cooling fan 4 FAN7
Processor control box FAN29 The fan is always ON.
cooling fan
Exhaust fan FAN3 When the top cover is closed, the fan is always ON.
When the top cover is opened, the fan is OFF.
Dryer fan FAN2 When printing (heater is activated): Fan ON
NOTE
• All the fans above except the exhaust fan are OFF while the program timer activates.
6. Electrical parts
63321 1/1
63510
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)
Dryer section, conveyor section and order classification section (positions

of electrical parts) [35, 35i]
! Layout diagram
13
12
10
11
6 7 1 2
8 3
6. Electrical parts
9
G084416
NOTE
• For the dryer section and order classification section, [N], [SM], [J] and [F] specifications are the same.
For positions of interlock switch (dryer cover), refer to ☞ 63290.
Dryer section, order classification section
1 Processor condition lamp
2 Sorter Motor DM4
3 Sorter Home Sensor SE31
4 Manual Sorter Switch (Manual replenishment switch) SW1
5 Print Full Sensor SE32
63510 1/2
63510

6 Print Sensor (Left) (3502) SE30
7 Print Sensor (Right) (3502) SE29
8 Dryer Lane Select Motor PM53
9 Lane Select Home Sensor SE46
10 Dryer thermosensor TH4
11 Dryer Safety Thermostat STH1
12 Dryer heater H4
13 Dryer fan FAN2 For details about fan operation
specification, refer to ☞ 63321.
6. Electrical parts
63510 2/2
63520
Conveyor unit/Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i]
! Layout diagram
6. Electrical parts
1
2
G083227
Conveyor unit/Colorimeter unit (electrical parts)

1 Conveyor motor PM51
2 Colorimeter cooling fan FAN8
3 Colorimeter - Colorimeter unit
4 Paper sensor 1 *1 SE75
5 Paper sensor 2 *1 SE76
6 Paper advance motor *1 PM12
*1
7 Pressure change solenoid SOL1
*1. To check these electrical parts, the colorimeter unit needs to be removed.
☞ 27100
63520 1/1
64110
Description of PCB (printer section)
Keyboard PCB (J391193) [35, 35i]
J171
J179 J178
G083171
! Function
• Connects the operation keyboard.
! Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
6. Electrical parts
• None
! 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None
! Unused connector
• None
! Component parts table

• None
64110 1/1
64140
Printer control PCB (J391183) [35, 35i]
LED1
P208 P229 P209 P206 P211 P212 P222 TP7
TP1
P207
P226
TP12
P210
LED4
TP4 TP9
P225
TP16
P202
F37
LED3 TP3
F36
TP15 P213
P224 F33 TP5
F34 TP6 TP8 P214

TP2
P223 TP17
LED2 F35
P221 P200
F32
P220
TP13
P203 P233
P219 P218 P215
P217 P216 P205 P232
P228 P201 TP11 P204 P234
TP10
6. Electrical parts
G083170
! Function
• Controls each electrical part of the paper advance unit, exposure advance unit, and paper supply unit A.
• Communicates with the laser control PCB (35).
• Communicates with the iBeam Control PCB (35i).
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
• Turns the power supply ON/OFF with the interlock switch (printer doors 1 and 2).
• Controls the buzzer and counter.
• Supplies power to the counter, printer power supply cooling fan, inner cooling fan and the printer control box cooling fan.
• Supplies power (5V, 24V, 36V) to the dual paper magazine PCB.
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000

• Back up the system data.
IMPORTANT
• Details of the precautions for the optical fiber cables, refer to ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual how to
use tool.
64140 1/3
64140

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600
• Read the system data.
☞ 35400
• Carry out paper sensor adjustment.
☞ 36000
! 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 4200
! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• ☞ 4252
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P200 Controls the dual paper magazine unit.
P202 35: Unused 35i: Used (Roller Position Sensor)
P204 Paper magazine code sensor B
P220 Unused
P228 Unused
P229 35: Unused 35i: Used (Roller Move Motor)
P234 Unused
6. Electrical parts
LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 IL24 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 IL36 V input check ON when power is supplied.
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible Not mounted
TP2 DC+24 V voltage measurement
TP3 IL24 V voltage measurement
TP4 IL36 V voltage measurement
TP5 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement
TP6 DC+1.5 V voltage measurement
TP7 to TP13 Ground Possible TP7 and TP11 mounted
TP8 to TP10, TP12, TP13 not
mounted
TP14 to TP17 Unused Impossible Not mounted
NOTE
• There are other types of TP for the printer control PCB than described above, but they are not used for service.
Fuse No. Rating Purpose
F32 T2.0 A/125 V DC24 V power supply protection
F33 T3.15 A/125 V IL24 V − 1 power supply protection
64140 2/3
64140

F36 T2.0 A/125 V IL36 V−2 power supply protection
F37 T2.0 A/125 V IL36 V−1 power supply protection
6. Electrical parts
64140 3/3
64150
Laser control PCB (J391318)[35]
TP404 P1508
P1516 P1515
P1517
P1521 P1501 P1502 P1503
P1527 TP408
P1528 TP851 TP852 P1551
TP452 TP451 TP409
P1523 CN2 CN3
P1524 TP403
P1545 P1541
P1546
P1547
P1534
P1548
TP405
P1513
TP419 TP407 TP406 P1542

TP420
P1520 TP417
TP415 TP352 P1543
TP401 TP402 TP414

P1544
TP351 LED402
TP418 TP416 TP152
P1519
LED401 TP411 TP410 TP151
TP301 TP412
P1509 P1532 P1522 TP150
P1510 P1506 P1504
6. Electrical parts
G083172
! Function
• Controls the laser unit.
• Receives the image data from the PC interface PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
• Controls the interlocks of B-AOM driver, G-AOM driver and R-AOM driver.
• Controls laser unit heater, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2 and laser control box cooling fans 1 and 2.
• Relays the control signal of the polygon mirror driver and the R laser.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
IMPORTANT
use tool.

☞ 35600
64150 1/3
64150

☞ 4200
! Unused connector
CN2, CN3 Unused
P1509 Connects to the laser operation record PCB.
P1510 Unused
P1521 Unused

LED401 Inputs DC+5 V from the laser power supply. ON when power is supplied.
LED402 ON when DC+24 V is supplied from printer power ON when power is supplied.
supply 4.
• Although test pins except TP402 are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
• TP351, 352, 416 and 418 cannot be measured with a voltmeter.
Test point No. Purpose Remarks

TP150 DC+5 V voltage When the normal value (+5 V) or (−5 V) is not detected: Confirmation of the R
TP151 measurement • Failure in the cable connection between the printer laser status at the laser
power supply 4 and laser control PCB. unit (Type EeR), (Type
TP152 DC−5 V voltage
FfR) or (Type BbR).
measurement • Failure in the printer power supply 4 and laser
control PCB.
6. Electrical parts
TP301 DC+1 V voltage When the normal value (+1 V) is not detected: R laser temperature
measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB control standard
voltage check
• Disconnection or short-circuit of thermosensor
Replace the laser unit for the thermosensor failure.
TP351,TP352 Unused
TP401 Measures DC+5 V from When the normal value (+5 V) is not detected: ARCNET
the laser power supply. • Failure in the cable connection between the laser communication
power supply and laser control PCB.
• Failure in the laser power supply and laser control
PCB.
TP402 to TP405 Ground Ground for confirmation of 5 V power supply
TP406 DC+3.3 V voltage FPGA, memory, CPU power supply
measurement
TP407 Ground Ground for TP406
TP408 DC+1.5 V voltage FPGA power supply
measurement
64150 2/3
64150

TP410 Measures DC+24 V−3 When the normal value (+24 V) is not detected: Laser control circuit
from the printer power • Failure in the cable connection between the printer
supply 4. power supply 4 and laser control PCB.
• Failure in the printer power supply 4
TP412 DC+12 V−1 voltage There is a failure in the laser control PCB if the normal
measurement value (+12 V) is not detected.
Controls each AOM.
TP414 DC-12 V−1 voltage There is a failure in the laser control PCB if the normal
measurement value (−12 V) is not detected.
Controls each AOM.
TP415 DC+5 V voltage There is a failure in the laser control power supply if the Confirmation of the
measurement normal value (+5 V) is not detected. laser temperature
adjustment standard
voltage
TP416 Unused
TP418 For reset signal
confirmation
TP419 DC+2.5 V voltage There is a failure in the laser control PCB if the normal Unable to receive the
measurement value (+2.5 V) is not detected. image data from the PC
LVPECL power supply interface PCB.
TP451 DC+5 V voltage There is a failure in the laser control power supply if the Synchronous sensor
measurement normal value (+5 V) is not detected.
6. Electrical parts
TP851 DC+5 V voltage There is a failure in the laser control power supply if the Unable to output an
measurement normal value (+5 V) is not detected. image from the laser
TP852 Ground Ground for TP851 control PCB properly.
64150 3/3
64151
iBeam Control PCB (J391180) [35i]
P1101 P1541 TP12

P1102
TP11 TP14 TP15

P1506
LED3
TP10
TP7
LED4
TP13
CN3
P181
TP4
TP5
TP3
P1522
TP6
P1513 TP1 TP2
TP8 TP9
P1516
P1517
P1527
P1528
P1523
P1524
P1545
P1546
P1547
P1548
P1520 P1509 P1510
G083175
6. Electrical parts
! Function
• Controls the iBeam unit.
• Receives the image data from the PC-laser interface PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
IMPORTANT
use tool.

☞ 35600
☞ 4200
64151 1/2
64151
! Unused connector
P1509, P1510, P181, Unused
CN3

LED3 Inputs DC+5 V from the iBeam power supply. ON when power is supplied.
LED4 Input check converted from DC+24 V to DC+12 ON when power + 24 V is supplied from printer
V with iBeam control PCB. power supply 4.
• Though test pins except TP9 are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
• TP1/2/12 cannot be measured with a voltmeter.

TP1, TP2 Unused
TP3 Ground (analog)
TP4 DC+5 V voltage measurement There is a failure in the iBeam power supply For confirming of the
(analog) if the normal value (+5 V) is not detected. standard voltage of the
inner temperature
adjustment sensor.
TP5 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement FPGA, memory, CPU power supply ARCNET communication
TP6 DC+2.5 V voltage measurement There is a failure in the iBeam control PCB Unable to receive the
if the normal value (+2.5 V) is not detected. image data from the PC
LVPECL power supply interface PCB.
TP7 DC+1.5 V voltage measurement FPGA power supply ARCNET communication
6. Electrical parts
TP8 to TP10 Ground
TP11 Measures DC+5 V−3 V from the When the normal value (+5 V) is not ARCNET communication
iBeam power supply. detected:
• Failure in the cable connection
between the iBeam power supply and
iBeam control PCB.
• Failure of the iBeam power supply and
iBeam control PCB
TP12 Unused
TP13 DC+12 V voltage measurement There is a failure in the iBeam control PCB The iBeam unit does not
if the normal value (+12 V) is not detected. operate.
For confirming of the
standard voltage of the
inner temperature
adjustment sensor.
TP14, TP15 Ground
64151 2/2
64190
Dual paper magazine PCB (J391184) [35, 35i]
P277
P279
P278 P281 P282

P280
G083177
! Function
• Drive function of the paper supply motor B
• Relays the sensor output signal of the paper end sensor 3 and the printer door 3 sensor.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000

• None

• None

Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 4200
! Unused connector
• None

TP1 Ground Possible
64190 1/1
64210
B laser driver and G laser driver [35]
B laser driver (J391160) G laser driver (J391160)
B laser driver (J91231) G laser driver (J91231)
6. Electrical parts
Unused
G085831
! Function
• Controls B laser and G laser.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• Install the B/G laser driver depending on the laser unit type.

• None
! Unused connector
PCB Name Connector No. Purpose
B laser driver P1656 Unused
G laser driver P1666 Unused

• None
64210 1/1
64230
AOM driver [35]
B-AOM driver G-AOM driver R-AOM driver
G058738
Parts No. How to identify AOM drivers

I124032 24L is stated on the label. Label
I124020 24K is stated on the label.
! Function
• Converts the image data to the signal that controls the AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
6. Electrical parts
• Controls AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
• The AOM drivers are compatible for each other and can be used together.

• Install the AOM driver depending on the laser unit type.
• Perform the daily setup for each paper type.
• If the daily setup is completed normally, the work has finished.

• If the daily setup is not completed normally, perform the initial setup.

Model Reference
35 ☞ 4200
! Unused connector
• None
64230 1/2
64230

• None
6. Electrical parts
64230 2/2
64240
CVP PCB (J391182) [35, 35i]
May not be mounted depending on conditions
G066110
! Function
• Controls the correction value printing unit.
! 1. Position
6. Electrical parts
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000

• None

• None

Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 4200

• ☞ 4252
! Unused connector
• None
IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
64240 1/2
64240
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP1 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 Ground Possible
Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F25 T3.15 A/125 V DC+36 V power supply 0 V when interlock switch is OFF.
protection
6. Electrical parts
64240 2/2
64241
PU Control PCB (J391321) [35, 35i]
P299
P300
Unused depending on the conditions
G068417
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Controls the pricing unit.
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000

• Back up the system data.
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.
IMPORTANT
use tool.

☞ 35600
☞ 35400
! Unused connector
P301 Pricing unit keyboard connection
64241 1/2
64241

P302 Pricing unit display connection
P303 PU data communication unit connection
P306 Connection to the printer power supply of the pricing
unit


TP1 DC+24 V voltage check Possible
TP2 DC+5 V voltage check Possible
TP3 Ground Possible
TP4 Ground Possible
Switch No. Bit No. Setting Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to set to OFF.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
5 OFF Unused
6 OFF Unused
7 OFF Unused
6. Electrical parts
8 OFF Unused

F15 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V power supply protection
64241 2/2
64250
Power supply (printer section, processor section) [35, 35i]
Power supply (Printer/Processor section) [35, 35i]
Common for 35 and 35i (printer) 35 (processor)
TB1(P313) CON1(P317) CON1(P318) CN1(P793)
PS1
PS3 PS10 PS12
VR
VR
TB1(P328) CON2(P326) CON3(P327)

CN2(P794)
CON2(P324) CON3(P325)
35 (printer) 35i (printer)
TB1(P306) CON1(P314) TB1(P309) CP1(P314)
6. Electrical parts
PS19 PS17 PS19 PS17
TB2(P412) CON2(P315) CON3(P316) TB2(P412) CP2(P1614)
G083176
! Function
Compatible Symbo Name Parts Function
model l No.
35 PS3 Printer power supply 1 I038404 Supplies power to the printer control PCB. DC+5 V
35i PS10 Printer power supply 2 I038405 Supplies power to the printer control PCB. DC+24 V
PS12 Printer power supply 3 I038406 Supplies power to the printer control PCB and DC+36 V
the CVP PCB.
35 PS17 Printer power supply 4 I038405 Supplies the power to the printer control PCB, DC+24 V
laser control PCB and PU control PCB.
35i I038403 Supplies the power to the printer control PCB,
iBeam control PCB and PU control PCB.
35 PS16 Laser power supply I038408 Supplies power to the laser control PCB, B laser DC+5 V
driver and G laser driver.
35i PS19 iBeam power supply I038404 Supplies the power to the iBeam control PCB DC+5 V
and the printhead module.
64250 1/2
64250
Compatible Symbo Name Parts Function

model l No.
35 PS1 Processor power supply I038401 Supplies power to the processor control PCB. DC+5 V
35i DC+24 V
IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If these functions are
operated, turn off the circuit breaker of the system and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection
function is operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000

Do not touch each potentiometer of power supply PCB which has been adjusted by the manufacturer before shipping.

• None

Model Reference
35 ☞ 4200
6. Electrical parts
! Unused connector
Only CN4 unused which is for Laser power supply 2 (PS16).

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
Power supply PCB F1 AC 200 V power supply −
protection
64250 2/2
66200
Description of PCB (processor section)
Processor control PCB (J391329) [35, 35i]
LED5
TP12
P704 P702 P700 P699 P698 P697 P692 P691 P690

P703 TP5
P707 P705 LED10
P706 P701 LED13 P694 P693 P689
P678
F17
P670
TP3 F15
P708
TP4 TP9
TP14 F16
LED12 P695
LED17 F18
P671 P688
P673 TP13 P696 F14

TP10
LED9
P672
LED4 LED15 LED2

LED14 P687
LED3 LED1
LED16
TP2
LED6
P674 TP1
LED11 P686
P675 TP7
LED8 LED7
TP6
P710 P676 P679

P709 P677 P684 P685
P681
P680 P682 P683 G083173
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.
• Controls the colorimeter unit.
• Relays the communication between the colorimeter and PC.
• Communicates with the PC.
• The difference between processor control PCBs (J391181) and (J391329) is that processor control PCB (J391329) is the PCB that
(P707) connector is added to processor control PCB (J391181). (For the F specification)
• The processor control PCB (J391181) cannot be used with the F specification.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• Backup the system data.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.
• Check the jumper connector.
IMPORTANT
• Details of the precautions for the optical fiber cables, refer to ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual how
•
to use tool.

66200 1/4
66200
☞ 35600
☞ 35400
• Correct the front end advance length and the error by the colorimeter unit adjustment.
☞ 35100
• ☞ 4203
• ☞ 4252
! Unused connector
P671 Unused
P672 [N] specification: unused
[SM] specification: connecting to SM I/O PCB
[J] specification: connecting to tablet replenishment driver PCB

[F] specification: connecting to F replenishment driver PCB
P673 Digital flowmeter Option
P678 Unused
P679 [J] specification: connecting to SW/DW tank level sensor and SW tank level sensor
P684
P685 [N] specification: unused
[SM] specification: connecting to SM I/O PCB
6. Electrical parts
[J] specification: unused
[F] specification: connecting to F replenishment driver PCB
P686
P689 For chilling unit Option
P690 Unused
P691 Print sorter unit Option
P693 Print sorter unit Option
P695 Unused
P697 Unused
P698 For cooling water unit Option
P699 Hour meter Option
P700, P701 Unused
P707 [N] [SM] [J] specification: unused
[F] specification: connecting to the temperature and humidity sensor
IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED1 Refilling water pump and cleaning pump The LED status during operation is shown in the
LED2 operation check table.*1
35 Series: (standard) [F] specification: unused
LED3
35i Series: (option)
66200 2/4
66200

LED4 CD circulation amount check ([SM] specification ON when CD circulation amount has decreased.
only)
LED5 Relay X2 operation check (program timer) ON during operation, OFF during the program
timer activation
LED6 SSR3 operation check (CD replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED7 SSR2 operation check (BF replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED8 SSR1 operation check (STB replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED9 Relay X1 operation check (effluent float switch) ON during operation
LED12 DC+12-1 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED13 Unused
LED14 Drive motor cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED15 Exhaust fan operation check ON during operation
LED16 Tank cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED17 DC+12-2 V input check ON when power is supplied.
*1. Table (You can check whether the pump is working by ON/OFF of LED1, 2 and 3.)
[J] specification: Cleaning pump only
CD−W BF−W STB1−W STB2−W STB3−W STB4−W

Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water
pump pump pump pump pump pump
LED1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
LED2 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
LED3 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
6. Electrical parts
Cleaning
pump
LED1 ON
LED2 OFF
LED3 OFF

TP1, P2 Unused Possible Not mounted
TP3 For A2.5 V voltage
measurement
TP4 DC+12-2 V voltage
measurement
TP7, TP8 Ground
TP9 DC+12-1 V voltage
measurement
TP10 Ground Mounted
TP11, TP12 Ground Not mounted
TP13 +3.3 V voltage measurement
TP14 A5 V voltage measurement
Jumper No. Setting Remarks

JP1 Open Be sure to set to open.
66200 3/4
66200

F14 T3.15 A/125 V AC+24 V power supply
protection
F15 DC+24 V-2 power voltage
protection
protection
protection
protection
6. Electrical parts
66200 4/4
66220
Processor relay PCB (J391339, J391186) [35, 35i]
P655 P646 P654 P650 P658 P657 P656

P660
TP2
F51
P642 P648
F52
X6 X5
F53
P659
LED14
TP1 LED7 LED11

P643
P649
LED13
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
P644 F49 F50 LED6 P652
X8
LED10 LED12
P651
LED8
X7
LED9
X1 X3 X4
TP3 P647
X2
FL1 FL2 FL3 FL4
P641
P645
6. Electrical parts
TA3 L1 P640
P653
G083174
! Function
• Changes the power supply specifications.
• Supplies power to each unit.
Dryer heater, processing solution heater, dryer fan, drive motor and printer section
• Protects the power surge.
• Supplies the power of AC 200 V line.
• The electrical parts mounted on the processor relay PCB (J391339) and (J391186) are all the same and compatible.
• Even if the circuit breaker of the machine is turned off, voltage is applied to terminal TA3 on processor relay PCB. If
processor relay PCB is to be replaced, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the main power supply.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• Wire the terminal strip TA3 according to the voltage specification of the main body.
• P655 connector is connected according to the voltage used.
66220 1/2
66220

• None

• ☞ 4203
• ☞ 4252
! Unused connector
P647 Unused The starter jumper is connected at forced startup.

LED1 SSR1 operation check (CD heater) ON during operation
LED2 SSR2 operation check (BF heater)
LED3 SSR3 operation check (STB heater)
LED4 SSR4 and 6 operation check (dryer heater)
LED5 SSR5 and 7 operation check (dryer heater)
LED6 SSR8 operation check (dryer heater)
LED7 Relays X6 and X7 operation check (processing solution float switch)
LED8 Relay X1 operation check (processing solution float switch safety
thermostat)
6. Electrical parts
LED9 Relay X2 operation check (printer main relay)
LED10 Relay X8 operation check (dryer cover)
LED11 Relay X5 operation check (processor top cover)
LED12 Relay X3, X4 operation check (dryer safety thermostat)
LED13 TR7 operation check (dryer fan)
LED14 DC24 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.

TP1 DC24 V input check Possible
P2 Ground Possible
TP3 Ground Possible

FL1, FL2, FL3, FL4 (T5A/250 V: power supply surge protecting circuit) −
F41 T10 A/250 V Processing solution heater
F42 T3.15 A/250 V CD heater
F43 T3.15 A/250 V BF heater
F44 T3.15 A/250 V STB heater
F45, F50 (T10A/250 V: dryer heater)
F46, F47, F48, F49 (T6.3A/250 V: dryer heater)
F51 T3.15 A/250 V Circulation pump (STB2, STB1, CD)
F52 T3.15 A/250 V Circulation pump (STB4, STB3, BF)
F53 T6.3 A/250 V DC24 V power supply protection (dryer fan, drive
motor, etc)
Printer main relay X2 does not operate.
66220 2/2
66500
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J306328) [J] [35]
G050714
! Function
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the tablet replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Lights LEDs, drives motors and relays output signals on the tablet replenishment section
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• None
6. Electrical parts
• None
! Unused connector
• None

LED3 Relay X22 operation check ON when power is supplied.

G Ground Possible

F25 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V power supply
protection
66500 1/1
66600
SM I/O PCB (J391191) [SM] [35, 35i]
Unused
G070013
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the SM replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Drives each replenisher pump and water supply pump of the SM replenishment section and relays the output signal.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• None

• Adjust the sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor, after replacing the PCB.
☞ 27830
! Unused connector
P606 Unused

LED1 CD−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED2 CD−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED3 CD−C replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED4 STB replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
66600 1/2
66600

LED5 BF−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED6 BF−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED8 DC+24 V−A input check ON when power is supplied.
LED9 DC+24 V−B input check ON when power is supplied.
LED10 SSR12 operation check (CD−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED11 SSR13 operation check (CD−B replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED12 SSR14 operation check (CD−C replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED13 SSR15 operation check (BF−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED14 SSR16 operation check (BF−B replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED15 SSR17 operation check (STB replenisher pump) ON during operation

TP2 DC+24 V−A voltage Possible
measurement
TP3 DC+24 V−B voltage Possible
measurement
TPG1 Ground Possible
TPG2 Ground Possible
VR No. Purpose Remarks
6. Electrical parts
VR1 CD−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR2 CD−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR3 CD−C replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR4 STB replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR5 BF−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR6 BF−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
66600 2/2
66700
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] [35, 35i]
P601 P596 P604 P603

P609
P600
TP5 TP3
LED3
P599
LED2 LED7 P605

P606
TP4 LED6 LED5 LED4

TP2
LED1
TP1
F60 P607 P602 P608 P597 P598

G085854
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Drives motor, each solenoid valve, replenisher pump and water supply pump of the F replenishment section, and relays the output
signal.
• Detects the solution level of the replenishment tank and controls the interlock switch (replenisher section door).
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
• None

• None
! Unused connector
P608, P609 Unused

LED1 DC+24 V−A input check ON when power is supplied.
LED2 DC+24 V−B input check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 DC5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher ON
Pump performance check OFF
66700 1/2
66700

LED5, LED6 Unused
LED7 Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door): ON
ON/OFF check OFF

TP1 DC+24 V−A voltage Possible
measurement
TP2 DC+24 V−B voltage Possible
measurement
TP4G Ground Possible
TP5G DC+5 V Ground Possible

F60 T5 A/250 V PCB protection
6. Electrical parts
66700 2/2
68100
Cables
Cables
Precautions for handling the cable [35, 35i]
! PCBs which connect to the optical fiber cable

PCB Name Manual No. Remarks
AFC/scanner control PCB Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
PC interface PCB PC Service Manual
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150 (35)
iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151 (35i)
PU control PCB PC Service Manual Option
IMPORTANT
• For details of precautions for using optical fiber cable, refer to how to use tool and The Factor List of the ARCNET
Communication Errors in ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.
! PCBs and unit to which the LVDS cable has been connected
PCB Name Manual No. Precautions when handling the LVDS cable
Scanner unit - Do not bend the LVDS cable by R20 mm or less.
PC interface PCB PC Service Manual Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm.
LVDS cable
6. Electrical parts
! PCBs which connect the LVPECL cable
PCB Name Manual No. Precautions when handling the LVPECL cable
PC interface PCB PC Service Manual Do not bend the LVPECL cable by R25.4 mm or less.
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150 Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm.
LVPECL cable
R25.4mm
68100 1/1
68550
Cables
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) [35, 35i]
! Function
• You can supply power forcibly using the starter jumper when 200 V to 240 V is not supplied during operation.
! Status
• Power supply (200 V to 240 V) is not supplied during operation.
• When the program timer is activated or temperature is being increased, pressing the manual sorter switch for two seconds or
longer does not supply the power (from 200 V to 240 V ).
! Position of the starter jumper

[N], [SM] and [J] specifications [F] specification
Starter jumper Starter jumper
6. Electrical parts
Processor relay PCB Processor relay PCB
G083184
68550 1/3
68550
Cables
! Diagnosis
Are the personal computer, monitor, and each unit operating?
Not operating Operating
No problem.
Is LED9 on the processor relay PCB ON?
ON OFF
Repair or
replace Check if the connector is connected incorrectly, or
cables are disconnected.
J/P641 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P431 (relay) ↔
J/P432 (relay)
There is a
problem. Check the Processor relay PCB.
No problem.
Check if the connector is connected incorrectly, or cables are disconnected.

J/P654 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P794 (processor power)
There is a Check if there is blown fuse.

problem. F53 (125 V/6.3 A) (processor relay PCB)
Check the Processor relay PCB.
6. Electrical parts
No problem.
Turn off the power supply and attach the starter jumper on the connector (P647) of the
processor relay PCB. Make the processor relay PCB between 200 V and 240 V turn
ON forcibly.
Check the version of processor via System Version Check.
Version cannot be checked. Version can be checked.
Upgrade the software.

Turn off the power and remove the starter jumper. Turn on the power
again, and then check that LED9 of the processor relay PCB is ON.
ON
OFF
Processor control PCB failure
68550 2/3
68550
Cables
6. Electrical parts
68550 3/3
7000
Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................. 70010

Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) [35, 35i] ......................70010
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) [35, 35i] ...............................70021
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ..............................................70040
Check the processor setting [N] [SM] [J] .........................................................................................................70050
Check the processor setting [F] .........................................................................................................................70051
Scanner section adjustment check [S-4] ............................................................................................................70060
Scanner section adjustment check [S1-II] .........................................................................................................70060
7 Setup for service personnel
7000 1/1
70010
Setup for service personnel
Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature

adjustment) [35, 35i]
For stand-alone printer, scanner and AFC-related specifications are not necessary.
! Procedures
1. No. 1319: Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. may appear onscreen when
the machine is turned on.
If the attention message shown above appears onscreen, scanner-related data will be initialized after the system is restarted.
For details, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
• For the Stand Alone Printer at installation, No.6901: ARCNET communication error. may occur when turned ON.
Press and hold Ctrl and Alt key, and press D key. Then, change the setting of Attached Scanner in Machine Specification to Not
in use via Machine Specification in Debug mode.
☞ 37540
2. When registering or updating the light source at the installation, the messages No. 6331: Line
scanning communication error. or No. 6900: Main control system error. may appear.
When the error above occurs, release the error and upgrade the system using CD so as not to display this error message.
3. Upgrading system using the CD

Insert the QSS software CD into the CD drive and start Setup.exe in the CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT
• If upgrading the system is not carried out, the versions of scanner section, printer section and processor
section may not match, and the machine may not operate correctly.
4. Status check of the ARCNET communication

Check the connection status of ARCNET cable used for the system using Self-Diagnosis Program.

• Exit QSS software, double-click C:\NoritsuKoki\Self Check\SelfCheck(Noritsu Mark) to start Self-Diagnosis Program.
• For details about how to use and start Self-Diagnosis Program, refer to ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.
5. Preparation of the tools for the setup

Prepare the following tools before setup for installation.
• Service personnel floppy disk (type B), Scanner adjustment chart, Floppy disk for backup data
6. Cleaning of the optical parts

Clean the optical parts below.
" Auto film carrier
Clean each brush, peripheral cooling fan, each sensor, each roller, and film path surface.
" Laser unit cleaning (35)
Cleaning the laser dustproof glass
" iBeam unit cleaning (35i)
iBeam unit cleaning
" Light source unit (input section)
Clean the dust prevention glass.
• For details about how to clean, refer to Maintenance Manual.
7. Entering the service personnel password
70010 1/3
70010
8. Reading the initial data

Be sure to use the initial floppy disk provided with the machine and read the data in Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU).
• For details about how to read the initial data, refer to ☞ 35400.
NOTE
• Read All Data in the service personnel level.
• There are four initial floppy disks.
Floppy disk Details

INITIAL DATA1 The data related to the input section
INITIAL DATA2 The data related to the printer and exposure devices
INITIAL DATA3 The data related to the processor
INITIAL DATA4 The data related to the scanner and film carriers

Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → Service Data → Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) → All Data
9. Install the Capacity Booster Software (3502).

• For details about how to install the Capacity Booster Software, refer to the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• If the capacity booster is not set as an option, this is not required.
10. Registering and checking the system specification

Register all the items.
Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
• For details about how to register and check, refer to ☞ 35800.

IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following adjustment is displayed after changing the machine
type, carry out following settings.
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment: ☞ 33600
• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33030
• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500
11. Installing the optional software

• Install the optional software such as QSS template frame, QSS template calendar and QSS template album.
• For details of the Installation procedure of optional software, refer to Installing the application software in the
Image Editing Operator's Manual.
NOTE
• When no optional software is used, this is not required.
12. Check the registration of the options.

Check if the equipped options are registered.
Extension → Function and Option Registration
70010 2/3
70010
13. Install the driver software referring to the operator's manual provided with the flatbed scanner. (35i)
14. Check the processor settings for [N], [SM], [J] and [F] specifications.
• [For N], [SM] and [J] specifications, refer to ☞ 70050.

• For F specification, refer to ☞ 70051.
15. Forced Pre-Emission (35i)

Use to remove the gas occurred inside the iBeam unit if the power supply of iBeam unit is not turned on for 20 days or more.
To finish Forced Pre-Emission, approx. 30 minutes are required.
• For adjustment, refer to ☞ 32510.
Extension → Setup → iBeam Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup → F: Functions → Forced Pre-Emission
16. Confirms the connection unit adjustment.

Refer to Connection Unit Service Manual 70010 for the connection unit adjustment.
17. Adjustment check of the scanner section

☞ 70060
18. Paper Sensor Adjustment
Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Functions via Paper Sensor Adjustment to adjust each
sensor.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment

19. Print Sensor Adjustment
Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment of Functions via Print Sensor Adjustment to adjust each sensor.
Extension → Processor Settings → Print Sensor Adjustment
20. Check Colorimeter Unit Adjustment

To measure each step such as test print correctly by colorimeter, check the paper stop position and the error of feeding rollers,
and correct it if necessary.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Colorimeter Unit Adjustment
The work to do until the processing solution temperature is adjusted is now completed. After the temperature adjustment of the
processing solution has been completed, proceed to the next ☞ 70021 Works after completing the temperature adjustment.
70010 3/3
70021
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature

adjustment) [35, 35i]
For stand-alone printer, scanner and AFC-related specifications are not necessary.
! Procedures
1. Process control strip.

Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
Extension → Maintenance → Process Control Strip
• For the processing procedure, refer to Control strip processing in the Operator's Manual - Basic Operations -.
2. Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Go to Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction → Functions → Test Print (Paper Magazines A/B) and make test prints and
correct zigzagging so that the zigzagging amount (A-B) is within ±0.3 mm for both two test prints.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction
Line A
A

B
Line B
G074514
3. Check Exposure Advance Adjustment 1.

Go to Exposure Advance Adjustment 1→Functions→Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/B) and confirm
following three points. If they are out of the standard, adjust them.
70021 1/6
70021
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure advance adjustment is carried out by magazine A or B, it is complete.
• Carry out exposure center correction for each paper magazine A and B.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance Adjustment 1

Center line Paper Front End to 0 mm-line Test Paper
Measurement Value
Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm
For checking 0 mm-line to 254

mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value
Rear end
G082086
(1) Check the Paper Front End to 0 mm (0 inch)-line Test Paper Measurement Value.

Check that the Exposure Start Timing Correction value is 25.4 mm.
(2) Check the 0 mm-line to 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Image Correction value is 254 mm.
(3) Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)
Check that the length A between left end and center of the test print is half of the paper width.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out exposure center correction for each paper magazine A and B.
4. Check Exposure Advance Adjustment 2.

Check the 0 mm(0 inch) line ∼ 254 mm line Test Paper Measurement Value, and check that the Exposure Image Correction
value is 254 mm.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance Adjustment 2
IMPORTANT
• When Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 is carried out by magazine A or B, it is complete.
70021 2/6
70021
A
Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm
For checking 0 mm-line to 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value
G084436
5. Exposure Position Adjustment, Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment confirmation, Exposure

Magnification Correction confirmation (35 Series)
Go to Exposure Position Adjustment → F: Functions → Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazines A/B) using the
paper with the maximum width that is in use and confirm the three points above. If they are out of the standard, adjust them.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction, exposure position adjustment, exposure magnification fine
adjustment are carried out for any one of magazine A, B, it is complete.
• Make a test print with the paper of 152 mm or more.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position Adjustment
70021 3/6
70021
Center line
For checking sub scanning

images (BLOCK−D1) For checking main scanning image
(BLOCK−D2) (BLOCK−B)
For checking the exposure

Exposure magnification fine magnification correction
adjustment checking chart
G084434
(1) Check the Exposure Magnification Correction.

Check that the image size is specified one against the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the distance of 130 lines.

(2) Check the Exposure Position Adjustment.
Check that each line makes a straight line in the rows (0a-0h) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-B and the
lines (0) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-D1 and BLOCK-D2 on the test print.
(3) Checking the Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment
Check with the exposure magnification fine adjustment checking chart on the 130 line to see if lines of cyan, magenta
and yellow are in a straight line.
6. Paper specification registration

Register the paper type used in the Initial Setup.
Check that the setup switch is turned ON.
• For the operation procedures, refer to ☞ 32510.
7. Initial Setup
Follow the instructions on the Initial Setup display. When two or three paper types are to be used, carry out Paper
Specification Registration/Setup for each paper on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup display.
Extension: 2260 → Setup → Initial Setup
70021 4/6
70021
8. Paper Magazine Registration Setup

Use the paper type which the initial setup was carried out, and register the magazine for each paper width.
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Registering the paper magazine
and surface to be used.
9. Print Channel Setting [Prints from the film]

Select the print channel to print from each film.
Extension → Setup → Print Channel
10. Print Channel Setting [Each media, Flatbed Scanner]
(1) Set the print channel to print from Each media or Flatbed Scanner.
IMPORTANT
• If color correction is necessary when printing from each media or the flatbed scanner, correct the
balance value (C, H, P) of each print channel. So, it is necessary to set each print channel for each
media and each flatbed scanner.
Extension → Setup → Print Channel
11. Checking the print color and density [Master DataReference Slope, Scanner SlopeDX Slope]
(1) Make each print of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the 240 negative•positive, 120 negative•positive,
and 110 negative•positive, which are frequently used at the shop.
(2) If color or density correction is necessary, correct them in Scanner Slope Correction (Negative).

• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.
Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)/Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)
12. Letter blur check

Go to Paper Specification Registration/Setup, Functions, Black Balance Adjustment to make a test print. If the colors
around the letters on the print is blurred too much, adjust it if necessary.
13. Banding check

Go to Paper Pressure Operation Correction → Functions→Test Print Confirmation (magazines A/B) to make test
prints. Check banding for each paper type.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction
14. Monitor setup

Adjust the brightness for the display monitor.
70021 5/6
70021
Carry out monitor setup and create a monitor profile.

Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup
15. DSA setting [Negative•Positive (135, 240, 120, and 110)]
(1) If DSA correction is necessary after making prints of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the
negative•positive (135, 240, 120, and 110), set TYPE 1, 2 and 3 of each DSA via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA
16. DSA setting [Each media, flatbed scanner and Net Order]
(1) If DSA correction is necessary when printing from each media, the flatbed scanner, or Net Order, set TYPE 1, 2
and 3 of each DSA via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA
17. Formatting a floppy disk for backup data

Format a prepared floppy disk for backup data on the Format Floppy Disk display.

This floppy disk is used to save the internal system data after the setup has been completed during installation.
IMPORTANT
• A floppy disk is necessary for the backup data of user level.
• Four floppy disks are necessary for the backup data of service personnel level.
Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → All Data → Format Floppy Disk
18. Saving the backup data

Save backup data to the floppy disk formatted in Step 17.
This completes the works.
70021 6/6
70040
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and

Japanese)
The English messages are displayed on the monitor on the system which are to be shipped outside Japan.
It is necessary to configure the Regional Options and install the translated message data so that the messages in the local language are
displayed and text in that language can be input.
Change the setting according to the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Prepare the following data in advance.
• Translated message file (Save the data to a floppy disk.)
• Translated HELP files (Save the data to a CD-R or a CD-R/W.)
! To bring up the Windows display
Bring up the Windows display when setting each item such as the dictionary function relating to the Windows system.
Switch the display according to the following procedure.
1. Bring up the Close Down Checks display.
On the Order Display, click F. → Menu → Extension → Close Down Checks
Close Down Checks display
S0009-00-UM02
2. Click F: Functions.
The F: Functions display appears.
F: Functions display

S0009-00-UM62
3. Click Quit The Application.

The confirmation window to end the application appears.
4. Click YES: Execute.
The confirmation window appears again.
5. Click YES: Execute.
The Windows display appears.
! To install the message file
Build the translated local language's message file in the system in advance. Carry out the operation according to the following
procedure.
1. Insert the floppy disk in which the message data is saved into the floppy disk drive.
2. Double-click Setup.exe in the floppy disk.
Installation starts.
70040 1/8
70040
3. Click Next.
Example: InstallShield Wizard
G050657
4. Click Finish.
G050660

Installation of the message file is complete.
Next, install the HELP file.
! To install the HELP file

Build the translated local language's Help file in the system in advance. Carry out the operation according to the following procedure.
1. Insert the CD-ROM in which the HELP file is saved into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the Setup.exe file in the CD-R or the CD-R/W.
Installation starts.
70040 2/8
70040
3. Click Next.
G056142
4. Click Finish.

G056143
Installation of the HELP file is complete.
Next, configure for the language.
! Setting the language
1. Select Start → Settings → Control Panel.

Example: Windows display
G050628
70040 3/8
70040
2. Double-click Regional Options.

Select the items in the following order.
Example: Control Panel display
G050683
The Regional Options display appears.
3. Click the General tab (index) and set the region (country) and language.
(1) Select the appropriate language and check the box in Language settings for the system.
Example: Regional Options display
G050662
70040 4/8
70040
(2) Click and click the appropriate locale (location).

G050612
4. Click the Input Locales tab (index) and set the dictionary function.
(1) Click Add.

G050663
(2) Select the Input locale.

Example: Add Input Locale display
G050666
70040 5/8
70040
(3) Select the Keyboard layout.

Example: Add Input Locale display
G050666
(4) Click OK.

The display returns to the Regional Options display.
(5) Select the language as default use.
G050663
(6) Click Set as Default.

The language is registered as the default.

G050663
5. Click Apply.
G050663
70040 6/8
70040
6. Click OK.
G050663
7. Insert the Windows 2000 Professional CD-R or CD-R/W into the CD-ROM drive and click OK.
G050664
The file copy starts. After the copy, you are prompted to restart the system.
8. Click No.
G050667
9. Restart the system.

(1) Click Start and click Shut Down.

Example: Windows display
G050604
(2) Click , and click Shut down.

Example: Shut Down Windows display
G050605
70040 7/8
70040
(3) Click OK.

Windows is quit and monitor display disappears.
(4) Confirm that the power lamp goes off.
(5) Turn off the circuit breaker.
(6) Turn on the circuit breaker in 10 seconds after it was turned off.
The power supply of this system is turned on and after a while, the power supply of the display monitor automatically
turns on. Then, the message Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality. appears.
This completes the operation.
10. Select the appropriate language on the Machine Specification display.
Select the appropriate language and set it.
(1) Bring up the Machine Specification display.

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
(2) Click and select Language.
Example: Machine Specification display
S3066-00-SM00
(3) Click and select HELP Language.

Example: Machine Specification display
S3066-00-SM00
(4) Click YES: Enter.
70040 8/8
70050
Check the processor setting [N] [SM] [J]

• For F specification, refer to ☞ 70051.
! Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed [N]
1. Check the measured value of the pump output amount.

Measure the pump output amount and check if the measured value is the same as the registered value.
If the measured value is different from the setting value, register the measured value.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount.
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting
! Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed [SM]
1. Initial replenishment operation of the pump

Prepare the containers to receive the solutions from CD-A, CD-B, CD-C and STB replenisher pumps, and carry out the initial
replenishment operation.
To measure the accurate pump output amounts, this operation is carried out only for these pumps.
NOTE
• When the initial replenishment is executed, all the replenisher pumps and water supply pumps operate simultaneously.
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting → F: Functions → Initial Replenishment Operation

! Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed [J]
1. Setting of Evaporation Refill Correction

Set each item of Evaporation Refill Correction.
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
• For setting procedures, refer to ☞ 33540.
2. Check the measured value of the pump output amount.

Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting
! Work after completing the processing solution temperature adjustment [J]
1. Check the tablet delivery operation.

Perform printing to see if the tablet is delivered from the bucket to the tablet chute properly.
If not, position adjustment is required for the elevator upper sensor, elevator middle sensor or elevator lower sensor.
70050 1/2
70050
• For adjusting the elevator upper sensor, refer to ☞ 27660.

• For adjusting the elevator middle sensor, refer to ☞ 27670.
• For adjusting the elevator lower sensor, refer to ☞ 27680.
70050 2/2
70051
Check the processor setting [F]
! Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed
1. Perform Processor Set Up Mode.

Exhaust the air from auto cleaning pump, open the manual and exhaust the air from each replenisher pump.
Extension: 2260 → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Processor Set Up Mode
2. Confirm the pump output amount setting.

Measure each replenisher pump output amount and check if the measured value is the same as the registered value.
amount.
• Refer to ☞ 33030.
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
3. Check Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting.

amount [ Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ].
• Refer to ☞ 33590.

Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting
4. Change from Operator Selections → Processor.

Change the following mode settings.
Item Change setting
Evaporation Correction Change from OFF → ON.
Humidity Confirm that this is set as Automatic.
Quiet Process Change from OFF → ON.
amount [ Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ].
• Refer to ☞ 33590.
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting
70051 1/1
70060
Scanner section adjustment check [S-4]
Adjustment check for scanners S-4 and that for S1-II are different.
• For S1-II, refer to ☞ Scanner section adjustment check [S1-II].
1. Adjust the sensor of the film carrier.

Carry out the adjustment of the film carrier sensor.
The adjustment items vary depending on which film carrier is attached.
135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC 135 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard Adjustment DX Sensor Standard Adjustment

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
2. Check the light axis and swing and tilt of the scanner unit.
Check that Light Axis Adjustment and Swing and Tilt Adjustment are in right positions.
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC, use the 120 AFC and 110 AFC for checking.
(1) Check Light Axis Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and check the display of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold.
When the difference of the displayed values is the following values or less, it is in position.
For S-4, if the difference of the displayed value is more than the values in the table, Scanner unit, AFC-II, or the
Scanner adjustment chart may be defective.
Priority*1 Attached film carrier Difference of G values when adjusting the
light axis

1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 ±37 pixels
2 120 AFC ±28 pixels
3 110 AFC ±28 pixels
*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Light Axis Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the above priority.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Light Axis Adjustment.
(2) Check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check.
When the displayed values are the following values or less, it is in position.
For S-4, if the difference of the displayed value is more than the values in the table, Scanner unit, AFC-II, or the
Scanner adjustment chart may be defective.
IMPORTANT
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) is less than the following value for that, checking the
Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC is not required.
Priority*1 Attached film carrier Value when checking the swing and tilt
adjustment
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 51/54 step
2 120 AFC 51/54 step
3 110 AFC 46/54 step
*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the priority
above.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.
70060 1/5
70060

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
3. Light Source Registration

Register the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Registration display.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration
4. Scanner focus adjustment

Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers to be used.
Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment for each film carrier and mount carrier using the prepared scanner adjustment chart.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers that the user uses.
• For the film carrier and mount carrier, carry out the focus adjustment for the magnification rate.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment
5. Scanner light source update

NOTE
• After carrying out the focus adjustment of the scanner unit, be sure to carry out light source update.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Update
70060 2/5
70060
Scanner section adjustment check [S1-II]
Adjustment check for scanners S-4 and that for S1-II are different.
• For S-4, refer to ☞ Scanner section adjustment check [S-4].
1. Carry out Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment of the auto film carrier.

Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment display.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
2. Checking the swing and tilt, light axis and lane stop position of scanner unit
Check that swing and tilt, light axis and lane stop position are in proper positions.
(1) Check Light Axis Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart (135) to the film feed unit (135 lane) and check the display of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold.
Check the difference between G value of 0 to 2500 and G values of 2501 to 5000.
When the difference of the values on the display is ±32 pixels or less, they are proper. If the difference of the values on
the display is more than ±33 pixels, Light Axis Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
• For Light Axis Adjustment Check, be sure to use 135 lane.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis
Adjustment

(2) Check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.
Set the scanner adjustment chart (135) to the 135 lane of film feed unit, then perform Swing and Tilt Adjustment
Check.
When the value on the display is 12/44 step or less, it is proper. If the value on the display is more than 13/44 step,
Swing and Tilt Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
• For Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check, be sure to use 135 lane.
Adjustment
(3) Check Lane Stop Position.
Set the scanner adjustment chart (135) on 135 lane and one (240) on 240 lane of the film feed unit, then perform Lane
Adjustment.
When the center of the waveforms of graph on the display is positioned within two waves to right and left from the
center line, it is proper. If it is out of position, Lane Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
• For Lane Stop Position Check, be sure to use both of 135 and 240 lanes.
Adjustment
70060 3/5
70060
3. Light Source Registration

Register the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Registration display.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration
4. Scanner focus adjustment

Carry out Focus Adjustment for both of 135 and 240 lanes.
Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment for each lane using the prepared scanner adjustment chart.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment
5. Light Source Update

Update the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Update display.
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Update
70060 4/5
70060
70060 5/5
8000
8. Appendix
Service personnel tool list .................................................................................................... 80310

Service personnel tool list [N] [SM] [J] [F] ......................................................................................................80310
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................. 81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list ...........................................................................................................81010
Table of wiring diagrams ..................................................................................................... 89000
Wiring diagram table [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................................................89000
8 Appendix
8000 1/1
80310
Service personnel tool list
Service personnel tool list
Service personnel tool list [N] [SM] [J] [F]
NOTE
• For details about service personnel tools related to film carrier like scanner adjustment chart, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
(Processor section) [N] [SM] [J] [F]
Tool Part No. Explanation
Colorimeter height adjustment jig A066490-01 Used to adjust the height of measuring point of the colorimeter.
Service personnel floppy disk F000472-01 Used to enter the service personnel password.
Head adjusting jig A037410-01 Used to adjust the printing pressure of the CVP.
Socket wrench unit (13 mm) Z022421-01 This tool (socket wrench) is used to replace the laser unit. (35
series)
Positioning pin A063588-01 Used to position when replacing the laser unit. Two pins are
necessary. (35 Series)
Used to position the iBeam unit mount. Two pins are necessary.
(35i Series)
Loupe H099047-00 Used to adjust the exposure position.
H099039-00 (no
longer available)
Grounding resistance measurement cable unit W407756-01 Used to check the grounding resistance between input section and
printer section or processor section.
Optical fiber cable pushing bar A073143-01 Used to pull out the optical fiber cable.
For using Optical fiber cable pushing bar, refer to ARCNET
Communication Diagnosis Manualhow to use tool.
Noritsu-eNET system program unit Z019675-01 Used for remote service.
Fiber cutter L003100-00 Used to cut the end of ARCNET cable when it is abnormal there.
For using fiber cutter, refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual, How to Use the Tools.
Aspirator H103007-00 Used to suck out the dust in the connector on the PCB connected to
the ARCNET cable.
For using aspirator, refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual, How to Use the Tools.
(Processor section) [SM]

Air exhaust tool (pipe type) assembly A050400-01 Used when installing the SM specification and replacing the
8. Appendix
replenisher pump. (compatible with the conventional SM machines)
Probe replacing jig A053235-01 Used when replacing the probe. (compatible with the conventional
SM machines)
(Processor section) [F]

Hose H121232 Use this to operate each automated flushing valve and auto cleaning
pump.
80310 1/1
81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list
Operation keyboard have same functions as some keys on the full keyboard.
QSS operation keyboard Corresponded full keyboard Remarks

F F1
REPT F2
ORDER F3
N F4
Y F5
M F6
C F7
D F8
-1 F9
+1 F10
PASS F11
NO/STOP F12
YES/START ENT
← ←
→ →
↑ ↑
↓ ↓
Operation keyboard
8. Appendix
G050097
81010 1/1
89000
Table of wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram table [35, 35i]
Block No. Item Diagram No.

- System connection diagram J310141
! Printer section/Processor section

IPP/LPP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (outside Japan) J310086
IPP/LPP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (outside Japan) J310216
IPP/LPP 1-1 AC power supply circuit diagram J310217
IPP 1-2 AC power supply circuit diagram J310149
LPP 1-2 AC power supply circuit diagram J310169
IPP/LPP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram J310089
IPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram J310151
LPP 1-5 DC power supply circuit diagram J310170
IPP/LPP 1-6 PC power supply circuit diagram J310152
IPP 2-1 System diagram J310153
LPP 2-1 System diagram J310171
IPP/LPP 2-2 PC connecting J310154
IPP 2-3 Paper supply unit A J310155
LPP 2-3 Paper supply unit A J310172
IPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit J310156
LPP 2-4 Around paper supply unit B/exposure advance unit J310173
IPP 2-5 Around paper advance unit J310157
LPP 2-5 Around paper advance unit J310174
IPP 2-6 Around printhead module J310158
8. Appendix
LPP 2-6 Around laser unit (type FfR) J310175
LPP 2-6 Around laser unit (type EeR) J310290
LPP 2-6 Around laser unit (type BbR) J310291
IPP/LPP 2-7 Correction value print unit J310159
IPP/LPP 2-8 Around pricing unit J310160
IPP/LPP 3-1 Frame section J310161
IPP 3-2 Interlock circuit J310162
LPP 3-2 Interlock circuit J310177
IPP/LPP 3-3 Paper supply unit J310163
IPP 3-4 Exposure advance unit J310164
LPP 3-4 Exposure advance unit J310264
IPP/LPP 3-5 Paper advance unit J310165
IPP/LPP 3-6 Dual paper magazine unit J310166
IPP 3-7 Around printhead module J310167
LPP 3-7 Laser unit (1) J310178
LPP 3-8 Laser unit (2) J310179
LPP 3-9 Laser unit (3) (Type FfR) J310180
89000 1/3
89000

LPP 3-9 Laser unit (3) (Type EeR) J310181
LPP 3-9 Laser unit (3) (Type BbR) J310182
IPP/LPP 3-10 Correction value printing unit J310168
IPP/LPP 4-1 Around processor relay PCB J310092
IPP/LPP 4-2 Around processor control PCB (1) J310094
IPP/LPP 4-4 Around SM I/O PCB [SM] J310099
IPP/LPP 4-4 Around J unit [J] J310100
IPP/LPP 4-4 Around F replenishment I/O PCB [F] J310226
IPP/LPP 5-1 Temperature control block (1) J310123

IPP/LPP 5-3 Processor section J310126
IPP/LPP 5-4 Replenisher section (1) J310127
IPP/LPP 5-4 Water supply section (1) J310254
IPP/LPP 5-5 Replenisher section (2) J310128
IPP/LPP 5-5 Water supply section (2) J310255
IPP/LPP 5-6 Effluent block J310129
IPP/LPP 5-7 Drive section J310130
IPP/LPP 5-8 Dryer section (1) J310131
IPP/LPP 5-11 Print conveyor section/print sorter unit J310134
IPP/LPP 5-12 SM replenisher section (1) [SM] J310135
8. Appendix
IPP/LPP 5-16 Tablet replenishment section (1) [J] J310256
IPP/LPP 5-17 Tablet replenishment section (2) [J] J310257
IPP/LPP 5-18 Replenisher section (1) [F] J310267
IPP/LPP 5-22 Cooling water plumbing unit J310139
IPP/LPP 5-23 Around colorimeter unit J310140
! Accessories
KIDS 1-1 Keyboard Expansion Kit J404678
BRAVO II 1-1 BRAVO II J404680
89000 2/3
89000
8. Appendix
89000 3/3

Qss-35 Service Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Qss-35 Service Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Distributed by: www.minilablaser.

Issued in June 2006

– for service personnel only –

1.Cautions for work

2.Replacement and adjustment of parts

7.Setup for service personnel

Notes to service personnel

Tapping truss head screw

Spike truss head screw (green)

Washer head screw (for ground)

About the chapters

" 1. Cautions for work

Symbols used in this manual

This is called the alert symbol mark.

Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual

This page is intentionally blank.

1. Cautions for work

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................... 25810

F replenishment unit [35, 35i] ................................................................................................. 27900

Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 35100

Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................. 40700

Attention message: Scanner .................................................................................................. 41300

Error message: Processor 1 .................................................................................................. 45500

Error message: Tablet replenishment .................................................................................... 45600

Error message: F replenishment ............................................................................................ 45900

Error message: Printer 1 ........................................................................................................ 46000

Error message: Printer 2 ........................................................................................................ 46100

Error: Main ............................................................................................................................. 46900

Printer paper advance operation ............................................................................................ 55100

Processor (fan operation specification) (35, 35i) .................................................................... 63321

7. Setup for service personnel

This page is intentionally blank.

1. Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words) .................................................................................. 10010

1 Cautions for work

Description of warning (signal words)

1. Cautions for work

Example of warning label

Symbol mark (warning

Warning text (warning

Location of warning labels

1. Cautions for work

1. Cautions for work

1. Cautions for work

1. Cautions for work

For safe operation

1. Cautions for work

! Precautions for processing solutions

! Precautions against electric shock

1. Cautions for work

! Precautions for operating rotary section

! Precautions for operating heating section

! Precautions for movable units

1. Cautions for work

! Precautions around cutting parts

• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

Countermeasure for static electricity when replacing and maintaining the

1. Cautions for work

1. Cautions for work

1. Cautions for work

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

System list ........................................................................................................................... 20005